Beverly Middle School - City of Beverly

Loading...
PROJECT MANUAL FOR:

Beverly Middle School 502 CABOT STREET

BEVERLY, MASSACHUSETTS

100% Design Development Not for Construction PREPARED BY:

Ai3 architects,

LLC

526 Boston Post Road Wayland, MA 01778 DATE OF ISSUE:

December 2, 2015 Project #: 1403.00 Volume 2 of 2

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 (DIVISIONS 00 THROUGH DIVISION 14) DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS Document 00 01 01 Project Title Page Document 00 01 02 Project Directory Document 00 01 10 Table of Contents Document 00 62 12 Product Submittal Form Document 00 63 13 Request For Interpretation (RFI) Form Document 00 63 25 Substitution Request Form DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 10 00 Summary Section 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures Section 01 29 00 Payment Procedures Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination Section 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 35 43 Environmental Procedures Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section 01 41 17 Utilities Notification Section 01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 45 23 Testing and Inspecting Services Section 01 45 29 Testing Laboratory Services Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 56 39 Tree Protection and Trimming Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements Section 01 73 00 Execution Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals Section 01 78 36 Warranties Section 01 81 19 Indoor Air Quality Requirements DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 02 28 20 Asbestos Remediation Section 02 30 00 Subsurface Investigation Section 02 41 00 Site Demolition Section 02 41 17 Building Demolition Section 02 95 00 As-Built Site Survey DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE Section 03 05 13 Concrete Sealers Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete DIVISION 04 — MASONRY Section 04 20 00 * Unit Masonry (Trade Contract Required)

Section 04 43 10 Section 04 43 20 Section 04 73 16 *

Granite Cut Stone Stone Masonry Simulated Stone Veneer (Trade Contract Required)

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 1 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

DIVISION 05 — METALS Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing Section 05 15 00 Stud Shear Connectors Section 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing Section 05 31 00 Steel Decking Section 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications (Filed Sub-Bid Required)

Section 05 51 00

Metal Stairs and Railings (Filed Sub-Bid Required)

Section 05 58 13

Column Covers

DIVISION 06 — WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry Section 06 15 00 Wood Decking Section 06 16 00 Sheathing Section 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry Section 06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork Section 06 55 00 Solid Surfacing DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 13 53 * Elastomeric Sheet Waterproofing (Trade Contract Required)

Section 07 16 13 *

Polymer Modified Cement Waterproofing

Section 07 21 00 Section 07 24 20 Section 07 26 00 Section 07 27 13 * Section 07 27 33 Section 07 46 46 Section 07 54 19 *

Thermal Insulation Exterior Finish System (EFS) Vapor Retarders Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers Closed-Cell Sprayed Foam Insulation Fiber Cement Siding Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Roofing

Section 07 62 00 *

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Section 07 71 00 *

Roof Specialties

Section 07 72 00 *

Roof Accessories

Section 07 81 00 Section 07 84 00 Section 07 92 00 *

Applied Fireproofing Firestopping Joint Sealants

Section 07 95 13

Construction and Expansion Joints

(Trade Contract Required)

(Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required)

(Trade Contract Required)

DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS Section 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors Section 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels Section 08 33 13 Coiling Counter Doors Section 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors Section 08 33 26 Overhead Coiling Grilles Section 08 34 73 Sound Control Doors

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 2 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Section 08 43 13 *

Aluminum-Framed Storefronts

Section 08 44 13 *

Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

Section 08 51 13 *

Aluminum Windows

Section 08 80 00 *

Glazing

Section 08 87 00 *

Glazing Surface Film

Section 08 90 00 Section 08 92 00

Louvers and Vents Louvered Equipment Enclosures

(Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required)

DIVISION 09 — FINISHES Section 09 05 06 * Common Work Results for Flooring (Trade Contract Required)

Section 09 21 23 Section 09 22 16 Section 09 29 00 Section 09 30 13 *

Shaft Wall Assemblies Non-Structural Metal Framing Gypsum Board Ceramic Tiling

Section 09 30 16 *

Quarry Tiling

Section 09 30 19 *

Paver Tiling

Section 09 51 00 *

Acoustical Ceilings

Section 09 64 29 Section 09 64 66 Section 09 65 13 *

Wood Strip and Plank Flooring Wood Athletic Flooring Resilient Base and Accessories

Section 09 65 16 *

Resilient Sheet Flooring

Section 09 65 19 *

Resilient Tile Flooring

Section 09 65 23 *

Rubber Flooring

Section 09 65 36 *

Static-Control Resilient Flooring

Section 09 65 43 *

Linoleum Flooring

Section 09 66 23

Resinous Matrix Terrazzo Flooring

Section 09 68 00 Section 09 72 00 Section 09 84 00 Section 09 91 00 *

Carpeting Wall Coverings Acoustic Room Components Painting

Section 09 96 00 *

High-Performance Coatings

(Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required)

(Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required)

(Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required)

DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES Section 10 11 16 Markerboards Section 10 12 00 Display Cases Section 10 14 00 Signage Section 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 3 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Section 10 22 15

Fixed Glass Panel Partitions

Section 10 22 26

Operable Glass Partitions

Section 10 22 28 Section 10 28 13 Section 10 44 00 Section 10 51 13 Section 10 71 13 *

Folding-Panel Partitions Toilet Accessories Fire Protection Specialties Metal Lockers Exterior Sun Control Devices

(Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required)

(Trade Contract Required)

DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT Section 11 13 00 Loading Dock Equipment Section 11 31 00 Appliances Section 11 40 00 Foodservice Equipment Section 11 52 13 Projection Screens Section 11 53 00 Laboratory Equipment Section 11 57 00 Vocational Shop Equipment Section 11 66 23 Gymnasium Equipment Section 11 66 24 Basketball Equipment Section 11 66 53 Gymnasium Dividers Section 11 68 00 Play Field Equipment and Structures DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS Section 12 24 00 Window Shades Section 12 30 00 Casework Section 12 35 51 Musical Instrument Storage Casework Section 12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames Section 12 61 00 Fixed Audience Seating Section 12 66 13 Telescoping Bleachers Section 12 68 00 Seat and Table Systems Section 12 93 00 Site Furnishings DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS Section 14 22 00 * Compact Traction Elevators (Trade Contract Required)

VOLUME 2 (DIVISIONS 21 THROUGH 33 + APPENDICES) DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 21 00 00 * Fire Suppression (Trade Contract Required)

DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING Section 22 00 00 * Plumbing (Trade Contract Required)

DIVISION 23 — HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 23 00 00 * Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning (Trade Contract Required)

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 4 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL Section 26 00 00 * Electrical (Trade Contract Required)

DIVISION 27 — COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 10 00 Structured Cabling (Trade Contract Required)

Section 27 21 33

Data Communications Wireless Access Points

Section 27 40 00

Audio-Video Communications

Section 27 50 00

Distributed Communications and Monitoring

Section 27 70 00

Video Distribution System

(Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required) (Trade Contract Required)

DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 28 00 00 * Electronic Safety and Security (Trade Contract Required)

DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK Section 31 00 00 Earthwork Section 31 10 00 Site Preparation and Cleaning Section 31 23 19 Dewatering and Drainage Section 31 25 00 Erosion Control DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Section 32 00 00 Bituminous Concrete Pavement, Curbing and Edging Section 32 13 13 Site Concrete Section 32 14 00 Unit Pavers Section 32 17 23 Pavement Markings Section 32 17 24 Signs Section 32 31 14 Black Vinyl Chain Link Fencing and Gates Section 32 31 20 Green Trellis Fence Section 32 32 00 Segmental Retaining Wall Section 32 32 10 Boulder Placement Section 32 50 00 Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan Section 32 84 00 Irrigation Section 32 92 00 Soil Preparation for Lawn Establishment Section 32 92 10 Soil Preparation for Athletic Fields Section 32 92 20 Seeding for Lawn Areas Section 32 92 30 Sodding Section 32 92 40 Seeding for Non-Lawn Areas Section 32 92 50 Soil Preparation for Rain Gardens Section 32 93 10 Trees, Shrubs, and Groundcovers DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES Section 33 05 13 Drainage Manholes and Catch Basins Section 33 10 00 Water Distribution Section 33 30 01 Sanitary Sewerage Section 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Systems

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 5 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

APPENDICES Appendix A

Keynote List End - Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 01 10 - 6 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION (Filed Sub-Bid Required) INDEX SECTION 21 00 00 ................................................................................................................. 1   PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 1   1.1   GENERAL PROVISIONS............................................................................................................ 1   1.2   GENERAL REFERENCES ......................................................................................................... 2   1.3   SCOPE OF WORK ..................................................................................................................... 2   1.4   WORK NOT INCLUDED ............................................................................................................. 3   1.5   INTENT ....................................................................................................................................... 3   1.6   CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS ............................................................................ 3   1.7   DRAWINGS AND CONFLICTS IN THE WORK ......................................................................... 4   1.8   EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION AND COORDINATION .......................................................... 4   1.9   WORKMANSHIP......................................................................................................................... 4   1.10   SITE INVESTIGATION ............................................................................................................... 5   1.11   TAXES AND INSURANCE.......................................................................................................... 5   1.12   PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS .................................................................................................. 5   1.13   CONTRACT COST BREAKDOWN............................................................................................. 5   1.14   GUARANTEE .............................................................................................................................. 5   1.15   MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................ 6   1.16   MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT HANDLING ............................................................................. 6   1.17   MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS ............................................................. 6   1.18   SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SCHEDULE ..................................................................... 7   1.19   RECORD DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................ 7   1.20   OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ............................................. 8   1.21   COORDINATION DRAWINGS ................................................................................................... 8   1.22   CLEANING OF SYSTEMS.......................................................................................................... 8   1.23   RUBBISH REMOVAL.................................................................................................................. 8   1.24   TEMPORARY STRUCTURES .................................................................................................... 9   1.25   TEMPORARY SERVICES .......................................................................................................... 9   1.26   TESTS......................................................................................................................................... 9   1.27   EQUIPMENT ACCESS REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 9   1.28   MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................................................... 9   1.29   WIRING DIAGRAMS................................................................................................................. 10   1.30   PROCEDURE FOR TESTING .................................................................................................. 10   PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 11   2.1   INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................... 11   2.2   ACCESS PANELS .................................................................................................................... 11   2.3   PIPE AND FITTINGS ................................................................................................................ 11   2.4   VALVES .................................................................................................................................... 12   2.5   HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS .......................................................... 12   2.6   SLEEVES AND INSERTS......................................................................................................... 14   2.7   ESCUTCHEONS....................................................................................................................... 14   2.8   SPRINKLER HEADS ................................................................................................................ 15   2.9   SPARE SPRINKLER HEADS AND CABINETS........................................................................ 15   2.10   ALARM CHECK VALVE............................................................................................................ 15   2.11   BACKFLOW PREVENTER ....................................................................................................... 16   2.12   FIRE VALVE CABINETS .......................................................................................................... 16   2.13   FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS & INDICATER VALVE ................................................ 16   2.14   DRAINS AND TEST CONNECTIONS ...................................................................................... 16   2.15   FIRE PROTECTION ALARMS.................................................................................................. 16   FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 1 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.16   SYSTEM DIAGRAM.................................................................................................................. 17   PART 3 EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 17   3.1   OPERATION AND START-UP ................................................................................................. 17   3.2   COORDINATION ...................................................................................................................... 17   3.3   PAINTING ................................................................................................................................. 18   3.4   WORKING PLANS, FLOW TEST AND HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS .................................. 18  

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 2 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION (Filed Sub-Bid Required) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1

GENERAL PROVISIONS A.

The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and CONTRACT CONDITIONS as listed in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS shall be included in, and made a part of this Section.

B.

Work of this Section requires Filed Sub-Bids and is governed by the provisions of the Massachusetts General Laws (MGL), Public Bidding Law - Chapter 149, Sections 44A to 44J inclusive, as amended, and applicable Sections of the MGL, Public Contract Law - Chapter 30.

C.

The work to be completed by the Filed Subcontractor for the work of this Section is shown on the following listed Drawings: Civil Work Drawings: C0.1 through C0 inclusive. Architectural Drawings: A1.01 through A1 inclusive. Food Service Drawings: K1.0 through K1 inclusive Structural Drawings: S0. through S inclusive. Plumbing Drawings: P0.1 through P2.1 inclusive. Fire Protection Drawings: FP0.1 through FP2.1 inclusive. Mechanical Drawings: M0.1 through M inclusive Electrical Drawings: E through E inclusive. Telecommunications Drawings: T through T inclusive 1. Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. The listing of Contract Drawings above does not limit Filed Subcontractor’s responsibility to determine full extent of work of this Section by all Drawings listed in the Drawing List on the Drawing Title Sheet, as modified by Addenda. 2. Refer to Section 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES, for alternates that may affect the scope of Work of this Section.

D.

Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as stipulated in INVITATION TO BID and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 1.

The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope: NAME OF SUB-BIDDER: SUB-BID FOR TRADE:

2.

___________________________ TITLE.

Each Sub-Bid submittal for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished by Awarding Authority, as bound herein, accompanied with the required bid deposit in compliance with MGL c149, Section 44B in the amount of 5 percent of Filed Sub-Bid.

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 1 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.2

1.3

GENERAL REFERENCES A.

Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, General Contract for Construction Services and Division 1, General Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section.

B.

Examine all Drawings and all other sections of the specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this section.

SCOPE OF WORK A.

Work in this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish completely and install all FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS, as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein and, in general, as follows: 1. Complete combined wet (manual) pipe standpipe/sprinkler systems covering all areas of the building, complete with standpipes with hose valves. 2. Monitor, pressure and flow switches. 3. Valve tags, valve charts, nameplates, and pipe identification and record drawings. 4. Testing and guarantees. 5. All hangers, inserts, sleeves, anchors, guides, strainers, gauges, thermometers, plus all related accessories required for a complete installation for each system, as specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings. 6. All operating and maintenance manuals, certification letters and Certificates of Approval. 7. All supplementary steel for piping and equipment supports. 8. Working drawings of the actual fire suppression system installation, hydraulic calculations and performing of flow tests if required by local fire department. 9. Tamper switches to be installed with supervisory signal. 10. Supervised low pressure alarm on city side of the double check valve assembly, trouble signal upon activation. 11. Low pressure alarm located on system side of wet system, alarm signal upon activation flow test, time to alarm 60 seconds or less desired. 12. Hydraulic charts & signage on all valves, drains, inspector’s test. 13. Valves located above suspended ceiling shall be installed within 2 feet of the ceiling tiles for accessibility by 6 foot step later. 14. FDC shall be 4 inch Storz type with strainer screen of 1/4inch mesh and 30 degree elbow downward, no less than 24 inches from finish grade.

B.

Items to be Furnished Only: Furnish the following items for installation by the designated Sections: 1. Access Panels a. Access panels for access to fire suppression equipment shall be furnished under this Section for installation by the General Contractor or appropriate Subcontractor.

C.

The Fire Suppression Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting related to the work of this Section except in finished surfaces. Patching is the responsibility of the trade effected.

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 2 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

D. 1.4

2.

For cutting and patching specifications, refer to Section 017300, EXECUTION.

The work of this Section is shown on Drawings numbered

The following related work shall be performed by the designated trades and under the listed SECTION: 1. Wiring of equipment requiring power connections and furnished by the Fire Suppression Contractor and starting devices for all motors incidental to the Fire Suppression Systems shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Sub Contractor: Section 260000. 2. Painting of piping, fittings, coverings, hangers, supports and all equipment not specifically specified to be painted by the Painting Contractor: Section 099100 3. Electricity and water for all tests and temporary operation of Fire Suppression Systems: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 4. Fire water service into building to be furnished and installed by the General Contractor, SECTION 331000 5. Refer to Section 053100 Steel Decking for restrictions on hanging of materials, piping mounts, brackets, hangers, hooks and other items from the metal decking.

INTENT A.

1.6

For coordination of cutting and patching, refer to Section 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION.

WORK NOT INCLUDED A.

1.5

1.

All work shall be in accordance with the arrangement, details and locations, as indicated on the Contract Drawings, Reference Drawings and any supplemental addenda, bulletins or drawings issued by the Architect. Layouts are diagrammatic and final arrangement of equipment shall suit field conditions. Install all necessary fittings and equipment offsets required to meet job conditions. The Drawings are not intended to be scaled, but shall be followed with sufficient accuracy to coordinate with other work and structural limitations. Work installed in a manner contrary to that shown on the Drawings, or interfering with the work of another trade, shall be removed and reinstalled when so directed by the Architect. Discrepancies and questionable points shall be immediately reported to the Architect for clarification.

CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS A.

All work shall be installed in conformance to the governing Codes, Regulations and Ordinances. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to familiarize himself with all governing Codes, Regulations and ordinances and report any non-compliance of the Plans and Specifications to the Architect, prior to entering into a contract. All the above requirements shall take precedence over the Plans and Specifications. These requirements are minimum criteria and no reductions permitted by Code will be allowed without written permission of the Architect.

B.

All workmanship, methods and materials shall meet the highest standards of the trade and, in general, shall conform to the standards of the following associations: American National Standards Institute (ANSI) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) National Board of Fire Underwriters (NBFU) FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 3 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) Underwriters' Laboratories (U.L.) American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) Massachusetts State Building Code, NFPA 1 Regulations and Ordinances of the Town of Beverly. 1.7

DRAWINGS AND CONFLICTS IN THE WORK A.

1.8

1.9

The Drawings and Specifications are intended to be complementary. Any materials shown or specified in one, but not in the other, reasonably implied and usually included under good industry practice and/or required by applicable Codes and Regulations for the proper and safe completion and operation of the work described herein, shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Drawings show general arrangement of equipment and are not intended to indicate the exact dimensions of runs.

EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION AND COORDINATION A.

All systems and equipment covered by this Section of the Specifications shall not be installed in congested and problem areas without first coordinating the installation of same with the other trades and the General Contractor. This Contractor shall, at his own expense, relocate all equipment installed in congested or problem areas should they interfere with the proper installation of the equipment to be installed by other trades and by the General Contractor.

B.

Particular attention shall be directed to the coordination of Systems with all equipment of other trades installed in the ceiling areas. Coordinate, with the other trades, the elevations of all equipment in ceiling areas to insure adequate space for the installation of fixtures before said equipment is installed.

C.

Furnish to the General Contractor and all other Contractors all information relative to the portion of the installation specified in this Section that will affect them, sufficiently in advance, so that they may plan their work and installations accordingly.

D.

In the case of failure on the part of this Contractor to give proper information, as indicated above, sufficiently in advance, this Contractor will pay for all back charges incurred by the General Contractor and other Contractors for the modification and/or relocation of any portion of the work already performed by them in conjunction with this Contract due to this Contractor's delay or for having given incorrect information.

E.

Obtain from the other trades, all information relative to the work covered by this Section of the Specifications, which this Contractor is to execute in conjunction with the installation of their respective equipment.

F.

In the event that conflicts, if any, cannot be settled rapidly and amicably between the affected trades with work proceeding in a workmanlike manner, then the Architect shall decide which work is to be relocated and his judgment shall be final and binding.

WORKMANSHIP

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 4 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

A.

1.10

SITE INVESTIGATION A.

1.11

1.13

1.14

It shall be the responsibility of the Bidders to acquaint themselves with the available information, before submitting their bid. Bidders must visit the site and acquaint themselves with the existing conditions and shall study all Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings, as well as the Specifications. The Bidders shall fully inform themselves of all local and state Code requirements. Extra compensation will not be given for obvious conflictions apparent at the time of the start of the project.

TAXES AND INSURANCE A.

1.12

The entire work provided in this Specification shall be constructed and finished, in every respect, in a workmanlike and substantial manner. It is not intended that the Drawings show every detail, but this Contractor shall furnish and install all such parts as may be necessary to complete the work in accordance with the best trade practice and to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner. The Owner shall have the right to reject any part of the work in case the workmanship is not of satisfactory quality and this Contractor shall replace same with acceptable work at his own expense.

This Contractor shall include in his bid, applicable federal, state and local taxes and the premiums of the insurance required by the General Conditions of the Contract. This Project is exempt from Massachusetts State Sales Tax. Tax exemption number will be given to the successful bidder.

PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A.

This Contractor shall obtain all the permits required for this Section of the work. He shall also obtain all the inspections and tests required. Defects discovered in work, materials and/or equipment shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner, and the inspection and test shall be repeated. When work is completed, this Contractor shall furnish a Certificate of Inspection and Approval, to the Owner, before final payment of the Contract will be allowed. Permits to be secured through the Town of Beverly.

B.

Refer to Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions Contract for Construction Services.

CONTRACT COST BREAKDOWN A.

At the start of construction, submit a breakdown of material and labor costs to aid the Architect in determining the value of the work installed, as the job progresses. The cost breakdown shall itemize categories of materials or portions of systems, as may be the case, to place a value on the work as it is installed.

B.

No requisitions will be paid until after the breakdown is delivered to the Architect.

GUARANTEE A.

Unless otherwise noted, all materials, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under this Section shall carry the standard warranty against all defects in material and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the work. Any fault due to defective or improper material or workmanship which may develop within that period, shall be made good, forthwith, by and at the expense of this Contractor, including all other damage done to areas, FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 5 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

materials and other systems resulting from this failure.

1.15

1.16

B.

This Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the Systems are of sufficient capacity to meet the specified performance requirements as set forth herein or as indicated.

C.

Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the Systems during the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be promptly replaced by this Contractor, at no charge to the Owner.

D.

This Contractor shall furnish, before the final payment is made, a written guarantee covering the above requirements.

MATERIALS A.

Materials shall be the best of their respective kinds and in full accord with the most modern mechanical construction. All materials shall be new.

B.

All materials necessary to make the installation complete in every detail shall be furnished and installed under this Contract, whether or not specifically shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

C.

It is the intent of the Specifications that one manufacturer be selected, not a combination, for any particular classification of materials.

D.

Where materials, equipment, apparatus or other products are specified by manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number, such designation is to establish the standard of desired quality and style and shall be the basis of the bid.

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT HANDLING A.

1.17

This Contractor shall do all handling of his materials and equipment and the resulting cleanup, at his expense, in a safe and satisfactory manner. Special attention shall be paid to the protection of life and property and the equipment or apparatus handled, and any corresponding damages shall be replaced, repaired or paid for by this Contractor, reviewed by the Architect. This Contractor shall provide all rigging, hoisting and staging required to complete the work of this Section, unless specifically noted otherwise.

MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A.

This Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and protection, from loss or damage of all causes, of all equipment, materials and tools supplied by him and stored or installed on the job site, until final acceptance of the project by the Owner.

B.

This Contractor shall store his materials and equipment in the location designated by the Owner and maintain the storage area in a safe condition.

C.

This Contractor shall clean, patch and repair any material and finishes of the building or its contents damaged during the execution of this Contract.

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 6 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.18

1.19

SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SCHEDULE A.

Submit complete Shop Drawings in accordance with provisions of the General Conditions and of the Supplementary General Conditions.

B.

Within 30 days after the date of Notice to Proceed and before purchasing any materials or equipment, submit to the Architect for approval, a complete list of the names of manufacturers of all equipment proposed to fulfill the work of this Section. After the list has been processed by the Architect, submit complete Shop Drawings of all equipment and materials. Do not order any material or equipment until approval has been obtained from the Architect.

C.

The approval of equipment and materials does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of Shop Drawings errors in details, sizes, quantities and dimensions which deviate from the Specifications, Contract Drawings and/or job conditions as they exist.

D.

If apparatus or materials are substituted by this Contractor for those specified, and such substitution necessitates changes in any mechanical or electrical equipment, or alteration to connections, piping, supports, or construction, same shall be provided. This Contractor is to assume the cost and entire responsibility thereof. The Architect's permission to make such a substitution shall not relieve this Contractor from full responsibility for the work.

E.

Changes to work already performed, made necessary by delays in Shop Drawing approvals, and are the responsibility of this Contractor.

RECORD DRAWINGS A.

The Architect will provide two (2) sets of black or blue line on white drawings to the General Contractor for the purpose of maintaining record drawings, one set of which shall be maintained at the site and on which, at all times, shall be accurately, clearly and completely show the actual installation of all work of this SECTION. At the completion of the contract, this Contractor shall submit to the General Contractor a complete set of record drawings showing all "As Built” conditions. After checking the aforementioned drawings, the General Contractor shall certify that they are complete and correct and shall submit the record drawings to the Architect. The Architect may have his Consulting Engineers review the drawings to determine if the installations, as shown thereon, are complete and accurate. After receiving verification that the Record Drawings are complete and accurate, this Contractor shall submit new mylar reproducible copies of the final Record Drawings to the Architect. Each drawing shall be marked "RECORD DRAWING" and dated. Availability of record drawings shall be prerequisite to scheduling a final inspection of this contract and said drawings and original contract documents will be used in checking completion of the work. Non-availability of record drawings or inaccuracies therein may be grounds for cancellation and postponement of any scheduled inspection by the Owner and shall be a condition precedent to final payment until such time as the discrepancy has been corrected. This contractor shall refer to Section 017800 for additional contract requirements to be performed for Record Drawings.

B.

The record drawings required to be furnished under the terms of this Contract are: Section

Reference FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 7 Design Development / 12.2.15

Drawings

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

FIRE SUPPRESSION 1.20

1.21

1.23

Required FP0.1,

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.

Provide operating instructions to the Owner's designated representative, with respect to operating and maintenance procedures, for all equipment and systems installed. The cost of up to eight (8) hours of instruction shall be included in the Contract Price. This contractor shall refer to Section 017800 for additional contract requirements to be performed for Operating Instruction and Maintenance Manuals.

B.

At the completion of the project, turn over to the Architect, three (3) complete manuals containing the following: 1. Complete shop drawings of all equipment. 2. Operation description of all Systems. 3. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of all suppliers of the products, materials, equipment and Systems. 4. Guarantees on all products, materials and equipment. 5. Preventive maintenance instructions for all Systems. 6. Spare parts list of all System components.

C.

Each manual shall be typewritten and bound under one (1) hard cover and will be reviewed by the Architect. The manuals shall be clearly and permanently identified on the cover with the name of the project.

D.

Upon completion of the instructions, this Contractor shall obtain a letter of acceptance of the instructions as being complete from the Owner. Submit a copy of said letter to the Architect.

COORDINATION DRAWINGS A.

1.22

Section 21 00 00

This Contractor shall be responsible to develop and furnish all required information on the coordination drawings required under DIVISION 01 of the Specifications. Contractor shall coordinate the elevations and locations of all his systems with the work of all other trades.

CLEANING OF SYSTEMS A.

Before the Systems are accepted, all equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, so that no dirt, dust or other foreign matter will be deposited and be detrimental to the operation of the Systems.

B.

After the installation is complete, equipment with factory finished surfaces shall be cleaned and damaged or scratched spots shall be touched up with the same type and color paint applied at the factory.

C.

All equipment that is to receive finish paint by the Painting Contractor, shall be cleaned by this Contractor and left ready to have surfaces prepared to receive paint.

RUBBISH REMOVAL

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 8 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

A.

1.24

TEMPORARY STRUCTURES A.

1.25

1.27

1.28

This Contractor shall provide, on the premises and where directed by the Architect, shall maintain in good condition, and shall remove when directed, suitable and substantial watertight sheds in which he shall store all his materials and equipment.

TEMPORARY SERVICES A.

1.26

At the completion of the work, or when ordered by the General Contractor or the Architect, this Contractor shall remove from the property, all the rubbish or waste material belonging to him. Keep the job site free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish; premises must be maintained in a clean condition.

All water, electricity, fire protection and sanitary facilities required for safe and efficient construction during normal working hours shall be furnished in accordance with the General Requirements.

TESTS A.

Furnish all labor, materials, instruments, supplies and services and bear all cost for the accomplishment of the tests herein specified. Correct all defects appearing under test, repeat the tests until no defects are disclosed and leave the equipment clean and ready for use.

B.

Perform any tests, other than herein specified, which may be required by legal Authorities or by Agencies to whose requirements this work is to conform.

C.

Dispose of test water and wastes after tests are complete, in a manner satisfactory to the Architect and in accordance with governing regulations.

EQUIPMENT ACCESS REQUIREMENTS A.

All work shall be installed so that all parts requiring inspection, operation, maintenance and repair are readily accessible. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this, but changes of magnitude shall not be made prior to written approval from the Architect.

B.

Furnish access panels in walls and ceilings at locations indicated on the Drawings, or to permit access for adjustment, removal and the replacement and servicing of all equipment, and all other items requiring maintenance and adjustments. Access panels shall be installed by the General Contractor.

C.

Coordinate the exact location of access panels in all finished spaces with the Architect.

MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A.

Unless otherwise indicated, motors for equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished and installed by the Fire Protection Contractor and shall be as follows: 1. Motors 1/3 HP and smaller shall be wound for 120 volts, single phase, 60 cycle AC service.

B.

Unless otherwise specified, all motor starters shall be furnished and installed by the FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 9 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Electrical Subcontractor. 1.29

WIRING DIAGRAMS A.

1.30

This Contractor shall furnish wiring diagrams for all equipment furnished under this Section for which wiring is to be installed by the Electrical Subcontractor.

PROCEDURE FOR TESTING A.

Partial tests shall be made during the progress of the work.

B.

All labor, materials, instruments, devices and power required for testing shall be furnished by this Contractor. All tests shall be performed in the presence and to the satisfaction of the Architect and such other parties as may have legal jurisdiction.

C.

Repair, or if directed by the Architect, replace all defective work with new work without extra charge to the Contract. Repeat tests as directed until all work is proven to meet the requirements specified herein.

D.

Restore to its finished condition any work or materials disturbed by tests.

E.

This Contractor shall be responsible for removing all temporary piping connections required for tests and dispose of test water and wastes after tests in a manner satisfactory to the Architect.

F.

This Contractor shall make hydrostatic, pneumatic and operational tests on all fire protection equipment in accordance with standards of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and by the NFPA.

G.

Fire Protection Systems: 1. Upon completion of each phase of the fire protection system installation, this Contractor shall inspect and test the systems in the presence of the Owner's representative and the Fire Inspector. 2. The complete testing procedure for the system shall be in accordance with the requirements stated in the National Fire Protection Association's respective pamphlet for each system, but not less than the procedures specified herein. 3. In general, the Fire Protection Systems shall be tested with water to a hydrostatic pressure of 200 pounds per square inch. This pressure shall be maintained for a minimum of four (4) hours or until the system has been inspected for leaks or defects. If any leaks or defects are detected, they shall be remedied in an approved manner and the System shall be retested in the manner specified herein. 4. This Contractor shall secure all Certificates of Approval from all agencies. Each Certificate shall be delivered to the Architect before final acceptance.

H.

This Contractor shall be responsible to supervise, instruct, test, document and perform all other services necessary pertaining to the installation of all water mains, fire hydrants and related components. provided under Section 331000 so that he can certify that said installation is in accordance with all NFPA requirements and shall provide a fully executed "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Underground Piping" in NFPA 24, Latest Edition.

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 10 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1

2.2

2.3

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.

This Contractor shall comply with all the rules, Codes, ordinances, regulations and requirements of all legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction over the whole or any part of the work herein specified. Regulations supplement this Specification and shall take precedence in any case of conflict.

B.

All equipment and materials furnished in connection with the installation shall be new and furnished in accordance with the requirements of the Standards of the NFPA and they shall be of the best grade and quality of their respective kinds, free from natural, manufacturing or construction flaws, defects or irregularities and finish, fittings and workmanship shall be equal to the highest commercial grade.

C.

Castings of all metals of all kinds shall be clean, smooth, close grained, of uniform thickness and free from all defects such as sand holes, blisters or cracks.

D.

Before the installation will be accepted, the Fire Protection Contractor shall have every portion of his work in first-class working condition.

E.

Where installing any of the apparatus herein called for, sufficient clearance shall be allowed to permit the removal and replacing of parts that may require future removal for repairs and replacement.

F.

Exposed piping shall be installed as tight as practical to structural members.

G.

Piping shall be installed neatly and square to all surfaces. Horizontal sidewall sprinklers shall be installed as tight to beams and ceilings as the sprinkler listing will allow with reference to the existence of beams.

ACCESS PANELS A.

Furnish access panels for installation by the General Contractor, in walls and nonaccessible ceilings, at locations to permit access for adjustment, removal and replacement of all equipment, such as valves, drains, and all other items requiring maintenance and adjustment.

B.

All access panels shall be located in closets, storage rooms and/or other non-public areas, in a workmanlike manner, positioned so that the junction can be easily reached, and the size shall be sufficient for this purpose (minimum 16" x 16"). When access panels are required in corridors or other public areas, they shall be located as directed by the Architect.

C.

Panels shall be of the types specified in Section 083100 and shall be set square and flush in cooperation with the Subcontractors for other Sections of the Specifications. Particular attention shall be exercised in the selection of doors for masonry walls in order that frame sizes used will match the courses of concrete masonry units.

D.

Access panels Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.

PIPE AND FITTINGS A.

All piping inside the building for the fire protection systems 2-1/2 inches and smaller FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 11 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

in size, unless otherwise specified, shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe with threaded ends conforming to ASTM Standard A135, latest amendment, approved for use in Fire Protection Systems. All piping inside the building, three inches (3") and larger in size, unless otherwise noted, shall be Schedule 10 black steel pipe with rolled groove ends, approved for use in Fire Protection Systems.

2.4

2.5

B.

Fittings for the systems shall be cast iron, unless otherwise specified. Cast iron fittings shall be extra heavy pattern for pipe sized larger than two inches (2"). Malleable iron fittings of standard weight pattern will be acceptable in sizes up to six inches (6"). U.L. approved and F.M. listed groove fittings will be allowed. All fittings shall be approved by Underwriters Laboratories for use in sprinkler systems and shall be designed and guaranteed for a working pressure of not less than 175 psi cold water pressure.

C.

All close and shoulder nipples shall be of corresponding materials as the pipe and shall be extra heavy pattern.

D.

All pipe shall be run true to line and grade and, in general, parallel to walls and ceilings. All open ends of the pipe lines and equipment shall be properly capped and plugged during the installation in order to keep dirt or foreign materials out of the system. All work shall be performed in a practical manner and according to the highest standards of workmanship.

E.

All threaded pipes shall have full tapered threads with ends reamed out after threading and cutting.

F.

The interior of all pipes and fittings shall be cleaned before assembling. All pipe threads (not fittings) shall have a thorough application of approved pipe joint cement before assembling. Any leaky joints shall be remade, as caulking will not be permitted. All pipe shall be pitched. Means shall be provided to completely drain the entire system. Capped flushing connections shall be provided at the ends of all cross mains.

G.

Underground pipe shall be type 52, cement-lined, ductile pipe with class 250 mechanical fittings having Mega-Lug connections.

VALVES A.

All valves shall be of the O.S. & Y. type, of approved extra heavy flanged pattern and be designed and guaranteed for a minimum working pressure of 175 psi. All shut-off valves shall be located in conveniently accessible positions. Valves controlling the water supply to each system shall have an approved sign attached to the yoke indicating the purpose of the valve.

B.

Check valve shall be of approved type for fire protection systems and be designed and guaranteed for a minimum working pressure of 175 psi.

C.

Drain valves shall be Underwriters' approved all bronze angle, globe pattern with renewable disc, hose with cap and chain, ample size hand wheel and rated for a working pressure of 175 psi.

HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A.

All piping shall be supported throughout the building structure by means of approved

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 12 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

hangers and supports. Piping shall be supported to maintain required grading and pitching of lines, to prevent vibration and to secure piping in place, and shall be so arranged as to provide for expansion and contraction. B.

Pipe hangers shall be of black malleable iron, heavy petters in two (2) parts bolted together, of a type approved for Fire Protection Systems installation.

C.

Hangers shall fit the pipe snugly but leave the pipe sufficient freedom of movement for expansion or contraction. Hangers which permit wide lateral motion of the pipe will not be acceptable.

D.

"C" clamps for hangers on pipes will not be permitted unless installed with safety straps.

E.

Maximum spacing of hangers on horizontal runs of pipe, having no concentrations of weight, shall be as follows: SCHEDULE Hanger Spacing for Various Pipes Pipe Size (inches)

Spacing (feet)

1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 6 8

7 10 10 10 10 12 12 10 8 8

F.

Where Codes having jurisdiction require closer spacing, the hanger spacing shall be by Code in lieu of the distance specified herein.

G.

Provide hangers at a maximum distance of two feet (2') from all changes in direction (horizontal and vertical) on both sides of concentrated loads independent of the piping. Hangers, in general, for all horizontal piping shall be adjustable clevis type hangers.

H. I.

All vertical drops and run out pipes shall be supported by extension style, split ring type hangers.

J.

All horizontal piping shall be suspended from the building by mild steel rod connecting the pipe hanger to inserts, angle brackets and lag screws, by the building construction in accordance with the following table: Pipe Size (inches)

Rod Diameter (inches)

1-3 3-6 8

3/8 1/2 3/4 FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 13 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.6

2.7

K.

Hanger rods for other installation shall be sized in accordance with recommended load capacities of Specification A.S.T.M. Designation A-107, latest amendment.

L.

Remove rust from all ferrous hanger equipment (hangers, rods and bolts) and apply one (1) coat of rust inhibiting paint immediately after erection.

M.

All piping installed under this Section of the Specifications shall be independently supported from the building structure and not from the piping, ductwork or conduit of other trades. All supplementary steel required to meet requirements specified herein shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor.

N.

In areas where support of the pipe by hangers is not possible or feasible, piping shall be supported by an adjustable pipe roll stand with base plate equal to Figure 274, as manufactured by Grinnel Corporation. This installation method shall be done in accordance with the requirements of all pertinent Codes.

O.

All supplementary steel throughout the project for this Section of the Specifications, both suspended and floor mounted, shall be furnished and installed by the Fire Protection Contractor and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect.

SLEEVES AND INSERTS A.

This Contractor shall be held responsible for the location of and maintaining in proper position, of sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts supplied and/or set in place by him. In the event that failure to do so require cutting and patching of finished work, it shall be done at this Contractor's expense by the General Contractor.

B.

All pipes passing through walls or partitions shall be provided with sleeves having an internal diameter one inch (1") larger than outside diameter of the pipe.

C.

Unless otherwise indicated and/or specified herein, all sleeves through masonry floors or interior masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe, set flush with finished wall or set one inch (1") above finished floor surfaces, or as indicated on the architectural drawings. Sleeves in stairwells shall be set flush with finish floor.

D.

Sleeves through interior non-masonry partitions shall be 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel, set flush with finished surfaces of the partitions.

E.

Sleeves through interior walls adjacent to all building expansion joints shall be two (2) pipe size diameters larger than diameter of pipe.

F.

This contractor shall be responsible to review all firestopping of all piping and related components for completeness. All firestopping materials and installation will be by the General Contractor under Section 07 84 00.

ESCUTCHEONS A.

Escutcheons shall be installed around all exposed bare pipe. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameters to cover the sleeve opening and shall fit snugly around the bare pipe.

B.

Escutcheons shall be cast brass, grey primed finish and provided with a set-screw to

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 14 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

properly hold escutcheons in place. 2.8

2.9

2.10

SPRINKLER HEADS A.

All sprinkler heads shall be quick response type, of 1/2 inch nominal orifice size. Heads shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and approved by Factory Mutual. All heads shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer.

B.

All heads shall have a temperature rating of 165°F unless the distance from a heat source or location of head warrants, by Code, a head of another degree rating.

C.

The following sprinkler heads shall be installed in the areas outlined: 1. All upright sprinkler heads in unfinished spaces shall be of brass, with deflectors and fusible links. 2. All pendant sprinkler heads, unless noted or designated otherwise, shall be concealed type heads having a ceiling plate of a color to match that of the ceiling it is mounted in. Heads in unheated spaces shall be of the dry pendant type with a maximum length of 36". 3. All sidewall heads in heated areas shall be chrome-plated units with sidewall deflectors and fusible links. Sidewall heads serving unheated areas shall have shafts a minimum of 18" in length. 4. All sprinkler heads in shower areas shall be wax coated. 5. All sprinkler heads in the Gymnasium shall have protective guards on them. 6. All sprinkler heads in rooms with black ceilings shall have black sprinkler heads. 7. Concealed sprinkler head flush covers are to match adjacent finishes and shall be coordinated with architect.

SPARE SPRINKLER HEADS AND CABINETS A.

The Fire Protection Contractor shall furnish and install, where directed by the Architect, a metal cabinet containing spare sprinkler heads and wrenches.

B.

The cabinet shall have shelves for storing the spare heads in an orderly manner. The shelf spaces shall be subdivided to segregate the sprinkler heads of each type and clearly identify them with approved markings. The cabinets shall have proper arrangement for hanging the wrenches.

C.

Spare sprinkler heads shall be provided in numbers, by NFPA Pamphlet #13, corresponding to the types and temperature ratings of those installed in the premises (6 minimum of each type).

D.

Wrenches shall be provided in a number so that there will always be a minimum of two (2) wrenches of each type required to remove any sprinkler head on the premises.

ALARM CHECK VALVE A.

Alarm check valve shall be approved type for a wet pipe sprinkler system complete with retarding chamber, water operating gong, drain valve, pressure gauges and other required trimmings. Valve shall be equal to Victaulic Model 751 for variable pressure vertical installation, sizes as indicated on the drawings, with electrical gong. Electric gong shall be located on outside of building with head and identification tag.

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 15 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.11

2.12

BACKFLOW PREVENTER A.

This Contractor shall furnish and install an eight-inch (8") Double Check Valve Assembly, where shown on the drawings. The device shall be a Watts Model No. LF709-UL/FM-S-FDA, or equal. Devices shall be by Ames, or Wilkins.

B.

One (1) complete rebuilding kit shall be supplied with the Double Check Valve Assembly.

C.

This Contractor shall be responsible to file design data sheets along with cuts of the double check valve assembly, and obtain approval of same from the local Water Department and the Department of Environmental Protection.

FIRE VALVE CABINETS A.

This Contractor shall furnish and install fire valve cabinets complete with all related accessories where shown on the drawings. All cabinets in fire-rated walls shall be firerated. Cabinets shall be as follows: Type "A" - A recessed steel cabinet, equal to Potter-Roemer, Inc. Figure 1880 with door style of Suffix "A" and 2-1/2" x 1-1/2" valve assembly. Assembly shall include a PotterRoemer, Inc. 2-1/2" rough brass, 300 lb., U.L. pressure-restricting angle valve No. 4085C; 2-1/2" x 1-1/2" brass reducer cap. Valve, reducer and all related components shall be chrome-plated. All hose valve connections shall face outward at approximately a 45 degree angle to permit easy connection of fire hoses. Provide sign for each fire department valve that reads MANUAL STANDPIPE FOR FIRE DEPARTMENT USE ONLY.

2.13

FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS & INDICATER VALVE A.

2.14

2.15

Fire department connections shall be Underwriters' Laboratories and NFPA approved units with a “Storz” type connection. Units shall be manufactured of heavy bronze complete with bronze caps, plugs and chains. Provide identification plate of cast brass with the words "AUTO. SPKR. – MANUAL STANDPIPE” in raised lettering.

DRAINS AND TEST CONNECTIONS A.

Drains and test connections shall be provided in the systems by all governing Codes, regulations and ordinances.

B.

Drains shall be provided at low point in piping, at base of risers, and wherever necessary to insure that all portions of the piping may be completely drained.

C.

Test connections shall consist of drain piping with a one inch (1") shutoff valve (O.S. & Y.) type, piped outdoors to a safe place of discharge. Pipe through outside wall shall be galvanized steel pipe with sleeve caulked watertight and plugged with a brass plug.

FIRE PROTECTION ALARMS

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 16 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

A.

2.16

O.S. & Y. valve monitor switches and sprinkler system's flow and pressure sensors shall be furnished and installed by the Fire Protection Contractor and wired by the Electrical Subcontractor. The Fire Protection Contractor shall coordinate with the Electrical Subcontractor on this portion of the system. Monitor switches shall be installed on all O.S. & Y. valves and shall be equal to Notifier OSY2 and be fitted with 2-SPDT switches. Flow switches shall be installed as indicated on the drawings and shall be equal to Notifier WFD 10/40 with adjustable delay. Electric alarm bells furnished and installed by Fire Protection Contractor and wired by the Electrical Contractor.

SYSTEM DIAGRAM A.

At the completion of the work, next to the alarm riser, provide a small scale plan of each floor of the building indicating zones, with locations of all control valves, low point drains and inspector’s tests. Plans shall be 1/32” = 1’-0” in scale neatly drawn and color-coded to indicate the portion of the building protected by each system, framed under glass and permanently mounted on the wall adjacent to the header.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1

OPERATION AND START-UP A.

3.2

The Fire Protection Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to place the equipment into operation and then start and operate all systems to demonstrate the fitness of the installation.

COORDINATION A.

The structure and its appurtenances, clearances and the related services, such as plumbing, heating, ventilation and electric service, have been planned to be adequate and suitable for the installation of equipment specified under this Section. The Owner will not assume any increase in cost caused by different requirements peculiar to a particular make or type of equipment and any such incidental cost shall be borne by the Fire Protection Contractor. He shall be responsible for the proper installation and location of his required sleeves, chases and inserts and see that they are set in the forms before the concrete is poured. He shall be responsible for his work and equipment furnished and installed by him until the completion and final acceptance of this Contract, and he shall replace any work which may be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to the Owner.

B.

In the event there is a conflict or inadequate space for the proper installation of Fire Protection equipment, the Fire Protection Contractor shall prepare a scaled (1/4" = 1'-0" size) composite drawing, showing the building structure and all equipment and items affecting the installation, to clearly identify the areas of conflict. The Fire Protection Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of the drawing, along with a written explanation of the problem, to the Architect for his review and determination on what action to take to resolve the conflict.

C.

It shall be the duty of the Fire Protection Contractor to furnish full information to all trades relative to the work they are to do in connection with work under this Section. This includes data for wiring, including wiring diagrams, equipment foundations, pipe connections and related components furnished under other Sections.

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 17 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.3

3.4

PAINTING A.

The Fire Protection Contractor shall apply one (1) coat of anti-rust paint and one (1) coat of flat black enamel to all support steel, hangers and other steel or iron elements of the Fire Protection system, furnished by him, which will be enclosed or above ceilings when the project is completed.

B.

Paint shall be omitted from all items with a galvanized finish.

C.

All surfaces to be painted shall be free of dirt, scale, rust, grease and oil. Rust spots are to be wire brushed. Ambient temperature shall be in accordance with paint manufacturer's requirements when painting is being performed.

D.

The Fire Protection Contractor shall touch up, with spray paint, all scratched or damaged surfaces of equipment with factory finish. Spray paint shall be the same color and type as factory finish.

E.

The Painting Contractor shall paint all mechanical equipment, enclosures, covers, panels, insulation, conduit and other equipment exposed to view, except factory finished items. Care shall be taken not to paint over equipment nameplates. The Fire Protection Contractor shall leave surfaces to be painted ready to receive paint. The Painting Contractor shall apply paint in accordance with the Painting and Finishing portion of this Specification. Colors shall be selected by the Architect.

WORKING PLANS, FLOW TEST AND HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS A.

General performance criteria for the fire protection systems has been developed on these Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible to engage a qualified Massachusetts registered fire protection engineer to prepare the final installation drawings of the fire protection systems. The contractor’s design of the fire protection systems and supporting calculations shall be submitted to the Architect for review, but solely for the purpose of reviewing relative to the criteria established herein. The review of the Contractor's engineer's design shall not, in any manner or respect, relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for any deviations made from the contract drawings of the fire protection systems. It requires preparation and submission of drawings, procurements of approvals and provision of a complete functional system of automatic sprinklers and standpipes.

B.

Before commencement of any work, submit and obtain all approvals of all plans and calculations from F.M. or other Insuring Agent prior to submittal to the Agency having jurisdiction, including the Fire Department, for final approval. Furnish copies of approved working plans to the Architect promptly after obtaining such approvals.

C.

Plans must show the following information in suitable fashion: 1. Name of Owner. 2. Names and addresses of Architect and Engineers. 3. Location of project. 4. North point. 5. Drawing scale. 6. Plans of all floors, partitions, exits, beams, lights, unit heater, diffusers, registers, duct over four feet (4') in width and ceiling heights. 7. Location, name, type, temperature rating and make of sprinkler heads including dimensioning of heads. 8. Structural beams and penetrations. FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 18 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.

18. D.

Source of water supply, size of pipe, and pressure available. Number of sprinklers on each riser, area of each room and total number of rooms in the building, including location and size of risers, mains, branches, and most remote area. Cutting and lengths of pipe. Make, type, model, size and location of sprinkler water flow alarms and tamper switches. Type of hangers, inserts and sleeves. Inspector's test connections, drain pipes and test pipes. Crosses, riser nipples and size. Control gate, checks and flushing connections. Riser diagram of entire schematic system indicating all alarms, valves, tamper switches, floor control valves, mains, risers, source of supply, quantity of sprinklers in each fire area on each floor, water pressure at each floor and height of each floor with regard to water supply source. Symbol list and abbreviations for entire Fire Protection System.

This Contractor shall be responsible to develop complete hydraulic calculations for the Fire Protection System as shown on the Drawings. This Contractor shall perform his own flow tests at building and base his calculations on the flow test results. Elevations of both flow and gauge hydrants must be included with all flow data. Flow test results and hydraulic calculations are to be submitted to the Architect, the Owner's Insuring Agent and the Fire Department for review. A ten (10) psi "cushion" is the minimum required for the design of the piping system. Exiting Flow Test Information: Location: Beverly Middle School – Cabot Street, Beverly MA. Date: September 11, 2015 Start Time: 10:00a.m., Duration of Test: 2 Min. Performed by: PARE Corporation (with assistance from Beverly Water Personnel) Purpose of Test: Determine available fire flow at 20 psi residual pressure. Consumption Rate During Test: 1,425 gpm @ 2 min. = 2,850 gallons. Flow Test Results at Hydrant: Flow Hydrant, flow rate 1,425 gpm, 2-1/2 inch nozzle, Static Pressure 90 psi, Residual Pressure 72 psi. Residual Hydrant: Nozzle size 2-1/2 inch, Static Pressure 92 psi, Residual Pressure 89 psi. Note: Pressure read from Pitot tube gauge corresponding to a flow rate of 1,425 gpm was approximately 72 psi. Friction coefficient of 0.9 is factored into the Pitot tube gauge. The results of this flow test are indicative of the conditions of the water system at the time of the test. Other factors, such as available fire reserve (i.e., storage tank volume), operation of booster pumps, etc., were not considered in this evaluation. END OF SECTION

FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 00 00 - 19 Design Development / 12.2.15

DO NOT REMOVE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING (Filed Sub-Bid Required) INDEX PART 1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 3   1.1   TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS ....................... 3   1.2   GENERAL REFERENCES ............................................................................................... 3   1.3   SCOPE OF WORK ........................................................................................................... 4   1.4   RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ................................................................. 5   1.5   DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................... 6   1.6   INTENT ............................................................................................................................. 6   1.7   CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS ................................................................. 6   1.8   DRAWINGS AND CONFLICTS IN THE WORK ............................................................... 7   1.9   EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION AND COORDINATION ................................................ 7   1.10   WORKMANSHIP .............................................................................................................. 7   1.11   SITE INVESTIGATION ..................................................................................................... 8   1.12   TAXES AND INSURANCE ............................................................................................... 8   1.13   PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS ........................................................................................ 8   1.14   CONTRACT COST BREAKDOWN .................................................................................. 8   1.15   GUARANTEE ................................................................................................................... 8   1.16   MATERIALS ..................................................................................................................... 9   1.17   MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT HANDLING ................................................................... 9   1.18   MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS ................................................... 9   1.19   SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SCHEDULE ........................................................... 9   1.20   LOCATION OF FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT .............................................................. 10   1.21   RECORD DRAWINGS ................................................................................................... 10   1.22   OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................ 11   1.23   COORDINATION DRAWINGS ....................................................................................... 12   1.24   CLEANING OF SYSTEMS ............................................................................................. 12   1.25   RUBBISH REMOVAL ..................................................................................................... 12   1.26   TEMPORARY STRUCTURES ....................................................................................... 12   1.27   TEMPORARY SERVICES .............................................................................................. 12   1.28   TESTS ............................................................................................................................ 12   1.29   EQUIPMENT ACCESS REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................... 13   1.30   MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................................... 13   1.31   WIRING DIAGRAMS ...................................................................................................... 13   1.32   CROSS CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................... 13   1.33   CLEANING, FLUSHING AND TESTING ........................................................................ 13   1.34   PROCEDURE FOR TESTING ........................................................................................ 14   1.35   COMMSIONING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 15   PART 2 PRODUCTS ..................................................................................................................... 15   2.1   INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 15   2.2   PIPE AND FITTINGS ...................................................................................................... 16   2.3   JOINTS AND COUPLINGS ............................................................................................ 16   2.4   VALVES .......................................................................................................................... 18   2.5   PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, CHANNELS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS ................. 18   2.6   ACCESS PANELS .......................................................................................................... 20   2.7   PIPE SLEEVES .............................................................................................................. 21   2.8   INSULATION .................................................................................................................. 21   2.9   CLEANOUTS .................................................................................................................. 22   PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 1 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.10   TRAPS ............................................................................................................................ 22   2.11   UNIONS AND NIPPLES ................................................................................................. 23   2.12   SHOCK ABSORBERS .................................................................................................... 23   2.13   VACUUM BREAKERS .................................................................................................... 23   2.14   PIPING ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................. 24   2.15   VENTS THROUGH THE ROOF ..................................................................................... 24   2.16   DRAINS .......................................................................................................................... 24   2.17   WALL HYDRANTS, HOSE BIBBS AND ROOF HYDRANT ........................................... 25   2.18   EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................... 25   2.19   GAS SOLENOID VALVES .............................................................................................. 26   2.20   MASTER GAS VALVE BOXES ...................................................................................... 26   2.21   GAS SERVICE AND METER ......................................................................................... 26   2.22   INTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTORS ......................................................................... 26   2.23   BACKFLOW PREVENTERS .......................................................................................... 27   2.24   TRAP PRIMERS ............................................................................................................. 27   2.25   EXPANSION JOINTS AND LOOPS ............................................................................... 27   2.26   GAS FIRED HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM ............................................................. 28   2.28   EMERGENCY SHOWER ELECTRIC HOT WATER SYSTEM ...................................... 28   2.29   DOMESTIC WATER TEMPERING SYSTEMS .............................................................. 28   2.30   EMERGENCY SHOWER WATER TEMPERING VALVE .............................................. 29   2.31   HOT WATER CIRCULATORS ....................................................................................... 29   2.32   ACID NEUTRALIZATION SYSTEM ............................................................................... 29   2.33   PLUMBING FIXTURES .................................................................................................. 31   2.34   HEAT MAINTENANCE CABLE ...................................................................................... 35   2.35   EXTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTOR ........................................................................... 35   2.38   GAS TRAIN VENT PIPING ............................................................................................. 35   2.40   WATER METER ............................................................................................................. 36   2.41   EMERGENCY SHOWER SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE/TIME CLOCK ........................ 36   2.45   VALVE TAGS, NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS ............................................................... 36   2.46   PIPE IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................. 37   PART 3 EXECUTION .................................................................................................................... 37   3.1   OPERATION AND START-UP ....................................................................................... 37   3.2   COORDINATION ............................................................................................................ 38   3.3   PAINTING ....................................................................................................................... 38   3.4   PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS ........................................................................................ 39   3.5   SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS ......................................................... 39   3.6   WATER SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................... 40   3.7   GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS .................................................................................... 41   END OF SECTION ........................................................................................................................ 41  

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 2 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

SECTION 22 00 00 PLUMBING (Filed Sub-Bid Required) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1

TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTING SUB-BIDS A.

Sub-bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope at a time and place as stipulated in the “ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS”. The following should appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope: NAME OF SUB-BIDDER PLYMOUTH NORTH HIGH SCHOOL PLYMOUTH, MA SUB-BID FOR: Section 22 00 00, Plumbing

B.

Every sub-bid submitted for work under this Section shall be on proper forms. Subbid forms may be obtained at the office of the Architect.

C.

Sub-bids shall be accompanied by BID BOND or CASH or CERTIFIED CHECK or a TREASURER’S CASHIER’S CHECK issued by a responsible bank or trust company payable to the AWARDING AUTHORITY in the amount of 5% of the subbid. A sub-bid accompanied by any other form of bid deposit than those specified is rejected.

D.

Each Sub-Bidder shall list in Paragraph E of the “Sub Bid Form” the name and bid price of each person, firm or corporation performing each class of work or part thereof for which the Section of the Specifications for the Sub-Trade requires such listing, provided that, in the absence of any contrary provisions in the Specifications, any Sub-Bidder may, without listing any bid price, list his own name in said Paragraph E for each such class of work or part thereof and perform that work with persons on his own payroll, if such Sub-Bidder, after Sub Bid openings, shows to the satisfaction of the Awarding Authority, that he does customarily perform such class of work or the part thereof with persons on his own payroll and is qualified to do so. This Section of the Specifications requires that the following class(es) of work shall be listed in Paragraph E under the conditions herein. CLASS OF WORK Insulation

E.

1.2

REFERENCE PARAGRAPH 2.8

In any case in which the sub-bidder intends to perform the class of work listed above with persons of his own staff, he shall nevertheless list his own name therefore under Paragraph E of the FORM FOR SUB-BID.

GENERAL REFERENCES A.

Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, General Conditions Contract for PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 3 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Construction Services and Division 1, General Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section. 1.3

SCOPE OF WORK A.

Work Included: The scope of work of this Section consists of the installation of all materials to be furnished under this SECTION, and without limiting the generality thereof, consists of providing all labor, materials, equipment, plant, transportation, appurtenances, and services necessary and/or incidental to properly complete all plumbing work as shown on the Drawings, as described in the Specifications, or as reasonably inferred from either or, in the opinion of the Architect, as being required and, in general, is as follows: 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21.

Complete sanitary, waste and vent systems, including kitchen waste and garage waste connecting to all fixtures, equipment and related items, terminating at 10'-0" off the building, as shown on the Drawings or as required by code for a “Designated System”. Complete storm drainage systems connecting to all roof drains, downspouts and related items, terminating at locations 10'-0" off the building, as shown on the Drawings or as required by code for a “Designated System”. Complete domestic cold water, hot water and hot water return piping system, including connection to all fixtures, equipment and related items as required. Acid waste and vent systems from all sinks and fixtures requiring same, including acid neutralization system and terminating at location 10’-0”’ off the building, as shown on the drawings. Non-potable water systems from backflow preventors on the domestic water system to all HVAC equipment and science area fixtures and equipment. A tempered emergency water system to supply all emergency showers and eyewashes. All valves for water, and gas piping systems. Roof Drains, Floor drains and area drains. Cleanouts, thermometers, strainers. Wall hydrants, hose bibbs. Circulator pumps. All plumbing fixtures, trim and fixture supports. Gas-fired water heaters. Exterior Grease Interceptors. Insulation of all potable and non-potable hot, cold, hot water return piping, chilled water piping, storm piping and roof drain bodies. Provide sanitary, gas, waste and vent piping, hot and cold water piping including final connections to all equipment supplied under other sections of this Specification complete with all incidental devices. Valve tags, valve charts, nameplates, pipe identification and record drawings. Secure all permits and pay all fees relating to the work. Complete gas piping systems from gas meter, including final connections to all equipment. All operating and maintenance manuals, certification letters and Certificates of Approval. Testing, sterilization and guarantees. All hangers, seismic restraints, inserts, sleeves, expansion loops, expansion compensators, anchors, guides, strainers, gauges, thermometers plus all related accessories required for a complete installation of each system, as PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 4 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

22. B.

Items to be Furnished Only: designated Sections: 1.

C.

2.

1.4

Furnish the following items for installation by the

Access Panels a. Access panels for access to plumbing equipment shall be furnished under this Section for installation by the General Contractor or appropriate Subcontractor.

The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting related to the work of the Section except in finished surfaces. Patching is the responsibility of the trade effected. 1.

D.

specified herein and/or indicated on the drawings. All supplementary steel for piping and equipment supports.

For coordination of cutting and patching, refer to Section 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. For cutting and patching specifications, refer to Section 017329, CUTTING AND PATCHING.

The work of this Section is shown on Drawings numbered P0.1, P0.01, P0.12, P0.13, P0.14, P1.01, P1.11, P1.12, P1.13, P1.14, P1.21, P1.22, P1.23, P1.24, P1.32, P1.33, P1.34, P1.42, P1.43, P1.44, P1.51, P1.52, P1.53, P1.54, P2.1,

RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A.

The following related work shall be performed by the Designated trades and under the listed SECTION: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

Excavation and backfill shall be performed by the General Contractor: SECTION 310000, EARTHWORK. On-site storm drainage systems, as shown on the Drawings: STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS, SECTION 334000. Continuation of sanitary drainage systems beyond 10'-0" off the building, as shown on the drawings: SANITARY SEWERAGE, 333000. Water service up to a point 6" beyond the foundation wall, as shown on the drawings WATER DISTRIBUTION, 331000. Wiring of equipment requiring power connections and furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and starting devices for all motors incidental to the Plumbing Systems shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor: ELECTRICAL, SECTION 26 00 00. Painting of piping, fittings, coverings, hangers, supports and all equipment not specifically outlined to be painted in this Section, shall be painted by the Painting Contractor: PAINTING, SECTION 099100. Electricity and water for all tests and temporary operation of Plumbing Systems: TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS, SECTION 015000. Concrete equipment pads for Plumbing equipment: CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE, SECTION 033000. Equipment access panels for Plumbing equipment shall be furnished by the Plumbing Contractor and installed by the General Contractor or respective Subcontractor. Flashing of all vents through the roof shall be performed by the Roofing Contractor, ROOFING AND FLASHING, SECTION 070002.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 5 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.5

1.6

DEFINITIONS A.

"Concealed" shall be defined as areas where work is located in chases, walls, partitions, shafts, and above ceilings.

B.

"Piping" shall mean, in addition to pipe, all fittings, valves, hangers, and other accessories relating to such piping systems.

C.

"Provide" shall mean "provided complete in place," that is, "furnished and installed."

D.

"Plumbing Subcontractor" shall mean the filed sub-bid contractor under this DIVISION 22 00 00.

INTENT A.

1.7

All work shall be in accordance with the arrangement, details and locations, as indicated on the Contract Drawings, Reference Drawings and any supplemental addenda, bulletins or drawings issued by the Architect. Layouts are diagrammatic and final arrangement of equipment shall suit field conditions. Install all necessary fittings and equipment offsets required to meet job conditions. The Drawings are not intended to be scaled, but shall be followed with sufficient accuracy to coordinate with other work and structural limitations. Work installed in a manner contrary to that shown on the Drawings, or interfering with the work of another trade, shall be removed and reinstalled when so directed by the Architect. Discrepancies and questionable points shall be immediately reported to the Architect for clarification.

CODES, REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS A.

All work shall be installed in conformance to the governing Codes, Regulations and Ordinances. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to familiarize himself with all governing Codes, Regulations and ordinances and report any non-compliance of the Plans and Specifications to the Architect, prior to entering into a contract. All the above requirements shall take precedence over the Plans and Specifications. These requirements are minimum criteria and no reductions permitted by Code will be allowed without written permission of the Architect.

B.

All workmanship, methods and materials shall meet the highest standards of the trade and, in general, shall conform to the standards of the following associations: American National Standards Institute American Society of Mechanical Engineers National Board of Fire Underwriters National Fire Protection Association National Electrical Manufacturers Association Occupational Safety and Health Act Underwriters' Laboratories American Society of Testing Materials National Sanitation Foundation Massachusetts Plumbing and Gas Code Massachusetts State Building Code, NFPA 1 Regulations and Ordinances of the Town of Beverly Americans with Disabilities Act

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 6 Design Development / 12.2.15

(ANSI) (ASME) (NBFU) (NFPA) (NEMA) (OSHA) (UL) (ASTM) (NSF)

(ADA)

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.8

DRAWINGS AND CONFLICTS IN THE WORK A.

1.9

1.10

The Drawings and Specifications are intended to be complementary. Any materials shown or specified in one, but not in the other, reasonably implied and usually included under good industry practice and/or required by applicable Codes and Regulations for the proper and safe completion and operation of the work described herein, shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. Drawings show general arrangement of equipment and are not intended to indicate the exact dimensions of runs.

EXCHANGE OF INFORMATION AND COORDINATION A.

All systems and equipment covered by this Section of the Specifications shall not be installed in congested and problem areas without first coordinating the installation of same with the other trades and the General Contractor. This Contractor shall, at his own expense, relocate all equipment installed in congested or problem areas should they interfere with the proper installation of the equipment to be installed by other trades and by the General Contractor.

B.

Particular attention shall be directed to the coordination of Systems with all equipment of other trades installed in the ceiling areas. Coordinate, with the other trades, the elevations of all equipment in hung ceiling areas to insure adequate space for the installation of fixtures before said equipment is installed.

C.

Furnish to the General Contractor and all other Contractors all information relative to the portion of the installation specified in this Section that will affect them, sufficiently in advance, so that they may plan their work and installations accordingly.

D.

In the case of failure on the part of this Contractor to give proper information, as indicated above, sufficiently in advance, this Contractor will pay for all backcharges incurred by the General Contractor and other Contractors for the modification and/or relocation of any portion of the work already performed by them in conjunction with this Contract due to this Contractor's delay or for having given incorrect information.

E.

Obtain from the other trades, all information relative to the work covered by this Section of the Specifications, which this Contractor is to execute in conjunction with the installation of their respective equipment.

F.

In the event that conflicts, if any, cannot be settled rapidly and amicably between the affected trades with work proceeding in a workmanlike manner, then the Architect shall decide which work is to be relocated and his judgement shall be final and binding.

WORKMANSHIP A.

The entire work provided in this Specification shall be constructed and finished, in every respect, in a workmanlike and substantial manner. It is not intended that the Drawings show every detail, but this Contractor shall furnish and install all such parts as may be necessary to complete the work in accordance with the best trade practice and to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner. The Owner shall have the right to reject any part of the work in case the workmanship is not of satisfactory quality and this Contractor shall replace same with acceptable work at his own expense. PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 7 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.11

SITE INVESTIGATION A.

1.12

TAXES AND INSURANCE A.

1.13

1.14

1.15

It shall be the responsibility of the Bidders to acquaint themselves with the available information, before submitting their bid. Bidders must acquaint themselves with the existing conditions and shall study all Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and Electrical Drawings, as well as the Specifications. The Bidders shall fully inform themselves of all local and state Code requirements. Extra compensation will not be given for obvious conflictions apparent at the time of the start of the project.

This Contractor shall include in his bid, applicable federal, state and local taxes and the premiums of the insurance required by the General Conditions of the Contract. This Project is exempt from Massachusetts State Sales Tax. Tax exemption number will be given to the successful bidder.

PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS A.

This Contractor shall obtain and pay for all the permits required for this Section of the work. He shall also obtain and pay for all the inspections and tests required. Defects discovered in work, materials and/or equipment shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner, and the inspection and test shall be repeated. When work is completed, this Contractor shall furnish a Certificate of Inspection and Approval, to the Owner, before final payment of the Contract will be allowed. Permits to be secured through the Town of Beverly.

B.

Refer to Instruction to Bidders and General Conditions Contract for Construction Services.

CONTRACT COST BREAKDOWN A.

At the start of construction, submit a breakdown of material and labor costs to aid the Architect in determining the value of the work installed, as the job progresses. The cost breakdown shall itemize categories of materials or portions of systems, as may be the case, to place a value on the work as it is installed.

B.

No requisitions will be paid until after the breakdown is delivered to the Architect.

GUARANTEE A.

Unless otherwise noted, all materials, items of equipment and workmanship furnished under this Section shall carry the standard warranty against all defects in material and workmanship for a period of not less than one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the work. Any fault due to defective or improper material or workmanship which may develop within that period, shall be made good, forthwith, by and at the expense of this Contractor, including all other damage done to areas, materials and other systems resulting from this failure.

B.

This Contractor shall guarantee that all elements of the Systems are of sufficient capacity to meet the specified performance requirements as set forth herein or as indicated.

C.

Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of failure of any part of the Systems during PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 8 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

the guarantee period, the affected part or parts shall be promptly replaced by this Contractor, at no charge to the Owner. D. 1.16

1.17

MATERIALS A.

Materials shall be the best of their respective kinds and in full accord with the most modern mechanical construction. All materials shall be new.

B.

All materials necessary to make the installation complete in every detail shall be furnished and installed under this Contract, whether or not specifically shown on the Drawings or specified herein.

C.

It is the intent of the Specifications that one manufacturer be selected, not a combination, for any particular classification of materials.

D.

Where materials, equipment, apparatus or other products are specified by manufacturer, brand name, type or catalog number, such designation is to establish the standard of desired quality and style and shall be the basis of the bid. Unless noted otherwise these manufacturers are not proprietary and it is understood that variations in configuration and appearance do not eliminate other manufacturers as equals.

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT HANDLING A.

1.18

1.19

This Contractor shall furnish, before the final payment is made, a written guarantee covering the above requirements.

This Contractor shall do all handling of his materials and equipment and the resulting cleanup, at his expense, in a safe and satisfactory manner. Special attention shall be paid to the protection of life and property and the equipment or apparatus handled, and any corresponding damages shall be replaced, repaired or paid for by this Contractor, as approved by the Architect. This Contractor shall provide all rigging, hoisting and staging required to complete the work of this Section, unless specifically noted otherwise.

MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A.

This Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and protection, from loss or damage of all causes, of all equipment, materials and tools supplied by him and stored or installed on the job site, until final acceptance of the project by the Owner.

B.

This Contractor shall store his materials and equipment in the location designated by the Owner and maintain the storage area in a safe condition.

C.

This Contractor shall clean, patch and repair any material and finishes of the building or its contents damaged during the execution of this Contract.

SHOP DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SCHEDULE A.

Submit complete Shop Drawings in accordance with provisions of the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract and Section 013300, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 9 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.20

B.

Within 30 days after the date of Notice to Proceed and before purchasing any materials or equipment, submit to the Architect for approval, a complete list of the names of manufacturers of all equipment proposed to fulfill the work of this Section. After the list has been processed by the Architect, submit complete Shop Drawings of all equipment and materials. Do not order any material or equipment until approval has been obtained from the Architect.

C.

The approval of equipment and materials does not relieve this Contractor from the responsibility of Shop Drawings errors in details, sizes, quantities and dimensions which deviate from the Specifications, Contract Drawings and/or job conditions as they exist.

D.

If apparatus or materials are substituted by this Contractor for those specified, and such substitution necessitates changes in any mechanical or electrical equipment, or alteration to connections, piping, supports, or construction, same shall be provided. This Contractor is to assume the cost and entire responsibility thereof. The Architect's permission to make such a substitution shall not relieve this Contractor from full responsibility for the work.

E.

Changes to work already performed, made necessary by delays in Shop Drawing approvals, are the responsibility of this Contractor.

LOCATION OF FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT A.

1.21

The Architect will establish the exact location of all fixtures, equipment and devices to be located in finished spaces of the building. Such precise locations are, for the most part, indicated on the Architectural plans of the various spaces, and it shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to obtain instructions from the Architect for the location of any items whose location is not specifically given on the Architectural Drawings. Any work installed contrary to the Architectural Drawings, or without the prior approval of the Architect, shall be relocated and any necessary changing or patching of the surrounding work shall be done at the expense of this Contractor.

RECORD DRAWINGS A.

The Architect will provide two (2) sets of black or blue line on white drawings to the General Contractor for the purpose of maintaining record drawings, one set of which shall be maintained at the site and on which, at all times, shall accurately, clearly and completely show the actual installation of all work of this SECTION. At the completion of the contract, this Contractor shall submit to the General Contractor a complete set of record drawings showing all "As Built" conditions. After checking the aforementioned drawings, the General Contractor shall certify that they are complete and correct and shall submit the record drawings to the Architect. The Architect may have his Consulting Engineers review the drawings to determine if the installations, as shown thereon, are complete and accurate. After receiving verification that the Record Drawings are complete and accurate, this Contractor shall submit new mylar reproducible copies of the final Record Drawings to the Architect. Each drawing shall be marked "RECORD DRAWING" and dated. Availability of record drawings shall be prerequisite to scheduling a final inspection of this contract and said drawings and original contract documents will be used in checking completion of the work. Non-availability of record drawings or inaccuracies therein may be grounds for cancellation and postponement of any scheduled inspection by the Owner and shall be a condition precedent to final payment until such time as the discrepancy has been corrected. This contractor shall refer to PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 10 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Section 001780 for additional contract requirements to be performed for Record Drawings. B.

The record drawings required to be furnished under this Contract are: Section Plumbing

1.22

Reference Section 22 00 00

Drawings Required P0.1, P0.01, P0.14, P1.01, P1.13, P1.14, P1.23, P1.24, P1.34, P1.42, P1.51, P1.52, P2.1,

P0.12, P1.11, P1.21, P1.32, P1.43, P1.53,

P0.13, P1.12, P1.22, P1.33, P1.44, P1.54,

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.

. B

Provide qualified trained personnel to insure proper operation of the systems and to train the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems installed. Instruction period shall be two (2) eight-hour days. 1. “Training of the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s Representatives. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. Refer to Commissioning Specification, Section 019100, for contractor training requirements. At least two (2) months prior to occupancy or final acceptance of the project, turn over to the Architect, three (3) complete manuals containing the following in accordance with CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, SECTION 017800: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Complete shop drawings of all equipment. Operation description of all Systems. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of all suppliers of the products, materials, equipment and Systems. Guarantees on all products, materials and equipment. Preventive maintenance instructions for all Systems. Spare parts list of all System components.

C.

Each manual shall be typewritten and bound under one (1) hard cover and will be reviewed by the Architect. The manuals shall be clearly and permanently identified on the cover with the name of the project.

D.

“This contractor shall refer to Section 011780 for additional contract requirements to be performed for Operating Instructions and Maintenance Manuals.”

E.

Upon completion of the instructions, this Contractor shall obtain a letter of acceptance of the instructions as being complete from the Owner. Submit a copy of said letter to the Architect. PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 11 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.23

COORDINATION DRAWINGS A.

1.24

1.25

CLEANING OF SYSTEMS A.

Before the Systems are accepted, all equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, so that no dirt, dust or other foreign matter will be deposited and be detrimental to the operation of the Systems.

B.

After the installation is complete, equipment with factory finished surfaces shall be cleaned and damaged or scratched spots shall be touched up with the same type and color paint as applied at the factory.

C.

All equipment that is to receive finish paint by the Painting Contractor, shall be cleaned by this Contractor and left ready to have surfaces prepared to receive paint.

RUBBISH REMOVAL A.

1.26

This Contractor shall provide, on the premises and where directed by the Architect, shall maintain in good condition, and shall remove when directed, suitable and substantial watertight sheds in which he shall store all his materials and equipment.

TEMPORARY SERVICES A.

1.28

At the completion of each day's work, or when ordered by the General Contractor or the Architect, this Contractor shall remove from the property, all the rubbish or waste material belonging to him. Keep the job site free from accumulation of waste material and rubbish; premises must be maintained in a clean condition.

TEMPORARY STRUCTURES A.

1.27

This Contractor shall be responsible to develop and furnish all required information on the coordination drawings required under DIVISION 1 of the specifications. Contractor shall coordinate the elevations and locations of all his systems with the work of all other trades.

All water, electricity, fire protection and sanitary facilities required for safe and efficient construction during normal working hours shall be furnished in accordance with the General Requirements.

TESTS A.

Furnish all labor, materials, instruments, supplies and services and bear all cost for the accomplishment of the tests herein specified. Correct all defects appearing under test, repeat the tests until no defects are disclosed and leave the equipment clean and ready for use.

B.

Perform any tests, other than herein specified, which may be required by legal Authorities or by Agencies to whose requirements this work is to conform.

C.

Dispose of test water and wastes after tests are complete, in a manner satisfactory to the Architect and in accordance with governing regulations.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 12 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.29

1.30

EQUIPMENT ACCESS REQUIREMENTS A.

All work shall be installed so that all parts requiring inspection, operation, maintenance and repair are readily accessible. Minor deviations from the Drawings may be made to accomplish this, but changes of magnitude shall not be made prior to written approval from the Architect.

B.

Furnish access panels in walls and ceilings at locations indicated on the Drawings, or as required to permit access for adjustment, removal and the replacement and servicing of all equipment, and all other items requiring maintenance and adjustments. Access panels shall be installed by the General Contractor.

C.

Coordinate the exact location of access panels in all finished spaces with the Architect.

MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A.

Unless otherwise indicated, motors for equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished and installed by the Plumbing Contractor and shall be as follows: 1. 2.

B. 1.31

This Contractor shall furnish wiring diagrams for all equipment furnished under this Section for which wiring is to be installed by the Electrical Contractor.

CROSS CONNECTIONS A.

1.33

Unless otherwise specified, all motor starters shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Contractor.

WIRING DIAGRAMS A.

1.32

Motors 1/3 HP and smaller shall be wound for 120 volts, single phase, 60 cycle AC service. Motors 1/2 HP and larger shall be wound for 480 volts, three phase, 60 cycle, A.C. service. See equipment schedules and Electrical Specifications. Motor power factor shall be a minimum of 0.85. Motors shall be the highefficiency type.

No plumbing fixtures, devices or piping shall be installed which will provide a cross or interconnection between a water distributing supply and the drainage system.

CLEANING, FLUSHING AND TESTING A.

All equipment and piping, including all traps and cleanouts, shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Architect.

B.

Coordinate all start up, operation and testing activities with the Project Manager, General Contractor and the Commissioning Agent per specification Section 019100. 1. “Contractors’ tests shall be scheduled and documented in accordance with the commissioning requirements. Refer to Commissioning Specification, Section 01 91 00, for further details.” 2. “System verification testing is part of the Commissioning Process. Verification testing shall be performed by the contractor and witnessed and PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 13 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

documented by the Commissioning Agent. Refer to Commissioning Specification, Section 01 91 00, for system verification tests and commissioning requirements.” C.

The entire water piping system shall be sterilized in accordance with the following: 1.

D.

1.34

The entire water distribution system including all cold water, hot water, hot water return, non-potable hot and cold lines, chilled water lines, etc., shall be thoroughly sterilized with a solution containing not less than 50 parts per million of available chlorine. The chlorinating materials shall be either liquid chlorine, or calcium hypochlorite, or chlorinated lime. The sterilizing solution shall be allowed to remain in the system for a period of eight (8) hours during which time all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After sterilization, the solution shall be flushed from the system with clean water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million, unless otherwise directed.

After construction is complete, at least four (4) weeks prior to occupancy, the domestic water system of the building shall be tested by a state-approved firm for the level of lead. The system shall be tested at a minimum of five (5) locations in the building, as directed by the Board of Health. Testing shall be done after system has been chlorinated and all fixtures have been thoroughly flushed for at least three (3) days. A written report of the test results shall be provided to the Owner within seven (7) days of the test. All costs associated with this testing and flushing shall be included in this Contractor's base bid price.

PROCEDURE FOR TESTING A.

This Contractor shall perform all tests in accordance with Paragraph 1.28 of this Section of the Specifications.

B.

Partial tests shall be made, as required, by the progress of the work.

C.

Test all piping and connections and make watertight before applying insulation and before concealment, as outlined in the following: 1.

2.

Sanitary System, Kitchen Waste, Acid Waste System and Storm System Piping a. All sanitary, kitchen waste, acid waste and storm piping shall be tested with water and proved tight to the satisfaction of the Architect and/or Plumbing Inspector before piping is covered and fixtures connected. b. Before the installation of fixtures and traps, close all openings of system and fill piping with water to roof and allow to stand for at least 30 minutes until a thorough inspection has been made, after which, if the lines prove tight, the water shall be drawn off and trenches backfilled and fixtures connected. Water Systems a. All water piping shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psig. All piping shall be proved tight at this pressure before trenches are backfilled. Water piping, if in any way concealed by structural work, shall be tested to the aforesaid pressure and proved tight before pipes are concealed. This test pressure shall be held for a period of not less than one (1) hour. The Plumbing PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 14 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

1.35

Contractor shall make all repairs and alterations in the piping systems necessary to meet the test. Gas Piping System a. All gas piping shall be tested in accordance with rules and regulations of the Massachusetts Gas Code and the National Fuel Gas Code (NFPA 54). In no case shall the tests be less than the following: Test gas piping at not less than a 12" column of mercury and piping shall hold tight for a period of two hours.

COMMSIONING REQUIREMENTS A.

An independent Commissioning Agent (CA) will be retained for this project. The commissioning process will be implemented in accordance with the LEED for Schools v2009 and Commissioning Credits EAp1 – Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems and EAc3 – Enhanced Commissioning.

B.

This contractor shall assist and support the CA as necessary in accordance with the requirements of specification section 01 91 00 – COMMISSIONING. 1. “Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with Tenant’s and Building Owner’s Representatives and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation and issue closure. Refer to Commissioning Specification, Section 01 91 00, for detailed commissioning requirements.”

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.

B.

This Contractor shall comply with all the rules, Codes, Ordinances, regulations and requirements of all legally constituted Authorities having jurisdiction over the whole or any part of the work herein specified. Regulations supplement this Specification and shall take precedence in any case of conflict. All equipment and materials furnished in connection with the installation shall be new and furnished in accordance with the requirements of the standards outlined in Paragraph 1.7 and they shall be of the best grade and quality of their respective kinds, free from natural, manufacturing or construction flaws, defects or irregularities and finish, fittings and workmanship shall be equal to the highest commercial grade.

C.

Castings of all metals, of all kinds, shall be clean, smooth, close grained, of uniform thickness and free from all defects such as sandholes, blisters or cracks.

D.

Before the installation will be accepted, the Plumbing Contractor shall have every portion of his work in a first-class working condition.

E.

Where installing any of the apparatus herein called for, sufficient clearance shall be allowed to permit the removal and replacing of parts that may require future removal for repairs and replacement.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 15 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.2

PIPE AND FITTINGS A.

Soil, Waste, Kitchen Waste, Vent and Storm Piping 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. B.

Acid Waste and Vent Piping 1.

C.

2.

All water piping inside the building, except as hereinafter specified, shall be Type "L" hard-drawn copper tubing, as manufactured by Bridgeport Brass, American Brass, Revere Copper and Brass Company, or equal, with solder joints, seamless cast bronze or wrought copper fittings. Water piping buried underground shall be Type "K" soft-temper copper tubing with compressiontype cast bronze fittings. Piping for connections between valves and equipment shall be chromeplated seamless red brass pipe, iron pipe size, containing not less than 85 percent copper and threaded brass fittings, with flat bands, as manufactured by Crane Company, Walworth, Grinnell, Milwaukee or equal.

Gas Piping and Gas Train Vent Piping 1.

2.3

Material for use above the floor slab shall be Schedule 40 polypropylene pipe with mechanical joint fittings. Piping below the floor slab and outside the building shall be Schedule 40 polypropylene with electrically fused joints and fittings. All polypropylene pipe shall be flame retardent.

Domestic Water, Chilled Water, Non-potable Water and Emergency Shower Water Piping 1.

D.

Piping materials for sanitary and storm systems inside the building, above the floor slab, including soil, waste and vent piping, unless otherwise noted, shall be standard weight coated hubless cast iron equal to "no-hub" system. Pipe, fittings, couplings and gaskets shall be manufactured in strict accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute's Standard No. 301 and approved for use in Massachusetts. The pipe shall be cast in one piece and with gasket positioning lugs. The pipe shall be legibly marked on the barrel with the manufacturer's name and/or trademark. Piping material for sanitary and storm systems below the floor slab or below grade shall be service weight cast iron soil pipe with hub joints, coated with tar and asphaltum. Vent piping 2" and smaller shall be standard weight galvanized steel or wrought iron with screwed fittings. Waste pipe above ground may be Type "M" copper tubing with solder joint sweat drainage fittings. Indirect waste piping shall be Type "K" copper tubing with sweat solder joint drainage fittings. Urinal branch and fixture wastes shall be of cast, high silicon iron soil pipe and fittings with caulked joints of acid-proof rope packing.

Gas piping and gas train vent piping shall be Schedule 40 steel or wrought iron complying with ANSI Standard for Wrought Steel or Wrought Iron Pipe, B36.10-1970. A suitable drip or condensation pocket shall be installed at all points in accordance with the requirements of all applicable Codes.

JOINTS AND COUPLINGS

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 16 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

A.

Soil, Waste, Kitchen Waste, Vent and Storm Piping Joints 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

B.

Acid Waste and Vent Piping Joints 1. 2.

C.

Joints in acid waste and vent piping above the floor slab shall be mechanical-joint type with cut grooves, a sealing ring and appropriate fitting. Joints in acid waste and vent piping below the floor slab shall have sockettype fittings, compatible with the piping and have a heavy gauge resistance wire molded into them. All joints shall be electrically fused for a complete seal.

Domestic Water, Chilled Water, Non-potable Water and Emergency Shower Water Piping Joints 1. 2. 3.

D.

Couplings on all hubless cast iron piping shall consist of a stainless steel shield, band and tightening device, and a neoprene gasket assembled at the factory as a complete unit. Couplings shall be marked with manufacturer's name and number and shall meet ASTM C564 Specifications. Joints for service weight cast iron pipe shall be made with resilient rubber gaskets. All joints in threaded pipe shall be American National taper screw threads. Apply graphite and oil compound to the male threads only. Joints between steel, wrought iron and cast iron shall be made with Manhoff Fitting screwed into threaded pipe and caulked into the cast iron pipe. Every connection between drainage pipes and water closets, floor outlet service sinks, pedestal urinals, and earthenware trap standards or other fixtures with floor outlet, shall be made with brass, wrought copper, hard lead, iron or plastic flanges that are caulked, soldered or screwed to the drainage pipe. The fixture shall be bolted to the flanged connection, with an approved gasket, washer or setting compound between the fixture and the flange. Only brass or stainless steel nuts and bolts shall be used. The floor flange shall be fastened to a structurally firm base. The use of commercial putty or plaster as a setting compound is prohibited.

Copper tubing and sweat fittings shall be assembled with 95-5, lead free, tin and antimony solder composition with a 1000ΕF melting point and a noncorrosive flux. All copper piping 1-1/2" and larger shall have all tubing and fittings tinned prior to assembly. Joints between copper tubing and iron pipe or at connections to tanks shall be made with a combination iron and brass flange with composition gasket and iron bolts.

Gas Piping Joints and Gas Train Vent Piping Joints 1.

Joints in gas piping and gas train vent systems shall be made with malleable iron fittings and tape for pipe 3" and smaller. Pipe larger than 3" shall have welded joints, conforming to ANSI B31-2 Code for Pressure Piping, Chapter 5, API Standard 1104 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, Section 9.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 17 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.4

VALVES A.

General 1. 2. 3.

B.

Water System Valves 1. 2.

3. 4.

C.

Furnish and install valves, where indicated on drawings or specified, so located that they may be operated, repaired or replaced with a minimum effort and repacked under pressure. The following list of valves is intended only as a guide for type and quality to this Contractor: Ball Valves Ball Valves Gate Valves Balancing Valve

3" and smaller 4" in size 4" and larger

Check Valves Drain-Off Valves

3" and smaller

Apollo #70-200 Apollo #78-255 Jenkins #677-A Apollo #70-200 with memory stop Jenkins #4093 Apollo #78-204

All fixture supplies and supplies to equipment not already furnished as such shall have angle or straight compression stops, unless otherwise specified. Drain valves shall be installed to drain the water from all sections of the hot water, hot water return and cold water piping. Furnish and install 1/2" all brass plug cocks with hose connections on each drain.

Gas System Valves 1.

2.5

Furnish and install valves, where indicated on the Drawings or specified, so located that they may be operated, repaired or replaced with a minimum effort and repacked under pressure. The basic system of valves (i.e., gate, globe, check for water service) shall be one manufacturer. Valves shall be Apollo, Jenkins, Walworth or equal.

Gas cocks shall be furnished and installed at connection to each piece of equipment, at each riser and where shown on the Drawings. Gas cocks shall be brass body tee handle types with Boston Key, manufactured in accordance with the local gas company requirements.

PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, CHANNELS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A.

All piping shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by means of approved hangers and supports. Pipes shall be supported so as to maintain the required grading and pitching of lines, to prevent vibration and to secure piping in place; they shall be arranged so as to provide for proper expansion and contraction of pipe.

B.

Spacing of hangers for horizontal piping shall be in accordance with the following: 1. 2.

Cast Iron Soil Pipe - 5'-0" at the hubs for 5' lengths, and for 10' lengths use 1 hanger at the hub and 1 at mid-point of the length. On "no-hub" pipe, install additional hangers on each side of each joint. Copper Tubing - 6'-0" o.c. for 1-1/4" and smaller. 10'-0" o.c. for 1-1/2" and larger. PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 18 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3. 4.

Threaded Steel Pipe - 10'-0" o.c. Acid Waste and Vent System Pipe - 4'-0" for pipe 2" and smaller and 5'-0" for pipe 3" and 4" in size.

C.

If Codes having jurisdiction require closer spacing, the hanger spacing shall be as required by Code in lieu of the foregoing. Provide hangers at all changes in direction and on both sides of concentrated loads (valves, strainers, regulators, etc.).

D.

Hangers shall be adjustable clevis hangers. Hanger rods shall have machine threads. Malleable iron brackets of approved type shall be used along the walls.

E.

Hangers shall be Grinnell Company, Carpenter and Patterson or Fee and Mason.

F.

Wire and strap hangers will not be permitted in this installation.

G.

Friction clamps shall be installed at the base of all plumbing risers and at each floor.

H.

Where three or more pipes are running parallel, gang type hangers may be used in lieu of the aforementioned clevis hangers. These hangers shall be sized to provide the insulation protectors as hereinafter specified. Separable saddles shall be used for each pipe on gang hangers. Where saddle slips are installed for uninsulated copper piping, they shall be constructed of 16 gauge (minimum) copper.

I.

Field painting or spraying of hangers, rods and nuts in lieu of copper plating will not be acceptable.

J.

All vertical lines, drops and runouts, including insulated pipes, shall be supported by split-ring extension type hangers or equal. These hangers shall be copper-plated when used on uncovered copper tubing. Supports on insulated piping shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of the pipe insulation. Hangers shall be placed in the horizontal line near the riser and at ten foot (10') intervals or at each floor slab.

K.

All horizontal piping shall be suspended from the building by mild galvanized steel rod connecting the pipe hanger to inserts, beam clamps, angle brackets and lag screws, as required by the building construction, in accordance with the following: PIPE SIZE (inches)

ROD DIAMETER (inches)

3/4 - 2 2-1/2 - 3-1/2 4 -6 8 - 10

3/8 1/2 3/4 1

L.

Hanger rods for other installations shall be sized in accordance with recommended load capacities of Specification ASTM A107.

M.

All hangers on insulated lines shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of the pipe insulation. Provide pipe covering protection saddles at all hangers on insulated lines of sheet metal, 18 gauge, and twelve inches (12"), minimum length, and shall cover 180 degrees of arc (lower quadrants) on the covering at all hangers on insulated piping systems.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 19 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.6

N.

Remove rust from all ferrous hanger equipment immediately after erection.

O.

Miscellaneous trapeze hangers for pipe supports with inserts and steel for interior plumbing stack and riser supports indicated shall be provided by this Contractor.

P.

Piping at all equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent strains or distortions in the connected equipment and control valves. Piping shall be supported to allow for removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without requiring additional support after these items are removed.

Q.

All factory fabricated channels with related accessories for piping supports shall be Unistrut Corporation or approved equal. Channels and fittings shall be constructed of bonderized steel, coated with a corrosion-resistant primer and ovenbaked. All other related accessories (nuts, bolts, rollers, washers, couplers, springs, etc.) shall be electro-galvanized finished.

R.

All piping installed under this Section of the Specifications shall be independently supported from the building structure and not from piping, ductwork or conduit of other trades. All supplementary steel, including factory fabricated channels required to meet the requirements specified herein, shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor.

S.

All pipe hangers and equipment supports shall be constructed and installed in accordance with Seismic Zone requirements as outlined in the State Building code. This Contractor shall submit one (1) copy of shop drawings and calculations detailing seismic hanger restraints to the local Building Authority and Architect, along with a letter of compliance signed by a registered structural engineer confirming that the piping hangers meet state seismic code requirements. Cable provided for seismic systems shall be color coded and pre-stressed.

ACCESS PANELS A.

Furnish access panels for installation by the General Contractor, in walls and nonaccessible ceilings, at locations as required to permit access for adjustment, removal and replacement of all equipment, such as valves, traps, vacuum breakers, and all other items requiring maintenance and adjustment.

B.

All access panels shall be located in closets, storage rooms and/or other non-public areas, in a workmanlike manner, positioned so that the junction can be easily reached, and the size shall be sufficient for this purpose (minimum 16" x 16"). When access panels are required in corridors or other finished areas, they shall be located as directed by the Architect.

C.

Panels shall be of the types specified in Section 083100 and shall be set square and flush in cooperation with the Subcontractors for other Sections of the Specifications. Particular attention shall be exercised in the selection of doors for masonry walls in order that frame sizes used will match the courses of concrete masonry units.

D.

Access panels Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 20 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.7

PIPE SLEEVES A.

General 1.

2.8

All pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set by this Contractor. Their location and setting shall be carefully coordinated with the requirements or limitations of the structural member they are passing through. Any conflict arising shall be solved by utilizing the best trade practices.

B.

Sleeves and plates shall be black steel, Schedule 40, in accordance with A.S.T.M. Specifications A-120.

C.

They shall be provided at all joints where pipes pass through concrete or masonry. They shall be sized so as to provide for pipe covering and for lateral expansion.

D.

The ends shall be flush with the surfaces, except in floors, where it is possible for water to accumulate, such as toilets, janitor's closets, etc., in which cases, they shall terminate one inch (1") above the finish floor.

E.

Where pipes pass through partitions, ceilings and furring (plaster and glazed tile), furnish and install No. 24 gauge galvanized iron sleeves, over which furnish and install cast metal floor plates of the escutcheon type, designed to cover the sleeves and to remain in permanent position.

F.

“This contractor shall be responsible to review all firestopping of all piping and related components for completeness. All firestopping materials and installation will be by the general Contractor under Section 078400.”

G.

Furnish labor to set and fasten all sleeves before the floors and walls are finally constructed.

H.

Provide chromium-plated escutcheon plates at all exposed locations in finished rooms where pipes pass through walls, floors and ceilings.

INSULATION A.

All water piping, all storm piping (horizontal and vertical) and all equipment installed under this Contract shall be covered as follows:

Piping or Apparatus All cold water, hot water, hot water return, storm, chilled water, non-potable cold water, non-potable hot water, tempered emergency shower supply and return water piping.

Insulation I.P.S. ½” to 6” – 1” thickness, 8” and larger – 1-1/2” thickness – both of fiberglass, heavy density, snap-on type

All valves and fittings on insulated lines and underside of roof drain bodies

Pre-molded PVC covers packed to 1” thickness with fiberglass

All trap primer piping and cold water and hot water piping below slab or in masonry walls

¾” closed-cell neoprene insulation

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 21 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

All supplies and wastes associated with handicapped lavatories

2.9

2.10

Modeled closed-cell vinyl insulation equal to Handi-Lav-Guard Model #103

B.

Apply all insulation over clean, dry surfaces with all joints firmly butted together. Perform all tests prior to covering.

C.

All fiberglass insulation shall be furnished with factory-applied, all-purpose, vinylcoated and embossed vapor barrier laminate with pressure sealing lap adhesive seam. Openings, joints, and end strips shall be sealed against moisture penetration with vapor barrier cement.

D.

Insulation shall be as manufactured by Gustin-Bacon Manufacturing Company. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, or Johns-Manville, and shall be applied by skilled insulation mechanics employed by an insulation contractor.

E.

All insulation shall run continuously through walls, floors and ceilings.

CLEANOUTS A.

Cleanouts shall be installed where indicated on the drawings and/or where required in soil, waste, acid waste and storm pipes. Cleanouts shall be installed at the base of all risers and at each change of direction. In storm system, install cleanouts same as for soil or waste piping or dandy cleanouts before going below grade.

B.

Cleanout plugs shall be heavy cast brass of the screwed type, full size up to and including four inches (4").

C.

Cleanouts shall be same size as pipe for piping up to four inches (4") in size and not less than four inches (4") for piping larger than four inches (4").

D.

For piping running under floor slab, cleanouts shall be brought up to just under the floor slab level.

E.

Access cover for concrete floor type cleanouts shall be J.R. Smith 4043 bronze top; tile floor type shall be J.R. Smith 4163; carpeted floor type shall be J.R. Smith 4043Y.

F.

Access to cleanouts in walls shall be provided by an access panel.

G.

All cleanout access covers shall be manufactured by J.R. Smith, Zurn or Josam.

TRAPS A.

Furnish and install traps with cleanouts on all fixtures and equipment requiring connection to the sanitary system of the same size and material as the pipe in which they occur.

B.

Traps installed on threaded pipe shall be recessed drainage pattern.

C.

Fixture traps shall be self-scouring and shall have no interior partitions except where such traps are integral with the fixture. Slip joints or coupling may be used on the trap inlet or within the trap seal of the trap if a metal-to-metal ground joint is used. Each fixture trap, except a trap that is cast integrally or in combination with the fixture in which the trap seal is readily accessible or except when a portion of the PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 22 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

trap is removable for cleaning purposes, shall have an accessible cleanout plug of ample size that is protected by the water seal.

2.11

2.12

2.13

D.

Fixture traps shall be made of cast brass with wall thickness of not less than 0.1 inch. All exposed traps shall have a polished chrome finish.

E.

Strainers, C.O. plugs, tailpieces, waste arms, and overflows and any other similar fixture to trap connection when of metal, shall be made of brass or other approved non-corrosive metal, not less than 17 gauge thickness.

F.

Traps shall be set level with respect to their water seals.

UNIONS AND NIPPLES A.

Union connections installed on brass pipe two inches (2") in diameter and smaller shall be brass composition "E" in strict accordance with Federal Specification WWU-516.

B.

Piping shall be installed with unions properly spaced to permit alterations and repairs.

C.

All connections between copper tubing and galvanized tanks or piping shall be made with dielectric unions.

D.

All close and shoulder nipples shall be of corresponding materials as the pipe and shall be extra heavy design.

SHOCK ABSORBERS A.

Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings or as required by Code, shock absorbers properly sized and in accordance with Plumbing and Drainage "Standard P.D.I. WH201." These units shall be equal to the Smith "Hydrotrols" type units. Shock Absorbers by Josam, Zurn or Watts are acceptable.

B.

All shock absorbers must be located behind access panels or in readily accessible areas.

C.

Installation of shock absorbers shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations.

VACUUM BREAKERS A.

Approved vacuum breakers shall be installed with any plumbing fixture or equipment in which the potable supply outlet may be submerged and which cannot be protected by the minimum air gap. This includes all fixtures with hoses or a means for attaching hoses.

B.

All vacuum breakers shall be certified by a recognized testing laboratory acceptable to the Administrative Authority.

C.

Vacuum breakers shall be installed with the critical level at least six inches (6") above the fixture they serve and on the discharge side of any control valve.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 23 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.14

2.15

PIPING ACCESSORIES A.

Vacuum reliefs shall be Watts Regulator Company #36 or approved equal.

B.

Thermometers shall be 4-1/2 inches in diameter, and angle with a range of 40°F. to 240°F., as manufactured by Albert A. Weiss and Son, Inc. Include thermometer well.

C.

Pressure and temperature relief valves shall be ASME Rated, temperature relief 210°F., pressure relief 125 psi, double Btu rated, self-closing, as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company or approved equal.

D.

Pressure gauges shall be four inches (4") in diameter with a range of 0 to 150 psi, as manufactured by U.S. Gauge.

VENTS THROUGH THE ROOF A.

2.16

All pipes extending through the roof for the sanitary or waste systems or acid waste system shall be the same material as that piping system. Vents shall be of sizes indicated on the Drawings and extend at least 18 inches above the roof, ending in the top of pipe, which will be flashed by the General Contractor. Any vent pipe within 25'-0" of an outdoor air intake shall extend a minimum of 2'-0" above the air intake.

DRAINS A.

Drains shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. Furnish and install all floor drains and roof drains. Coordinate installation of all flashing collars of roof drains with the Roofing Contractor. Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for the proper location of the various sizes and types of drains furnished by him.

B.

Drains in waterproof floors and areas shall have galvanized iron clamping rings with six (6) pound lead flashing to bond nine inches (9") in all directions. Drains shall be checked with Architect's drawings to determine depth of the flashing collar. Brass extension pieces shall be provided if necessary.

C.

Floor drains shall be by J.R.Smith, Josam, Zurn and shall be equal to the following schedule: 1.

2.

3.

4.

Floor Drain "A" (General Areas) - J.R. Smith Figure 2010-A-P-050, cast iron body drain with flashing collar, adjustable, nickel bronze strainer head and trap primer connection. Unit to have four-inch (4") IPS outlet and deep seal trap. Floor Drain “B” (Kitchen Area drain) - J.R. Smith Figure 3020, cast iron receptor with acid-resisting porcelain-enameled interior and nickel bronze rim and grate with flashing flange, lumaloy bottom strainer, four inch (4") IPS trap and outlet. Floor Drain “C” (Kitchen Deep Drain) - J.R. Smith Figure 3061, cast iron receptor with acid-resisting, porcelain-enameled interior with nickel-bronze tops and four inch (4") IPS outlet and deep seal trap. Provide funnel drain with each unit, Figure 3581. Floor Drain "D" (Dishwasher) - J.R. Smith Figure 3061, cast iron receptor with acid-resisting , porcelain-enameled interior with nickel-bronze, 3/4 PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 24 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

5. 6.

D.

Roof drains shall be equal to the following schedule: 1. 2. 3.

2.17

2.18

grate and four-inch (4") IPS outlet with trap primer fitting and deep seal trap. Floor Drain "E" (Science Rooms) - J.R. Smith Figure 3020, cast iron body drain with acid resistant coated interior and flashing collar. Drain to have four inch (4") IPS outlet with trap primer fitting and deep seal trap. Floor Drain "F" (Mechanical Areas) - J.R. Smith Figure 2142 floor drain with cast iron body and cast iron tractor grate. Unit to have four-inch (4") IPS outlet with trap primer fitting and deep seal trap.

Roof Drain "A" - J.R. Smith Figure 1010-R-C-E-U-AD with Duco cast iron body, clamping collar, extension and aluminum dome. Outlet size as shown on the drawings. Roof Drain "B" - J.R. Smith Figure 1010-R-C-E-U-AD with Duco cast iron body, clamping collar, extension and aluminum dome having ¼” mesh s.s. screen on dome. Outlet size as shown on the drawings. Roof Drain “C” - J.R. Smith Figure 1015-R-C-AD with Duco cast iron body, clamping collar, adjustable extension and aluminum dome. Outlet size as shown on the drawings

E.

Kitchen Trench Drains are to be furnished by the Kitchen Equipment Contractor and installed and piped by the Plumbing Contractor.

F.

All floor drains and trench drains not provided with type primers shall be installed with “Trap Guard” insert as manufactured by ProSet Systems, Inc or equal.

WALL HYDRANTS, HOSE BIBBS AND ROOF HYDRANT A.

Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings and mounted at elevations indicated on the Drawings, wall hydrants equal to the following unit: J.R. Smith Figure 5609-NB, or equal, bronze hydrant with nickel/bronze face and hose connection having an integral vacuum breaker. Unit to have removable brass "T" handle.

B.

Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings and mounted 18" above the finished floor, hose bibbs equal to the following unit: Hose Bibb "A" shall be a single temperature, solid bronze wall faucet with threaded spout and pail hook notch, Chicago Model No. 952 or equal.

C.

Furnish and install, where indicated on the Drawings and mounted 18" above the finished floor, hose bibbs equal to the following unit: Hose Bibb "B" shall be a single temperature, solid bronze wall faucet with threaded spout and pail hook notch, Chicago Model No. 998-RCF or equal.

D.

Furnish and install, where indicated on the drawings, roof hydrants. Roof hydrants to be Woodford Model RHY2 or equal. Each unit to have its drain piped with ½” copper tubing to the following locations.

EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A.

Certain equipment will be furnished and installed by others. They will be provided with strainers, tailpieces, waste valves and faucets. The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install traps, drains, stop valves, water piping and waste piping, as PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 25 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

specified herein, to all kitchen and science equipment. B.

2.19

GAS SOLENOID VALVES A.

B. C.

2.20

2.22

This Contractor shall furnish and install a gas solenoid valve (Solenoid Valve #1) to automatically shut off the supply of gas to the cooking equipment. Gas valve shall be of the type compatible with the hood's fire suppression system and shall be installed complete with all required cable, enclosure, pulleys, etc., necessary to connect valve to suppression system. System shall be tested several times, in the presence of the Owner, upon completion to insure proper operation. “Downstream of the above outlined gas solenoid valve, this contractor shall install an ASCO, or equal Model 8214 gas solenoid valve (Valve #2) which shall be interlocked with the kitchen hood’s exhaust fan and detection system.” Two (2) pairs of the above outlined valves shall be installed on this project. One (1) pair shall be in the School’s Kitchen, the other shall be in the Concession Building’s Cooking Area.

MASTER GAS VALVE BOXES A.

2.21

All water, waste and vent piping which is located under counters or exposed at plumbing fixtures or food service equipment shall be chrome-plated or have chromeplated cover tubes.

Master gas valve boxes shall be furnished and installed by this contractor, as detailed on drawings.

GAS SERVICE AND METER A.

Gas service up to the building, including meter, will be performed by the local Utility Company.

B.

Cost of work will be backcharged to the Owner. The Plumbing Contractor must contact the Gas Company and coordinate the proper timing of the service and meter installation.

C.

This Contractor shall coordinate with the Gas Company to insure proper installation of meter with regards to location.

INTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTORS A.

This Contractor shall furnish and install three (2) interior grease interceptors; two (2) in the School’s Kitchen areas, which are complete in all respects. Interceptors shall be as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Zurn, Josam or equal.

B.

Grease interceptors “A”, “B” shall be equal to J.R. Smith Figure 8350 grease interceptor with cradle, having acid-resistant epoxy inside and outside, and flow control fitting having a rating of 50 GPM and grease capacity of 100 pounds, bearing approval seal of the Plumbing and Drainage Institute. Interceptors to have three inch (3") non-submerged inlet and three inch (3") outlet connections, internal air-relief double wall deep seal code trap and removable baffles.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 26 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.23

2.24

BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A.

Furnish and install a reduced pressure type backflow preventer (RPB-1) in the Mechanical Room in the make-up water supply to the HVAC system. Backflow preventer shall be of the size indicated on the Drawings. Device shall be equal to Watts Model No. 909.

B.

Furnish and install reduced-pressure type backflow preventers in the non-potable water feeds to the science areas. Device RPB-2 (1" in size) shall be installed in the cold water supply. RPB-3 (1 in size) shall be installed in the hot water supply. Devices shall be equal to a Watts Model 909. There will be three location for this installation.

D.

Furnish and install a reduced pressure type backflow preventer (RPB-4) in the Kitchen, in the water supply to the Ware washer. Backflow preventer shall be of the size indicated on the Drawings. Device shall be equal to Watts Model No. 909.

E.

Furnish and install a double check backflow preventer (DCBP-1) on the outlet side of the tempering valve for the emergency shower water supply. Backflow preventer shall be of the size indicated on the drawings. Device shall be equal to a Watts Model 007.

F.

Backflow preventers shall be by Watts, Apollo or Willkins.

G.

Spare parts kits shall be provided with all backflow preventers and shall be attached to each unit.

H.

This Contractor shall be responsible to file design data sheets, along with cuts of all backflow preventers, and obtain approval of same from the local Water Department and the Department of Environmental Protection.

TRAP PRIMERS A.

2.25

Furnish and install, where shown on the Drawings, automatic trap primers, of the pressure-drop type, complete with all associated piping, to all floor drains indicated on the Drawings. Trap primers shall be equal to Precision Plumbing Products Oregon No. 1. Type “A” to have one-pipe distribution unit; Type “B” to have twopipe distribution unit. Type “C” to have three-pipe distribution unit. Type “D” to have four-pipe distribution unit. Trap primers shall be installed in accessible locations or with access panels to permit servicing.

EXPANSION JOINTS AND LOOPS A.

Expansion joints for piping systems shall be located as required to prevent undue strain in the piping system, equipment or building structure.

B.

Piping shall be so installed as to permit expansion and contraction degrees of anticipated installation area temperature.

C.

Domestic Water Piping Systems 1.

Provide expansion loops in all piping mains, where shown on the Drawings, of dimensions as indicated on the Drawings. PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 27 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.26

2.27

2.28

GAS FIRED HOT WATER HEATING SYSTEM A.

This contractor shall furnish and install, complete in every respect, two (3) hot water heaters, with balanced manifold piping, as detailed on the drawings. Each heater shall be equal to an PVI Commercial Gas Water Heater (Conquest) Model 80 L 130A-GCML Input – 800,000 BTU/HR. Recovery – 932 GPH per 100°F rise Storage – 130 Gallons 120 VAC, 1 Phase, 60Hz, 11 amps

B.

Each hot water heater shall be 96% thermal efficient, ANSI [email protected] 70 F to 140 F., Up to 99% thermal efficient at low fire. Heaters are equipped for direct combustion air connection. Maximum supply gas pressure to heater 10.5” W.C. Minimum pressure to be 3.5” W.C. Shall have an ASME working pressure of 150 psi, and stamped National Board, and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Heaters has 15 year tank and heating surfaces warranty covering waterside and condensate corrosion, leaking, production of rust water, material defects and workmanship. Manufacturer’s professional start-up service to be included.

C.

Heater venting material, use category IV PVC, CPVC or ETL, UL, ULC or CSA listed stainless steel or Centrotherm Innoflue SW polypropylene vent. Minimum vent length is 5 eq. feet, maximum vent length varies by model number and vent diameter.

EMERGENCY SHOWER ELECTRIC HOT WATER SYSTEM A.

This Contractor shall furnish and install an electric hot water heater on a shelf, in the Acid Neutralization Rooms.

B.

Electric hot water heater shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, or equal, with a 1.5 K.W. element, combined adjustable thermostatic control for 30° to 110°, set at 85°F and on/off switch. Heater to be equal to Model No. E06. Unit to have a 6 gallon cement-lined tank surrounded by foam insulation with a one (1) year warranty. Heater shall be installed complete with relief valve and all related components as required by the Massachusetts State plumbing Code.

DOMESTIC WATER TEMPERING SYSTEMS A.

This Contractor shall furnish and install, as detailed on the Drawings, one (1) domestic water tempering systems, equal to a Leonard Type TM-18620015020PRV-RF-0-LTR with two (2) thermostatic mixing valves in a parallel installation, with integral check stops and wall support. Capacity shall be 182 GPM at 8 psig pressure drop with a range of 85Ε to 140ΕF. Units by Leonard, Powers, Lawler or equal are acceptable.

B.

Units to be installed and piped in accordance with all manufacturer’s recommendations.

C.

This Contractor shall furnish, with each unit, one (1) complete repair kit to allow that mixing assembly to be totally rebuilt.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 28 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.29

2.30

2.31

EMERGENCY SHOWER WATER TEMPERING VALVE A.

This Contractor shall furnish and install, as detailed on the Drawings, one (3) emergency shower water tempering valve equal to a Lawler Model No. 911, or equal, capable of delivering 60 GPM at a 30 psig pressure drop.

B.

This Contractor shall furnish, with the unit, one (1) complete repair kit to allow the mixing assembly to be totally rebuilt.

HOT WATER CIRCULATORS A.

This Contractor shall install building circulator pumps where shown on the drawings. Pumps shall be Bell + Gossett, Taco or Armstrong. These units shall be rigidly mounted on iron pipe brackets. All wiring connections shall be done by the Electrical Contractor. Circulators shall be all bronze, capacity of all 120ΕF circulators shall be 15 GPM at 25 ft. head and shall be equal to a Bell & Gossett Model PR with a 1/6 HP, 120 volt, 1 phase motor. Capacity of the emergency shower circulator shall be 12 GPM at 14 ft. head and shall be equal to a Bell & Gossett Model PR with a 1/6 HP, 120 volt, 1 phase motor. Capacity of the 140°F circulator shall be 10 GPM at 10 ft. head and shall be equal to a Bell & Gossett Model HV with a 1/6 HP, 120 volt, 1 phase motor. Units shall have an adjustable aquastats to regulate operation of motor. Units shall be set to operate to provide a water temperature of 5ΕF below supply temperature.

B.

This Contractor shall be responsible to balance each primary 120ºF return system to a flow of 10 GPM and each secondary 120F hot water return leg to a flow of 5 GPM and the 140ºF hot water return line to 10 GPM and each leg of the emergency shower system to 4 GPM. A final report indicating flows shall be provided. Flow control valves shall be used as balancing valves.

ACID NEUTRALIZATION SYSTEM A.

Acid waste neutralization system equipment shall be as manufactured by Orion Inc. or equal.

B.

Install three (3) new complete system to service the Science classrooms in each zone. System shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall include the following: 1.

2.

Tank a.

Tank shall be constructed of polypropylene with 1/2" thick walls, top and bottom. Cover to be flanged. Tank shall have 55-gallon nominal capacity. Tank to be 22.5" diameter, 33.5" high with 27" to outlet invert and 4" pipe connections. Tank to have 4 inch vent outlet connection. pH Monitoring System a.

P/N 738313, pH display and alarm with base unit, UL listed single sensor station, UL listed NEMA 4 enclosure, pH analyzer with user set Hi and Low alarm points and analyzer/sensor fault prewired with cord and plug for standard 120 vac, 15 amp outlet NEMA 515R, local alarm visual/audible indication 4-20mA output for remote indication, two 5A/120vac dry contacts for remote alarm PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 29 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

notification, one industrial 30 foot pH sensor with 1 ½ inch gas tight insertion fixture, factory calibrated with buffer 4 and 10 solutions, U-Trap Assembly a. U-trap assembly shall be manufactured of polypropylene pipe and fittings which have been joined by the heat fusion method. Tank side of trap is to have an extension section which will house the effluent pH probe. The purpose of this unit is to maintain a pocket of effluent which allows the probe to remain wet and insures that the flow will pass by the sensor. The inlet and outlet sides of the unit shall be provided with flanges. 3

Installation a. b. c. d.

e.

f. g. 4

5

6

7

All components and instrumentation system shall be furnished for installation from a single source. The monitoring system shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and drawings in compliance with job specifications and local plumbing codes. Chemical feed tubing to be sleeved in secondary containment piping. System calibration and start-up shall be included in the package provided by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall also be responsible for conducting a training seminar for the site facilities people prior to the system being turned over to the Owner (minimum 12 hours). The manufacturer, as part of his package, shall be responsible for making not less than three (3) visits during the first year of operation to check-up on the workability of the system. The manufacturer does not, however, take responsibility for the day-today operation of the system. Manufacturer shall provide a point-to point wiring diagram drafted specifically for this project. System supplier shall have a minimum of four (4) years experience in the design and installation of pH monitoring systems.

Warranty a.

All new components and instrumentation for the neutralization system shall be warranted against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from the date of delivery.

a.

Manufacturer shall include a Certificate of Insurance with their submittal, proving that they are insured as a manufacturer of such systems.

Insurance

System Maintenance a.

Manufacturer shall be capable of providing a maintenance agreement with the Owner should they wish to enter into such an agreement.

System Wiring a.

Manufacturer shall be responsible for wiring all components of the system at the site. Wiring shall be done by a licensed Electrician and run in conduit per local codes. Only power wiring to the main and remote panels shall be provided under Section 260000.

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 30 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

C.

Installation 1.

2.32

All components and instrumentation for the neutralization systems shall be furnished, ready for installation from a single source.

PLUMBING FIXTURES A.

Furnish and install all fixtures including supports, connections, fittings and any incidentals to make a complete installation.

B.

Supply escutcheons which are not furnished with plumbing fixtures.

C.

Faucets and all exposed fittings shall be chromium-plated. All sinks (not lavatories) shall have flow restrictors for a maximum flow of 1.5 GPM.

D.

Fixtures shall bear manufacturer's guarantee label or trademark indicating "first quality." Acid-resisting enameled ware shall bear the manufacturer's symbol signifying acid-resisting material.

E.

Architect shall be final judge as to whether fixtures fulfill the requirements of the Specifications and as to whether they are of suitable quality.

F.

Manufacturer - Fixtures shall be Kohler, American Standard or Toto. Flush valves to be Sloan-Royal, Toto or Delaney Flush Valve Company. Toilet seats to be Church, Beneke or Bemis. Carriers and drainage fittings to be J.R. Smith, Zurn or Josam.

G.

The color of all fixtures shall be white.

H.

Fixtures shall be in accordance with the following schedule: P-1 Water Closet (Wall-Hung) Kohler K4325, vitreous china, 1.28 gallon flush, siphon jet, elongated bowl, wall hung with 1-1/2" top spud. Church 9500C white, solid plastic, open front seat, no cover, check hinge. Sloan Royal “Optima” 111-1.28-ES-S flush valve, 1 inch screwdriver angle stop, vacuum breaker, cast brass set screw flange and C.P. I.P.S. nipple to wall and El-154 Transformer. Wiring between flush valve and transformer is the responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor, including box for valve connection. Unit shall be set on an adjustable type combination fixture support and drainage fitting with foot support of type suitable to meet building construction and to set rim at 15" above floor. P-1H Water Closet (Handicapped) To be the same as Fixture P-1 outlined above, but to be mounted 17" to the rim of the fixture. P-2 Urinal Kohler K-4904-ET “Bardon” vitreous china, wall hung, urinal 1/8 GPF, (0.128 GPF), ¾” top spud, 14” extended rim, Water Saver compliant and with 2 inch wall outlet. Sloan Royal Optima Model 186 ES-S, High Efficiency 1/8 GPF, (0.128 GPF), Flush valve, 1 inch screwdriver angle stop, vacuum breaker, cast brass set screw flange and C.P.I.P. nipple to wall and EI-154transformer. Wiring between flush th

th

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 31 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

valve and transformer is the responsibility of the Plumbing Sub-contractor, including box for valve connection. Mounted on floor-mounted chair carrier with foot support so rim is 24” above floor. P-2H Urinal (Handicapped) Urinal shall be the same as specified for Fixture P-2 except that mounting shall be 16 inches floor to rim and unit shall be set on a concealed chair carrier with foot support. P-3 Lavatory Kohler K-2030 "Greenwich" 20x18 inch vitreous china lavatory with front overflow, 8" faucet centers. Set on floor-mounted arm chair carrier so unit is 32" above floor to rim. Chicago No. 116.101.AB.1 faucet with deck plate and 240.631.00.1 transformer. Wiring between faucet and transformer is the responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor. K-7715 C.P. drain with integral grid strainer. K-7607 (Pr) C.P. 3/8-inch angle supplies, with loose key stops, risers. Powers Model e480 mixing valve with in-line checks installed in the supplies to the faucet fitting. K-9010 C.P. 1-1/4 inch by 1-1/2 inch cast brass one-piece P-trap with cleanout. K-9015 C.P. 1-1/2 inch by 6-inch IPS nipple to wall with cast brass set screw flange. P-3H Lavatory (Handicapped) Kohler K-2030 "Greenwich” 20 x 18 vitreous china lavatory, with floor-mounted concealed arm type carrier to set unit at 32" above floor. Chicago No. 116.101.AB.1 faucet with deck plate and transformer. Wiring between faucet and transformer is the responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor. K-13885 C.P. 1-1/4 inch offset drain with integral grid strainer. K-7607 (Pr) C.P. 3/8-inch angle supplies, with loose key stops, risers. Power Model e480 mixing valve with in-line checks installed in the supplies to the faucet fitting. K-9010 C.P. 1-1/4 inch by 1-1/2 inch cast brass one-piece P-trap with cleanout. K-9015 C.P. 1-1/2 inch by 6-inch IPS nipple to wall with cast brass set screw flange. Concealed arm chair carrier with steel plate feet welded to uprights with one-piece threaded concealed arms. All trim under lavatory to be insulated. P-3B Lavatory System (Handicapped) Bradley frequency model FL-2H-TMA-PT, ADA & TAS compliant lower station only, patented molded one-piece design with integral bowls, terreon solid surface material,, trap and transition cover enclose, includes capacitive sensing faucet, navigator thermostatic mixing assembly, 110-120 VAC plug-in adaptor to convert battery-operated S53-315 faucet. Provide floor mounted base carrier to support unit. P-4 Bi-Level Water Cooler (Handicapped) Halsey-Taylor Model HTHB-HACG8BLPV-WF, Filtered Bi-Level HAC green cooler with hydro-boost, bottle filler. Provide replacement filters 3 pack model number 55898C. Two (2) 1-1/2 inch brass P-traps. Two (2) 3/8-inch supplies with stops. Provide mounting brackets. P-5 Shower Units (Typical) PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 32 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Shower valve/head assembly shall be a Symmons No. 1-100-X shower control with a 4-231- 1.5 GPM shower head. 2” stainless steel drain body cast integral with removable strainer plate made of stainless steel. Plumbing Subcontractor to set drain. Shower basin to be constructed in place by the General Contractor. P-5H Shower Unit (Handicapped) Shower basin to be constructed in place by the General Contractor. Plumbing Subcontractor to provide floor drain type “A” in each basin. Unit to have Symmons No. 1-25VT-FSB-X-48, pressure balanced shower valve with open-flow hand spray having 5'-0" of hose and 36-inch C.P. bar with adjustable slide and wall connection flange having a vacuum breakers. A 1.5 GPM glow restrictor shall be provided in the spray head. P-6 Janitor’s Sink Fiat Mop Receptor Model TSB-3003, Terrazzo mop service basin with 6" drop front and stainless steel caps on all curbs. Chicago No. 445-897-SRCXKCP manual faucet, wall mounted, adjustable arm, rigid vacuum breaker spout with 3/8” male hose thread and pail hook. #832-AA hose and hose bracket. #889-CC mop hanger. Trap to suit. P-7 Emergency Shower/Eyewash Shower and Eye Wash units shall be equal to Guardian Model GBF2150, This Contractor shall furnish and install all piping between actuating arm, eyewash and shower head. Pipe to run in walls and above ceilings. P-8 Sink Elkay Model LRAD-2219, Single compartment, 22” x 19 X 6-1/2" deep, 18-8 nickel bearing stainless steel, top mount, drilled for 8” center faucet, 3 holes, self-rimming. Unit to have stainless steel cup strainer LR 35 and tailpiece. C.P. 3/8-inch angle supplies with stops. C.P. 1-1/2” inch cast brass adjustable P-trap with cleanout plug and C.P. cover tube. Chicago Faucet C.P. Model 786-E3-319ABCP type faucet with swing spout and side spray. 2.2 GPM, 8 inch centers, 6 inch wrist blade handles. P-9 Sink Elkay Model LRAD-2219, single compartment,22” x 19” x 6-1/2” deep, 18-8 nickel bearing stainless steel, top mount, drilled for 8” center faucet, 3 holes, self-rimming. Unit to have stainless steel cup strainer and tailpiece. C.P. 3/8-inch angle supplies with stops. C.P. 1-1/2” inch cast brass adjustable P-trap with cleanout plug and C.P. cover tube. Chicago Faucet C.P. Model 1100-317ABCP type faucet with swing spout, 4 inch wrist blade handles. P-10 Sink Elkay Model LRAD-2219, single compartment,22” x 19” x 6-1/2” deep, 18-8 nickel bearing stainless steel, top mount, drilled for 8” center faucet, 1 hole, self-rimming. Unit to have stainless steel cup strainer and tailpiece. C.P. 3/8-inch angle supplies with stops. C.P. 1-1/2” inch cast brass adjustable P-trap with cleanout plug and C.P. cover tube Chicago Faucet Model 116.103.AB. Electronic faucet, deck mounted single hole, HyTrronic Gooseneck dual beam infrared sensor, 0.5 GPM vandal proof non-aerating PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 33 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

spray outlet, single supply of tempered water, model 242.659.00.1, 12 volt AC transformer. Wiring between faucet and transformer is the responsibility of the Plumbing Subcontractor. P-11 Service Sink Elkay Model ESSB2520C, single wall service sink, 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, full length 12 inch high backsplash, furnished with wall hanger and stainless steel support brackets, LK173 cast iron P trap, LK907BR03L2H faucet, 4 inch lever handles, threaded hose connection with vacuum breaker and bucket hook. C.P. 3/8-inch angle supplies with stops. Provide LK 18B stainless steel strainer. P-12 Double Bowl Scullery Sink Elkay Model SS8248 double free standing scullery sink, 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel, LK940VS07L2S faucet, 4 inch lever handles, vacuum breaker. LK 18B stainless steel strainer. C.P. 3/8-inch angle supplies with stops. P-13 Ceramic and Art Room Sinks The sink, two (2) faucets and drain provide by General Contractor. This Contractor shall install sink, faucets, drain, trap and all related incidentals. Traps shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. Sink to have J.R. Smith solid interceptor Model No. 8710, or equal. P-13H Ceramic and Art Room Sinks (Handicapped) The sink, faucet and drain provided by General Contractor. This Contractor shall install sink, faucet, drain, trap and all related incidentals. Trap shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor. Sink to have J.R. Smith solid interceptor Model No. 8710, or equal. All trim under sink to be insulated. See Paragraph 2.8. Drain shall run parallel and tight to wall. P-14 Sink (MS Science Classrooms) Elkay Model DLR-2219, single compartment, 8-inch deep, 18 gauge sink driller for 8 inch center faucet. Unit to have grid strainer and tailpiece. C.P. 3/8-inch angle supplies with stops. Trap shall be of the same materials as the acid waste system and shall be purchased from the supplier of that system. P-14H (Handicapped) Elkay Model DLR-2219, single compartment, 5-inch deep, 18 gauge sink driller for 8 inch center faucet. Unit to have grid strainer and tailpiece. C.P. 3/8-inch angle supplies with stops. Trap shall be of the same materials as the acid waste system and shall be purchased from the supplier of that system. P15 Washer Connection Water connection shall be equal to Symmons Model No. W-602. I.

All fixtures and equipment shall be supported and fastened in a satisfactory manner. Where wall-hung fixtures are secured to masonry, they shall be fastened with 1/4-inch through bolts provided with nuts and washers and plates at back, except where chair carriers are specified. Bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagon and exposed bolts, nuts, washers and screws shall be chromiumPLUMBING 22 00 00 - 34 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

plated brass. Where secured to concrete walls, they shall be fastened with brass bolts or machine screws in lead sleeve-type expansion shields and shall extend at least 3 inches into solid concrete. J.

2.33

2.34

2.35

Where chair carriers are required, they shall be completely concealed in the building construction and shall rigidly support the fixtures from the floor. Chair carriers shall be securely fastened to the floor and be adjustable both vertically and horizontally, and shall support fixtures in such a manner that no part of the fixture will be supported by the wall or partition. All wall-hung water closets and urinals shall be supported on combination wall-hung drainage fittings and chair carrier complete with foot. These fittings shall be cast iron, vertical or horizontal type, fitted with face plate of the proper type to accommodate the fixture specified, furnished complete with necessary bolts, nuts and washers as well as connecting nipples of the proper length with gaskets for the closet connections.

HEAT MAINTENANCE CABLE A.

This Contractor shall furnish and install heat maintenance cable on the nonpotable hot water piping. Contractor to refer to drawings for exact amount of heat maintenance cable to provide. Cable to start at discharge side of the backflow preventer and carry to the faucet outlet at each science room sinks.

B.

Heating Cable shall be equal to Raychem “HWAT-Y2 Trace” as manufactured by Tyco Thermal Controls. Cable shall be installed tight to the pipe, below the insulation and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Cable shall be set to maintain 120º F water temperature using a Raychem *ECO Controller. All cables shall be connected to power supplies at the junction boxes indicated on the electrical plans.

EXTERIOR GREASE INTERCEPTOR A.

The Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install, complete in all respects, an exterior grease interceptor constructed and installed as shown on Drawings. Precast, reinforced concrete unit shall be a 2,000 gallon tank. Unit shall be of 5,000 psi at 28-day concrete, have a design load of AASHTO-HS20-44, and have steel reinforcement of ASTM A-615-79, Grade 60. All joints shall be sealed with Acmelite Sealant.

B.

Interceptor shall have an inlet and outlet tee, all of service weight cast iron. All tees shall extend a minimum of six inches (6”) above the flow line of the tank. Inlet tee shall extend to 36” off the bottom, outlet tee shall extend to 12” off the bottom and both shall be on the centerline of the tank, directly below their respective cleanout manholes. This Contractor shall be responsible to install all tees.

C.

The interior of the grease interceptor shall have a plasticized liner field applied by this Contractor. Liner shall be equal to Sikagard 62, as manufactured by Sika Corporation and shall be installed in accordance with all the manufacturer’s recommendations.

GAS TRAIN VENT PIPING

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 35 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

A.

2.36

2.37

WATER METER A.

This Contractor shall be responsible to connect to the new domestic water service stubs, provided by the General Contractor, six-inches (6") above the floor, in the school building and in the Concession Building. At point of connections, this Contractor shall provide a full size shutoff valve. This Contractor shall continue piping beyond, as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.

B.

This Contractor shall be responsible to coordinate all work with the General Contractor to insure proper installation of service, location, sleeves, bracing and other items necessary to provide complete services. The cost of all labor and materials not included in the work done by the General Contractor, but required for a first-class installation, shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.

C.

Water meters shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor in accordance with Beverly Water Department requirements. Meters shall have a bronze case and stainless steel shafts and bolts. Units shall read in cubic feet or gallons, as required, and have a remote reader. This Contractor shall be responsible to obtain all information pertaining to the required setting and piping arrangement required for the meters by the Beverly Water Department. All incidental items required for a complete, first-class installation by the Water Department shall be the responsibility of this Contractor.

EMERGENCY SHOWER SYSTEM SOLENOID VALVE/TIME CLOCK A.

2.38

This Contractor shall be responsible to furnish and install all required gas train vent piping for the boilers and hot water heaters. Piping shall be of same material and supported in the same manner as specified for gas piping. Vent piping shall run from components requiring same to the termination point noted on the drawings. Gas vent piping shall terminate with a turndown elbow with an insect screen.

This contractor shall furnish and install, where shown on the drawings a ball valve with an electric activator unit wired to a digital 24 hour time clock. All items, including time clock and all wiring between activator and time clock is the responsibility of the Plumbing Contractor. Unit shall be set to discharge for 10 seconds, every 12 hours.

VALVE TAGS, NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS A.

All valves on pipes of every description shall have neat circular brass valve tags of at least 1-1/2 inches in diameter, attached with brass hook to each valve stem. Stamp on these valve tags in letters as large as practical (1/2 inch minimum) the number of the valve and the service, such as "H.W.," "C.W.," for hot water and cold water respectively. The numbers of each service shall be consecutive.

B.

All valves on tanks and pumps shall be numbered by 3-inch red metal discs with white numbers 2 inches high secured to stem of valves by means of brass hooks or small solid-link brass chain.

C.

These numbers shall correspond to numbers indicated for valves on the RECORD DRAWINGS and on two printed detailed lists. These printed lists shall state the numbers and locations of each valve and the fixture or group of fixtures which it controls, and other necessary information such as requiring the opening or closing of another valve or valves, when any one valve is to be opened or closed. PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 36 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.39

D.

These printed lists shall be prepared in a format to meet approval of the Architect. Lists shall be framed under glass and hung as directed by the Architect.

E.

Each water outlet on the water systems shall be additionally tagged as follows: Potable water outlets shall be identified by 3-inch diameter metal tags bearing the legend "SAFE WATER" in letters not less than 1/2-inch in height. Non-potable water outlets shall be identified by firmly-attached metal tags having the shape of a 4-inch equilateral triangle bearing the legend "WATER UNSAFE" in letters not less than 7/16-inch in height.

F.

Nameplates, catalog numbers, and rating identification shall be securely attached to electrical and mechanical equipment with screws or rivets. Adhesives or cements will not be permitted.

PIPE IDENTIFICATION A.

All piping, shall have markers applied 25 feet on center and on both sides of wall penetrations and at access panel locations. Identification shall be applied after final painting of pipe covering is complete. Markers shall be applied after final painting of pipe covering is complete. All markers shall indicate direction of flow, description of pipe contents, and shall be of colors as specified herein.

B.

All potable water shall be painted with 3” wide bands at 10’-0” intervals and on both sides of floor and wall penetrations, by the painting contractor.

C.

Markers for piping up to six inches in diameter, including covering, shall be equal to Seton Type SNA snap-on markers. Markers for 6-inch diameter and larger, including covering, shall be equal to Seton Type STR strap-on markers with stainless steel spring fasteners. Markers on vertical lines shall be mounted as high as possible.

D.

Pipe markers shall be as follows: Piping System

Marking

Background Color

Non-potable Water Domestic Cold Water Domestic Hot Water Domestic Hot Water Return Waste Vent Storm Gas

Unsafe Water Cold Water Domestic Hot Water Domestic Hot Water Return Waste Vent Storm Gas

Yellow Green Green Green Blue Blue Blue Yellow

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1

OPERATION AND START-UP A.

This Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary to place PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 37 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

the equipment into operation and then start and operate all systems to demonstrate the fitness of the installation.

3.2

3.3

B.

Prior to start-up, the Plumbing Contractor shall check all systems for completeness, provide lubrication, clean and flush all piping and equipment, perform pressure tests, chemical treatment, and make all other adjustments necessary for start-up.

C.

This Contractor may start portions of the systems as the work progresses; however, all systems which are normally operating simultaneously must be so operated upon completion of the work.

COORDINATION A.

The structure and its appurtenances, clearances and the related systems, such as plumbing, fire protection, heating, ventilation and electric, have been planned to be adequate and suitable for the installation of equipment specified under this Section. The Owner will not assume any increase in cost caused by differing requirements peculiar to a particular make or type of equipment and any such incidental cost shall be borne by this Contractor. He shall be responsible for the proper installation and location of his required sleeves, chases, inserts, etc., and see that they are set in the forms before the concrete is poured. He shall be responsible for his work and equipment furnished and installed by him until the completion and final acceptance of this Contract, and he shall replace any work which may be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to the Owner.

B.

In the event there is a conflict or inadequate space for the proper installation of Plumbing equipment, this Contractor shall prepare a scaled (1/4" - 1'-0" min.) composite sketch showing the building structure and all equipment and items affecting the installation, to clearly identify the areas of conflict. This Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of the sketch, along with a written explanation of the problem, to the Architect for his review and determination on what action to take to resolve the conflict.

C.

It shall be the duty of this Contractor to furnish full information to all trades relative to the work they are to do in connection with work under this Section. This includes data for wiring, including wiring diagrams, equipment foundations, pipe connections, etc. furnished under other Sections.

PAINTING A.

This Contractor shall apply one (1) coat of anti-rust paint and one (1) coat of flat black enamel to all support steel, hangers and other steel or iron elements of the Plumbing System, furnished by him, which will be enclosed or above ceilings when the project is completed.

B.

Paint shall be omitted from all items with a galvanized finish.

C.

All surfaces to be painted shall be free of dirt, scale, rust, grease and oil. Rust spots are to be wire brushed. Ambient temperature shall be in accordance with paint manufacturer's requirements when painting is being performed.

D.

This Contractor shall touch up, with spray paint, all scratched or damaged surfaces of equipment with factory finish. Spray paint shall be the same color and type as factory finish. PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 38 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

E.

3.4

PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS A.

3.5

The Painting Contractor shall paint all mechanical equipment, enclosures, covers, panels, insulation, conduit and other equipment exposed to view, except factory finished items. Care shall be taken not to paint over equipment nameplates. This Contractor shall leave surfaces to be painted ready to receive paint. The Painting Contractor shall apply paint in accordance with the Painting and Finishing portion of this Specification. Colors shall be selected by the Architect.

Materials, fixtures and fittings shall be properly protected and all pipe openings shall be temporarily closed so as to prevent obstructions and damage. All plumbing fixtures (i.e., water closets, lavatories, and urinals) shall be boxed over and all other fixtures protected with pasted-on paper. Post notice prohibiting the use of the fixtures prior to completion. Take precaution to protect all materials.

SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A.

Sanitary, Waste, Kitchen Waste, and Acid Waste Systems 1.

B.

Storm 1.

C.

Provide complete storm water piping systems, up to 10'-0" off the building, or as indicated on the drawings, connecting to all roof drains.

Indirect Waste Piping Systems 1.

D.

Provide complete interior and exterior sanitary, waste, Kitchen Waste drainage and acid waste systems up to 10'-0" off each building, or as indicated on the Drawings, connecting to all plumbing fixtures, floor drains and equipment.

Furnish and install complete indirect waste piping systems, as indicated on the drawings, connecting to fixtures and equipment, discharging through an air gap into trapped floor drains or fixtures.

General 1.

2.

3.

Soil, waste, Kitchen Waste, vent, acid waste, acid vent and storm piping shall be installed, as indicated on the Drawings, properly secured to the building structure. All piping above slab shall be secured with iron hangers. Extend to roof all lines of soil, waste and vent piping in stacks with all branches and fittings required and with extension through roof, as required by the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Plumbing Code. Where an end circuit vent pipe from any fixture or line of fixtures is connected to a vent line serving other fixtures, the connection shall be at least three feet (3') or sufficiently above the floor on which the fixtures are located, to prevent use of the vent line as a waste line. All changes in pipe size and direction on soil connections and waste lines shall be made with Y's and 45-degree fittings or 45-degree combination fittings shall be used wherever possible. All offsets shall be made at an angle of not more than 45 degrees. All fixtures and drains shall be separately trapped and all traps shall be vented, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, for fixtures or drains in PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 39 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9.

3.6

battery vent systems. This Contractor shall flush the sanitary and storm system piping with water in sufficient volume to obtain free flow through line. Remove all obstructions and correct all defects discovered. All cast iron pipes shall be free from sand holes, cracks or other defects and shall be of uniform weight, size and thickness, installed concealed in finished areas, as required to provide adequate waste from fixtures, evenly pitched and properly secured with iron hangers. All piping three inches (3") or less in diameter shall be installed with a pitch of not less than 1/4 inch per foot; larger than three inches (3") in diameter shall be installed with a pitch of not less than 1/8 of an inch per foot. The building drains shall leave the building where shown on the Drawings, and shall be provided with a full four inch (4") cleanout accessible from the building interior. Prior to commencement of work, this Contractor shall verify with the General Contractor all inverts and direction of lines leaving the building. Furnish and install a complete system of vent piping to vent all stacks, fixtures, traps and appliances, as indicated on the Drawings and/or required to meet the Plumbing Code. All vent piping shall be concealed, where possible, with the horizontal pipe pitching back toward fixtures to allow condensation to drain. Vent stacks passing through the roof shall extend 18 inches above the roof, and shall be a minimum size of two inches (2") in diameter. The vent shall be located at least eight feet (8') back of roof edges (offset, as required).

WATER SYSTEMS A.

Provide complete water systems to service all fixtures, systems, equipment and points requiring water throughout the project. Systems shall include connection to water services, water meters, all valves, all piping, insulation, gauges, all control devices, equipment bases and all other related controls and accessories specified herein and/or indicated.

B.

Installation 1.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Branch lines from service or main lines shall be taken off the top of main as indicated, using such cross-over fittings as may be required by structural or installation conditions. All service pipes, fittings and valves shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work and not less than 1/2 inch between finished coverings on the different services. Provide shock absorbers at hot water heaters and at all locations indicated on the Drawings. Provide access panels at all concealed shock absorbers. Pipes shall be run parallel and graded evenly to drainage points. There shall be a 1/2 inch drain valve at each low point in piping so that all parts of the systems can be drawn off. Provide valves on all risers to groups of fixtures and wherever shown on the Drawings. Valves in pipe spaces shall be made accessible by the use of access panels. Cast brass or bronze unions shall be installed in the water system at the connections to all equipment so that they may be conveniently disassembled. Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the site and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Air chambers shall be provided at the top of supplies to each plumbing PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 40 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

8. 9.

10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

3.7

fixture or series of fixtures, not protected by a shock absorber. No piping shall be installed in a manner to permit back siphonage or any flow of water from sanitary or drainage systems into water service or distribution piping under any conditions. Air gaps, open end of funnel drains and approved vacuum breaking devices shall be provided as required and as approved by the Inspector of Plumbing. Piping to hose end faucets or hose end fittings or any fixtures where water supply outlet is below the fixture overflow rim shall have vacuum breakers. Where flanges are installed on the systems, red rubber gaskets shall be installed between each pair of flanges. Heating of piping to eliminate the installation of fittings will not be permitted. Piping systems shall be kept clean during all phases of work. Open ends of incomplete piping shall be protected to prevent the entrance of foreign materials. Furnish and install a copper-plated friction clamp on all cold water supplies to each water closet. Provide suitable means of thermal expansion for all hot water piping, using swing joints, expansion joints or expansion loops, and long-turn-offsets as required. Piping connections to equipment shall be provided with unions or flanges to permit alterations and repairs.

GAS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS A.

Provide complete gas distribution systems to service all equipment and points requiring gas throughout the project. System shall include all cooking equipment, boilers, make-up air unit, hot water heaters, science labs and all other equipment specified herein and/or indicated.

B.

Installation 1. 2. 3.

All gas piping shall be installed in accordance with the rules and regulations of the Massachusetts State Fuel Gas Code. Gas piping shall be supported to pitch evenly toward drip pockets. This Contractor shall be responsible to field paint all exterior gas piping with two (2) coats of grey enamel paint.

END OF SECTION

PLUMBING 22 00 00 - 41 Design Development / 12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

DO NOT REMOVE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

SECTION 23 00 00 HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING INDEX PART 1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 1   1.1   GENERAL PROVISIONS............................................................................................................ 1   1.2   GENERAL REFERENCES ......................................................................................................... 2   1.3   SCOPE OF WORK ..................................................................................................................... 2   1.4   DEFINITIONS ............................................................................................................................. 4   1.5   VALVE TAGS, NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS ........................................................................... 4   1.6   SHOP DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................... 4   1.7   CODES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS .................................................................................. 5   1.8   INTENT ....................................................................................................................................... 5   1.9   DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 5   1.10   GIVING INFORMATION ............................................................................................................. 5   1.11   OBTAINING INFORMATION ...................................................................................................... 6   1.12   MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................. 6   1.13   REFERENCES............................................................................................................................ 6   1.14   COORDINATION DRAWINGS ................................................................................................... 6   1.15   MOTORS AND STARTERS........................................................................................................ 7   1.16   TEMPORARY HEATING ............................................................................................................ 7   1.17   OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ...................................................................... 7   1.18   RECORD DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................ 8   1.19   CONTRACT COST BREAKDOWN............................................................................................. 8   1.20   GUARANTEE AND SERVICE .................................................................................................... 8   1.21   DEBRIS REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP ........................................................................................ 8   1.22   COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 8   1.23   EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS............................................................................ 9   1.24   SEQUENCING ............................................................................................................................ 9   PART 2 PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................... 9   2.1   ACCESS PANELS ...................................................................................................................... 9   2.2   AIR SEPARATORS................................................................................................................... 10   2.3   BOILERS................................................................................................................................... 11   2.4   BREECHING AND CHIMNEY (DOUBLE WALL AL29-4C) ...................................................... 14   2.5   CABINET UNIT HEATERS ....................................................................................................... 16   2.6   CHEMICAL TREATMENT......................................................................................................... 16   2.7   CHILLER (AIR COOLED) ......................................................................................................... 17   2.8   CONVECTORS ......................................................................................................................... 22   2.9   DUCTLESS SPLIT FANCOIL SYSTEM.................................................................................... 23   2.10   ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT (ERU-1 through ERU-8) ............................................................. 24   2.11   EXPANSION JOINTS ............................................................................................................... 32   2.12   EXPANSION TANKS ................................................................................................................ 33   2.13   FANS (CENTRIFUGAL) ............................................................................................................ 33   2.14   FANS (DESTRATIFICATION)................................................................................................... 33   2.15   FANS (ROOF) ........................................................................................................................... 35   2.16   FAN (FUME HOOD EXHAUST)................................................................................................ 35   2.17   FANCOIL UNITS ....................................................................................................................... 37   2.18   FILTERS ................................................................................................................................... 38   2.19   FINTUBE RADIATION .............................................................................................................. 39   2.20   FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS........................................................................................... 39   2.21   GRAVITY VENTILATORS ........................................................................................................ 39   2.22   HOT WATER REHEAT COILS ................................................................................................. 40   2.23   INSULATION MATERIALS (GENERAL REQUIREMENTS)..................................................... 40   HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 1 Design Development / 12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

2.24   INSULATION MATERIALS (EQUIPMENT) .............................................................................. 41   2.25   INSULATION (PIPING) ............................................................................................................. 41   2.26   INSULATION (SHEET METAL) ................................................................................................ 43   2.27   MAKE-UP AIR UNIT (INDIRECT GAS FIRED)......................................................................... 45   2.28   MOTORS .................................................................................................................................. 49   2.29   PIPE, HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS ..................................................................... 50   2.30   PIPING MATERIALS................................................................................................................. 55   2.31   REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES .......................................................................... 57   2.32   PRESSURE GAUGES .............................................................................................................. 58   2.33   PUMPS ..................................................................................................................................... 59   2.34   RADIANT HEATING PANELS .................................................................................................. 60   2.35   REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS .............................................................................. 61   2.36   ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS .......................................................................................... 62   2.37   SHEET METAL WORK ............................................................................................................. 70   2.38   SHEET METAL WORK (HIGH VELOCITY SYSTEMS)............................................................ 73   2.39   SLEEVES, INSERTS AND OPENINGS.................................................................................... 74   2.40   SOUND ATTENUATORS ......................................................................................................... 76   2.41   STRAINERS.............................................................................................................................. 78   2.42   SUPPLEMENTAL SUPPORT SYSTEM ................................................................................... 78   2.43   TERMINAL BOXES................................................................................................................... 79   2.44   THERMOMETERS.................................................................................................................... 80   2.45   UNIT HEATERS ........................................................................................................................ 80   2.46   VALVES .................................................................................................................................... 81   2.47   VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES........................................................................................... 84   2.48   VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS .......................................................... 90   2.49   WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES ................................................................................ 100   2.50   WATER SYSTEM ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................ 100   2.51   AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS .......................................................................... 100   2.52   HOISTING MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT ......................................................................... 125   PART 3 EXECUTION ............................................................................................................................... 125   3.1   MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP....................................................................................... 125   3.2   COORDINATION .................................................................................................................... 125   3.3   COORDINATION DRAWINGS ............................................................................................... 126   3.4   PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP ............................................................................................. 127   3.5   OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ..................................................................... 127   3.6   OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................................................... 127   3.7   SYSTEM START-UP AND OPERATION................................................................................ 128   3.8   SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION ................................................................................................. 129   3.9   SHEET METAL WORK REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 130   3.10   PIPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION.......................................................................................... 132   3.11   PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING AND CLEANING ..................................................................... 134   3.12   PIPING SYSTEM PRESSURE TESTS ................................................................................... 134   3.13   INSULATION APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS .................................................................... 135   3.14   SYSTEM BALANCING............................................................................................................ 137   END OF SECTION ................................................................................................................................... 146

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 2 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

SECTION 23 00 00 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (Filed Sub-Bid Required) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1

GENERAL PROVISIONS A. The BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, and CONTRACT CONDITIONS as listed in the Table of Contents, and applicable parts of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS shall be included in, and made a part of this Section. B.

Work of this Section requires Filed Sub-Bids and is governed by the provisions of the Massachusetts General Laws (MGL), Public Bidding Law - Chapter 149, Sections 44A to 44J inclusive, as amended, and applicable Sections of the MGL, Public Contract Law Chapter 30.

C.

The work to be completed by the Filed Subcontractor for the work of this Section is shown on the following listed Drawings: Site Work Drawings: L xxx through L xxx inclusive. Architectural Drawings: A xxx through A xxx inclusive. Food Service Drawings: K xxx through K xxx inclusive Structural Drawings: S xxx through S xxx inclusive. Plumbing Drawings: P xxx through P xxx inclusive. Fire Protection Drawings: FP xxx through FP xxx inclusive. HVAC Drawings: H xxx through H xxx inclusive Electrical Drawings: E xxx through E xxx inclusive. Telecommunications Drawings: T xxx through T xxx inclusive 1.

2. D.

Examine all Drawings and all other Sections of the Specifications for requirements therein affecting the work of this Section. The listing of Contract Drawings above does not limit Filed Subcontractor’s responsibility to determine full extent of work of this Section or by all Drawings listed in the Drawing List on the Drawing Title Sheet, as modified by Addenda. Refer to Section 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES, for alternates that may affect the scope of Work of this Section.

Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work and shall be filed in a sealed envelope with the Awarding Authority at a time and place as stipulated in INVITATION TO BID and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 1.

The following shall appear on the upper left hand corner of the envelope: NAME OF SUB-BIDDER: SUB-BID FOR TRADE:

2.

E.

___________________________ TITLE.

Each Sub-Bid submittal for work under this Section shall be on forms furnished by Awarding Authority, as bound herein, accompanied with the required bid deposit in compliance with MGL c149, Section 44B in the amount of 5 percent of Filed Sub-Bid.

Sub Sub-Bid Requirements: In accordance with Massachusetts General Law, Chapter 149, Section 44F, as amended, The Filed Sub-Bidder shall list in “Form for Sub-Bids” the name and bid price of each person, firm or corporation performing each class of work or part thereof for which the Section of the Specifications for that Sub-Trade require such listing. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 1 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.

This filed trade requires that the following classes of work be listed in under the conditions indicated herein: a. SHEETMETAL WORK 2.42, 2.43, 3.9 b. INSULATION 2.28, 2.29, 2.30, 2.31, 3.13 c. AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 2.57

1.2

GENERAL REFERENCES A.

1.3

Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section.

SCOPE OF WORK A.

Work Included: The scope of work consists of the installation of all materials to be furnished under this SECTION, and without limiting the generality thereof, consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, plant, transportation, rigging, staging, appurtenances and services necessary and/or incidental to properly complete all heating, ventilating and air conditioning work as shown on the Drawings, as described in the Specifications, or as reasonably inferred from either, in the opinion of the Architect as being required, and includes: 1. Gas fired hot water boilers and associated combustion air system and flue system. 2. Hot water heating and chilled water cooling rooftop units and energy recovery units. 3. Hot and chilled water supply and return piping distribution system and accessories. 4. Hot and chilled water circulation pumps, expansion tanks, air separators and accessories. 5. High efficiency air cooled chiller. 6. Supply ductwork with associated terminal boxes, hot water reheats coils and supply registers and diffusers. 8. Return and exhaust ductwork with associated grilles and registers. 9. Refrigerant piping systems and accessories. 10. Fintube radiation, cabinet unit heaters, convectors and horizontal unit heaters. 11. Toilet exhaust and general exhaust systems. 12. Kitchen hood exhaust system. 13. Piping and ductwork insulation. 14. Balancing, air and water. 15. Automatic temperature controls. 16. Chemical treatment. 17. Furnish, erect and maintain staging and scaffolding, including mechanical hoisting and rigging equipment required for the performance of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning work.

B.

The HVAC Subcontractor shall be responsible for all cutting and patching related to the work of this Section except in finished surfaces. Patching is the responsibility of the trade affected. 1. For coordination of cutting and patching, refer to Section 01 31 00, PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION. 2. For cutting and patching specifications, refer to Section 01 73 00, EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 2 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

C.

Items to be Furnished Only: Furnish the following items for installation by the designated Sections: 1. Access Panels a. Access panels for access to heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment shall be furnished under this Section for installation by the General Contractor or appropriate Subcontractor.

D.

Items to be Installed Only: Install the following items as furnished by the designated Sections: 1. SECTION 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL a. Duct mounted smoke detectors.

E.

Related Work: The following items of work are not included in this Section and are specified under the designated SECTIONS: 1. DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION a. Coordination of cutting and patching. SECTION 01 73 00 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 2. DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION a. Excavation, backfill, pumping and shoring. 3. DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE a. Concrete bases and supports. 4. DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 00 02 - ROOFING AND FLASHING a. Flashing for all roof penetrations. 5. DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS a. Door louvers and undercut doors. 6. DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09 00 09 - PAINTING a. Field painting, except as noted otherwise. Field painting of radiation shall be done using the electrostatic method. 7. DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS SECTION 08 90 00 - LOUVERS AND VENTS a. Exterior wall louvers. 8. DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION 11 40 00 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT a. Kitchen equipment. 9. DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 21 00 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION a. Sprinklers and equipment. 10. DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING SECTION 22 00 00 - PLUMBING a. Domestic water heaters. b. Town water make-up. 11. DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL a. Power wiring except power wiring to variable air volume terminal units b. Starters and disconnects where not furnished integral with equipment. c. Emergency generator and related equipment. d. Wiring of smoke detectors. e. Wiring of Solid State Controller and wiring to associated destratification fans. f. Wiring of Solid State Controllers to respective exhaust fans.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 3 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

F. 1.4

1.5

1.6

The work of this Section is shown on Drawings numbered, M0.1 through M7.5.

DEFINITIONS A.

“HVAC” as used hereinafter in this SECTION shall mean “Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.”

B.

“HVAC Subcontractor” as used hereinafter in this SECTION shall mean the “Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Subcontractor,” i.e., the filed bid subcontractor under this Section 23 00 00.

C.

“Concealed” shall be defined as areas where piping is located in chases, shafts, pipe tunnels, and above furred ceilings.

D.

“Underground” shall mean piping exterior to or within the building that is buried. All other piping shall be considered “exposed.”

E.

“Piping” shall mean, in addition to pipe, all fittings, valves, hangers, and other accessories relating to such piping systems.

F.

“Provide” shall mean “provided complete in place,” that is, “furnished and installed.”

VALVE TAGS, NAMEPLATES AND CHARTS A.

Furnish and install on each gate and globe valve, and on all automatic control valves used in this contract, a two-inch diameter brass tag with stamped numeral a minimum height of one-half inch painted white. The tags shall be attached to the valve handles or stem necks with brass hooks or chains and properly secured.

B.

These numbers shall correspond to numbers indicated for valves on the Record Drawings and on two printed detailed lists. These printed lists shall state the numbers and locations of each valve and control and the section, fixture or equipment which it controls, and other necessary information such as requiring the opening or closing of another valve or valves, when any one valve is to be opened or closed.

C.

These printed lists shall be prepared in form to meet approval of the Architect and shall be framed under glass.

D.

Nameplates, catalog numbers and rating identification shall be securely attached to electrical and mechanical equipment with screws or rivets. Adhesives or cements will not be permitted.

SHOP DRAWINGS A.

General: Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, for submittal provisions and procedures.

B.

In accordance with Division 1, General Requirements, submit to the Architect for approval complete sets of detailed information consisting of manufacturers’ bulletins, capacities, shop drawings, and parts lists of all material to be provided for this project.

C.

Any manufacturer’s names and/or model numbers identified herein are intended to assist in establishing a general level of quality, configuration, functionality, and appearance HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 4 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

required. Unless noted otherwise, this is NOT a proprietary specification and it should be noted that “Or approved equal” applies to all products denoted herein. It is understood that all manufactures will have minor variations in configuration, appearance, and product specifications and such minor variations shall not eliminate such manufacturers as an “approved equal". It is the intent of this specification to encourage open and competitive involvement from multiple manufacturers that are able to supply similar products. 1.7

1.8

CODES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS A.

All work done under this SECTION shall conform to the codes and regulations governing such work as set forth by the Massachusetts Department of Public Safety, the Massachusetts State Building Code and all local codes having jurisdiction.

B.

Give notices, file plans, obtain permits and licenses, and obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Deliver certificates of inspection to Architect. No work shall be covered before examination and approval by Architect, inspectors and authorities having jurisdiction. Imperfect or condemned work shall be replaced with work conforming to requirements, without extra cost to Owner, subject to the approval of the Architect. If work is covered before due inspection and approval, the HVAC Subcontractor shall pay costs of uncovering the installed work, whether it meets contract requirements or not.

C.

Refer to Division 1, Section 01 41 00, Regulatory Requirements.

INTENT A.

1.9

1.10

It is not intended that the Drawings show every pipe, fitting, and appurtenance. All such parts necessary for the complete execution of the work, in accordance with the best practices of the trade and to the satisfaction of the Architect shall be provided whether these parts may have been specifically mentioned or not, or indicated on the Drawings.

DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A.

The Drawings and Specifications are complementary each to the other, and any labor or material called for by either, whether or not by both, or necessary for the successful operation of any components shall be furnished and installed.

B.

Before installing any work, verify that it does not interfere with the clearances required for other work. Installed work which interferes with existing necessary services shall be modified as directed by the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C.

Be familiar with the Drawings and Specifications of all other trades to prevent interferences and assure complete coordination.

GIVING INFORMATION A.

Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings and foundations required for all apparatus furnished under this SECTION and give full information to the General Contractor sufficiently in advance of the work, so that all such openings and foundations may be built in advance. Furnish all sleeves and supports herein specified, so the General Contractor may build same in place.

B.

In the case of failure to give proper information as noted above, assume the cost of having necessary changes to the work made by the General Contractor. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 5 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.11

OBTAINING INFORMATION A.

1.12

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.

1.13

Obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of apparatus which is to be provided, for the proper methods of installation. Obtain all information from the General Contractor and other Subcontractors which may be necessary to facilitate the work and the completion of the whole project.

All materials and equipment furnished under this SECTION shall be new and of the best grade for the service intended. The manufacturers mentioned in the specifications are intended to indicate the quality desired. Any substitutions shall be reviewed by the Architect as herein provided by the “or equal” clause, in addition to meeting the limitations of space and capacity shown or specified. Re-built materials and equipment will not be accepted.

REFERENCES A.

National standards referenced herein are included to establish recognized quality only. Equivalent quality and testing standards will be acceptable subject to their timely submission, review and acceptance by the Engineer.

B.

Refer to SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES for schedule of references.

C.

Reference Standards: 1. Reference herein to any technical society, organizations, group or body are made in accordance with the following abbreviations: ADC Air Diffusion Council AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI American National Standards Institute ARI Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM American Society of Testing Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWS FS IEEE NEC NEMA NFPA SMACNA UL

1.14

American Welding Society Federal Specifications Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers National Electrical Code National Electrical Manufacturer Association National Fire Protection Association Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

COORDINATION DRAWINGS A.

Before materials are purchased or work is begun, the HVAC Subcontractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer, Coordination Drawings showing the size and location of his equipment, ductwork and piping lines relevant to the complete system. He shall ensure that these drawings are compatible and correctly annotated and cross- referenced at their HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 6 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

interfaces. B.

1.15

1.16

MOTORS AND STARTERS A.

Motors for all equipment under this SECTION shall be quiet in operation and shall be guaranteed to run without objectionable noise or vibration.

B.

Motors smaller than one-half (1/2) horsepower shall be wound for 120 volts, single phase, 60 hertz.

C.

Motors one-half (1/2) horsepower and larger shall be wound for 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz.

D.

Starters for all equipment shall be provided by the Electrical Subcontractor.

E.

Voltages shown in Paragraphs B and C are typical unless otherwise noted.

F.

All motors one horsepower and over shall be premium efficiency type.

TEMPORARY HEATING A.

1.17

Coordination drawings are for the Contractor’s and the Engineer’s use during construction and shall not be construed as replacing any shop or record drawings required elsewhere in these Contract Documents.

Special reference is made to “Heating during Construction”, Section 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.

Refer to SECTION 01 78 00 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, for submittal procedures pertaining to operating and maintenance manuals.

B.

At least two (2) months prior to the time of turning over this contract to the Owner for Use & Occupancy or substantial completion, secure and deliver to the Architect three (3) complete indexed files containing approved operating and maintenance manuals, shop drawings, and other data as follows: 1. Operating manuals and operating instructions for the various systems. 2. Catalog data sheets for each item of mechanical or electrical equipment actually installed including performance curves, rating data and parts lists. 3. Catalog sheets, maintenance manuals, and approved shop drawings of all mechanical or electrical equipment controls and fixtures with all details clearly indicated. 4. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of repair and service companies for each of the major systems installed under this Contract. 5. Copies of all service contracts provided for the guarantee period. 6. Copies of all equipment and system warranties.

C.

Non-availability of operating and maintenance manuals or inaccuracies therein may be grounds for cancellation and postponement of any scheduled final inspection by the Owner until such time as the discrepancy has been corrected and/or retainage of sufficient monies to prepare same.

D.

Provide qualified trained personnel to insure proper operation of the systems and to train the Owner’s operating and maintenance personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the systems. Instruction period shall be a minimum of five (5) eight-hour HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 7 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

E.

1.18

1.19

RECORD DRAWINGS A.

General: Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, SECTION 017800, Close-out Submittals for Requirements.

B.

The record drawings required to be furnished under this SECTION are of drawings numbered M0.1 through M7.5.

CONTRACT COST BREAKDOWN A.

1.20

1.21

days. Coordinate with Commissioning Agent per specification section 01 91 00. Refer to SECTION 01 75 00, Starting and Adjusting. Coordinate all start-up, operation, and testing activities with the Project Manager, General Contractor and the Commissioning Agent per specification section 019100.

Within 30 days of commencing the work, submit to the Architect a complete breakdown of the Contract price to aid in determining the value of the installed work during the construction period. The form shall correspond to the construction schedule with a percentage of progress to complete breakdown with progress description by month.

GUARANTEE AND SERVICE A.

Attention is directed to the provisions of the CONTRACT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS regarding guarantees/warranties for the Work.

B.

Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees/warranties for work under this Section. However, such guarantees/warranties shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities which the manufacturer and the Contractor may have by law or by other provisions of the Contract Documents.

DEBRIS REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP A.

The HVAC Subcontractor shall, at the end of each day’s work, remove waste materials and debris resulting from the installation of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system. The HVAC Subcontractor shall deposit such waste and debris in a dumpster onsite. Dumpster shall be provided by the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the emptying of dumpster when required. The HVAC Subcontractor shall, at the completion of his work, remove from the school property all tools, equipment and surplus materials resulting from the installation of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning system.

1.22

COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS A.

An independent Commissioning Agent (CA) will be retained for this project. The commissioning process will be implemented in accordance with the LEED for Schools v2009 and Commissioning Credits EAp1 – Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems and EAc3 – Enhanced Commissioning.

B.

This contractor shall assist and support the CA as necessary in accordance with the requirements of specification section 019100 – COMMISSIONING.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 8 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.“Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with Tenant’s and Building Owner’s Representatives and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation and issue closure. Refer to Commissioning Specification, Section 019100, for detailed commissioning requirements.” 1.23

1.24

EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS A.

Bidders are expected to examine and to be thoroughly familiar with all contract documents and with the conditions under which work will be carried out. The Awarding Authority (Owner) will not be responsible for errors, omissions and/or charges for extra work arising from General Contractor or Filed Subcontractor's failure to familiarize themselves with the Contract Documents or existing conditions. By submitting a bid, the Bidder agrees and warrants that he has had the opportunity to examine the site and the Contract Documents, that he is familiar with the conditions and requirements of both and where they require, in any part of the work a given result to be produced, that the Contract Documents are adequate and that he will produce the required results.

B.

Pre-Bid Conference: Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend the Pre-Bid conference; refer to INVITATION TO BID for time and date.

SEQUENCING A.

Phasing: Refer to Section 01 10 00 - SUMMARY, and Drawings for phasing and milestone completion requirements which affect the General Contractor’s Work and the Work of this Filed Subcontract.

B.

Coordinate work of this Filed Subcontract with that of other trades, affecting or affected by this work, and cooperate with the other trades as is necessary to assure the steady progress of work.

C.

Do not order or deliver any materials until all submittals, required in the listed Specification Sections included as part of this Filed Subcontract, have been received and approved by the Architect.

D.

Before proceeding with installation work, inspect all project conditions and all work of other trades to assure that all such conditions and work are suitable to satisfactorily receive the work of this Section and notify the Architect in writing of any which are not. Do not proceed further until corrective work has been completed or waived.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1

ACCESS PANELS A.

All work shall be installed so that all parts requiring inspection, operation, maintenance and repair are readily accessible. Minor deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, but changes of magnitude shall not be made prior to written approval from the Architect.

B.

Furnish access panels for installation in walls and ceilings at locations indicated on the drawings to permit access. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 9 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.2

C.

All access panels shall be located in closets, storage rooms and/or other non-public areas, in a workmanlike manner, positioned so that junction can be easily reached and the size shall be sufficient for this purpose (minimum 12 inches x 16 inches). When the access panels are required in corridor, lobbies or other habitable areas, they shall be located as directed by the Architect.

D.

Access panels shall be as manufactured by Inland Steel Products Company “Milcor”, Walsh-Hannon-Gladwin, Inc., “Way-Loctor” or approved equal. Types shall be as follows: 1. Masonry or Tile “Milcor” Type M 2. Drywall “Milcor” Type DW 3. Fire-Rate “Milcor”

E.

Units shall have 16 gauge steel frame and 14 gauge steel hinged door panel. Door shall have concealed spring hinges allowing door to be opened to 175 degrees.

F.

Provide flush screwdriver operated camlocks in accordance with manufacturer’s schedule of panel sizes and number of locks.

G.

Units shall be factory primed for field painting by Section 09 00 09.

H.

Install U.L. rated 1-1/2 hour Class B access panels where required to comply with applicable code requirements.

AIR SEPARATORS A.

Furnish and install as shown on the drawings a Spirotherm, Bell & Gossett, or Taco air separator on the hot water heating system and chilled water system.

B.

All fittings shall be fabricated steel, rated for 150 psig design pressure and be selected for less than 1 foot of water pressure drop and velocity not to exceed 4 feet per second through the unit at specified GPM. Performance curves specifying air collection efficiency and pressure drop at rated flow shall be furnished by the unit manufacturer as part of the submittal for each unit.

C.

All units shall include an integral spirally wound three dimensional copper grid to act as a turbulence suppressive coalescing medium which must completely fill the fitting’s internal area. Units are to remove free and entrained air during system start up and continue to eliminate dissolved air through continual circulation and the coalescing action of the spirally wound grid. 1. Alternate units shall have an internal stainless steel air collector tube with 5/32” diameter perforations and 63% open area designed to direct accumulated air to the compression tank via an NPT connection at top of unit.

D.

Each fitting is to have a separate air and venting chamber to prevent system contaminants from harming the float and venting valve operation. At the top of the venting chamber shall be an integral float actuated brass air vent. There shall be no restriction in the connection from the venting chamber to the vent.

E.

The fittings are to include a valved side tap to flush floating dirt or liquids and for quick bleeding of large amounts of air during system fill or refill. Units shall include a bottom connection for use as a blow down connection for periodic cleaning. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 10 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

F.

2.3

Provide integral high capacity float actuated air vent at top fitting of tank. 1. Alternates must include bronze or cast iron float actuated air vent rated at 150 psig which shall be threaded to the top of the fitting. 2. Unit shall have bottom blow down connection. BOILERS

A.

Furnish and install in accordance with plans and specifications, including manufacturer's recommendations, state and local code, hot water boilers. The hot water boilers shall be as manufactured by Cleaver-Brooks, Aerco, Buderus, or Viessmann, rated at 60 psig design pressure and capacity, as scheduled on the drawings and specifications.

B.

Boiler Design 1. Boiler shall be a compact Firetube type, single pass, and down-fired design with ultra-low emission and high efficiency condensing technology herein listed. The boiler shall be designed for natural gas firing. The burner shall be a forced draft design with gas and combustion air premixed prior to the burner head. The boiler, and burner, shall be supplied by the same manufacturer to assure compatibility and single source responsibility for the package performance. The boilers shall be constructed in accordance with ASME Section IV Code. Boiler to be manufactured within an ISO 9001 certified facility. 2. The boiler shall be constructed with a minimum of ten (10) square feet of fireside heating surface per 33,475 BTU's of input. 3. The pressure vessel shall be constructed with stainless steel boiler tubes with titanium stabilized aluminum extended internal heating surface (AluFer). Firetube internal surface shall be a minimum of four (4) times the external waterside surface area. The pressure vessel shall be of a "counter flow" design with separated return flow connections and no minimum system flow requirements. 4. Other a. Two-inch (2") fiberglass blanket insulation and easily removable casing. b. Burner observation port. c. Factory paint with durable powder coat paint finish for corrosion protection. d. ASME Code relief valves with side outlet set for 60 psig. 5. Hot water boilers shall be specifically designed for top water outlet and bottom water inlet with necessary internal baffling.

C.

Computerized Burner Control 1. Boiler burner controls shall be an integrated, digital modulating controller. 2. Controller shall provide the following functions: a. Two (2) heating loops b. Burner sequencing with safe start check, pre-purge, direct spark ignition and post purge. c. Electronic ignition. d. Flame supervision. e. Safety shutdown with display of error. f. Modulating combustion fan. g. Circulating pump operation. h. Low gas pressure, air proving, high limit and frost protection. 3. Controller shall have an option for multiple boiler sequencing. 4. Controller shall have an option for communication device to computer interface. Boiler manufacturer shall coordinate with Invensys/ENE for compatibility requirements. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 11 Design Development / 12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

D.

Burner Design 1. Burner shall be a unitized Venturi, gas valve, blower and burner head design. 2. Burner shall incorporate a variable speed DC combustion air fan capable of modulating the burner at a 5:1 ratio from high fire to low fire. 3. Burner head shall be constructed of a Fecralloy-metal fiber for solid body radiation of the burner flame. 4. Burner shall produce less than 70-dBA sound reading at full firing rate.

E.

Electrical Requirements 1. Power available with be 220-1-60 phase with option for 115-1-60. 2. All wiring shall be in compliance with National Electrical Code.

F.

Efficiency 1. The boilers will have a guaranteed efficiency of up to 98% based on return water temperatures of 80ºF at full firing rate.

G.

Emissions 1. Burner boiler design shall produce NOx emission levels of less than 10 PPM at full firing rate.

H.

Operating Tests, Startup and On Site Services 1. A single vendor to assure proper installation and service design interface, and to provide in-warranty and post-warranty unified responsibility for the Owner and Consulting Engineer, as well as shall furnish the boiler system and accessories. 2. Boiler vendor's service organization shall employ service technicians having experience in all aspects of troubleshooting, corrective service, and preventative maintenance O&M reporting. Service personnel shall be full-time employees of the Vendor's organization and shall be available twenty-four (24) hours per day and three hundred, sixty-five (365) days per year. 3. Boiler vendor shall be covered by a general liability insurance policy. Boiler vendor shall provide the Owner with a Certificate of Insurance specifying amounts and types of coverage. All personnel involved in start-up service, adjustment, or testing of equipment must be covered under this insurance. 4. Boiler vendor shall provide a factory trained service engineer for periodic supervision during installation, field start-up service to supervise starting, adjusting and testing of boiler, training of the operating personnel in the proper operations and maintenance. Duration of training shall be of sufficient time to insure competent operation of boilers by owner’s maintenance personnel. Boiler start-up and training shall be coordinated with the Commissioning Agent; refer to specification section 019100.

I.

Manufacturer's Warranty 1. All equipment shall be guaranteed against defects in materials and/or workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of startup, or eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment, whichever comes first. The warranty shall include parts only to repair or replace all defective parts and materials. 2. The pressure vessel shall be warranted for twenty (20) years against thermal shock.

J.

Condensate Neutralization Kit 1. Boiler manufacturer shall provide a neutralization kit which shall consist of the following: a. Replaceable acid neutralization filter cartridge designed for six (6) HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 12 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b.

K.

months of use. The filter housing outlet shall be piped to drain. Condensate removal pump. The condensate pump shall be capable of handling 70 GPM at 5 ft/hd. The pump discharge shall be piped to filter inlet.

Boiler Sequencing and Control System 1. When multiple condensing boilers are to be installed in a common hydronic loop, a sequencing control system shall be provided by the boiler manufacturer to stage and control firing rate of the boilers. To ensure proper integration with the Cleaver-Brooks Clearfire boiler controls, the boiler manufacturer shall supply a boiler sequencing control system. The boilers shall be sequenced as follows to maximize their operating efficiency: a. The sequencing control system shall monitor the outdoor temperature and calculate a water loop temperature set point based on the selectable preset values. The sequencing system shall begin sequencing the condensing boilers based on the difference between the actual water loop temperature and the calculated (outdoor air) water temperature. b. When a requirement for heat is determined by the boiler sequencing control system, the lead boiler is energized and its firing rate is maintained at low fire. c. If the water loop temperature continues to decrease, the boiler sequencing control system shall enable a lag boiler. The first lag boiler is energized and the lag boiler’s firing rate is maintained at low fire. d. If additional heat is required, the boiler sequencing control system shall enable each additional lag boiler stage until all of the available condensing boilers in the water loop have been energized. Each boiler stage shall remain at low fire until all of the stages have been enabled. e. If all of the condensing boilers are enabled and additional heat is required, the boiler sequencing control system shall release the boilers to modulate. The condensing boilers shall modulate together as a single unit to keep the condensing boiler system at the lowest possible firing rate. f. As the water loop temperature increases, the boiler sequencing control system shall decrease the firing rate of the condensing boilers to maintain the water loop temperature. If all of the condensing boilers are at low fire and the water loop temperature continues to rise, the boiler sequencing control panel shall begin to stage the boilers off. The first lag boiler energized shall be the first boiler to be disabled. The condensing boilers shall continue to be disabled by the boiler sequencing control system based on the temperature rise of the water loop. g. The lead boiler is disabled when the water loop temperature reaches a selectable value referenced around the water loop set point. 2. The boiler sequencing control system shall be a microprocessor based Programmable Logic Controller with a Graphical User Interface and Touch Screen capabilities. Active display area will be a minimum of 4.7” with a display resolution of 320 x 240 pixels. Multiple Status and Configuration Screens will be available for easy interpretation of the hydronic loop status and configuration. The boiler sequencing control system enclosure will be NEMA 4X construction. Power required for the boiler sequencing control system will be 120/60/1. 3. The boiler sequencing control system shall have the ability to communicate with the Building Management System via BACnet MS/TP RS-485 or BACnet IP via ethernet. The boiler control system manufacturer shall furnish an interface gateway if required. 4. The boiler sequencing control system Sequencing Control shall include HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 13 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

5. 6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11. 12. 13.

2.4

automatic rotation of the lead boiler based on a user configured cycle count. Manual selection of the Lead boiler will also be available through a Setup Menu. Outdoor and loop header temperature sensors supplied with the boiler sequencing control system shall be PT100 RTD type. The boiler sequencing control system sequencing control shall provide an adjustable reset schedule based on the outdoor temperature. A linear outdoor reset ratio shall be determined based on user defined hydronic loop temperatures at 60ºF and 0ºF outdoor temperatures. A reference graphic shall be displayed on the Boiler sequencing control system representing the reset loop temperature vs. outdoor temperature calculated ratio. A user defined outdoor temp disable parameter shall be provided to turn off all boilers if a predetermined outdoor temperature is reached. Minimum and Maximum Loop Temperature parameters shall be provided for both Occupied and Unoccupied modes. This shall prevent the outdoor reset schedule from operating outside of a user defined temperature range. Provisions shall be provided that monitor the boiler’s outlet temperature and adjusts the firing rate if the boiler’s outlet temperature exceeds a user defined value above the loop set point. This is beneficial for variable flow loops to prevent high temperature limit alarms. Multiple setback schedules shall be available based on whether the building is in Occupied or Unoccupied mode. Building Mode selection shall be determined by a user defined Time of Day / Day of Week Touchscreen entry. The Building Mode shall automatically change between Occupied and Unoccupied based on the user programmed day and times. Manual Building Mode control shall also be available via a Setup menu. Building Mode shall be indicated on the Loop Status Screen for ease of reference. The boiler sequencing control system Sequencing Control shall provide alarm annunciation of each boiler connected to the network. The boiler sequencing control system shall automatically adjust the boiler sequencing schedule and remove the boiler from the sequencing logic if an alarm occurs. The boiler shall automatically be added back into the rotation loop as soon as the boiler sequencing control system senses that the alarm has been cleared. The boiler sequencing control system will stage the boilers based on a PID generated value. The Proportional, Integral and Derivative values shall be user defined through the Lead/Lag Configuration Screen. Each boiler stage shall be enabled based on a user defined “Percentage from Set point” control variable. Properly tuned loops shall provide temperature control accuracy up to +/- 2ºF. Boiler Sequencing Start and Stop parameters shall be user defined through the operator interface. A Manual Reset parameter shall be provided to allow the Proportional Band to be shifted around set point. The boiler sequencing control system shall provide capabilities to Enable/Disable the boilers through the operator interface. Boilers that are disabled shall not be included in the sequencing logic. A user defined time delay parameter shall be provided that delays enabling of the next boiler stage. This shall help to decrease cycling of the boilers when the heat load is close to being met. The boiler sequencing control system shall modulate the individual boiler’s automatic two-way control valve isolate any boiler not online. The boiler sequencing control system shall provide a user defined time delay to keep the isolation valve open to relieve heat from the boiler after being staged off.

BREECHING AND CHIMNEY (DOUBLE WALL AL29-4C)

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 14 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

A.

Furnish and install, where indicated on plans, non-positive and positive pressure vent systems for condensing and non-condensing applications.

B.

Standards: 1. Where applicable, products furnished under this section shall conform to the requirements of NFPA 54 and NFPA 211, and shall comply with UL 1738, Standard for Venting Systems for Category II, III, and IV Gas-Burning Appliances, and all other applicable standards. 2. All flue-gas carrying components of the vent system shall be obtained through one source. 3. Vent shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of original installation. Any portion of the vent repaired or replaced under warranty shall be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period.

C.

Special Gas Vent: 1. Vent shall be factory-built special gas type, double wall, engineered and designed for use on Category I, II, III, and IV appliances, or as specified by the equipment manufacturer. 2. Maximum continuous flue gas temperature not to exceed 550 degrees Fahrenheit (288 degrees Celsius). 3. Vent shall be constructed with an inner conduit constructed of AL29-4C® or 29-4 (S44735) superferritic stainless steel with a minimum thickness of .015” for diameters 3”-8”, .020” for diameters 10”-16”, .025” for diameters 18”-24”, and .035” for 26” and greater. 4. Vent shall be listed for an internal static pressure of 15” w.g. and tested to 37” w.g. 5. All inner wall conduit components shall be manufactured from AL29-4C® or 29-4 (S44735). The closure system shall be a mechanical locking strap closure system that is integral to the system. 6. Joints to be sealed with factory supplied sealant. Joints shall be designed to minimize collection of condensate in both horizontal and vertical runs. Joints shall not use screws or other lesser alloy fasteners that penetrate the inner conduit. 7. The outer wall casing shall be constructed of 430 stainless steel that shall not require additional surface preparation, such as painting, in order to withstand the outdoors or high humidity environments. 8. Inner conduit and outer wall casing shall be constructed with a one-inch air space between them and in such a fashion that prevents cross-alloy contamination. 9. Tees and elbows shall provide a pressure drop less than 15 feet equivalent horizontal vent. 10. Fittings that increase or decrease vent diameter shall be asymmetric in construction with a flat wall that maintains a straight line with adjoining parts in order to facilitate the unobstructed flow of all condensate. 11. All parts shall be compatible with other single wall and double wall products of the same manufacturer. 12. System is to be sized in accordance with the appliance manufacturer’s specifications, NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code (ANSI Z223.1), ASHRAE recommendations, and other applicable codes. 13. System shall be design with parts that will allow for clearance to combustibles of 1” for diameters 6”-24” unenclosed in the horizontal and enclosed in the vertical; and for clearance to combustible of 2” for diameters 26”-32” unenclosed in the horizontal and enclosed in the vertical. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 15 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

14.

2.5

2.6

Manufacturer shall provide, if needed, any custom made part to aid in a quick and effective installation. Custom parts will meet all criteria 3.1.A through 3.1.N.

D.

Sealant: 1. General Electric RTV106 High Temperature Sealant shall be used to seal all joints on systems where the maximum flue gas temperature will not exceed 550°F. 2. In lieu of high temperature sealant, a factory installed 550°F compatible gasket shall be used to seal the joints.

E.

Illustrated installation manuals shall be supplied to the installer and shall be available for downloading from the manufacturer’s website.

F.

All components shall be installed in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions and all pertinent local, regional, national, and international building and mechanical codes and regulations.

G.

Vent shall be Saf-T Vent® CI Plus as manufactured by Heat-fab, Inc. or approved equal."

CABINET UNIT HEATERS A.

Cabinet unit heaters shall be of the size, type and capacity indicated on drawings. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Vulcan, Sterling, Rosemex or Rittling.

B.

Cabinet unit heaters shall consist of a heating element with centrifugal fans driven by an electrical motor, filter, and where semi or fully recessed, they shall be flanged on four sides. They shall be capable of delivering the indicated heat emission with entering air at 60 degrees F. Each unit shall be provided with manual on-off switch and two-speed selector switch.

C.

All cabinet parts shall be factory finished. Color to be determined by Architect.

CHEMICAL TREATMENT A.

Provide where shown on drawings and as specified herein the equipment necessary for chemical treatment and service as provided by New England Systems and Supply, Inc., Nutmeg, Metropolitan Refinery Company, Inc., Barclay Chemical Company, Inc., Betz Company or Water Services Laboratories, Inc., or approved equal.

B.

The contract agreement satisfactory in form and substance to the Owner – executed between this Contractor and the chemical treatment company to furnish supervisory service to assure the use of proper chemical treatment to and for systems, installed under this contract, hot water, chilled water and condenser water, for a period of one (1) year from date of initial treatment thereof. The Contract: Assigned by this Contractor to the Owner on the date that the building is accepted by the Owner, so that chemical treatment will continue uninterrupted during the one year life of the contract. If the building is not accepted by the Owner prior to the expiration of the one year contract, arrangements shall be made by this Contractor to extend this contract until the building is accepted by the Owner.

C.

Chemical treatment company shall perform the following through its agents: 1. Supervise initial cleaning of systems and equipment. 2. Supervise initial introduction of chemical treatment. 3. Furnish service calls by its agents at a frequency of not less than one (1) per thirty (30) days thereafter, during the one (1) year life of the contract. 4. Furnish all required chemicals for proper treatment of all systems hereinafter HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 16 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

5.

6.

7. 8. 9.

2.7

described, together with all necessary testing equipment and reagents for field analysis of the water during the aforementioned one year contract. The chemical treatment company shall assume responsibility for field testing and control and regular addition of chemical treatment in whatever amounts are necessary on each of the systems hereinafter described, as provided by the chemical treatment company until the date of acceptance of the building by the Owner. Some water circulating pumps shall have mechanical seals as specified in this section. It shall be the responsibility of the chemical treatment company to coordinate with the pump manufacturer and adjust the formulation of the water treatment chemicals to be assured that the normal life of the mechanical seals is not affected. The chemical treatment supplier shall provide chemicals which are nonpollutants and meet Federal Water Quality criteria. The chemical treatment company shall establish, document and submit to the Architect volumes of each system or sub-system for which treatment is provided. The chemical treatment company shall provide start-up and training support to the owner. Training shall be coordinated with the Commissioning Agent. Refer to specification section 019100 for additional requirements.

D.

Hot Water Systems: Provide for each system one liquid chemical bypass type feeder of approximately 5 gallon capacity, complete with valves and fittings which shall be connected across each hot water heating system pump set.

E.

Chilled Water System: Provide liquid chemical bypass type feeder of approximately 5 gallon capacity, complete with valves and fittings connected across the chilled water pump sets.

F.

Chemical cleaning solutions used shall not be harmful to materials of construction. After systems have been drained, flushed and refilled, a chemical test shall be made by the chemical treatment company to determine that cleaning solution remaining in system does not impart alkalinity to water in excess of 300 ppm. A written report to this affect shall be submitted to the Architect.

G.

Initial Cleaning of Chilled Water, Hot Water Piping System: Cutting oil, excess pipe joint compound, finely divided solids and other similar foreign materials shall be removed from all circulating water and steam piping systems before they are placed in operation. The cleaning materials used shall be supplied and applied by the chemical treatment company and all circulation, draining, flushing and refilling work shall be done by this Contractor, as directed by the chemical treatment company.

H.

Refer to Piping Systems Flushing and Cleaning for additional requirements.

CHILLER (AIR COOLED) A.

The contractor shall furnish and install air-cooled water chillers as shown as scheduled on the contract documents. The chillers shall be installed in accordance with this specification and perform at the specified conditions as scheduled.

B.

The contractor shall furnish and install air-cooled rotary liquid chiller of size and capacity scheduled. Unit shall be installed in strict accordance with this specification. All units shall be furnished complete with helical rotary compressors, shell and tube evaporator, aircooled condenser, electronic expansion valves and microprocessor control panel. Total unit shall be UL certified and include the UL label. The unit shall be designed for outdoor application. The unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 550/590-2003.

C.

Air cooled water chiller(s) shall be manufactured by Trane, York, Carrier or McQuay. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 17 Design Development / 12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

D.

Compressors 1. Construct chiller using semi-hermetic helical rotary screw compressors with independent circuits. 2. Statically and dynamically balance rotating parts. 3. Provide oil lubrication system with oil charging valve and oil filter to ensure adequate lubrication during starting, stopping, and normal operation. 4. Provide compressor with automatic capacity reduction equipment consisting of capacity control slide valve. Compressor must start unloaded for soft start on motors. 5. Provide constant speed 3600 rpm for 60Hz (or 3000 rpm for 50Hz) compressor motor, suction gas cooled with robust construction and system design protection, designed for across-the-line or wye-delta starting. Furnish with starter. 6. Provide compressor heater to evaporate refrigerant returning to compressor during shut down. Energize heater when compressor is not operating. 7. Provide sound absorbing panels to attenuate compressor noise.

E.

Evaporator 1. The evaporator shall be designed, tested, and stamped in accordance with ASME code for a refrigerant side working pressure of 200 psig. Waterside working pressure shall be 150 psig. 2. Insulate the evaporator and water boxes with a minimum of 3/4 inch (K=0.26) insulation. If field installed the additional money to cover this in the field should be included in the bid. 3. Evaporator heat tape shall be factory installed and shall protect unit down to -20 F. Contractor shall wire separate power to energize heat tape and protect cooler while chiller is disconnected from the main power. 4. Provide shell and tube type evaporator, seamless or welded steel construction with cast iron or fabricated steel heads, seamless internally and externally finned copper tubes, roller expanded into tube sheets. 5. Provide ability to remove evaporator tubes from either end of the heat exchanger. 6. Provide water drain connection, vent and fittings for factory installed leaving water temperature control and low temperature cutout sensors. 7. Water connections shall be grooved pipe. Evaporator shall have only one entering and one leaving connection. If manufacturer provides 2 separate evaporators, contractor shall provide manifold and pressure gauges to ensure equal flow is provided to each evaporator. 8. Proof of flow shall be provided by the equipment manufacturer, mechanically installed and electrically wired, at the factory of origin.

F.

Condensers and Fans 1. Provide vertical discharge direct driven propeller type condenser fans with fan guard on discharge. Entire fan assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced and fan assembly shall be either painted or zinc coated steel. Fan guard shall be either PVC, chrome, or zinc coated. 2. Provide TEAO (Totally Enclosed Air Over) fan motors with permanently lubricated ball bearings. 3. Construct condenser coils of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Provide sub-cooling circuits. Air test under water to 506 psig. 4. Provide coil protection for shipping. Entire condenser coil shall be covered with heavy plastic to prevent inadvertent damage to coil during shipment or rigging.

G.

Enclosures/Starters 1. House components in a galvanized steel frame and mounted on welded HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 18 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. 3.

4.

5.

structural steel base. Hot-dip galvanized steel frame coating shall be Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) recognized as G90-U, UL guide number DTHW2. Unit panels and control panels shall be finished with a baked on powder paint. Control panel doors shall have door stays. Paint system shall meet the requirements for outdoor equipment of Federal Government Agencies. Mount starters and Terminal Blocks in weatherproof panel provided with full opening access doors. Factory mounted and wired disconnect should be a lockable, through-the-door type with an operating handle and clearly visible from outside of unit indicating if power is on or off. Casings fabricated from steel that do not have a Zinc coating conforming to ASTM A 123 or ASTM A525 shall be treated for the prevention of corrosion with a factory coating or paint system. The coating or paint system shall withstand 500 hours in a salt-spray fog test in accordance with ASTM B 117. Each specimen shall have a standard scribe mark as defined in ASTM D 1654. Upon completion of exposure, the coating or paint system shall be evaluated and rated in accordance with procedures A and B of ASTM D 1654. The rating of failure at the scribe mark shall be not less than six (average creepage not greater than 1/8 inch). The rating of the unscribed area shall not be less than ten (no failure). Thickness of coating or paint system on the actual equipment shall be identical to that on the test specimens with respect to materials, conditions of application, and dry-film thickness. For each compressor provide a wye-delta starter. Delta-Delta and Solid State Starters shall be unacceptable because they accomplish a smaller reduction in inrush than Y-delta.

H.

Refrigerant Circuit 1. All units shall have 2 refrigeration circuits to provide redundancy, each with one or two (manifolded) compressors on each circuit. Single refrigerant circuit chillers are not acceptable. 2. Provide for each refrigerant circuit: a. Liquid line shutoff valve. b. Suction Service Valve c. Filter (replaceable core type). d. Liquid line sight glass. e. Electronic or thermal expansion valve sized for maximum operating pressure. f. Charging valve. g. Discharge and oil line check valves. h. High side pressure relief valve. i. Full operating charge of HFC-134a and oil for packaged units only. Units with remote evaporator option selected will ship with an oil charge and a nitrogen holding charge. 3. Capacity Modulation: Provide capacity modulation that includes linear unloading to maintain close leaving water temperature control. Unit shall be capable of operation down to 20%.

I.

Controls 1. Chilled water temperature control shall be microprocessor-based, proportional and integral controller to show water and refrigerant temperature, refrigerant pressure, and diagnostics. This microprocessor-based controller is to be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer. Controls shall include the following readouts and diagnostics: a. Phase reversal/unbalance/single phasing and over/under voltage protection. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 19 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b. c. d.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Low chilled water temperature protection. High and low refrigerant pressure protection. Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water temperature. e. Condenser fan sequencing to automatically cycle fans in response to load, expansion valve pressure, condenser pressure, and differential pressure to optimize unit efficiency. f. Display diagnostics. g. Oil pressure control based off of maintaining system differential pressure. h. Compressors: Status (on/off), %RLA, anti-short cycle timer, and automatic compressor lead-lag. On chiller, mount weatherproof control panel, containing starters, power and control wiring, factory wired with terminal block power connection. Provide primary and secondary fused control power transformer and a single 115 volt 60 Hz single phase connection for evaporator freeze protection heaters. a. The unit controller shall utilize a microprocessor that will automatically take action to prevent unit shut down due to abnormal operating conditions associated with: evaporator refrigerant temperature, high condensing pressure and motor current overload. In the above case, the chiller will continue to run in an unloaded state, and will continue to produce some chilled water in an attempt to meet the cooling load. However, if the chiller reaches the trip-out limits, the chiller controls will take the chiller off line for protection, and a manual reset will be required. Once the "near-trip" condition is corrected, the chiller will return to normal operation and can then produce full load cooling. Provide the following safety controls with indicating lights or diagnostic readouts. a. Low chilled water temperature protection. b. High refrigerant pressure. c. Low oil flow protection. d. Loss of chilled water flow. e. Contact for remote emergency shutdown. f. Motor current overload. g. Phase reversal/unbalance/single phasing. h. Over/under voltage. i. Failure of water temperature sensor used by controller. j. Compressor status (on or off). Provide the following operating controls: a. Eight (8) or more step leaving chilled water temperature controller which cycles compressors and activates cylinder unloaders or slide valve based on PI algorithms. If manufacturer is unable to provide at least 8 steps of unloading, providing hot gas bypass shall be required. b. Five minute solid state anti-recycle timer to prevent compressor from short cycling. Compressor minimum stop-to-start time limit shall be 2 minutes. If a greater than 5 minute start-to-start, or greater than 2 minute stop-to-start timer is included, hot gas bypass shall be provided to insure accurate chilled water temperature control in light load applications. c. Chilled water pump output relay that closes when the chiller is given a signal to start. d. Load limit thermostat to limit compressor loading on high return water temperature to prevent nuisance trip outs. e. High ambient unloader pressure controller that unloads compressors to keep head pressure under control and help prevent high pressure HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 20 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

nuisance trip outs on days when outside ambient is above design. Compressor current sensing unloader unit that unloads compressors to help prevent current overload nuisance trip outs. g. Auto lead-lag functions that constantly even out run hours and compressor starts automatically. If contractor cannot provide this function then cycle counter and hour meter shall be provided for each compressor so owner can be instructed by the contractor on how to manually change lead-lag on compressors and even out compressor starts and running hours. h. Low ambient lockout control with adjustable set point. i. Condenser fan sequencing which automatically cycles fans in response to ambient, condensing pressure and expansion valve pressure differential thereby optimizing unit efficiency. Provide user interface on the front of the panel. If display is on the inside of the panel, then a control display access door shall be provided to allow access to the display without removal of panels. Provide user interface with a minimum of the following features: a. Leaving chilled water set point adjustment from LCD input b. Entering and leaving chilled water temperature output c. Percent RLA output for each compressor d. Pressure output of condenser for circuits one and two e. Pressure output of evaporator for circuits one and two f. Ambient temperature output g. Voltage output h. Current limit set point adjustment from LCD input. i. Remote leaving water temperature set point. j. Alarm indicating light and relay. Provide factory installed contact closure input for initiation of ice building. Ice building termination shall be based on an adjustable entering water temperature set point. All compressors shall run at full load during ice building. The chiller control system shall be capable of communicating with the building management system via BACnet MS/TP RS-485 or BACnet IP via ethernet. Any and all communication interface cards required shall be furnished by the chiller manufacturer. The chiller control panel shall provide leaving chilled water temperature reset based upon return water temperature. The chiller control panel shall provide an alarm relay output that shall energize whenever a fault requiring manual reset is detected by the panel. The chiller control panel shall provide input for leaving chilled water temperature set point based upon a 2-10VDC or 4-20mA signal from a building automation system. The chiller control panel shall provide input for chiller current limit set point based upon a 2-10VDC or 4-20mA signal from a building automation system. f.

6.

7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. J.

Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to ANSI/AHRI 550/590-2003 Standard for testing and certified rating of Water Chilling Packages using the Vapor Compression Cycle. 2. Conform to ANSI/UL 1995 code for construction of water chillers. In the event the unit is not UL approved, the manufacturer shall, at manufacturer expense, provide for a field inspection by an UL representative to verify conformance to UL standards. If necessary, contractor shall perform modifications to the unit to comply with UL, as directed by the UL representative. 3. Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 8 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for construction and testing of water chillers. 4. Conform to ANSI/ASHRAE 15 code for construction and operation of water HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 21 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

5.

2.8

chillers. Chiller must be built in an ISO 9001 classified facility.

K.

Verification of Capacity and Efficiency 1. The chiller (one of each size) shall be factory performance tested under full load conditions in an ambient controlled, AHRI 550/590-2003 approved test facility. The manufacturer shall supply a certified test report to confirm performance as specified. The performance test shall be conducted in accordance with AHRI Standard 550/590-2003 procedures and tolerances. a. The performance test shall be run with clean tubes in accordance with AHRI 550/590-2003 to include the following: b. Downward temperature adjustment shall be made to the design leaving evaporator water temperature to adjust from the design fouling to the clean tube condition. c. The factory test instrumentation shall be per AHRI 550/590-2003, and the calibration of all instrumentation shall be traceable to the National Institute of Technology. d. The owner or his representative shall be notified 14 days in advance to witness the factory performance test. If the owner or his representative desires to witness the performance test, all travel expenses will be the owner's responsibility. e. A certified test report of all data shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to completion of the project. The factory certified test report shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer's company. Preprinted certification will not be acceptable; certification shall be in the original.

L.

Manufacturer's Field Services 1. OEM Startup shall be performed by factory trained and authorized servicing technicians confirming equipment has been correctly installed and passes specification checklist prior to equipment becoming operational and covered under OEM warranty. 2. The manufacturer shall furnish complete submittal wiring diagrams of the package unit as applicable for field maintenance and service.

M.

Warranty 1. Provide a full parts warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from shipment, whichever occurs first. 2. A 5-year motor/transmission/compressor warranty shall be provided.

CONVECTORS A.

Furnish and install where shown on the drawings, convectors with inlet grilles and access doors of sizes, capacities and type indicated on the schedule. All convectors shall be complete with air vent chamber and key operated air cocks. Heating elements shall consist of seamless copper tubes, non-ferrous fins, cast iron headers and galvanized steel sideplates and tube supports. Each convector shall have installed in return line an approved balancing fitting with adjusting screw. All recessed convector casings on outside walls shall be entirely covered within recess with at least 1/2 inch insulation sheet securely secured to the casing. All exposed screw heads shall be tamperproof, Phillips, Allen or approved equal. All recessed and semi-recessed convector front panels shall be 14 gauge enameled steel and be flanged on four sides. The convectors shall be as manufactured by Vulcan, Sterling, Rosemex or Rittling.

B.

Convectors shall be factory finished. Color to be determined by Architect. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 22 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.9

DUCTLESS SPLIT FANCOIL SYSTEM A.

Provide a complete split system type ductless fancoil air conditioning system consisting of compact mounted packaged evaporator sections with matching air cooled outdoor condensing unit. The units shall be listed by the Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. All wiring to be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC). The units shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 210 and bear the ARI label. A full charge of R-410a for 25 feet of refrigerant tubing shall be provided in the condensing unit. System SEER shall meet or exceed 1992 Federal Standards. 1. The system components shall be provided by a single manufacturer to provide for an integrated, 100% compatible installation. System shall be as manufactured by Mitsubishi Company, Sanyo Company or Trane.

B.

The units shall have a manufacturer’s warranty for a period of one (1) year from date of installation. The compressor shall have a warranty of six (6) years from date of installation. If, during this period, any part should fail to function properly due to defects in workmanship or material, it shall be replaced or repaired at the site of installation.

C.

The indoor unit shall provide a total minimum cooling capacity as scheduled on the drawings. The units shall have a SEER rating as indicated on the equipment schedule at ARI Standard conditions. The system net minimum total cooling capacity shall be rated at 67 degrees FDB indoor and 95 degrees FDB air entering the outdoor coil.

D.

The indoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and wired. The casing shall be of galvanized sheet steel, phosphatized, bonderized and finished in a baked enamel white finish. 1. The evaporator fan shall be a high performance forward curve line flow fan direct driven by a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall run on permanently lubricated bearings. 2. An adjustable change vane shall be provided with the ability to direct the air flow from horizontal to vertical. An adjustable guide vane shall be provided to manually change the air direction from left to right. 3. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with smooth plate fins bonded to copper tubing. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. All tube joints shall be brazed with phoscopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested to 450 psig at the factory. 4. An insulated condensate pan with drain shall be provided under the coil.

E.

The control system shall consist of multiple microprocessor sections. One microprocessor shall be factory wired and located within each indoor unit. It shall have the capability of sensing room temperature and indoor coil temperature; receive and process commands from the remote controller; and control the outdoor unit. The Contractor shall be responsible for required interlock wiring. 1. The microprocessor within the wall mounted remote controller shall display setpoint; provide two (2) manually selected modes of cooling, normal and economy operation at 2 degrees above setpoint; night set back operation of 4 degrees above setpoint; and manual or automatic fan speed control. 2. The optimum temperature shall be memorized for immediate recall as the system default setpoint whenever the system is used again. 3. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored after power interruption. 4. Automatic fan speed control shall be based upon the temperature difference between setpoint and room temperature maintaining lowest speed possible. 5.

A remote control unit shall be wireless, using infrared, line of sight for control of system and shall include automatic ON/OFF timer; liquid crystal display, and temperature reset capability. Furnish and install, in the field, on the wall, a HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 23 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

F.

2.10

remote control unit holder. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. The casing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, phosphatized, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. The unit shall be furnished with direct drive, propeller type fans arranged for horizontal discharge. 1. The motor shall have inherent protection, be of the permanently lubricated type and resiliently mounted for quiet operation. 2. The fans shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. 3. Multiple compressors shall be provided, one for each indoor evaporator fancoil unit. The compressors shall be of the high performance rotary type with accumulator and internal thermal overloads. The compressors shall be mounted so as to avoid the transmission of vibration. 4. The refrigeration system shall have the capability to operate with maximum height difference of 25 feet and overall refrigerant tubing length of 160 linear feet between indoor and outdoor sections without the need for line size changes, traps, or additional oil. Refrigerant flow from the condenser to be controlled by means of capillary tubes. 5. The condenser coil shall be non-ferrous construction with smooth plate fins bonded to copper tubing. The coil shall be protected with an internal metal guard finish to match unit panels. 6. The unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the matching indoor units.

ENERGY RECOVERY UNIT (ERU-1 through ERU-8) A.

Manufacturers: Units shall be as manufactured by Annexair, Hakkon, Seasons Four, or approved equal.

B.

General: 1. Unit shall be factory fabricated. Unit manufacturer shall be responsible for provisions of fans, dampers, coils and all other unit and plenum components as specified in this section or other sections of this division and performance characteristics as shown in schedules or on drawings. Contractor designed or assembled air handling units shall not be acceptable or considered as equal. 2. Unit shall be factory-fabricated for shipping and field assembly by experienced manufacturer of large custom air handling units that maintains engineering and production staff. a. Provide proof of credentials of manufacturer’s staff. 3. Shop drawings shall be subject to approval of the Owner and Architect. 4. Certify conformance with performance requirements specified and shown on Drawings. 5. Provide necessary appurtenances to perform as specified, whether or not expressly required by Contract Documents mentioned herein in conformance with good trade practice, as determined by Architect. 6. The factory modular units shall be constructed on a roof curb or steel dunnage provided under other sections. Mechanical Division Contractor shall carefully coordinate dimensions of air handling unit with framework or curb dimensions. 7. Unit manufacturer shall seal any casing penetrations made in field for piping, conduit, tubing and equipment installed under other sections. Advise manufacturer in advance of required field penetrations of casing.

C.

Testing: 1. Test to ensure structural integrity, design suitability under simulated operating HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 24 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. 3.

conditions, systems operation and minimum vibration levels as specified. Certify that unit complies with design intent and Contract Documents. Manufacturer shall be responsible for correcting any operating deficiencies found during the unit startup after installation. Prior to shipping the following tests shall be performed: a. Pressure test water coils if coil manufacturer has not already performed pressure test, and piping. b.

c. d.

Unit operation and vibration analysis. Operate fans at design RPM, set fan drive and conduct complete vibration spectrum as specified. Fan, motor, drive and base assembly, vibration shall be brought to within specified levels. Check motor and drive vibration with fan as a completed assembly. Energize electrical devices to ensure operational integrity prior to shipment. Replace non-functioning items. Submit housing panel acoustical, structural and physical properties performance test data before shipment from independent recognized test laboratory.

D.

Unit shall comprise of, but not limited to, AHU sections shown on drawings and the following list: 1. Double wall cabinet. 2. Hot water heating coil section 3. Chilled water cooling coil section 4. Pre Filter section 5. Supply air fan section. 6. Intake section with dampers. 7. Fan motors compatible with variable frequency drives 8. Variable frequency drives for fan motors, condenser fans and compressors. 9. Outside air intake plenum 10 Exhaust air fan section. 11. Rotary enthalpy energy recovery wheel section 12. Return section with dampers.

E.

Costs associated with dimensional, performance or other deviations from the specified equipment, including engineering costs to evaluate such deviations, shall be paid by the contractor.

F.

The unit(s) shall be installed in strict accordance with the specifications. Unit(s) shall be complete with all components and accessories as specified. All units shall be factory assembled, internally wired, and 100% run tested to check operation, fan and blower rotation and control sequence before leaving the factory. Wiring internal to the unit shall be numbered for simplified identification. Units shall be ETL listed and labeled, classified in accordance with ANSI-UL 1995 / CAN/CSA C22.2 No.236. Units shall be rated and ETL listed for electric heaters with single point power connection for the entire unit, up to 100kW.

G.

Quality Assurance: 1. All unit(s) shall be factory run tested before shipping. A proof copy of the test shall be placed in the unit electrical power & control panel. Unit(s) shall bear the ETL label, tested in accordance to UL 1995. Electrical components shall be UL listed; fans shall be tested in an AMCA certified laboratory; insulation shall comply with NFPA 90A; coils shall tested in accordance to ARI 410 and filters shall be tested in accordance to ASHRAE 52. The unit manufacturer shall have an independent testing agency test the air leakage, panel deflection and sound HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 25 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

pressure levels for a typical unit providing at minimum the supply airflow of units in question and not exceeding 20,000 CFM. The air leakage of the unit(s) shall not exceed 1% at 10” inches H2O positive static pressure and a copy of the report must be submitted upon request. Unit shall be constructed to limit frame and panel deflection to 1/250th of the panel length at 10” inches H2O positive static pressure and a copy of the report must be submitted upon request. The unit shall also be tested in accordance with ANSI S12.34-1998 and instrumentation used must be in compliance with the requirements of AMCA 300 for sound readings. The sound tests conducted shall report overall sound power and pressure readings for supply air outlet, return air inlet and casing radiated. H.

Housing: 1. The unit housing shall be constructed from a frame, base and panel assembly. Unit shall be completely factory assembled and shipped in one piece as shown on drawings. The frame shall consist of robust injection molded corners and extruded thermally broken aluminum profiles; welded together for reinforcement. Base structure shall be fully welded with formed heavy gauge galvanized steel and have integral lifting lugs which can be removed once the unit is installed. “Thermo-composite” panels shall be mechanically fastened to the base structure. Unit casing must be guaranteed to have no exterior condensation at interior AHU temperatures down to 43F while unit exterior conditions are maintained at 95 F dry bulb / 85 F wet bulb. 2. All roof, floor and wall panels shall be made from “thermo-composite” panels, with an aluminum interior and exterior liner. All panels and access doors shall be 2” thick double wall construction with R14 foam insulation, and Greenguard certified®. The panels shall be capable of withstanding air pressure up to 10” w.c with 1/16” panel deflection. Panels shall be fastened from the interior and gasketed along the frame to reduce thermal transmission. Fixed panels shall be removable without affecting the housing integrity. a. Alternate construction: All roof and wall panels shall be made from aluminum, minimum. 12 Ga Aluminum Exterior wall and 22 Ga Steel Metal Liner. All panels and access doors shall be double wall construction with (R-12) two-inch thick, minimum 3.0 pcf polyisocyanurate foam insulation. All casing panels and frame must be provided with true thermal break. Base shall be fully welded with formed heavy-gauge galvanized steel with removable integral lifting lugs. .125” Aluminum Checkerplate Floor – Fully Welded, capable of holding 1.5” of water. 6” channel base rail. Floor shall be aluminum, minimum .063”, mechanically fastened to the base with minimum (R12) two-inch thick polyisocyanurate foam insulation and 22ga Galvanized Steel metal under liner.

  1.

2.

Casing system shall be guaranteed to assure the owner that system capacity, performance, and cleanliness standards specified are not compromised. The panels shall be tested in accordance with SMACNA and ASHRAE 111 to have a deflection of no more than L/1150 at 10’’ and withstand air pressures up to 8” w.c. Leakage to be guaranteed at no more than 1% of the design volume at 11/2 times the design operating pressure or 30 CFM, whichever is greater. All casing walls shall be of panel construction, including the fan discharge walls, mixing section walls. Access doors shall be provided to all major components to facilitate quick and easy access. Access doors are to be provided with open guard door locks to lock the door in the open position for safe access in windy conditions. All access door(s) shall have Allegis type latches and nylon type hinges designed to open HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 26 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3. 4. 5.

8.

180 degrees. Doors shall open against air pressure as indicated on drawings. Removable panels provided for equipment pull out for coil(s) and heat exchanger(s) shall have key tooled threaded insert fasteners, and have at least one fixed handle on the outside. Access doors shall be sealed with a full “UShaped” gasket for superior air tightness along the door edge. Bulb type gaskets shall not be acceptable since they do not return to their original form once compressed. The airflow separation wall between the outside air intake and exhaust air outlet shall be one inch double wall “thermo-composite” panels insulated with minimum R7 foam insulation and Greenguard certified®.) All roof and side wall seams shall be positively sealed to prevent water and air leakage. Outdoor units shall have a rain gutter above each access door and a watertight roof shall be provided with a white TPO UV-reflective membrane. The entire exterior will be finished with (2) two coats of acrylic urethane enamel, manufacturer standard color. Paint shall pass ASTM B117 3000-hour salt fog resistance test and ASTM D4585 3000-hour moisture condensation resistance test. Floor openings shall be covered with 1” fiberglass safety walk-on gratings. Air handler unit casing shall be provided with a lifetime warranty against corrosion resistance under normal use.

I.

Enthalpy Wheel 1. Enthalpy Wheel shall recover both sensible and latent heat. The matrix shall be constructed from corrugated aluminum and specifically treated and coated with silica gel desiccant to assist and enhance latent heat transfer. Segmented wheel shall be provided on diameter sizes above 96”. Seals shall be full contact, low bleed type, made from dual band Ultra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene. Any seal that is non-contact is not to be considered a seal and will not acceptable. Labyrinth type seals do not operate properly under different air stream pressures therefore shall not be acceptable in any circumstances. Drive system shall be operated by a fractional horsepower motor (maximum 1 HP), reducing gear-box, pulley and v-belt. Belts shall be made of multi-link high-tech urethane/polyester composite. The wheel bearing shall be permanently sealed and press fitted into the wheel matrix for long life operation. A double purge sector (2 x 5º) shall be factory installed to reduce cross contamination to under 0.04%. Frost control prevention shall be accounted for if outdoor air temperatures are below 10 degrees F at equal airflows and return relative humidity below 30%. Manufacturer shall provide and wire a VFD to control wheel speed. ATC shall modulate wheel speed to accomplish frost control per manufacturer’s recommendation. Other methods of frost control will not be considered for this application. Wheel speed shall not rotate faster than 20 rpm. Any rotational speed above 20 rpm will be unacceptable. Media cleaning shall be accomplished with any of the following methods: compressed air, low pressure steam, hot water or light detergent without degrading the latent recovery. a. Warranty: A standard 5-year material and labor warranty covering all materials supplied and installed.

J.

Fans 1.

The fans shall be carefully positioned and installed at an optimal distance to respect uniform airflow across the heat exchanger & coil(s). a. Plug Fans: Fans shall be direct drive radial centrifugal fans with free running impeller. No fan belts will be acceptable for this application. Fans shall be compact, optimized and construction made of galvanized sheet steel with backward curved 7-blade high efficiency impeller, protected by an epoxy powder coating. To reduce vibration, the impeller HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 27 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b. c.

K.

shall be balanced with hub to an admissible vibration severity of less than 2.8 mm/s in conformity with DIN ISO 14694 and proof shall be supplied for each individual impeller. Tests shall be made according to DIN ISO 1940 Part 1, quality of balancing G2.5/6.3. The single inlet shall be mounted onto constant speed direct drive motor, equipped with an air flow optimized inlet cone from galvanized sheet steel. Fans shall have maintenance free ball bearings, closed on both sides, sealed for life. Fans shall be completely certified as per ISO 5801 and in accordance to AMCA standards. Fans will require to be operated by a Variable speed drive. Plug fan shall come equipped with guard grills for the air intake side. The unit manufacturer shall provide flexible connection between fan and fan wall. Flex connection material shall be flame retardant fabric suitable for intended use meeting the requirements of NFPA 90A. The fan and motor shall be factory-mounted on a welded structural steel spring type vibration base. The base shall be mounted on stable / adjustable, seismically restrained (seismic zone 2) isolators with 2” maximum deflection rating. Spring efficiency to be not less than 98%.

Fan Motors 1. The fan motors shall meet NEMA standard dimensions and comply with the Energy policy Act of 1997. Motors shall have high efficiencies with low noise and vibration output. Motors shall be certified and built in accordance to ISO 9001 quality control system. 2. Motors shall be 1750 or 3600 RPM, 460V/3ph/60 Hz as scheduled and as per the following: a. Motor shall be premium efficient, ODP enclosure, with cast iron housing and end bells. b. Motor shall be of HP as listed on schedule and be selected for a minimum of 10% over calculated BHP. The motor service factor shall be a minimum of 1.15. c. Motor shall be designed for continuous duty operation, NEMA Design B with Class F insulation. d. The motor shall be suitable for operating with variable frequency drives without undue noise, vibration or deterioration of reliability and life. 1)

e. f. g. h. i.

A shaft grounding brush kit will be provided to prevent electrical damage to motor bearings by safely channeling harmful shaft currents to ground.

Provide stainless steel nameplate indicating the following: NEMA efficiency index nominal efficient (MB1-12.53BO). AFBMA bearing numbers. Lubrication instructions. Acceptable motor manufacturers: Reliance, General Electric, Baldor

L.

Fan Airflow Balancing 1. Provide the EZ Balancer fan air flow measurement and control system with fan inlet bell air flow measuring taps, electronic controller with digital display of cfm for each fan and transducer.

M.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) 1. The VFD shall use Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) technology to convert three phase input power to coded Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) output. The VFD shall be equipped with easy access function for the most HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 28 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

N.

Filters 1. Pre-Filters (Maxi Pleat 2” MERV 8 (25-30%)) a. Filters shall be factory installed upstream of the heat exchanger and coils, in both airstreams. The air filters shall be Filtration Lab’s Maxi-60 MERV 8. Each filter consist of 100% synthetic media, expanded metal on the downstream and enclosing with high wet-strength beverage board with diagonal support bonded on air entering and air exiting side of each pleat. MERV 7 model 415 FILTERS, u.l. class 2 are rated as per ashrae test 52.2.1999 at 55% efficiency initial (based on Minimum Average Efficiency) at 3-10 microns. The model 415 could be operated at 500 fpm, surface area 17.6 FT2 of media based on 24 x 24 x 2 initial static pressure at 0.28” final will be 1”. Filters shall be placed in a completely sealed, galvanized holding frame with quick release latches for easy replacement. 2. Final (Mega-Pak 4” MERV 13 (85%) a. Filters shall be factory installed where shown on the drawings. The air filters shall be Filtration Lab’s Mega-Pak MERV 13. Each filter shall consist of 100% synthetic media, expanded metal on the downstream and enclosing frame shall be constructed of a rigid galvanized steel to provide a durable housing for the filter pack. The filter shall have a steel reinforced diagonal support braces affixed on both sides of the filter and it shall have plastic fingers for affixed on both sides of the media pack to control spacing as well to prevent the pleat rows from collapsing one upon the other. 3.

O.

frequently used parameters in HVAC applications. The VFD keypad shall have door mounted status indicators. The VFD shall have monitoring functions to monitor VFD during motor operation. The VFD shall have a carrier frequency that is able to switch the IGBT at 15 kHz. The power terminal strip shall have at least (8) eight digital programmable input terminals. The VFD shall also have programmable output terminals. The VFD shall have 4-20mA analog output terminals that are fully programmable. The VFD shall have the ability to retry automatically after a fault. In the event of a momentary power failure the VFD shall read the inverter speed and direction of a coasting motor and shall restart the motor smoothly. The drive shall have electronic thermal protection settings to protect the motor. The VFD shall have PID function for constant flow applications. The VFD manufacturer shall provide at no charge phone support on VFD. In addition to that, every VFD smaller than 20 hp shall be available in either extender box or integrated enclosure configuration. VFD larger than 20 hp shall be mounted in an integrated enclosure only including the power unit, contactors, relays, and all specified accessories. VFD’s shall not have by-pass. Variable frequency drives shall be as manufactured by ABB, Mitsubishi, CutlerHammer or approved equal. Per the design intent, all VFD’s utilized on this project for HVAC use shall be provided by one manufacturer. ERU manufacturer shall coordinate VFD selection with HVAC sub-contractor.

Filter Gauge a. Unit manufacturer shall provide and install a Dwyer series 2000 magnehelic gauge complete with stainless steel static pressure tips and accessories for indicating the operating pressure drop of each filter bank. Indicating range of gauge shall be selected at two times the final resistance of the filter bank. The filter gauge shall be mounted on the unit exterior.

Dampers HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 29 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.

2.

3. 4.

Dampers shall be installed where shown on the drawings. Dampers shall be low leak type with rubber edges, opposed or parallel blades, and constructed from extruded aluminum. Galvanized dampers will not be acceptable. The exhaust air outlet shall have a standard aluminum gravity type damper, unless otherwise noted below. Dampers shall be installed in the following compartments with linkage rod for actuators: a. Outdoor air intake. b. Return/Recirculation air damper c. Exhaust outlet d. Enthalpy wheel bypass dampers (ERU-7&8 only) Actuators shall be 24V factory installed; two-position or modulating type. All actuators shall have spring return mechanism and auxiliary switches. Dampers will be installed in the failed close position unless otherwise noted.

P.

Hot Water Heating Coils 1. Hot water coils shall have 5/8” O.D., 0.035” thick copper tubes with helically wound 0.008” thick aluminum fins by Aerofin, Heatcraft or Marlo. a. Casing shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel. b. Headers shall be steel barrels with vents, drains, and serpentine continuous tube design, suitable for 200 psi working pressure. c. Coil fins shall be flat or rippled fin design, .0075” aluminum. Air pressure drop scheduled shall not be exceeded. 2. Coils shall be housed in factory-fabricated frame independent of unit casing. Coil frames shall be 12-gauge stainless steel. a. Coil frames shall support coil sections independently allowing coil to be removed through exterior unit casing, normal to direction of air flow, without disturbing other coil sections. b. Coil casing shall have removable panel on exterior side. 3. All coil pipe connections shall be individually extended through the unit casing wall. Pipe headers and all piping specialties are to be provided in the field by the Contractor. Drain and vent connections shall be piped with ball valves and hose bibs for the drain. 4. Coils shall be tested to 250 psig under water and shall be guaranteed for 200 psig working pressure.

Q.

Chilled Water Cooling Coils 1. Chilled water coils shall have 5/8” O.D., 0.035” thick copper tubes with 0.008” by Aerofin, Heatcraft or Marlo. a. Casing shall be continuous stainless steel. b. Headers shall be steel barrels with vents, drains, and serpentine continuous tube design, suitable for 200 psi working pressure. Headers shall have intruded tube holes to provide a large brazing surface for maximum strength and inherent flexibility. c. Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. 2. Coils shall be housed in factory-fabricated frame independent of unit casing. Coil frames shall be 12-gauge stainless steel. a. Coil frames shall support coil sections independently allowing coil to be removed through exterior unit casing, normal to direction of air flow, without disturbing other coil sections. b. Coil casing shall have removable panel on exterior side. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 30 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3. 4.

5. 6.

Each coil tier shall have a welded 16-gauge stainless steel condensate drain pan extending at least 6” in direction of air flow individually piped to unit pan. Provide a minimum pan depth of 3”. Pans shall be double sloped IAQ type. All coil pipe connections shall be individually extended through the unit casing wall. Pipe headers and all piping specialties are to be provided in the field by the Contractor. Drain and vent connections shall be piped with ball valves and hose bibs for the drain. Coils shall be tested to 250 psig under water and shall be guaranteed for 200 psig working pressure. All coils shall be certified in accordance with ARI standard 410.

R.

Roof Curb 1. An insulated, pre-fabricated seismic roof curb shall be provided and shipped knocked down. The roof curb will be made of 16-gauge galvanized steel with 4” flanges, minimum 24” high with a factory installed 2” x 3” wood nailer strip.

S.

Electrical 1. All electrical and control components shall be wired into a NEMA4 electrical panel and shall be single point power connection. 2. Electrical panel shall include: a. High & low voltage wiring with fuse protection b. All variable frequency drives c. 24 Volt transformers d. Lockable non-fused disconnect switch e. Laminated electrical, controls and refrigeration diagrams f. Air vent to evacuate excess heat g. A separate wiring pipe chase for low voltage and high voltage h. A drain shall be included in the electrical compartment. 3. Any motors controlled by a VFD shall be wired without the use of contactors and overloads. 4. A UV resistant unit nameplate shall describe unit weight, all electrical requirements, such as FLA, MCA, MOP, and laminated one on the front door and one inside the electrical service compartment. 5. All high voltage wiring shall be copper type tray cable, certified UL1277. Aluminum wiring is not acceptable. All high and low voltage connections shall have water tight connectors.

T.

Controls 1. All controls to be by ATC sub-contractor.

U.

Service Power & Lighting 1. GFI, lights and switches shall be factory installed and wired to a common junction box. A separate power connection 120/1 will be required (powered by others). 2. Marine Light a. A marine light shall be included in the supply fan compartment.

V.

Warranty 1. Annexair warrants each product to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal and proper use, and will within twelve (12) months from date of start-up and not exceed eighteen (18) months from shipment, repair or replace any part which, when returned to our factory transportation charges prepaid, and upon inspection by Annexair, proves to be defective. This warranty does not include any labor or service charges that occur under this warranty. Minimum (5) five year enthalpy wheel warranty shall be provided, parts only – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 31 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. W.

Equipment Start-up 1. The equipment start-up and operational check out is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor who purchased the equipment and associated personnel responsible for its operation. Manufacturer must provide a factory-trained technician who will provide Start-Up Supervision. A written request for Start-Up Supervision must be received a minimum of 2 weeks before expected start-up date in order to schedule it. The mechanical contractor must supply personnel, tools, gauges and instruments to run the equipment. The personnel responsible for the operation of the equipment must be present for the start-up. 2. The energy recovery unit start-up technician shall provide detailed start-up reports summarizing the start-up procedures and results.

X.

Weather Hoods 1. The outdoor air hood shall be designed with a 4” extruded aluminum louver, bird screen and a plenum enclosure with drain holes. The louver blades shall be drainable type with a maximum 45 degree angle and curved with integral rain baffle. The louver design shall not allow more than 0.03 oz/ft2 water penetration when tested in accordance to AMCA 500. The pressure drop of the complete hood assembly shall not exceed 0.05” wc at a maximum 450 fpm. 2. Pre-filter rack system shall be installed within the weather hood enclosure to prevent outdoor air dust and debris from entering the damper and unit casing plenum. Filter access in the hood shall be accomplished via the louver that is installed with a stainless steel piano hinge and spring loaded latch. No tools or ladders shall be required to access the pre-filters in the weather hood assembly. 3. The exhaust air outlet louvers shall be 2” extruded aluminum, with nonrestricting blade design and bird screen. OA Airflow Balancing and Monitoring Package 1. An IAQ-TEK probe, transducer and monitor shall be provided and installed in the outside air intake hood to measure OA airflow. Startup and balancing shall be done by the controls contractor.

Y.

2.11

labor not included. The installing contractor must be responsible for warranty service and maintenance after the equipment is placed into operation.

EXPANSION JOINTS A.

Expansion joints shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Advanced Thermal Systems, ADSCO Division of Yube Industries or approved equal.

B.

Expansion joints shall have internal and external guides, fabricated steel body with 150 psig service ratings, single or double slide arrangement to suit the installation location. Bases shall be provided for mounting on framing or to other framing structure. Joints shall have flanged pipe ends on all sizes, polished duplex chrome/nickel plated sleeve sections and entire unit shall be provided with external packing application connections for addition of lubricant under full line pressure. Provide proper packing for both hot and cold lines, together with sufficient spare material and applicator for one year period.

C.

Provide guides for expansion joints on the movement side of each expansion joint. Two guides shall be provided prior to each moveable section of expansion joint. Guides shall be ADSCO Model H, for high temperature and Model H-1TB for low temperature lines. Guides shall be located as recommended by the expansion joint supplier for his equipment to minimize lateral misalignment. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 32 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

D. 2.12

2.13

2.14

Provide fintube compensators where indicated on the drawings or every 50 feet on straight fintube runs. Compensators shall be enclosed bellows type with internal guides.

EXPANSION TANKS A.

Expansion tanks shall be of the types, sizes and capacities indicated on the drawings. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Taco, Bell and Gossett or Thrush.

B.

Equipment shall be designed for 125 psig ASME working pressure and so labeled. Tanks shall be provided with gauge glass with tricocks and drain, tank drain, charging valve and mounting saddles or cradles.

C.

Bladder-type tanks shall be designed for 125 psig ASME working pressure and be so labeled. Tanks shall be provided with tank drain, charging valve, replaceable bladder, lift ring and base support or cradle. Acceptance capacity shall be the capacity scheduled

FANS (CENTRIFUGAL) A.

Centrifugal fans mounted in ceiling, wall or with inline duct configuration shall be of the sizes and capacities indicated on the drawings. Fans shall be centrifugal type manufactured by Cook, Greenheck, Acme or Penn Ventilator Company.

B.

Fans shall be provided with damper and adapter kit for installing fan with an inline arrangement, where applicable a wall vent, or roof vent cap for installation on an insulated curb provided by the HVAC Contractor.

C.

Provide solid state controller to allow full range control of fan speed.

FANS (DESTRATIFICATION) A.

Provide as shown on the plans, non-power overloading ceiling mounted destratification fan(s). Fan(s) shall be of the specified size, arrangement and capacity. Fan(s) having tip velocities greater or requiring horsepower greater than those identified as the Project Standard will not be acceptable.

B.

The fans shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seals for both air and sound performance. Fan ratings shall be based upon tests performed in strict accordance with AMCA Standard 210-67 test code for air moving devices. Each fan shall carry near the manufacturer’s nameplate, the seal authorized by AMCA indicating that ratings are certified. Fans not bearing this seal will not be acceptable.

C.

Each fan shall have tagging identification engraved on the manufacturer’s nameplate. Units shall be manufactured by Leading Edge, Cook or Peerless.

D.

Propeller Criteria: 1. Blades shall be constructed of die formed, aerodynamically contoured steel. Each blade shall have a high tensile steel bracket spot welded in a minimum three (3) point suspension formation, ground smooth following assembly. Bracket shall anchor its blade to the motor rotor assembly using a minimum of two (2) machine screws to support maintainability. 2. Blades shall be finished in epoxy enamel finish over electro-statically applied epoxy powder primer. Blade sets shall be weight matched to within two (2) grams tolerance and shall be statically and dynamically balanced following the HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 33 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

coating and assembly processes. Fans to be installed less than ten feet (10’) above the floor shall have rolled edge blades a minimum of 3/16 inches in thickness in conformance with U.L. Standard 507.

E.

Motor Criteria: 1. Each fan motor shall be sized to drive its fan. Whenever starting requirements exceed operating requirements, the motor shall be selected large enough to start the fan without overheating. 2. No motor shall operate within the service factor range. 3. Motor shall be of the heavy duty, fixed shaft-rotating housing type carefully matched to the fan load. Motor shall be premium efficiency, 0.91 minimum power factor, poly-phase or single phase as identified on the drawings. 4. Motor shall be suitable for use with solid state motor speed controllers. Provide embedded automatic-reset type thermal overload protection. Fans to be so labeled in accordance with U.L. Standard 507. 5. Motor shaft shall be steel bar rod, cold-drawn, minimum 5/8 inches in diameter. Shaft shall incorporate the necessary holes to incorporate down-rod assembly mounting and secondary safety cable mounting simultaneously.

F.

Bearings: 1. Bearings shall be of the self-aligning, heavy duty, permanently sealed and greased chrome steel ball type. 2. The bearings shall be of sufficient size and quality to have AFBMA B50 rated lives in excess of 100,000 hours at maximum cataloged fan operating conditions.

G.

Motor rotor/housing assemblies shall be of formed steel construction, deep drawn to provide air space for motor heat dissipation. Housing shall be finished in epoxy enamel finish over electro-statically applied epoxy powder primer.

H.

Down-rod Assembly: 1. Down-rod assembly shall consist of 3/4 inch nominal outer diameter steel pipe finished in epoxy enamel finish over electro-statically applied epoxy powder primer. 2. Upper shackle shall secure directly to the down-rod, shall consist of nominal 1/8 inch thick formed, plated steel, and shall be rubber bushed to provide a resilient floating suspension for the mounting hook. 3. Lower yoke shall secure directly to the down-rod and shall consist of nominal 1/8 inch thick formed, plated steel. Yoke shall provide primary support directly to the motor shaft and shall provide space for the secondary support cabling. Fan accessories shall include: 1. Factory installed secondary support assembly connected to motor shaft with minimum six (6) feet of 1/8 inch 7x7 galvanized cable. Rated breaking strength shall be 920 lbs. minimum. 2. Totally enclosing fan guard of twelve (minimum) spoke across bar construction: a. Radial Bars – 5 gauge. b. Circumferential Bars – 5 gauge on three (3) inch centers. c. Heavy duty 16 gauge mounting brackets shall secure the fan guard assembly directly to the fan down rod assembly. Provide a secondary support assembly connected to fan guard mounting brackets with minimum six (6) feet of 3/32 inch 7x7 galvanized cable. Rated breaking strength shall be 920 lbs. minimum. 3. U.L. listed solid state motor speed controller shall incorporate infinite speed control with positive “Off” position. Controller shall incorporate 8 ampere rated (minimum triacs and solid copper wire toroidal choke-type RFI suppression

I.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 34 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

circuitry. 2.15

FANS (ROOF) A.

Roof exhaust fans shall be of the centrifugal belt-driven or direct-drive type as indicated on drawings. Fans shall be of capacities and characteristics as scheduled on drawings and specified herein. Fans shall be as manufactured by Greenheck, Cook or Penn Ventilator Company.

B.

Construction of the fan housing shall be of heavy-gauge aluminum.

C.

All spun parts shall have a rolled bead for added rigidity and shall be specially spun so as to seal the pores of the aluminum providing greater resistance against oxidation and deterioration.

D.

The fan wheel shall be all-aluminum of the centrifugal blower type featuring backwardinclined blades and a tapered inlet shroud. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Inlet cone shall be aluminum and of the centrifugal blower type. Motor and drives shall be enclosed in a weathertight compartment, separate from the exhaust air stream. Air for cooling the motor shall be supplied to the motor compartment by way of an air passage from an area free of contaminated exhaust fumes. Motors shall be of the duty, permanently lubricated, sealed ball-bearing type. Drives shall be sized for 165 percent of motor horsepower capabilities and of the cast-iron type, keyed to the fan and motor shafts. Variable pitch drives shall be standard. Fan shall be of steel construction, turned, ground, and polished to precise tolerances in relationship to the hub and bearings. Drive belts shall be of the oil-resistant, non-static, non-sparking type with life expectancy of 24,000 hours.

E.

Bearings shall be flanged and of the permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, ballbearing type capable of over 200,000 hours bearing life. The entire drive assembly and wheel shall be removable as a complete unit, from the support structure without disassembling the external fan housing. The complete drive assembly shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolation.

F.

Direct drive units shall be of identical construction as belt drive units, except for drives, belts, and fan shaft bearings.

2.16

G.

Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA ratings seal for air and sound performance.

H.

Fans shall be furnished with pre-fabricated 18 inch high roof curbs. Roof curbs shall have 2 inch raised cant strip and wood nailer. Curb shall be aluminum construction with all seams continuously welded the entire length. Curbs shall meet the one “G” acceleration criteria. Fans shall be furnished with automatic motor operated damper.

I.

Provide solid state speed controller as a disconnect for direct drive fans, pre-wired and mounted. Provide pre-wired and mounted disconnect switch on belt drive fans.

FAN (FUME HOOD EXHAUST) A.

General 1. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 Lb/ft3). 2. Fans selected shall be capable of accommodating static pressure and flow variations of +/-15% of scheduled values. 3. Each fan shall be belt driven. 4. Fans to be equipped with lifting lugs. 5. Fan to be coated steel with a minimum of 4 mils of Hi-Pro Polyester Resin. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 35 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

6. 7.

Color to be gray. Fasteners to be stainless steel. Fan assembly shall be designed for a minimum of 125 MPH wind loading, without the use of guy wires.

B.

Fan Housing and Outlet 1. Fan housing to be aerodynamically designed with high-efficiency inlet, engineered to reduce incoming air turbulence. 2. Fan housing shall be welded steel with a minimum of 4 mils of Hi-Pro Polyester Resin. No uncoated metal fan parts shall be acceptable. 3. Fan housings that are fabricated of polypropylene or fiberglass that have lower mechanical properties than steel, have rough interior surfaces in which corrosive, hazardous compounds can collect, and / or which chalk and structurally degrade due to the UV component of the sunlight shall not be acceptable. 4. A high velocity conical discharge nozzle shall be supplied by the fan manufacturer and be designed to efficiently handle an outlet velocity of up to 6000 FPM. Discharge stack caps or hinged covers, impeding exhaust flow shall not be permitted. 5. Provide housing drain for removal of rain and condensation. 6. A bolted and gasketed access door shall be supplied in the fan housing allowing for impeller inspection or removal of impeller, shaft and bearings without removal of the fan housing. 7. Standard finish color to be gray.

C.

Fan Impeller 1. Fan impeller shall be centrifugal, backward inclined, with non-stall characteristics. The impeller shall be electronically balanced both statically and dynamically per AMCA Standard 204. 2. Fan impeller shall be manufactured of aluminum (AMCA type B spark resistant), fully welded and coated with a minimum of 4 mils of Hi-Pro Polyester resin.

D.

Fan Bypass Air Plenum 1. For constant volume systems, the fan shall be connected directly to the exhaust duct without the need of a bypass air plenum. 2. Fan designs that use inlet flexible connectors that can leak causing loss of lab exhaust shall not be accepted. 3. A fan isolation damper, either gravity back draft or two position actuated, fabricated of steel or aluminum and coated with minimum 4 mils of Hi-Pro Polyester resin, electro-statically applied and baked, shall be provided as shown on the project documents. 4. Blower / Plenum vibration isolation shall be limited to neoprene / cork vibration pads.

E.

Fan Motors and Drive 1. Motors to be premium efficiency, standard NEMA frame, TEFC with a 1.15 service factor. A factory mounted NEMA 3R disconnect switch shall be provided for each fan. Motor maintenance shall be accomplished without fan impeller removal or requiring maintenance personnel to access the contaminated exhaust components. 2. Drive belts and sheaves shall be sized for 150% of the motor horsepower, and shall be readily and easily accessible for service, if required. Drive shall consist of a minimum of two belts under all circumstances. 3. Shaft to be polished and ground steel. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 36 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4.

5. F.

2.17

Fan shaft bearings shall be Air Handling Quality, ball or roller pillow block type and be sized for an L-10 life of no less than 100,000 hours. Bearings shall be fixed to the fan shaft using concentric mounting locking collars, which reduce vibration, increase service life, and improve serviceability. Bearings that use set screws shall not be allowed. Bearings shall have extended lube lines with Zerk fittings.

Manufacturer 1. Greenheck Fan Corp, Model Vektor-H High Plume Laboratory exhaust system or approved equal.

FANCOIL UNITS A.

Furnish and install fancoil units where shown on the drawings and to the sizes and capacities as indicated in the schedule. Fancoil units shall be as manufactured by McQuay, American Air Filter, Carrier, or approved equal.

B.

Performance Data: 1. Unit capacities shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 441-70. 2. Units shall be sound tested and rated in accordance with ARI Standard 443-70. 3. Unit shall comply with National Electrical Code and approved by Underwriter’s Laboratories.

C.

Basic unit includes chassis, coil, heavy-density faced-glass fiber insulation, air block-offs around coil, removable fan board/drain pan assembly, auxiliary drain pan, fan, fan housing, motor and filter. Chassis shall be of galvanized steel of molded, high impact thermoplastic with solderless connection (7/8 inch OD copper tubes). Unit shall have onepiece box construction pedestal base riveted to chassis.

D.

Coils: 5/8 inch OD seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated aluminum fins with continuous fin collars and sleeved coil end supports. Maximum working pressure 300 psig, factory burst test 450 psi (air) and leak test 300 psi (air under water). Maximum entering water shall be 275 degrees F. Coils shall have female sweat connections to accept 5/8 inch OD copper tubing.

E.

Auxiliary Heating Coils (L): 7/16 inch OD copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated aluminum fins with continuous fin collars and sleeved end supports. Maximum working pressure 200 psig. Maximum entering water 220 degrees F. Female sweat connections to accept 1/2 inch OD copper tubing.

F.

Drain Pans: Vertical main drain pans shall be galvanized steel with molded, one-piece self-extinguishing polystyrene foam insulating liner.

G.

Fans: Fan wheels centrifugal forward-curved, double width of molded, reinforced glass fiber material. Fan wheels and housings corrosion resistant. Fan housings of formed sheet steel.

H.

Motors: High efficiency permanent split capacitor motors shall not exceed scheduled amperage, shall have integral thermal overload protection and start at 78 percent of rated voltage. Motors shall operate satisfactorily at 90 percent of rated voltage on all speed settings and at 10 percent over voltage without undue magnetic noise. Temperature rise HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 37 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

by winding resistance method shall not exceed 60°C. (shaded pole) and 50°C (psc) on high speed and 65°C. (shaded pole) and 55°C. (psc) on reduced speeds. CFM 200 300 400 600

AMPS AT HIGH SPEED 0.55 0.60 0.55 0.80

All motors shall be factory run tested in assembled unit prior to shipping. Motor cords shall be quickly detachable at switch box by locking prolonged connector (optional on horizontal units).

2.18

I.

Filters: Concealed from site and removable from vertical models without displacing front panels. Filters shall be throw-away type of woven glass fiber.

J.

Extended Motor Oilers: Plastic tubes shall terminate beneath discharge grille of vertical cabinet models. Tube openings shall be covered.

K.

Piping Package: The piping package shall be arranged to pipe the two coils from the same end. Piping package shall be complete with four stop valves and automatic air vents for each coil. Piping package shall be completely factory mounted including two (2) three-way control valves of same manufacture as the automatic temperature control system.

L.

Controls: Each unit shall have a factory-mounted and wired three-speed on/off switch.

FILTERS A.

MERV 11 1. Air Filters shall be Model Pre Pleat 62RM11 panel filters, as manufactured by Flanders Precisionaire or approved equal. 2. Each filter shall consist of an electrostatically charged synthetic only media, with corrosion-resistant expanded metal backing and moisture resistant enclosing frame. The filter shall be 1”, 2” or 4” nominal depth. The grid shall be 100% bonded to the media on the air exiting side to eliminate media vibration and pull away. 3. The grid shall be formed to provide a uniform V-wedge shaped pleat with the open area on the air exiting side for maximum utilization of the media and low airflow resistance. The filter shall be classified for flammability by Underwriters Laboratories, Standard 900 as Class 2. 4. The filter shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value of 11 by ASHRAE Standard 52.2.

B.

MERV 13 1. Air Filters shall be Model Dominator High Efficiency Rigid Cell Extended Surface Filter, as manufactured by Purolator or approved equal. 2. Each filter shall consist of 100% synthetic media. The cell sides shall be high strength, high impact polystyrene plastic and the entire filter shall be completely incinerable. The filter shall be 4” nominal depth. 3. The filter shall be classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Standard 900 as Class 1. 4. The filter shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value of 13 by ASHRAE Standard 52.2. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 38 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.19

2.20

2.21

FINTUBE RADIATION A.

Fintube radiation shall be of the types, sizes and capacities indicated on the drawings. Fintube elements, brackets, hanging strips, floor angles and enclosure panels shall be as manufactured by Vulcan, Sterling, Rosemex or Rittling.

B.

Fintube radiation covers shall be as detailed on the drawings. They shall run continuous wall to wall, except where otherwise indicated on the drawings.

C.

Fintube shall extend the full width at walls with square end caps at columns. Enclosure covers shall have hinged access panels for valving.

D.

Fintube elements shall be steel tube, steel fins, 4¼ inch, 40 fins per linear foot, except where noted otherwise.

E.

Wall mounted type enclosure mounted in front of glazing shall have full backplate.

F.

Fintube enclosures shall be factory finished. Color to be determined by Architect.

FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS A.

All mechanical equipment and systems shall be substantially supported without distortion or excessive vibration. The methods of support shall be as hereinafter described, except as otherwise noted on the drawings. This Contractor shall locate all equipment bases and shall provide all anchor bolts and templates to the General Contractor who shall form and set all concrete work and shall set all anchor bolts. Anchor bolts and nuts shall be galvanized.

B.

Concrete housekeeping pads shall follow equipment plan shape and be 6 inches in height. Where equipment is set directly on housekeeping pads the space between equipment base and pad top shall be filled by the General Contractor with non-shrinking grout. Where equipment shape or mounting is such as to require an air space between equipment bases and pad, the pad shall then be furnished with a smooth troweled surface. All equipment shall be anchored to housekeeping pads or all intervening vibration isolator bases shall be anchored to the structure.

C.

Where steel frame floor supports are indicated to be provided, such framing shall be allwelded type with two coats of red primer. The framing system shall be substantial type with members sized to prevent equipment distortion or excessive vibration. Framing shall be simple post and beam box type with diagonal bracing to prevent lateral movement. Beam members shall be positioned to align with equipment support points for proper bolting and posts shall be positioned to prevent excessive beam cantilevering. Posts shall be provided with baseplate anchored to the structure.

D.

Where steel framing supports are indicated to be provided for roof mounted equipment (those without integral curbs for setting into roof structure) the same framing system as described above shall be used, except members shall be galvanized and bolted together. Posts shall be positioned to align both framing and roof structural members with pitch pockets at roof penetrations.

E.

Ground-mounted equipment shall be supported with framing system similar to roofing application described above except that posts shall be set on poured-in-place concrete piers with galvanized anchor bolts. Concrete piers shall be provided by the General Contractor.

GRAVITY VENTILATORS A.

Gravity ventilators shall be roof mounted air intake louver houses as manufactured by Cook, Greenheck, or Penn Ventilator Company. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 39 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.22

2.23

B.

Louver houses shall have heavy gauge extruded 6063-T5 aluminum blade of the storm blade style with corners metered and welded. Roof and curb caps shall be formed of minimum 0.051 gauge aluminum unit base to be minimum 0.080 gauge. The entire assembly braced by heavy mill gauge galvanized steel interior upright angles at the corners and along the sides. Manufacturer’s catalog ratings shall be based upon tests conducted in an industry approved testing laboratory with air volumes and losses as shown.

C.

Per ANSI-A58.1 testing standards, each ventilator must be rated for 100 MPH wind load and 101.5 lbs. per square foot snow load.

D.

Furnish 1/2” thick sprayed on plastic coating to eliminate condensation on underside of roof. Intake ventilators to be 200% free area. Relief vents to be 150% free area.

E.

All seams to be continuously welded. Equip all ventilators with aluminum bird screen. 1. Provide a roof curb of matching construction details, coordinated with the roof construction within which it is to be installed. Curb shall be equipped with a two position, electrically driven damper at the integral utility shelf within the curb, for each gravity ventilator.

F.

Provide entire aluminum assemblies in three-coar, fluoropolymer color, to be selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s standard range of colors and gloss. 1. Surfaces to be acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pre-treated. 2. Provide manufacturer’s standard three-coat, thermo-cured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer, fluorocarbon color coat and clear fluorocarbon topcoat, with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinyl resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. 3. Provide with five (5) year warrantee.

HOT WATER REHEAT COILS A.

Hot water reheat coils shall be of the sizes and capacities indicated on the drawings. Coils shall be as manufactured by Heatcraft, McQuay, Trane or Carrier.

B.

Coils shall be ARI rated and suitable for 250 psig test pressures.

C.

Coils shall be constructed with welded steel headers, staggered copper tubes with spirally wound mechanically bonded aluminum fins. Coils shall be provided with mounting flanges for insertion into the ductwork. Independently support all coils.

INSULATION MATERIALS (GENERAL REQUIREMENTS) A.

All insulation materials to be furnished for installation under this section shall be as manufactured by Owens-Corning, Certainteed, Knauf, or Schiller Company.

B.

Shop drawings shall be submitted for all insulation system materials to be furnished for installation under this section. Submittals shall include descriptions of the application of all materials to be used for each insulation class and catalog cuts of all materials furnished.

C.

All insulation materials to be furnished for installation under this section shall conform to fuel contributed flame spread and smoke developed limits set forth in NFPA Standard 90A as determined by NFPA 255, ASTM E84 or UL723 tests. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 40 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.24

INSULATION MATERIALS (EQUIPMENT) A.

Equipment shall be insulated as specified and as indicated on the drawings.

B.

Insulation shall be applied to equipment in accordance with insulation class. Thickness and special jacketing indicated below. Hot water heat exchangers, hot water expansion tanks, and hot water air separators shall have 1½ inch thick Class 142 insulation. Chilled water expansion tanks, chiller chilled water boxes shall have 1½ inch thick Class 141 insulation. Chilled water pumps shall have 2 inch thick Class 141 insulation segmented to permit pump servicing without damaging insulation. Hot water pumps shall have Class 141 insulation same as chilled water pumps. Class 141 Insulation shall consist of minimum 6 pound rigid fiberglass blocks cut to fit equipment shape and secured with 1/8 inch annealed steel wire anchored with pins attached to equipment surface to prevent sagging. Over insulation tightly stretch wire lath, wired and anchored securely in place with all edges tied to prevent lifting and separating. Over lath apply 1/2 inch thick insulating cement plaster in two coats consisting of scratch and troweled smooth finish coat. Finish shall consist of two (2) 1/8 inch thick coats of vapor seal adhesive with intermediate glass fabric reinforcing with smooth finish. Class 142 Insulation shall consist of minimum 6 pound rigid fiberglass blocks cut to fit equipment shape and secured with 20 gauge annealed steel wire or bands. Voids and seams shall be filled using insulating cement. Over insulation tightly stretch wire lath, wired and anchored securely in place with all edges tied to prevent lifting and separating. Over lath apply 1/2 inch thick insulating cement plaster in two coats consisting of scratch and troweled smooth finish coat. Finish shall consist of 6 ounce canvas jacket trimmed to fit, tightly wrapped, sized and secured with lagging adhesive.

2.25

INSULATION (PIPING) A.

Piping systems shall be insulated as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings. Fluid Hot Water Chilled Water Coil Drains

Fluid Temp. Range F. 105-200

Run-outs Up to 1” 1/2

≤ 1.5”

> 1.5”

Class



2

104

40-55

1/2





104

Any

3/4

3/4

3/4

Inside 104 Outside 107

Run-outs not exceeding twelve (12) inches in length Note: Provide 0.016 inch thickness embossed aluminum protective jacketing on all insulated piping within mechanical rooms within 6 feet of floors. B.

Insulation shall be omitted from the following piping: 1. Equipment vent piping. 2. Equipment drain piping beyond shut off valve. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 41 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3. 4. 5. 6. C.

Steam coil condensate piping from equipment outlets to steam trap. Compressed air piping. Piping within fintube covers. Heat pump loops.

Engine exhaust piping, fittings and silencers shall be covered with 4 inch calcium silicate insulation. Insulation shall be applied in two (2) layers with staggered joints. Secure insulation in place with heavy gauge stainless steel bands. Seal all seams and joints in each layer with high temperature cement. Cover insulation with reinforced glass fiber cloth. Class 104 Piping: Insulation shall consist of high density (minimum #4) molded fiberglass sectional pipe insulation with a minimum R value of 4.0 H. degrees F. ft.²/BTU per inch, with factory applied all-service jacket with vapor barrier, butt and lap end strips shall be self-sealing or secured with vapor seal adhesive. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: 2 inch size and smaller shall be insulated with 1 pound density and secured with 20 gauge annealed steel wire. Then apply insulating and finish cement to match the adjacent pipe insulation thickness and then have two (2) 1/8 inch thick smoothing and finishing coats of vapor seal adhesive applied using intermediate glass fabric reinforcing. Vapor seal adhesive shall lap adjacent pipe cover. Fittings may be insulated with two layers of fiberglass with PVC covers. Valves, Fittings and Flanges: 2½ inch size and larger shall be insulated using sections of high density fiberglass molded sectional pipe insulation cut to fit, secured with 20 gauge annealed steel wire. All voids and pockets shall then be filled with insulating cement and finish cement. Finish shall be two 1/8 inch thick smoothing and finishing coats of vapor seal adhesive applied using intermediate glass fabric reinforcing. Vapor seal adhesive shall alp adjacent pipe cover. Class 107 Tubing and Piping: Insulation shall consist of flexible type foamed plastic pipe insulation with flame spread rating of 25 or less and smoke development rating of 50 or less per ASTM E84-75 test, integral vapor barrier. Insulation shall be slit type, field sealed with companion adhesive. Fittings, Valves and Flanges: Tubing Systems – Fittings shall be made by miter cutting of adjacent straight piping runs and sealing joints with companion adhesive. Valves shall be insulated by using a combination of nested pipe insulation and sheets to form a complete enclosure with all joints sealed with companion adhesive. Flanges shall be insulated by using sheets cut to fit pipe side of flange and wrapping sheets around flange perimeter. All joints shall be sealed using companion adhesive. Piping Systems – Fittings shall be insulated using nested sections of pipe insulation mitered to form a square corner and sealing joints with companion adhesive. Valves and flanges shall be insulated as described for tubing systems.

D.

PVC Piping Insulation Cover: 1. Piping insulation cover shall be of nominal thirty (30) mil UV stabilized PVC preformed to appropriate shapes for straight piping, fittings, valves and accessories. Solvent welding type adhesive shall form a permanent chemical bond between surfaces and shall present a continuous vapor barrier across the joint. PVC piping insulation cover shall incorporate the following characteristics. Typical Properties Service Range

Test Method N.A.

Value 0°F. to 150°F

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 42 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.26

Specific Gravity Flame Spread Smoke Developed

ASTM D-792 ASTM E-84-97a ASTM E-84-97a

1.48 25 50

Typical Properties Flexural Strength Tensile Modulus Elongation at Yield Flexural Modulus Electrical Conductance Gardner-SPI Impact

Test Method ASTM D-638 ASTM D-638 ASTM D-638 ASTM E-790 D-257 D-3679

Abrasion

Taber Method

Water Vapor Transmission

ASTM E96-95

Value 11,500 psi 470,000 psi 3% MD 460,000 psi Non-conductor 8 lb/mil (30 mil sample) 10,000 revolutions, CS-17 wheel, 1,000 gr weight 0.009 perms

INSULATION (SHEET METAL) A.

Sheet metal work shall be insulated as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings.

B.

Insulation shall be applied to the following: 1. All air conditioning systems ductwork and associated equipment exposed to view; all systems outside air plenums, ducts and louver boxes; all system exhaust air plenums, ducts and louver boxes from louver connections back to automatic dampers. All portions of heating and ventilating and air conditioning unit casings not internally insulated, all air conditioning systems return air fans and all equipment shall have Class 131 insulation. 2. All concealed air conditioning system supply and return air ductwork and associated equipment including terminal box reheat coil casings, shall have Class 135 insulation. 3. Insulation liner shall be provided where indicated on the drawings. Refer to sheet metal work. 4. All sound attenuators in insulated system ductwork shall be insulated. Sound attenuator sections furnished with Rooftop air handling units shall be insulated in field when not furnished insulated by the unit manufacturer.

C.

Kitchen grease ductwork shall have 3 inch Class 130 insulation.

D.

Insulation shall be omitted from the following sheet metal work: 1. Toilet, locker and storage exhaust ductwork except where noted on drawings.

E.

All louver plenums, louver blank-off plates and ductwork which will conduct air shall have insulation thickness increased to a minimum of 2 inches or as indicated on drawings.

F.

All supply and return ductwork located outside shall have rigid board insulation with thickness increased to a minimum of 3 inches and be provided with a weatherproof cover in addition to the vapor barrier. 1. Class 130 a. Insulation shall consist of a UL listed duct wrap system complying with UL 1978 and ASTM E-119. Blanket material shall be in alumina (45% ±) composite incorporating the following characteristics. b. Service Range: 0°F to 2300°F c. Melting Point: 3200°F HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 43 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

d.

R Value @ 70°F:

e.

R Value @ 283°F:

f. g. h.

2.

3.

Hr.Sq.Ft.° F .Inch BTU Hr.Sq.Ft.° F .Inch 9.9 BTU 4.5

Flame Spread: 5 (ASTM E84/UL-723) Smoke Developed: 5 (ASTM E84/UL-723) The blanket shall have a foil facing, adhered to the blanket mat, incorporating the following characteristics: i. Tensile Strength: M.D. 40#/IN (ASTM D-828) C.D. 40#/IN (ASTM D-828) j. Puncture Resistance: 100 Units (Min) (ASTM D-781) k. Self adhesive filament tape shall be of the high performance type equal to 3M Company *898. l. Banding material, 3/4” wide, minimum 0.015” thick, carbon steel for construction requirements of zero clearance to combustibles or 1 hour ratings. Stainless steel banding shall be used for 2 hour requirements (SS wire ties or 1/4” SS hose clamps may be substituted for hanger insulation only). m. Tensioning tool for banding material manufactured by Okle or by Signoide Company; seals such as those manufactured by Okle or by Signode Company; and crimping tool such as those manufactured by Okle or Signode. n. 10 gauge, 4” to 5” long, copper coated steel pins; 1½” x 1½” galvanized steel speed clips; capacitor discharge stud gun (110/115) such as that manufactured by AGM. o. Grease duct access door hardware; 4½” x 5” long, 1/4” wing nuts and 1/4” metal washers; 4” long steel hollow tubing to fit threaded rods. Class 131 a. Insulation shall consist of 1½ inch thick minimum 4 pound density rigid fiberglass board with reinforced foil vapor barrier cut to fit duct shape and applied by impaling insulation on pins attached to duct surface. Pins shall be located approximately 1 per square foot of surface. Insulation shall be secured on pins using metal washers with excess pin length trimmed. Seal seams and all vapor barrier penetrations using 4 inch wide reinforced foil tape self-sealing type or secured using vapor seal adhesive. b. Note: Flanges protruding from sheet metal shall be covered with 4 inch wide insulation board strips and sealed with 4 inch wide reinforced tape secured with vapor seal adhesive. c. Finish shall consist of pre-sized glass fabric jacket applied to insulation surface and secured with lagging adhesive. All plenums and ducts within 5 feet of floors shall have edges reinforced with metal corner beads applied to insulation and sealed with 4 inch reinforced foil tape secured with vapor seal adhesive prior to finish. Class 135 a. Insulation shall consist of minimum 1½ inch thick flexible fiberglass blanket with reinforced foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be tightly wrapped around duct and secured using bonding adhesive covering not less than 50 percent of sheet metal surface. Seams and penetrations shall be sealed by using 4 inch wide reinforced foil tape self-sealing type or secured with vapor seal adhesive. The bottom of ducts over 24 inches wide shall have additional support for blanket consisting of pins attached to duct surface at a rate of 1 per 2 square feet, evenly spaced. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 44 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Insulation shall be impaled on pins and secured using mechanical washers with excess pin length trimmed. G.

Ductwork Weatherproof Insulation Cover: 1. Weatherproof insulation cover shall be a self-adhering roll-type roofing membrane consisting of a laminated assembly of aluminum facing, two (2) layers of styrene-buadiene-styrene and a nominal forty (40) mil layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive. Asphalt adhesive compound shall be pressure sensitive, protected by a release paper u ntil installation. Composite assembly shall incorporate the following characteristics. Typical Properties Service Range Heat Aging

Test Method N.A. ASTM D-794

Flame Spread Smoke Density Tear Strength

ASTM E-84-97a ASTM E-84-97a ASTM D-1424

Tensile Strength

ASTM D-1000

Elongation

ASTM D-1000

Static Uplift

ASTM E-907

Wind Driven Rain

South Florida Test 5683

Lap Joint Tensile Strength Lap Joint Peel Strength Abrasion

MFM Method

No damage or failure evident @ 75 psf for 1 minute No leakage, damage or failures evident @ 100 MPH Exceeds material strength

MFM Method

11 lb/in (180° angle)

Taber Method

Low Temperature Flexibility Q-U-C Accelerated Weathering

MFM Method

10,000 revolutions, CS-17 wheel, 1,000 gr weight 100,000 cycles @ 10°F with no cracking 4,000 hr exposure surface and lap joints, no effect

Reflectivity Water Vapor Transmission 2.27

Q Panel Co. UV Chamber per Rubber Manufacturer’s Association Photo-volt meter ASTM E96-95

Value -25°F. to 150°F. No visible blistering, delamination or deterioration 0 (NFPA Class “A”) 5 680 gr MD 640 gr CD 500 p si MD 625 psi CD 296% MD 228% CD

129 (black surface ≈ 29) 0.009 perms

MAKE-UP AIR UNIT (INDIRECT GAS FIRED) A.

Provide factory fabricated H&V units in the sizes and capacities as identified on the drawings. Units shall be indirect fired by natural gas, shall draw combustion air in through a dedicated vent and shall discharge products of combustion through a dedicated vent. Units shall be as manufactured by Reznor, Greenheck or Sterling.

B.

Equipment casings shall be sectional type factory assembled of indicated manufacturer’s HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 45 Design Development / 12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School standard design for system static pressures. Casings shall be provided with galvanized or baked enamel corrosion resisting finish. Individual sections shall be bolted together utilizing gaskets and then mastic sealed. All sections shall have 1 inch thick fiberglass lining secured using adhesive and provided with air side air erosion coating. Provide access doors to all fan sections and furnace sections.

C. D.

Units shall be mounted from four point lifting and anchor holes suitable for suspension mounting, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Mixing shall occur directly within the blower section. Mixing system shall have parallel bladed return and outside air dampers with active sections sized to produce 1,200 FPM to 1500 FPM through either section at design air flow. Where excessive damper blades are provided, blank off the furthest blade. Dampered openings shall be arranged at right angles to one another with two (2) sets of parallel blades forcing the two air streams together. Outside air dampers shall be gasketed.

E.

Filter sections shall be field fabricated as separate sections as indicated on the drawings. Filters shall be low velocity type except as indicated otherwise on the drawings and shall be 4 inch MERV 11 type. Filter shall be mounted in metal holding frames accessible from either side of the casing. Provide three (3) spare sets of filters.

F.

Heat exchanger(s) construction shall consist of 20 gauge (minimum), Type 409 stainless steel tubes, seams electric resistance welded, with 20 gauge (minimum) Type 409 stainless steel headers.

G.

Burners shall be die-formed with stamped porting and stainless steel port protectors to prevent scale or foreign matter from obstructing the burner ports. Burner construction shall consist of Type 409 stainless steel, seams electric resistance welded. 1. Burners must be individually removable for cleaning and servicing. The entire burner assembly must be easily removable with a slide-out drawer design. The pilot must be accessible through a pilot access plate without removing the burner assembly.

H.

Venting shall occur through a power type separated combustion system as identified on the drawings. 1. Flue collector construction shall consist of Type 409 stainless steel, seams electric resistance welded. 2. Air for combustion shall be entrained through a dedicated combustion air inlet vent by an integral vent fan designed for the furnace size it serves. Vent shall terminate through a factory fabricated intake. Combustion air shall be precisely metered in accord with the required firing rate to produce appropriate fuel-air combinations for optimum combustion efficiency. 3. Products of combustion shall be discharged through a dedicated flue gases vent. Vent shall terminate through a factory fabricated exhaust terminal a minimum of twenty-four inches (24”) above the nearest construction within a ten foot (10’0”) radius and a minimum of eighteen inches (18”) above the combustion air inlet. 4. Combustion air inlet vent and flue gases vent shall run independently from the furnace to a factory fabricated concentric adapter. The adapter shall form the combustion air inlet vent into a concentric sleeve around the flue gases vent. The two concentrically oriented vents shall run together to their respective coaxial terminations.

I.

Units shall be provided with gas valves suitable for Class 2, maximum inlet pressure of 0.5 psig (14 inch wc) on natural gas. The low voltage combination automatic gas valves must include: HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 46 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Main operating valve. Pilot safety shut off. Pressure regulator. Manual main shut off valve. Manual pilot shut off valve. Adjustable pilot valve. Gas valves shall be of the electronic type providing modulated heat output. Ignition shall be at full fire (100 percent input). The gas valve shall modulate from 100% rated input to 50% rated input.

J.

The solid state ignition control system shall ignite the required pilot(s) by direct spark during each cycle of operation. When pilot flame(s) are proven, main burner valve(s) shall open to allow gas flow to the burners. Pilot(s) and burner(s) must be extinguished during the “Off” cycle.

K.

Fan sections for low pressure service shall have forward curved fan wheels, except where specifically noted otherwise. All fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced and so designed that the first critical speed is not less than 20 percent beyond the indicated operating space. Fan bearings shall be grease lubricated type with extended grease nipple. Fans shall have V-belt drives with motors mounted on adjustable slide bases. Motors shall have adjustable sheaves. V-belt drives shall have belt guards with hole at fan shaft for tachometer readings. Unit shall have rubber vibration isolator rails.

L.

Supply fan motors shall open drip proof (ODP) design, premium efficiency, and inverter rated. 1. Motors shall be provided with internal thermal overload protection, external overload protection with heaters, or magnetic starters. Motors 1/2 horsepower and larger shall be suitable for poly-phase electric service. 2. Motor wiring shall be enclosed in 1/2 inch Greenfield cable. 3. Supply fan motors shall be activated through a magnetic starter.

M.

A factory installed and wired single point power connection junction box shall feed a factory installed and wired control box including any necessary control service transformers, high limits, and fan delay relays. The fan delay relay shall delay the fan start until the heat exchanger reaches a pre-determined, factory set temperature. The fan delay relay shall require the fan to operate after burner shut-down to remove residual heat from the heat exchanger.

N.

Factory installed options shall include: 1. 120 volt convenience outlet. 2. Firestat to shut unit down and notify all fire alarm functions if discharge air reaches a factory preset temperature. Firestat shall require manual reset. 3. Factory mounted and wired variable frequency drive with P.I.D. control. 4. Disconnect switch.

O.

Field installed options shall include: 1. High gas service pressure regulator, to reduce the main gas line pressure from a maximum of 125 psig to a minimum of 5 inches water column. 2. One main set and two spare sets of filters. 3. Clogged filter switch shall sense the suction pressure increase incurred by the blower due to filter obstruction. Switch shall indicate in the blower compartment and shall incorporate normally-open contacts for remote notification. 4. Roof mounting curb for equipment scheduled for roof mounting. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 47 Design Development / 12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

P.

Provide flexible braided stainless pipe connectors at least 12 inches long in each piping connection to the unit.

Q.

Submittals shall show operating characteristics of each equipment section and note all operation data indicated on the drawings for the actual equipment selections. Also provide individual assembly drawings for Rooftop air handling unit showing sequence of sections and all accessories furnished as part of the equipment. Individual unit sound power levels shall be separately tabulated together with scheduled design limitations.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 48 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.28

MOTORS A.

This section identifies basic requirements for motors. It includes motors that are factoryinstalled as part of equipment and appliances as well as field-installed motors.

B.

Quality Assurance: 1. Comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code”. 2. NRTL Listing: Provide NRTL listed motors. a. Term “Listed”: As defined in “National Electrical Code”, Article 100. b. Listing Agency Qualifications: “Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory” (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 3. Comply with NEMA MG 1: “Motors and Generators”. 4. Comply with UL 1004: “Motors, Electric”.

C.

All motors provided for this project shall comply with the requirements of this section, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Polyphase 2. Motors Smaller than 1/2 HP: Single phase. 3. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz. 4. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected for the following motor voltage ratings (utilization voltages): a. 120V Circuit: 115 V – motor rating. b. 208V Circuit: 200 V – motor rating c. 240V Circuit: 230 V – motor rating. d. 480V Circuit: 460 V – motor rating. 5. Service factors indicated for motors are minimum values and apply at frequency and utilizing voltage at which motor is connected. Provide motors which will not operate in service factor range when supply voltage is within 10 percent of motor voltage rating. 6. Capacity: Sufficient to start and operate connected leads at designated speeds in indicated environment, and with indicated operating sequence, without exceeding nameplate ratings. Provide motors rated for continuous duty at 100 percent of rated capacity. 7. Temperature Rise: Based on 40 degree C. ambient except as otherwise indicated. a. Enclosure: Totally Enclosed Air Over

D.

Polyphase Motors: 1. General: Squirrel-cage induction type conforming to the following requirements except as otherwise indicated. a. NEMA Design Letter Designation: “A” or “B” 2. Multi-Speed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. 3. Premium Efficiency Motors: Nominal efficiency equal to or greater than that stated in NEMA Standard Publication MG 1-2003, Tables 12-12 and 12-13 respectively. 4. Variable speed motors for use with solid-state drives: Energy efficient, squirrelcage induction, design B units with ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by drive manufacturer. 5. Internal thermal overload protection for motors: For motors so indicated, protection automatically opens control circuit arranged for external connection. Protection operates when winding temperature exceeds safe value calibrated to the temperature rating of the motor insulation. 6. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading of the application. 7. Rugged Duty Motors: Totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum service factor. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 49 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

8.

E.

2.29

Provide motors with regreasable bearings and equipped with capped relief vents. Insulate windings with nonhygroscopic material. External finish shall be chemical resistant paint over corrosion resistant primer. Provide integral condensate drains. Motors for reduced in-rush starting: Coordinate with indicated reduced in-rush controller type and with characteristics of driven equipment load. Provide required wiring leads in motor terminal box to suit control method.

Single-Phase Motors: 1. General: Conform to the following requirements except as otherwise indicated. 2. Energy Efficient Motors: One of the following types as selected to suit the starting torque and other requirements of the specific motor application: a. Permanent Split Capacitor b. Split-Phase Start, Capacitor-Run c. Capacitor-Start, Capacitor-Run 3. Shaded-Pole Motors: Use only for motors smaller than 1/20 HP. 4. Internal Thermal Overload Protection for Motors: For motors so indicated, protection automatically opens the power supply circuit to the motor, or a control circuit arranged for external connection. Protection operates when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to the temperature rating of the motor insulation. Provide device that automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range except as otherwise indicated. 5. Bearings, belt connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft shall be ball bearing type. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings may be used for other single phase motors.

PIPE, HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS A.

Provide all necessary labor, supervision, materials, equipment and services required to furnish and install all pipe supports, hangers, anchors and other suitable supporting appliances necessary to support firmly and substantially all parts of the apparatus described in this specification. Equipment shall be as manufactured by B-Line, Uni-Strut, Grinnell or Carpenter & Patterson. 1. Pipe shall be adequately supported by pipe hanger and supports and restrained by anchors. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be sized to accommodate insulation thickness.

B.

Steel pipe hangers, anchors and supports shall have the manufacturer’s name, part number, and applicable size stamped into each part for identification.

C.

Hangers, anchors and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with the following standards as appropriate. 1. ASTM B633: Specification for Electro-deposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 2. ASTM A123: Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strip 3. ASTM A653 G90: Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design and Manufacture 4. MSS SP69: Manufacturers Standardization Society: Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application Hangers: 1. Uninsulated pipes 2 inches and smaller: a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger.

D.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 50 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3.

4.

b. Adjustable steel swivel J-hanger. c. Malleable iron ring hanger or hinged ring hanger. d. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket. e. Adjustable steel clevis hanger. Uninsulated pipes 2½ inches and larger. a. Adjustable steel clevis hanger. b. Pipe roll with sockets. c. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll. Insulated Pipe – Hot Services (including steam piping): a. 2 Inch and Smaller Pipes: i. Adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal shield. b. 2½ Inch and Larger Pipes: i. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection. ii. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle. Insulated Pipe – Cold Services (including chilled water piping): a. 5 Inch and Smaller Pipes: i. Adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal shield. b. 6 Inch and Larger Pipes: i. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle. ii. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection.

E.

Pipe Anchors: 1. Provide a complete system of accessories to transmit thermal expansion forces to the building structure for redirection to the piping expansion compensation system. Anchors shall consist of structural attachments, framing members for translating forces to and from the building structure and plates welded to the appropriate piping sections. 2. Structural attachments shall be as appropriate for the point of connection intended. Verify anchor connection points with Project Structural Engineer prior to fabrication. 3. Framing members shall be sized to accept the forces associated with the Contractor’s proposed piping system arrangement with a minimum factor of safety of 3.0. 4. Framing point of attachment to the appropriate piping section shall be of a minimum thickness of 1/4” and shall increase by 1/16” in thickness for each twopipe size increases above three inches in diameter (3”Ф). Framing point of attachment to the appropriate piping section shall be of a minimum length of 16” and shall increase by 2” in length for each two pipe size increases above three inches in diameter (3” Ф). 5. Welds to connect framing point of attachment to the appropriate piping section shall be full penetration fillet welds parallel to the central axis of the piping. All welding processes, including but not limited to procedures and welding operator qualifications, shall be in strict accordance with the requirements of Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (edition, including any addenda, in effect at the time of the contract execution).

F.

Pipe Clamps: 1. Provide pipe clamps with weld-less eye nuts to allow flexibility in the hanger assembly to adjust for horizontal movement. Provide double bolted pipe clamps for insulated lines.

G.

Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: 1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A570 Gr. 33 structural steel channel, 1⅝ x 1⅝” minimum, or stronger. 2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 51 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

For pipes subjected to axial movement: a. Strut mounted roller support. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines. b. Strut mounted pipe guide.

H.

Wall Supports: 1. Pipes 4 Inches and Smaller: a. Carbon steel hook. b. Carbon steel J-hanger. 2. Pipes Larger than 4 Inch: a. Welded strut bracket and pipe straps. b. Welded steel brackets, with roller chair or adjustable steel yoke pipe roll. Use pipe protection shield or saddles on insulated lines.

I.

Floor Supports: 1. In mechanical spaces where weight of piping or other apparatus makes it impractical to support same suspended only from structure above, flanged pipe standards shall be installed to support the weight of the piping, valves and fittings. Main passageways and access space must not be obstructed. 2. Hot piping under 6 inch and all cold piping: a. Carbon steel adjustable pipe saddle and nipple attached to steel base stand sized for pipe elevation. Pipe saddle shall be screwed or welded to appropriate base stand. 3. Hot piping 6 inches and larger: a. Adjustable roller stand with base plate. b. Adjustable roller support and steel support sized for elevation.

J.

Vertical Supports: 1. Steel riser clamp sized to fit outside diameter of pipe.

K.

Copper Tubing Supports: 1. Hangers shall be sized to fit copper tubing outside diameters. a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger. b. Malleable iron ring hanger, or hinged ring hanger. c. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket. d. Adjustable steel clevis hanger. 2. For supporting vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps. 3. For supporting copper tube to strut use epoxy painted pipe straps sized for copper tubing, or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps. Note: Copper plating of hangers is for purposes of identification only. This superficial coating shall not be designed to provide significant protection in corrosive areas.

L.

Plastic Pipe Supports: 1. V-bottom clevis hanger with galvanized 18 gauge continuous support channel.

M.

Supplementary Structural Supports: 1. Design and fabricate supports using structural quality steel bolted framing materials as manufactured by B-Line or Uni-Strut. 2. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gauge, ASTM A570 Grade 33 steel, 1⅝” x 1⅝” or greater to meet loading conditions. Submit designs for pipe tunnels and pipe galleries to Engineer for approval. 3. Clamps and fittings shall be specifically designed and listed for use with the strut system. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 52 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

N.

Upper Attachments: 1. Beam clamps shall be used where piping is to be suspended from building steel. Clamp type shall be selected on the basis of load to be supported, and load configuration. a. C-Clamps shall have locknuts and cup point set screws. Top flange cclamps shall be used when attaching a hanger rod to the top flange of structural shapes. Refer to manufacturer’s recommendations for setscrew torque. Retaining straps shall be used to maintain the position on the beam where required. b. Center loaded beam clamps shall be used where specified. Steel clamps, malleable iron or forged steel beam clamps with cross bolt shall be suitable to fit beams. 2. Concrete Inserts: a. Cast in place spot concrete inserts shall be used where applicable, either steel or malleable iron body. Spot inserts shall allow for lateral adjustment and have means for attachment to forms. Select inserts to suit threaded hanger rod sizes. i. Arrange pipe hangers, and auxiliary framing if required, to limit the maximum pipe load, with pipes fully insulated and filled with water, to not exceed 1500 pounds on any one slab insert. ii. Inserts shall be spaced not closer than 4 feet o.c. in either direction. Where pipe inserts are closer together than 4 feet o.c. notify the Architect for review. b. Continuous concrete inserts shall be used where applicable. Channels shall be 12 gauge, ASTM A570 Grade 33 structural quality carbon steel, complete with Styrofoam inserts and end caps with nail holes for attachment to forms. The continuous concrete insert shall have a minimum load rating of 2,000 lbs/ft. in concrete. Select channel nuts suitable for strut and rod sizes. c. Provide inserts for placement in form-work before concrete is poured. d. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sizes of reinforced concrete beams. e. Where concrete slabs form finished ceilings, provide inserts to be flush with slab surface. f. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

O.

Vibration Isolation and Supports: 1. Refer to Section “Vibration Isolation and Seismic Restraints” for vibration isolation requirements. 2. All horizontal runs of pipe in all mechanical equipment rooms, and for a distance of fifty (50) equivalent pipe diameters beyond the respective mechanical equipment rooms, shall be isolated from building structure by means of units designed for insertion of rids. Selection of correct isolators for each application shall be made by the vibration isolation manufacturer subject to approval of the Architect.

P.

Accessories: 1. Hanger rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular cross section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain or perforated straps shall be allowed. 2. Shields shall be 180° galvanized sheet metal, 12” minimum length, 18 gauge minimum thickness, designed to match outside diameter of the insulated pipe. 3. Pipe protection saddles shall be formed from carbon steel, 1/8 inch minimum HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 53 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Q.

R.

thickness, sized for insulation thickness. Saddles for pipe sizes greater than 12 inches shall have a center support rib. Finishes: 1. Hangers not in direct contact with copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with ASTM B633, SC3 or have an electro-deposited epoxy finish. 2. Strut channels shall be pre-galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653 G90 or Strut channels shall be electro-deposited epoxy finish. 3. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. 4. Hangers and strut located in corrosive areas shall be Type 316 stainless steel with matching stainless steel hardware. 5. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be painted with electro deposited copper colored epoxy. Support Spacing: 1. Horizontal steel piping shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69 Tables 3 and 4, excerpts of which follow below: NOMINAL PIPE SIZE 1/2” - 1½” 1½” 2” 2½” 3” 4” 2.

ROD DIAMETERS 3/8” 3/8” 3/8” 1/2” 1/2” 5/8”

MAX. SPACING 7’0’ 9’0” 10’0” 11’0” 12’0” 14’0”

Horizontal copper tubing shall be supported in accordance with MSS SP-69 Tables 3 and 4, excerpts of which follow below: NOMINAL TUBE SIZE 1/2” – 3/4” 1” 1¼” 1½” 2” 2½” 3” 4”

ROD DIAMETERS 3/8” 3/8” 3/8” 3/8” 3/8” 1/2” 1/2” 1/2”

MAX. SPACING 5’0’ 6’0” 7’0” 8’0” 9’0” 10’0” 11’0” 12’0”

S.

Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contact such as plastic coated hangers, copper colored epoxy paint, or non-adhesive isolation tape. Galvanized felt isolators sized for copper tubing may also be used.

T.

Install hangers to provide a minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

U.

Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

V.

Support vertical piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Support vertical pipes at every other floor. Wherever possible, locate riser clamps directly below pipe couplings or shear lugs.

W.

Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at the same elevation, provide trapeze hangers as specified herein above. Trapeze hangers shall be spaced according HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 54 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

to the smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports according to schedule herein above. X. 2.30

Do not support piping from other pipes, ductwork or other equipment which is not building structure.

PIPING MATERIALS A.

All piping materials installed under this section shall be new and shall consist of the following materials of construction: System of Section

Piping Class

Hot Water Supply and Returns Chilled Water Supply and Returns Make-Up Water Relief Valve and Vent Lines Drain Lines Cooling Coil and Louver Condensate Pan Drains Chemical Feed Refrigerant Piping

2 2 20 2 2 20 9 12

Note: Class 20 piping may be used in lieu of Class 2 piping for two-inch (2”) and smaller diameter piping for hot water, chilled water and any size drain line. B.

Class 2 Piping System 2 Inches and Smaller

2-1/2 Inches and Larger

Construction

Screwed construction with screwed or flanged connections to equipment.

Butt-welded construction with flanged connections to valves and equipment.

Piping

Carbon steel, Schedule 40, ANSI B36.10, ASTM A120.

Carbon steel, Schedule 40 to 8"; Schedule 30 for 10" to 18"' Schedule 20 for 20" to 24"; ANSI B36.10, ASTM A53, Grade A or B (except that all steam and hydronic heating systems piping shall be Schedule 40).

Fittings

Malleable iron, 150 lb. class screwed ends, ANSI B16.3, ASTM A197.

Carbon steel, schedule to match piping, butt-weld ends, ANSI B16.9, ASTM A234, Grade WPA.

Couplings

Same as "Fittings" above.

Unions

Malleable iron, 300 lb. class, screwed ends, ANSI bronzeto-bronze type, ANSI B16.5, ASTM A181, Grade 1.

Forged steel, 150 lb. ANSI Standard weld-neck type flange, ANSI B16.5, ASTM A181, Grade 1.

Flanges

Forged steel, 150 lb. ANSI

Same as "Unions" above.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 55 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

standard screw-on type, ANSI B16.5, ASTM A181, Grade 1. C.

D.

Class 9 Piping System 2 Inches and Smaller

2-1/2 Inches and Larger

Construction

Screwed construction with screwed or flanged connections to equipment.

Butt-welded construction with flanged connections to valves and equipment.

Piping

Stainless steel, Schedule 40, ANSI B36.26, ASTM A312, Grade TP 304L.

Stainless steel, Schedule 40, ANSI B36.26, ASTM A312, Grade 304L.

Fittings

Forged stainless steel, 2000 lb. ANSI standard, screwed type, ANSI B16.11, ASTM A182, Grade F304.

Forged stainless steel, Schedule 40, butt-welded ends, ANSI B16.9, ASTM A182, Type 304L.

Couplings

Same as "Fittings" above.

Unions

Forged stainless steel, 2000 lb. ANSI standard, socketwelded stainless steel seats, ASTM A182, Grade F304.

Forged stainless steel, 300 lb. ANSI standard, weld-neck type flange, ASTM A182, Grade F304.

Flanges

Forged stainless steel, 300 lb. ANSI standard, socketwelded type, ASTM A182, Grade F304.

Same as "Unions" above.

Class 12 Piping System All Pipe Sizes Construction

Hard brazed joints.

Piping

Copper tubing, Type ACR, hard drawn; cleaned, dehydrated and capped for refrigeration service, ANSI B70.1, ASTM A280. All Pipe Sizes

Fittings

Wrought copper, brazed joint type, ANSI B16.22.

Couplings

Same as "Fittings" above.

Brazing Alloy

East Flo, Sil Fos, Phos. Co. minimum 1100 ºF melting temperature ASTM B260. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 56 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

E.

2.31

Class 20 Piping System 2 Inches and Smaller

2-1/2 Inches to 8 Inches

Construction

Soldered joint construction with threaded adaptors.

Screwed construction with flanged connections to valves and equipment.

Piping

Copper, Type L, hard drawn, ANSI H23.1, ASTM B88.

Carbon steel (galvanized), Schedule 40, ANSI B36.20, ASTM A120.

Fittings

Cast bronze or wrought copper, solder joint type, ANSI B16.19 or B16.22.

Cast iron (galvanized), 125 lb. class, screwed ends, ANSI B16.3, ASTM A197.

Couplings

Same as "Fittings" above.

Same as "Fittings" above.

Unions

Wrought copper, solder joint type, ANSI B16.19 or B16.22.

Malleable iron fittings (galvanized), 125 lb. ANSI standard, screw-on type, ANSI B16.1.

F.

Flange Bolts and Nuts 1. CI to CI, CI to CS, CI to CB and CB to CB. 2. Bolts: ANSI, B181, ASTM A307, Grade B, square head, coarse threaded series, Class 2B fit. a. CS to CS b. Stud Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B7, Class 2A fit. c. Nuts: ANSI B18.2.2, ASTM A194, Grade B7, heavy hexagonal series, semi-finished, Class 2B fit.

G.

Gaskets: For all pipe classes except as note: 1. Gaskets: Flat ring 1/16-inch thick rubber, Garlock Style 3100 graphite or equal. ADA rated for service. 2. For make-up water service and cooling tower water. a. Gaskets: Full face 1/16-inch thick rubber, Garlock 22 or equal. b. For fuel oil service: i. Gaskets - Garlock 2021.

H.

Solder for Class 20 Piping: 95-5 tin antimony or 95.5 lead-tin conforming to ASTM B32, allow Grade 5A.

REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES A.

Summary: 1. Extent of refrigeration piping, fittings, valves and accessories is indicated (on the drawings and by the requirements of this section and section 15B.03 “General Requirements – Mechanical”). a. Refrigeration piping is specified on a performance basis and the Contractor is responsible for the design and preparation of shop drawings covering all refrigeration piping work. 2. Related Sections: Refer to other Division 15 sections for the following: a. Mechanical Insulation HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 57 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

B.

C.

2.32

Quality Assurance: 1. Codes and Standards: Provide refrigeration piping conforming to the requirements of the following: a. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). b. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). c. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). d. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). e. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS). Submittal: 1. Refer to Section 15B.02, “Submittals” for basic information relating to submittal requirements. 2. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data on the following: a. Refrigerant Valves b. Refrigerant Specialties

D.

Refrigerant Piping: 1. Refrigerant Piping: Dimensions and material requirements for pipe, pipe fittings and components shall conform to ASHRAE 15 and ANSI B31.5 and shall be compatible with fluids used and capable of withstanding the pressures and temperatures of the service. a. Tubing used for refrigerant service shall be cleaned, sealed, capped, or plugged prior to shipment from the manufacturer’s plant.

E.

Valves and Accessories: 1. Valves: Provide valves designed, manufactured and tested specifically for refrigerant service. a. Internal parts shall be removable for inspection or replacement without applying heat or breaking pipe connections. Threaded ends of valves shall conform to ANSI B2.1.

F.

Execution – General: 1. Installation: Install piping components to ensure proper and efficient operation of the equipment and controls and in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions. a. Provide proper supports for the mounting of vibration isolators, stands, guides, anchors, clamps and brackets. b. Provide piping connected to equipment with vibration isolators with flexible connections which shall conform to vibration and sound isolation requirements for the system. c. Conform to ASHRAE 15 and ANSI B31.5.

PRESSURE GAUGES A.

Pressure gauges shall be of sizes, types and capacities specified herein and located as indicated on the drawings. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Ashcroft, Trerice or Manning, Maxwell, Maxwell and Moore.

B.

Except as otherwise indicated, all gauges shall be 4½ inch diameter stainless steel case and ring phosphor bronze bourbon type, 1 percent full scale accuracy and bottom connection. Gauges for panel mounting shall have stainless steel flush mounting ring and back connection. Gauges for fluid handling service shall have isolating cock and also fitting with pulsation dampeners and red setpoint indicators at pump inlets and outlets. Gauges for steam service shall have coil syphon and isolating cock. All cocks HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 58 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School shall be rated at 150 WSP except on HP steam service, 250 WSP.

C.

2.33

Gauge range shall be as follows: 1. Chilled Water 0-100 PSIG 2. Hot Water 0-100 PSIG Note: Mount all gauges so as to be read from floor. Provide two (2) spare gauges for each range indicated.

PUMPS A. B.

Pumps shall be of sizes, types, capacities and arrangements indicated on Drawings. Equipment shall be manufactured by Taco, Bell and Gossett, Grundfos or Armstrong. Equipment shall be complete shop-assembled packages with pump, motor drive couplings, pump base assemblies and accessories. All equipment shall be shop primed and finish painted. All pumps shall be field checked for alignment and corrected prior to start-up. This Contractor shall be responsible for insuring compatibility of chemical treatment program with pump seals used. Pumps shall not overload their drivers along any point of their entire operating curves. All pumps shall have suction and discharge flanges drilled and tapped for pressure gauge installation. All pumps shall be capable of operating at water temperatures from 35 degrees F. to 250 degrees F. All pumps shall have drip bases. Drip bases to be piped to floor drain and shaft seal drains shall be piped to drip base by this Contractor.

C.

Inline Suction Pumps: Pumps shall be base mounted, single stage, double suction design with a foot mounted volute to allow servicing of the impeller and bearing assembly without disturbing piping connections. 1. Shall be rigidly coupled pipe-mounted types. Pump features shall include bronze impeller, alloy steel shaft, 100,000 hour ball bearings, cupro-nickel steel shaft sleeves, stuffing boxes, mechanical seals, 250 PSI test vertically split casings, flanged suction and discharge connections, rigid pump/driver coupling, coupling guard, motor driver and rigid pump-driver mounting baseplate and frame. 2. Pump volute shall be Class 30 cast iron, suitable for 175 PSI working pressure, with integrally-cast pedestal support feet. The impeller shall be cast bronze enclosed, double suction type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking cap screw. 3. The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the pump shaft by an internally-flushed mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous operation at 225 deg. F. A replaceable bronze shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal. Seals shall be capable of serviceability without disconnecting the pump from its piping. 4. Pump shall be rated for minimum of 175 psi working pressure. Volute shall have gauge tappings at the suction and discharge nozzles and vent and drain tappings at the top and bottom. 5. Pump bearing bracket shall have oil lubricated bronze journal and thrust openings. Bracket shaft shall be alloy steel having ground and hardened thrust bearing faces. A flexible coupling to dampen starting torque and torsional vibrations shall be employed. 6. Motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be of the size, voltage and enclosure called for on the plans. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned, and shall be realigned by the Contractor after installation prior to start-up. 7. Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute Standards. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high grade machinery enamel prior to shipment.

D.

End Suction Pumps: Pumps shall be base mounted, single stage, end suction design with a foot mounted volute to allow servicing of the impeller and bearing assembly without HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 59 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

disturbing piping connections. 1. Pump volute shall be Class 30 cast iron with integrally-cast pedestal support feet. The impeller shall be cast bronze enclosed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking cap screw. 2. The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the pump shaft by an internally-flushed mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring, suitable for continuous operation at 225 deg. F. A replaceable bronze shaft sleeve shall completely cover the wetted area under the seal. 3. Pump shall be rated for minimum of 175 psi working pressure. Volute shall have gauge tappings at the suction and discharge nozzles and vent and drain tappings at the top and bottom. 4. Base plate shall be of structural steel or fabricated steel channel with fully enclosed sides and ends, and securely welded cross members. Grouting area shall be fully opened. A flexible type, center drop-out design coupler, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, shall be employed between the pump and motor. Coupler shall be shielded by a coupler guard securely fastened to the base. 5. Motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be of the size, voltage and enclosure called for on the plans. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned, and shall be realigned by the Contractor after installation. 6. Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute Standards. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high grade machinery enamel prior to shipment. 7. Shall be flexible coupled base-mounted types. Pump features shall include bronze impeller, alloy steel shaft, 100,000 hour ball bearings, cupro-nickel steel shaft sleeves, stuffing boxes, mechanical seals, 250 PSI test vertically split casings, flanged suction and discharge connections, flexible pump/driver coupling, coupling guard, motor driver and rigid pump-driver mounting baseplate and frame. E. 2.34

Shop Drawings shall include complete dimension drawings of all equipment furnished, together with individual pump curves, and electric data.

RADIANT HEATING PANELS A.

Radiant heating panels shall be of the types, sizes and capacities indicated on the Drawings. Radiant heating panels shall be as manufactured by Sunel, Aerotech or Airtex.

B.

Radiant heating panels shall be constructed of extruded aluminum with a approximate overall thickness of 0.115 inches. The panel shall consist of an assembly of five inch (5") strips to the width indicated on the drawings. The strips shall have a 0.495 inside diameter copper tube expanded within a circular cavity in the extrusion for an intimate 360º contact of copper tube to aluminum extrusion under all operating temperature conditions. Ends of tubes shall be swagged to 0.503 inches inside diameter for proper soldering fit of 3/8-inch Type"L" soft copper tubing. Panel size shall be as indicated on the drawings. Panel size shall be as indicated on the drawings. Panel face configuration and color shall be as selected by the Architect. The panel finish shall be two (2) coats of baked enamel painted after assembly.

C.

Radiant heating panels shall be installed by a qualified Contractor. 1. Ceiling panel contractor qualifications: a. Be regularly and continuously in the business of installing radiant ceilings for a period of no less than five (5) ears prior to the bid date of this project. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 60 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b. c. 2.

3.

4.

2.35

Have installed no less than twenty-five (25) radiant panel installations. Be certified by the manufacturer, in writing, as the authorized installing contactor. Provide a list of installations as per Paragraph 1.b above.

d. Testing a. The Radiant Ceiling Panel Subcontractor shall perform hydrostatic text on all circuits of radiant panels. The test shall assure that here are no leaks in the system up to 150 psi. Others a. All supply and return piping to within twenty-four inches (24") of the radiant circuits and valves, strainers, unions, air vents, gauges and the like shall be furnished and installed by the Mechanical Contractor. Final connections shall be made by the Mechanical Contractor. Installation a. Panels shall be installed in openings provided by others. Panels shall be trimmed and notched where required, to fit neatly at walls, columns and other projections. b. All interconnections shall be made by the radiant panel installed. Interconnections shall consist of 6'0" "loops". c. Insulation as specified shall be installed over all active radiant panels. d. Specified clips to hold down panels and wire hangers (for panels 24" wide or wider) shall be installed. e. All panels shall be left free of finger marks or other foreign matter.

REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS A.

Registers, grilles and diffusers shall be of model, size and capacity and furnished as scheduled on the drawings. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Krueger or Metal-Aire and shall be supplied with white baked enamel finish except where noted otherwise.

B.

All supply registers shall be furnished with individually adjustable face louvers. Registers and grilles shall be supplied with white baked enamel finish except where noted otherwise.

C.

Diffusers, registers and grilles for installation in walls or plastered ceilings shall be provided with sponge rubber frame gaskets and Phillips head screws for attachment of device frame to building construction.

D.

The diffuser shall be provided with a removable core permitting easy access to core sections. Diffuser neck shall extend no less than 1 inch above the core to accommodate an internal duct connection to prevent leakage to ceiling space. Diffusers shall be assembled in patterns which provide one, two, three or four-way air discharge with each side delivering a quantity of air proportional to the area served. When indicated by manufacturer’s model number on the equipment schedule, the ceiling diffusers shall be of the restricted multi-orifice jet induction and air mixing type consisting of louver sections with built-in diffusing vanes. The vanes shall be arranged to discharge air from adjacent louvers at an angle of 45 degrees in opposite directions to ensure rapid mixing of primary and room air. Each individual diffusing vane shall be welded in place and mechanically fastened to adjacent louver sections to make a rigid unit. The vanes shall extend to the discharge edges of the louvers. Where louver sections join core frame, the louver ends shall be welded to core frame. The leaving edge of each louver shall be hemmed and the louver ends shall be rounded and hemmed before welding the core frames.

E.

F.

All duct connections to registers, grilles and diffusers shall have all interior surfaces HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 61 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

with the line of sight or within 4 feet of the opening painted with dull black paint. 2.36

ROOFTOP AIR HANDLING UNITS A.

Furnish and install air handling units as manufactured by Annexair, Hakkon, Seasons Four or approved equal. The unit manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience, who issues complete catalog data on total product and has a minimum of ten installations using the scheduled product model.

B.

The operating range shall be between 115°F and -20°F as standard for all units. Performance shall be rated in accordance with ARI testing procedures. All units shall be factory assembled, internally wired, and 100% run tested to check operation, fan and blower rotation and control sequence before leaving the factory. Wiring internal to the unit shall be numbered for simplified identification. Units shall be ETL listed and labeled, classified in accordance with UL 1995/CAN/CSAlNo. 236-M90.

C.

Unit shall comprise of, but not limited to, AHU sections shown on drawings and the following list: 1. Double wall cabinet. 2. Hot water heating coil section 3. CW cooling coil section 4. Pre Filter section 5. Final Filter section. 6. Supply air fan section. 7. Intake and mixing section with dampers and louvers or hoods. 8. Fan motors compatible with variable frequency drives 9. Outside air intake plenum 10. Return/relief air fan section.

D.

Design and Construction Features: 1. Housing: a. The unit housing shall be constructed from a frame, base and panel assembly. Unit shall be completely factory assembled and shipped in one piece as shown on drawings. The frame shall consist of robust injection molded corners and extruded thermally broken aluminum profiles; welded together for reinforcement. Base structure shall be fully welded with formed heavy gauge galvanized steel and have integral lifting lugs which can be removed once the unit is installed. “Thermocomposite” panels shall be mechanically fastened to the base structure. Unit casing must be guaranteed to have no exterior condensation at interior AHU temperatures down to 43F while unit exterior conditions are maintained at 95 F dry bulb / 85 F wet bulb. b. All roof, floor and wall panels shall be made from “thermo-composite” panels, with an aluminum interior and exterior liner. All panels and access doors shall be 2” thick double wall construction with R14 foam insulation, and Greenguard certified®. The panels shall be capable of withstanding air pressure up to 10” w.c with 1/16” panel deflection. Panels shall be fastened from the interior and gasketed along the frame to reduce thermal transmission. Fixed panels shall be removable without affecting the housing integrity. (1) Alternate construction: All roof and wall panels shall be made from aluminum, minimum. 12 Ga Aluminum Exterior wall  and 22 Ga Steel Metal Liner.  All panels and access doors HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 62 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

c.

d.

e. f. g.

h. 2.

shall be double wall construction with (R-12) two-inch thick, minimum 3.0 pcf polyisocyanurate foam insulation. All casing panels and frame must be provided with true thermal break. Base shall be fully welded with formed heavy-gauge galvanized steel with removable integral lifting lugs. .125” Aluminum Checkerplate Floor – Fully Welded, capable of holding 1.5” of water. 6” channel base rail.    Floor shall be aluminum, minimum .063”, mechanically fastened to the base with minimum (R-12) two-inch thick polyisocyanurate foam insulation and 22ga Galvanized Steel metal under liner. Casing system shall be guaranteed to assure the owner that system capacity, performance, and cleanliness standards specified are not compromised. The panels shall be tested in accordance with SMACNA and ASHRAE 111 to have a deflection of no more than L/1150 at 10’’ and withstand air pressures up to 8” w.c. Leakage to be guaranteed at no more than 1% of the design volume at 1-1/2 times the design operating pressure or 30 CFM, whichever is greater. All casing walls shall be of panel construction, including the fan discharge walls, mixing section walls. Access doors shall be provided to all major components to facilitate quick and easy access. Access doors are to be provided with open guard door locks to lock the door in the open position for safe access in windy conditions. All access door(s) shall have Allegis type latches and nylon type hinges designed to open 180 degrees. Doors shall open against air pressure as indicated on drawings. Removable panels provided for equipment pull out for coil(s) and heat exchanger(s) shall have key tooled threaded insert fasteners, and have at least one fixed handle on the outside. Access doors shall be sealed with a full “UShaped” gasket for superior air tightness along the door edge. Bulb type gaskets shall not be acceptable since they do not return to their original form once compressed. The airflow separation wall between the outside air intake and exhaust air outlet shall be one inch double wall “thermo-composite” panels insulated with minimum R7 foam insulation and Greenguard certified®.) All roof and side wall seams shall be positively sealed to prevent water and air leakage. Outdoor units shall have a rain gutter above each access door and a watertight roof shall be provided with a white TPO UV-reflective membrane. The entire exterior will be finished with (2) two coats of acrylic urethane enamel, manufacturer standard color. Paint shall pass ASTM B117 3000-hour salt fog resistance test and ASTM D4585 3000hour moisture condensation resistance test. Floor openings shall be covered with 1” fiberglass safety walk-on gratings. Air handler unit casing shall be provided with a lifetime warranty against corrosion resistance under normal use.

Supply and Return Fans: a. The fans shall be carefully positioned and installed at an optimal distance to respect uniform airflow across the coil(s). b. Plug Fans: Fans shall be direct drive radial centrifugal fans with free running impeller. No fan belts will be acceptable for this application. Fans shall be compact, optimized and construction made of galvanized sheet steel with backward curved 7-blade high efficiency impeller, protected by an epoxy powder coating. To reduce vibration, the impeller shall be balanced with hub to an admissible vibration severity of less HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 63 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

c. d.

e.

3.

than 2.8 mm/s in conformity with DIN ISO 14694 and proof shall be supplied for each individual impeller. Tests shall be made according to DIN ISO 1940 Part 1, quality of balancing G2.5/6.3. The single inlet shall be mounted onto constant speed direct drive motor, equipped with an air flow optimized inlet cone from galvanized sheet steel. Fans shall have maintenance free ball bearings, closed on both sides, sealed for life. Fans shall be completely certified as per ISO 5801 and to AMCA standards. Fans will require to be operated by a Variable speed drive. Plug fan shall come equipped with guard grills for the air intake side. The unit manufacturer shall provide flexible connection between fan and fan wall. Flex connection material shall be flame retardant fabric suitable for intended use meeting the requirements of NFPA 90A. The fan and motor shall be factory-mounted on a welded structural steel spring type vibration base. The base shall be mounted on stable / adjustable, seismically restrained (seismic zone 2) isolators with 2” maximum deflection rating. Spring efficiency shall not be less than 98%. The unit shall be delivered with factory installed airflow measuring system. The airflow measuring system, consisting of a piezometer ring and transducer, shall be installed on the fans. The package consists of an inlet port on the fan inlet cone connected with flexible tubing to the transducer.

Fan Motors: a. The fan motors shall meet NEMA standard dimensions and comply with the Energy policy Act of 1997. Motors shall have high efficiencies with low noise and vibration output. Motors shall be certified and built in accordance to ISO 9001 quality control system. b. Motors shall be 1750 or 3600 RPM, 460V/3ph/60 Hz as scheduled and as per the following: i.

ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii.

viii.

Motor shall be premium efficient, ODP enclosure, with cast iron housing and end bells. Motors shall be furnished with efficiencies equal to or greater than those specified in the Energy Policy Act of 1992 (EPACT). Motors shall be inverter duty rated. Motor shall be of HP as listed on schedule and be selected for a minimum of 10% over calculated BHP. The motor service factor shall be a minimum of 1.15. Motor shall be designed for continuous duty operation, NEMA Design B with Class F insulation. The motor shall be suitable for operating with variable frequency drives without undue noise, vibration or deterioration of reliability and life. Motor bearing life shall be L-10 200,000 hours. Provide stainless steel nameplate indicating the following: a) NEMA efficiency index nominal efficient (MB112.53BO). b) AFBMA bearing numbers. c) Lubrication instructions. d) A shaft grounding brush kit will be provided to prevent electrical damage to motor bearings by safely channeling harmful shaft currents to ground. Acceptable motor manufacturers: Reliance, General Electric, Baldor

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 64 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4.

Fan Airflow Balancing: a. Provide the EZ Balancer fan air flow measurement and control system with fan inlet bell air flow measuring taps, electronic controller with digital display of cfm for each fan and transducer. The system must allow setting of required airflow of the fans without the need to adjust VFD settings by simply using up/down keypad buttons. One (1) EZ Balancer is required for up to two (2) airflows even if multiple fans are used and can be applied for constant and variable airflow applications with a 010Vdc signal.

5.

OA Airflow Balancing and Monitoring Package: a. Economizer: The economizer segment shall be furnished with factory installed integral air flow monitor/damper. i. The integral airflow monitor/damper shall be a Ruskin AMS-60. ii. The integral airflow monitor/damper shall be tested to AMCA Standard 611-95.

6.

Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) a. The VFD shall use Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) technology to convert three phase input power to coded Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) output. The VFD shall be equipped with easy access function for the most frequently used parameters in HVAC applications. The VFD keypad shall have door mounted status indicators. The VFD shall have monitoring functions to monitor VFD during motor operation. The VFD shall have a carrier frequency that is able to switch the IGBT at 15 kHz. The power terminal strip shall have at least (8) eight digital programmable input terminals. The VFD shall also have programmable output terminals. The VFD shall have 4-20mA analog output terminals that are fully programmable. The VFD shall have the ability to retry automatically after a fault. In the event of a momentary power failure the VFD shall read the inverter speed and direction of a coasting motor and shall restart the motor smoothly. The drive shall have electronic thermal protection settings to protect the motor. The VFD shall have PID function for constant flow applications. The VFD manufacturer shall provide at no charge phone support on VFD. In addition to that, every VFD smaller than 20 hp shall be available in either extender box or integrated enclosure configuration. VFD larger than 20 hp shall be mounted in an integrated enclosure only including the power unit, contactors, relays, and all specified accessories. VFD’s shall not have “by-pass” for direct driven fans since they may damage the unit if the motor rpm is higher than the actual rpm required.

7.

Filters a. Pre-Filters (Maxi Pleat 2” MERV 8 (25-30%)) i. Filters shall be factory installed upstream of the heat exchanger and coils, in both airstreams. The air filters shall be Filtration Lab’s Maxi-60 MERV 8. Each filter consist of 100% synthetic media, expanded metal on the downstream and enclosing with high wet-strength beverage board with diagonal support bonded on air entering and air exiting side of each pleat. MERV 7 model 415 FILTERS, u.l. class 2 are rated as per ashrae test 52.2.1999 at 55% efficiency initial (based on Minimum Average HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 65 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b.

c.

8.

Efficiency) at 3-10 microns. The model 415 could be operated at 500 fpm, surface area 17.6 FT2 of media based on 24 x 24 x 2 initial static pressure at 0.28” final will be 1”. Filters shall be placed in a completely sealed, galvanized holding frame with quick release latches for easy replacement. Final (Mega-Pak 4” MERV 13 (85%) i. Filters shall be factory installed where shown on the drawings. The air filters shall be Filtration Lab’s Mega-Pak MERV 13. Each filter shall consist of 100% synthetic media, expanded metal on the downstream and enclosing frame shall be constructed of a rigid galvanized steel to provide a durable housing for the filter pack. The filter shall have a steel reinforced diagonal support braces affixed on both sides of the filter and it shall have plastic fingers for affixed on both sides of the media pack to control spacing as well to prevent the pleat rows from collapsing one upon the other. Filter Gauge i. Unit manufacturer shall provide and install a Dwyer series 2000 magnehelic gauge complete with stainless steel static pressure tips and accessories for indicating the operating pressure drop of each filter bank. Indicating range of gauge shall be selected at two times the final resistance of the filter bank. The filter gauge shall be mounted on the unit exterior.

Control and Smoke Dampers: a. Dampers shall be installed where shown on the drawings. Dampers shall be low leak type with rubber edges, opposed or parallel blades, and constructed from extruded aluminum. Galvanized dampers will not be acceptable. b.

c.

Dampers shall be installed in the following compartments with linkage rod for actuators: i. Outdoor air intake. ii. Return/Recirculation air damper iii. Relief outlet Actuators shall be 24V factory installed; modulating type. All actuators shall have spring return mechanism and auxiliary switches.

d.

Dampers will be installed in the failed close position unless otherwise noted. Smoke dampers meeting the following specifications shall be furnished and factory installed where shown on the Bid Drawings.

e.

Smoke dampers shall be furnished, factory mounted and wired by the AHU manufacturer on all supply and return air duct connections 15,000 cfm and larger. Dampers shall be Greenheck SMD-43, Ruskin SD-50 or approved equal. i. ii.

Damper shall be selected for opposed blade action. Smoke dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, 92A, 92B, 101 and further shall be tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest edition of UL Standard 555S. Smoke dampers shall be of low leakage design qualified to UL 555S Leakage Class III. Smoke dampers shall be FM approved and AMCA tested.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 66 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

iii.

9.

Dampers shall be UL listed, testing to be capable of withstanding 4” W.G. differential pressure at 2,000 FPM approach velocity. iv. Each damper/actuator combination shall have a UL555S elevated temperature rating of 250 degrees F. shall be rated to operate at maximum design air flow at its installed location. v. Each damper shall be supplied with an appropriate actuator installed by the damper manufacturer at the time of damper fabrication. Damper actuator shall electric and be furnished with two end switches to annunciate full open and full closed position of smoke damper. vi. Damper frames shall be made of galvanized steel or extruded aluminum. Damper blades shall be extruded aluminum airfoil shape to withstand high velocities and static pressures. Dampers shall be provided with stainless steel blade end seals and flexible synthetic blade edge seals to keep leakage to a minimum. vii. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve type rotating in extruded holes in the damper frame. viii. Damper must be rated for mounting vertically (with blades running horizontal) or horizontally and be UL 555S rated for leakage and airflow in either direction through the damper. ix. Each damper section shall not exceed 60” x 60”. Provide linkage between sections. x. Damper linkage to be concealed in frame channel outside of the airstream. Provide a minimum of one electric damper actuator per 25 S.F. maximum damper area. Vertical Tube Integral Face & Bypass (VIFB) Hot Water Coils (See Details) a. Coil shall be installed as shown on the drawings. Arrangement, capacity etc, shall be as shown on the coil schedule (and/or drawings). Air pressure drop scheduled shall not be exceeded. b. The coil ratings shall be certified in accordance with ARI 410 standards. c. The coil shall consist of an integral series of finned heating elements and element by-pass with interlocked dampers. The coil shall be capable of maintaining constant discharge air temperatures regardless of variations in the entering air temperature, with full water flow in the coil at all times. d. Coils shall be tested to 250 psig under water and shall be guaranteed for 200 PSIG working pressure and up 400 deg F. e. The elements shall consist of .008” thick patterned aluminum plate fins applied to 5/8" OD .035” thick seamless copper tubes. f. The finned elements shall be secured to a carbon steel header by means of a silver brazed joint. g. The supply/return header(s) shall be enclosed within the coil casing at the base of the unit and not exposed to the air stream. h. Elements shall be arranged in a vertical position. The use of expansion joints shall not be required. i. The tubes shall be connected to the headers in a straight thru manner (no 90 degree bends). j. Casings shall be minimum 12 GA galvanized steel, braced and flanged (punched if necessary for duct or wall mounting). End casings shall have smooth, embossed tube holes to avoid abrasion during expansion and contraction. k. Dampers shall be wrap around “clamshell” design. Dampers shall be minimum 16 GA galvanized steel. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 67 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

l.

m.

Interconnecting bars shall be stainless steel. Operator lever arms shall be welded to a common shaft for permanent alignment with pivots on bronze oilite bearings. The operator shall connect to the damper linkage via threaded ball joint rod ends. All coil pipe connections shall be individually extended through the unit casing wall. Pipe headers and all piping specialties are to be provided in the field by the Contractor. Drain and vent connections shall be piped with ball valves and hose bibs for the drain.

10.

Standard Hot Water Heating Coils (See Details): a. Hot water coils shall have 5/8” O.D., 0.035” thick copper tubes with helically wound 0.008” thick aluminum fins by Aerofin, Heatcraft or Marlo. i. Casing shall be 16-gauge galvanized steel. ii. Headers shall be steel barrels with vents, drains, and serpentine continuous tube design, suitable for 200 psi working pressure. iii. Coil fins shall be flat or rippled fin design, .0075” aluminum. Air pressure drop scheduled shall not be exceeded. b. Coils shall be housed in factory-fabricated frame independent of unit casing. Coil frames shall be 12-gauge stainless steel. i. Coil frames shall support coil sections independently allowing coil to be removed through exterior unit casing, normal to direction of air flow, without disturbing other coil sections. ii. Coil casing shall have removable panel on exterior side. c. All coil pipe connections shall be individually extended through the unit casing wall. Pipe headers and all piping specialties are to be provided in the field by the Contractor. Drain and vent connections shall be piped with ball valves and hose bibs for the drain. d. Coils shall be tested to 250 psig under water and shall be guaranteed for 200 psig working pressure.

11.

Chilled Water Cooling Coils a. Chilled water coils shall have 5/8” O.D., 0.035” thick copper tubes with 0.008” thick aluminum plate fins by Aerofin, Heatcraft or Marlo. b. Coils shall be selected for use with fresh water. c. Casing shall be 16-gauge stainless steel for cooling coils. d. Headers shall be steel barrels with vents, drains, and serpentine continuous tube design, suitable for 200 psi working pressure. Headers shall have intruded tube holes to provide a large brazing surface for maximum strength and inherent flexibility. e. Fins shall have full drawn collars to provide a continuous surface cover over the entire tube for maximum heat transfer. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fins to provide a continuous primary to secondary compression bond over the entire finned length for maximum heat transfer rates. f. Coil connections shall be same end. AHU manufacturer shall clearly label each pipe connection with a supply or return designation. g. Coils shall be housed in factory-fabricated frame independent of unit casing. Coil frames shall be 12-gauge stainless steel. i. Coil frames shall support coil sections independently allowing coil to be removed through exterior unit casing, normal to direction of air flow, without disturbing other coil sections. ii. Coil casing shall have removable panel on exterior side. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 68 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

iii.

i.

j. k.

Drain pan shall be provided for cooling coils. Cooling coils shall sit on stainless steel tubular support rails, which shall stand a minimum of (2) two inches above the highest point of the floor drain pan. Stacked coils shall be provided for larger airflows and intermediate drain pans shall be provided for each coil bank. Drain pans shall be stainless steel with stainless steel drain connections on one side only. Drain pans shall be triple sloped IAQ type. All coils shall be certified in accordance with ARI standard 410. All coil pipe connections shall be individually extended through the unit casing wall. Pipe headers and all piping specialties are to be provided in the field by the Contractor. Drain and vent connections shall be piped with ball valves and hose bibs for the drain. Coils shall be tested to 250 psig under water and shall be guaranteed for 200 psig working pressure. All coils shall be certified in accordance with ARI standard 410.

12.

Power & Safety Control: a. The power and control center shall be integral to the unit housing and rated NEMA 4X. All wiring shall be accomplished by the manufacturer and must be tested under a high pot test. Under no circumstances shall any wiring or parts be field installed. Panels that are externally mounted to the unit shall not be accepted, regardless of the NEMA rating they may have. A separate access door shall be provided with an approved locking device. All electrical components contained in the panel shall be UL/CSA certified and labeled. The unit shall be complete with motor starters / VFDs, fuses, cascading overloads (without VFD’s or 2 motors on same VFD), relays, terminals for main ON/OFF and step-down transformer. All components shall be factory wired for single point power connection by the manufacturer of the unit. A non-fused safety disconnect switch shall be factory installed for on/off servicing. Any power or control wiring that is field installed shall not be accepted under any circumstances. If units show up at the job site without wiring by the manufacturer, the contractor will have to send back units to the manufacturer at the contractors’ expense to get them factory wired and re-tested.

13.

Service Power & Lighting: a. GFI, lights and switches shall be factory installed and wired to a nonfused safety disconnect switch shall be factory installed for on/off servicing. A separate power connection 120/1 will be required (powered by others).

14.

Controls: a. All controls to be by ATC contractor.

15.

Roof Curb: a. A seismically rated insulated, pre-fabricated roof curb shall be provided and shipped knocked down. The roof curb will be made of 16-gauge galvanized steel with 4” flanges, maximum 24” high with a factory installed 2” x 3” wood nailer strip. b. The mechanical contractor shall be furnish and install all shims and or pressure treated blocking to insure a level curb.

16.

Warranty: a. Unit manufacturer warrants each product to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal and proper use, and will within HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 69 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

twelve (12) months from date of start-up and not exceed eighteen (18) months from shipment, repair or replace any part which, when returned to our factory transportation charges prepaid, and upon inspection by Annexair, proves to be defective. This warranty does not include any labor or service charges that occur under this warranty. The installing contractor must be responsible for warranty service and maintenance after the equipment is placed into operation. 17.

Equipment Start-up: a. The equipment start-up and operational check out is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor who purchases the equipment and associated personnel responsible for its operation. Manufacturer must provide a factory-trained technician who will provide Start-Up Supervision. A written request for Start-Up Supervision must be received a minimum of 2 weeks before expected start-up date in order to schedule it. The mechanical contractor must supply personnel, tools, gauges and instruments as required to run the equipment. The personnel responsible for the operation of the equipment must be present for the start-up. 18.

2.37

The minimum outdoor air and economizer outdoor air hoods shall be designed with a 4” extruded aluminum louver,bird screen and a plenum enclosure with drain holes. The louver blades shall be drainable type with a maximum 45 degree angle and curved with integral rain baffle. The louver design shall not allow more than 0.03 oz/ft2 water penetration when tested in accordance to AMCA 500. The pressure drop of the complete hood assembly shall not exceed 0.05” wc at a maximum 450 fpm. 2. The exhaust air outlet louvers shall be 2” extruded aluminum, with nonrestricting blade design and bird screen.”

SHEET METAL WORK A.

General: Ductwork systems shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with recommendations contained in the SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”, Third Edition 2005, and as herein specified. Tables and figures referred to hereinafter are taken from the SMACNA publication.

B.

Duct Pressure Classes: As shown on drawings. Where no specific duct pressure class designations are provided on drawings, the 2 inch water gauge pressure class is the basis of compliance with the standards, regardless of velocity in the duct, except when the duct is variable volume supply or designated exhaust. All variable volume ducts upstream of VAV boxes have a 3 inch WG basis of compliance when the drawings do not give pressure class. All AC unit discharge plenums of VAV systems shall have a 6 inch WG basis and the ductwork to the first branch take-off a 4 inch WG basis of compliance when the drawings to do indicate a pressure class. Negative pressure ductwork between lab hoods and exhaust fan inlet shall be 5 inch water gauge pressure class. Snaplock construction is not permitted. Refer to NFPA for Smoke Exhaust Ductwork Gauge Requirements.

C.

Casings and Plenums: Casing and plenum sheet metal gauges, reinforcing and construction details shall be in accordance with Figures 6-1 through 6-12. Intake and exhaust plenums shall be sealed liquid tight and drained. Where through-louver drainage cannot be achieved, a 1 inch drain connection with serviceable 3 inch deep trap, shall be provided within a heated space to prevent freezing, and piped to the nearest floor drain. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 70 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Bottom of plenums shall pitch toward drainage openings. D.

Hangers and Supports: Ductwork sheet metal supports shall be in accordance with Chapter IV, including all plenum and casing sheet metal which is suspended.

E.

Sealing: All duct joints and air device connections shall be sealed in accordance with Table 1-2 except that all supply systems shall be sealed Class A. The sealant shall be Hardcast 550 with imbedded fabric, except for joints with dissimilar metals then a lead gasket shall be provided. Louver plenums shall be sealed water tight to a height of 12 inches above the plenum bottom.

F.

Branch Take-Offs: Branch main take-offs for round ductwork shall be 45 degree lateral tap and where terminal boxes occur, shall be 45° angle entry in accordance with Figure 2-6.

G.

Elbows: Elbows for round ducts shall be stamped type elbows with centerline radius equal to 1.5 times duct diameter. Where space is limited, the centerline radius may be reduced to 1.0 times the diameter for only those ducts entering into corridor ceiling spaces from vertical duct shafts. Elbows for rectangular and oval ductwork shall have a centerline radius equal to 1.5 times the duct width. 1. Where space is restricted, square throat elbows with single or double thickness turning vanes may be used. Elbows shall be in accordance with Figure 2-2 except that throat types RE-4, RE-6, RE-7, RE-9 and RE-10 are specifically prohibited. Provide an access door upstream of all square throat elbows with single (or double) thickness turning vanes.

H.

Transitions and Offsets: Transitions in round ducts shall be conical reducers. Transitions in rectangular ducts shall be in accordance with Figure 2-7 except that offset type 1 and offset type 2 are specifically prohibited.

I.

Flexible Connections: Flexible connections shall be in accordance with Figure 2-17. Flexible connectors shall be installed to provide alignment of equipment and devices with ducts in operating positions. Provide on the inlet and outlet side of all air moving equipment incorporating rotating elements. Connections shall be of glass fiber reinforced neoprene captured by a fingered metal band at each edge. Maintain a maximum three inch (3”) separation and a minimum 1½ inch separation between the connected devices such that a standard four inch (4”) connector will be installed slack.

J.

Access Doors: Access doors in sheet metal ducts shall be provided with sash locks. Access doors in casings and plenums shall be provided with Type 2 locks (handles). All doors shall be hinged. Door insulation shall match adjacent casings. Doors shall be provided on all plenum and mixing sections, fire dampers, smoke dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers, reheat coils (inlet side), air valves and terminal filter equipment.

K.

Volume Dampers: Volume dampers shall be in accordance with SMACNA except that, in addition to those indicated on drawings, each branch main and branch shall be provided with damper typical to locations indicated in Figure 2-1. Additional dampers shall be provided where shown on plans, details and where specified elsewhere. Damper gauge to be two (2) gauges heavier than the duct in which they are mounted. Provide with locking quadrants or push rods and pillow blocks as appropriate. Dampers shall be sufficiently large to extend the full width of the branch duct to which it is attached. Provide scooped profile.

L.

Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Fire and smoke dampers shall be in accordance with National Fire Code NFPA 90A Standard requirements and bear an Underwriters label. Dampers shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 71 Design Development / 12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School instructions. Dampers shall be UL listed, labeled, and shall be dynamic-static designed in accordance with UL Standard 555. Dampers shall be listed to support the appropriate fire rating required for wall and/or floor penetrations served. Dampers in lined ducts shall be in accordance with Figure 2-22. Where required as a condition of damper listing, provide slip joint. To permit breakaway, no screws, rivets, bolts or other fasteners shall be used; each joint shall have an access door as applicable. Provide an access door in the duct to service fusible link. Access doors for insulated ducts shall be double wall insulated sandwich type. Fire dampers shall be out of air stream Type B or C. Combination fire/smoke dampers may be used in lieu of separate dampers. All smoke dampers and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be furnished with pneumatic or electric actuators and appropriate UL label. Provide 10 gauge welded sleeve where dampers can not be placed directly into the fire and/or smoke wall.

M.

All smoke dampers and fire/smoke dampers shall be supplied with electric/electronic actuators, 165 degree F. “McCabe Link” (for use in general HVAC ductwork), 185 degree F. “McCabe Link” (for use in smoke control exhaust ductwork). All fire/smoke dampers shall be capable of being reset remotely. All fire/smoke dampers shall be supplied with one (1) end switch that will indicate both full closed and full open. All fire/smoke dampers shall fail open upon loss of control signal. All smoke dampers shall fail closed upon loss of control signal. 1. Except where specifically noted otherwise, the maximum permissible pressure drop for any fire damper at air flow quantity required by Design Documents shall not exceed 0.1 inches of water. 2. Except where specifically noted otherwise, the maximum permissible pressure drop for any smoke damper assembly at air flow quantity required by design documents shall be as follows: a. Up to 1,000 FPM 0.05 Inches of Water b. 1,000 to 2,000 FPM 0.10 Inches of Water c. Over 2,000 FPM 0.20 Inches of Water 3. Damper sizes shall be adjusted accordingly where required to reduce pressure drop. 4. Installed dampers found to have pressure drops in excess of specified values shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.

N.

All fire, smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers shall be dynamically rated for the following conditions: 1. Fan (VAV) Discharge to Terminal Units 3,500 FPM 2. Fan (CV) Discharge to Reheat Coils 1,500 FPM 3. Terminal Box/Reheat Coil Discharge to a. Terminal Device (i.e. Diffuser) 1,000 FPM 4. Return/Exhaust Terminal Device a. (i.e. Register) to fan inlet 1,800 FPM

O.

Exposed Ductwork: All ductwork exposed to view, except in mechanical rooms, shall not be cross-broken or beaded. Where reinforcement cannot be eliminated by using heavy duty gauge, it shall be internal. Seams shall be of non-standing type and duct shall be cleaned and degreased to accept application of paint.

P.

Flexible Ductwork: Shall be manufactured in accordance with UL-181, Class 0 and the amended Standards of NFPA 90A. The flexible ductwork shall be tested and listed by UL under these standards. 1. Ductwork shall be fabricated of minimum 0.0065” thick, grade 3003 aluminum alloy incorporating a “0” temper. 2. Spiral construction shall incorporate a continuous grooved seam, flat pipe lock, doubled over, to create an effective triple locking joint. Double locking seams HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 72 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

shall not be accepted. Corrugations formed into the spiral tape impart rigidity and shall support duct flexibility. Corrugations shall not exceed 3% of the nominal duct diameter. Joints for securing to ductwork and/or equipment collars shall incorporate a reinforcing band around the circumference of the flexible duct and its connection point. Self-tapping sheet metal screws shall extend through the reinforcing band through the connecting collar, sandwiching the flexible ductwork between. Final air sealant shall be provided by Hardcast 550 with imbedded fabric. Where associated ductwork is specified to be insulated, matching thickness insulating jacket, complete with vapor barrier, shall be used. Length of flexible duct shall not exceed 48 inches except where specifically noted otherwise on drawings. Flexible ductwork shall not be used in conjunction with ductwork rated for 6 inches WG and higher. Flexible duct shall not be installed to penetrate any walls, ceilings, roofs, or floors. The intent of this specification section is to allow the use of flexible ductwork as a final connection to a terminal device. Bends shall not exceed 90 degrees or have a radius less than inside diameter of duct.

Q.

Exhaust systems serving bathrooms, shower rooms and similar rooms where the exhaust air may contain a high moisture content shall be constructed of aluminum and shall be sealed watertight and pitched to prevent any accumulation of moisture. Provide a trapped drain at all low points and at the base of each riser.

R.

Exhaust systems serving laboratory exhaust hoods shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel with externally welded, liquid tight joints, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.

S.

Provide 24 gauge piping sheet metal protective covers, shields or saddles to protect piping insulation. Protective covers shall totally encapsulate any and all exposed HVAC piping within six feet (6’) of finished floor. Shields and saddles shall extend a minimum of six inches (6”) ahead and behind the projected footprint of the pipe support addressed and shall completely cover the lower 180° arc of the insulated piping.

T.

Acoustic Liner: 1. All ductwork noted on plans t be acoustically lined, shall have one-inch (1") thick "ToughGard R" duct liner with enhanced surface. Acoustical liner shall be composed of rotary-type glass fibers for superior acoustic performance. The fibers shall be bonded together with a thermosetting resin into a insulation blanket which is overlaid with a durable, water repellent, fire-resistant black composite air stream surface. 2. Acoustic liner shall comply with ASTM C1071 for air velocities up to 6000 FPM. 3. Acoustic liner shall comply with ASTM C1104 for vapor sorption. 4. Acoustic duct liner shall have a minimum NRC rating of 0.70. Note: Duct dimensions shown are of clear inside dimensions after application of liner.

2.38

SHEET METAL WORK (HIGH VELOCITY SYSTEMS) A.

General: High velocity systems shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with recommendations contained in the latest edition of the SMACNA “High Pressure Duct Construction Standards” and as herein specified. Tables and figures referred to hereinafter are taken from the SMACNA Publication. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 73 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.39

B.

Ductwork: Ductwork sheet metal gauges, transverse joint construction and intermediate reinforcing shall be in accordance with Figure 2-2 for round ductwork and Table 4-3 for rectangular ductwork with welded joints.

C.

All duct joints shall be sealed in accordance with recommendations of Chapter 5 for the sealant used.

D.

Supports: Ductwork sheet metal supports shall be in accordance with Chapter 6.

E.

Branch Take-Offs: Branch main take-offs for round ductwork shall be 45 degrees lateral and where terminal boxes occur shall be conical tees in accordance with Figure 2-5.

F.

Elbows, Transitions and Offsets: Elbows for round ducts shall be stamped type elbows with centerline radius equal to 1.5 times duct diameter. Where space is limited the centerline radius may be reduced to 1.0 times the diameter for only those ducts entering into corridor ceiling spaces from vertical duct shafts. Elbows for rectangular ducts shall be radius type in accordance with Chapter 4. Where space is restricted, square throat elbows may be used in accordance with Chapter 4. Transitions in round ducts shall be conical reducers. Transitions in rectangular ducts shall be in accordance with Figure 418.

G.

Volume Dampers: Volume dampers shall be similar to those specified for low velocity ducts.

H.

Fire dampers and smoke dampers shall be in accordance with Chapter 4 with the damper designed to be outside main air stream in a housing extension. Dampers shall be UL listed and labeled for appropriate fire rating required for rating of wall or floor penetration served. Dampers shall be provided with hinged access doors adjacent to linkages. Where fire dampers cannot be placed directly into fire wall, then 10 gauge black steel welded extension housing shall extend to actual damper location. Dampers shall be located in straight duct sections and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation requirements.

I.

Flexible ductwork shall be in accordance with UL 181 Class 1 construction and shall be spiral wire reinforced fabric with liquid sealant and clamps to secure it to connecting ductwork or equipment collars. Where associated ductwork is specified to be insulated, insulating jacket, complete with vapor barrier, shall be used. Use manufacturer’s recommendations for sealing and securing joints at insulated flexible ducts. When unsupported length of flexible duct exceeds 6 feet, provide 1½ inch galvanized sheet metal saddles under fiberglass duct with sheet metal or aluminum strap supporting saddles from structural framing above. In no case shall hanger spacing exceed 6 feet. Bends shall not exceed 90 degrees or have a radius less than inside diameter of duct

SLEEVES, INSERTS AND OPENINGS A.

General: 1. All penetrations for piping, ductwork and conduit in the building walls, floors and roof shall have sleeved or boxed openings except for interior wall of gypsum board and stud construction which are not fire or smoke rated. 2. The HVAC Subcontractor shall be responsible for informing this Contractor of the construction schedule as to permit orderly inclusion of all sleeves, openings and inserts. The HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish and install all sleeves, boxed openings and inserts as the work progresses. If the HVAC Subcontractor fails to provide the sleeves, boxed openings and inserts, he shall bear the cost of modifications necessary for their inclusion. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 74 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

All cutting and patching shall be done by this Contractor. The HVAC Subcontractor shall not cut into any building construction without first having received permission from the Architect.

B.

Sleeves: 1. This Contractor shall furnish all sleeves for the work and furnish all labor for installation. 2. Sleeves through exterior building walls or through concrete construction shall be Schedule 40 (galvanized) steel pipe. Sleeves through interior fire or smoke rated walls of gypsum and stud construction shall be 10 gauge sheet metal. 3. Sleeves shall be sized to provide a total of not less than 1/2 inch clearance around the piping, duct or conduit together with any insulation cover. 4. Sleeves for setting into walls shall be flush with finished construction. Sleeves for setting into floors shall be imbedded in concrete slab and extend approximately 1 inch above finished floors. Sleeves through floors of mechanical rooms shall be 12 gauge and shall extend 4 inches above the floor. Sleeves shall be provided with lugs or flanges to permit firm attachment to the building construction. Wall sleeves shall not be used as support points. 5. All sleeved openings within the building shall be sealed airtight using fire barrier caulking with a UL classification for use as a fire barrier penetration seal for walls and floors with up to a three-hour fire rating, expanded into place for the full depth of the sleeve. Sleeved openings through exterior walls and floor shall also be sealed outside using waterproof mastic.

C.

Inserts: 1. Inserts or other type anchoring devices shall be provided for the support of piping, ducts, or equipment in masonry or concrete construction. Inserts shall be as specified under pipe supports. 2. The HVAC Subcontractor shall furnish and install all inserts.

D.

Openings: 1. Openings shall be framed or boxed by the HVAC Subcontractor. 2. Floor openings into mechanical rooms shall be provided with 4 inch high concrete curbs around the entire opening perimeter. All wall openings shall be flush with both surfaces. 3. Fire damper frames to be set into masonry or concrete construction shall be set into place at the time of the construction of the respective floor or wall. Exterior plywood covers shall be applied to both sides of fire dampers to prevent damage prior to making duct connections. 4. Openings for the passage of ducts and piping shall have 1/2 inch clearance all around the finished piping or duct and insulation. Boxed openings for gang piping shall be provided with 18 gauge sheet metal on both sides of penetration secured to the opening perimeter cut to fit the pipe shape and the clearance space within the opening filled with fire barrier caulking with a UL classification for use as a fire barrier penetration seal for walls and floors with up to a threehour fire rating, expanded into place so as to make the penetration airtight.

E.

Escutcheon Plates: Escutcheon plates shall be provided for all pipe penetrations into finished spaces as follows: 1. Pipe penetrations shall have chromium plated spun or pressed brass two-piece hinged escutcheon covers sized to fit the piping and insulation (if any) outside diameter and cover pipe sleeve. 2. Duct penetrations shall be 28 gauge stainless steel strips fastened with stainless steel screws or bolts and sized to cover the duct with any insulation and the wall HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 75 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

2.40

opening. Round ducts shall be provided with escutcheon plates as indicated above for piping. Penetrations through finished floors shall have matching finish extension escutcheon sleeves sized to the escutcheon and finished in a neat, workmanlike manner.

SOUND ATTENUATORS A.

Silencers shall be of the size, configuration, capacity and acoustic performance as scheduled on the drawings. All silencers shall be factory fabricated and supplied by the same manufacturer. Silencers shall be Vibro-Acoustics, IAC, United McGill or VAW.

B.

Alternate manufacturers must request and obtain written approval by the Engineer to bid the project at least 10 days prior to the bid due date. As a condition of pre-approval, alternate manufacturers must submit to the Engineer a minimum of twenty (20) different HVAC silencer test reports. Each report shall be for a silencer tested in full accordance with the ASTM E-477-99 silencer test standard in an aero-acoustic test facility which is NVLAP accredited for the ASTM E477-99 standard. Each test shall have been conducted within the last 12 month period. A copy of the laboratory’s NVLAP accreditation certificate must be included with the submitted reports. Any changes to the specifications must be submitted and approved in writing by the Engineer at least 10 days prior to the bid due-date.

C.

Silencer inlet and outlet connection dimensions must be equal to the duct sizes shown on the drawings. Duct transitions at silencers are not permitted unless shown on the contract drawings.

D.

Elbow Silencers: All elbow silencers, including models REFL shall be constructed with an 18 gauge galvanized steel outer casing (unless HTL casing is specified) and 22 gauge galvanized perforated steel. All acoustical splitters shall be internally radiused and aerodynamically designed for efficient turning of the air. Half and full splitters are required as necessary to achieve the scheduled insertion loss. All elbow silencers with a turning cross-section dimension greater than 48” shall have at least two half splitters and one full splitter.

E.

Rectangular Silencers: 1. All rectangular silencers shall be constructed with a 22-gauge galvanized steel outer casing and 26 gauge galvanized perforated steel liner.

F.

Acoustic Media: 1. Media shall be of acoustic quality, shot-free glass fiber insulation with long, resilient fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Glass fiber density and compression shall be used to insure conformance with laboratory test data. Glass fiber shall be packed with a minimum of 15% compression during silencer assembly. Media shall be bacteria and fungus resistant, resilient such that it will not crumble or break, and conforming to irregular surfaces. Media shall not cause or accelerate corrosion of aluminum or steel. Mineral wool will not be permitted as a substitute for glass fiber. Media Protection; 1. Media shall be encapsulated in glass fiber cloth to help prevent shedding, erosion and impregnation of the glass fiber.

G.

H.

Silencer materials, including glass fiber, shall have maximum combustion ratings as noted below when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. 1. Flamespread Classification: 15 2. Smoke Development Rating: 5 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 76 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

I.

Silencers shall have high transmission loss (HTL) walls externally applied and completely sealed to the silencer casing by the silencer manufacturer to assure quality controlled transmission loss. The HTL walls shall consist of media, airspace, mass and 10-gauge outer protective metal skin to obtain the specified room noise criteria. Standard acoustical panels will not be accepted as HTL walls. If requested by the Engineer, breakout noise calculations for each air handling and fan system shall be provided with the silencer submittal to insure compliance with the room noise criteria. Breakout noise calculations shall be based on the sound power levels of the specified equipment.

J.

Silencers shall be constructed in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA Standards for the pressure and velocity classification specified for the air distribution system in which it is installed. Material gauges noted in "Section B Materials” are minimums. Material gauges shall be increased for the system pressure and velocity classification. The silencers shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8 inches water gauge. 1. Casings shall be lockformed and sealed, except as noted in Section B Materials, to provide leakage resistant construction. Airtight construction shall be achieved by u se of a duct-sealing compound supplied and installed by the Contractor at the job site. 2. All perforated steel shall be adequately stiffened to insure flatness and form. All spot welds shall be painted.

K.

Acoustic Performance: 1. Silencer dynamic insertion loss shall not be less than that listed in the silencer schedule. 2. Silencer generated noise shall not be greater than that listed in the silencer schedule. 3. Acoustic performance shall include dynamic insertion loss and generated noise for forward flow (air and noise in same direction) or reverse flow (air and noise in opposite direction) in accordance with the project’s air distribution system requirements. 4. All silencer ratings shall be determined in a duct-to-reverberant room test facility which provides for airflow in both directions through the test silencer in accordance with the ASTM E-477-99 test standard. The test set-up, procedure and facility shall eliminate all effects due to flanking, directivity, end reflection, standing waves and reverberation room absorption.

L.

Silencer pressure drops shall not exceed those listed in the silencer schedule. Silencer pressure drop measurements shall be made in accordance with the ASTM E-477-99 test standard. Tests shall be conducted and reported on the identical units for which acoustical data is presented.

M.

The manufacturer shall supply certified test data for each scheduled silencer. The data shall include dynamic insertion loss, generated noise and pressure drop for forward or reverse flow, matching the project’s air distribution system requirement. All ratings shall be conducted in the same facility and shall utilize the same silencer. 1. Test facilities and test reports shall be open to inspection upon request from the Engineer. Silencer performance must have been substantiated by laboratory testing according to ASTM E477-99 and so certified when submitted for approval. The aero-acoustic laboratory must be NVLAP accredited for the ASTM E477-99 test standard. A copy of the accreditation certificate must be included with the submittals. Data from non-NVLAP accredited test facilities will not be accepted. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 77 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.41

2.42

STRAINERS A.

Strainers shall be provided where shown on the drawings and as specified herein. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Sarco, RP&C, Mueller, Armstrong or Barnes and Jones.

B.

Strainers shall be provided on inlets to all pressure regulating valves, temperature control valves and makeup water control valves. Strainer baskets shall be heavy duty perforated type with openings sized as recommended for the line size and service by the manufacturer. All strainers 2½ inch size and larger shall be provided with blow-down valves. Blow-down valves shall be ball valves, exception high and medium pressure steam service where gate valves specified for service shall be used. Blow-down valves shall have short nippled outlets angled down toward floor. Strainers on horizontal steam lines shall have to be installed with basket section installed horizontally and blow-down connections rotated to basket low point.

C.

Strainers for all services, except as otherwise specified, shall conform to the following: 1. Strainers on lines 2 inches and smaller shall have 250 working steam pressure bronze bodies with screwed ends. 2. Strainers on lines 2½ inches and larger shall have 125 working steam pressure semi-steel bodies with flanged ends.

D.

Strainers for high pressure steam and medium pressure steam service shall conform to the following: 1. Strainers on lines 2 inches and smaller shall have 600 pound cast steel 2. Strainers on lines 2½ inches and larger shall have 300 pound cast steel bodies with flanged ends

SUPPLEMENTAL SUPPORT SYSTEM A.

This Contractor shall provide all supplemental supports required to direct equipment and materials support loads to approved structural load bearing points. All mechanical equipment and systems shall be substantially supported without distortion or excessive vibration. The methods of support shall be as hereinafter described, except as otherwise noted on the drawings.

B.

The supplemental support system shall be substantial type with members sized to prevent equipment distortion or excessive vibration. The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide support components such that all equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration being transmitted to the structure.

C.

The supplemental support system shall conform to requirements of this specification. Manufacturer’s published characteristics referenced are intended as a guide only. The supplier shall verify support elements submitted are in accordance with specified materials and construction and are appropriately sized to accept and direct the proposed loading.

D.

All supplemental support elements shall be by one (1) manufacturer: Unistrut, B-Line or Telestrut. The acceptable standard or quality shall be as follows: 1. Framing Members: a. Nominal Size: 1⅝” x 1⅝” “U” channel b. Body: Mild Carbon Steel, ASTM A570 Grade 33 c. Gauge: 12 Gauge (0.105” thick) d. Slot Width: 7/8” nominal e. Pre-Punching: 9/16” Diameter, 1⅞” on center, 3 sides HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 78 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

f. g. 2.

Fittings: a. Nominal Size: 1⅝” (length per device) b. Shape: Per Service from Manufacturer’s Standard Catalog c. Body: Hot Rolled Mild Carbon Steel, ASTM A570, Grade 33 d. Gauge: 1/4” Nominal Thickness e. Hole Size: 9/16” Nominal f. Finish: Hot Dipped Galvanizing, G90 weight, ASTM A123 g. Conformance: Metal Forming Manufacturer’s Association (MFMA) Standard Publication MFMA-1

3.

Accessories: a. Nominal Size: Per Service from Manufacturer’s Standard Catalog b. Shape: Per Service from Manufacturer’s Standard Catalog c. Body: Hot Rolled Mild Carbon Steel, ASTM A570, Grade 33 d. Gauge: 1/4” Nominal Thickness e. Hole Size: 9/16” Nominal f. Conformance: Metal Forming Manufacturer’s Association (MFMA) Standard Publication MFMA-1. g. Rollers: Gray Cast Iron Nuts and Bolts: a. Nominal Size: 1/2” diameter x (Size per device) b. Body: Mild carbon steel, ASTM A570, Grade 33, and Case Hardened c. Threading: Coarse, Unified & American, UNC Classes 2A and 2B d. Mounting: Spring or non-spring e. Finish: Electro-Galvanized, G90 weight, ASTM A123 f. Conformance: Metal Forming Manufacturer’s Association (MFMA) Standard Publication MFMA-1

4.

E. 2.43

Finish: Hot-Dipped Galvanizing, G90 weight, ASTM A123 Conformance: Metal Forming Manufacturers Association (MFMA) Standard Publication MFMA-1.

Supplemental support system members shall be positioned to align with equipment support points for proper bolting.

TERMINAL BOXES A.

Single duct type with hot water coils: 1. Terminal Casing Furnish and install Titus, Enviro-Tec or Metal-Aire, single duct terminals of sizes and capacities (CFM) indicated on the drawings. Terminals shall be constructed of not less than 24 gauge zinc-coated steel, mechanically assembled and sealed to form an air-tight casing; maximum air leakage of 2 % at 3" w.g. Spot-welded casings are not acceptable. Interior walls of the terminal casing shall be lined with 1/2 -inch dual-density fiberglass with 4 pounds per cubic foot skin density, rated for a maximum air velocity of 4500 fpm. Insulation must meet all requirements of UL 181 and NFPA 90-A. Raw edges exposed to the airstream shall be coated and sealed. Sound power data shall be submitted with no corrections or noise reduction factors applied. 2. Air Control Valve Assembly Terminal air control valve shall be dual-wall construction, consisting of two (2) metal thicknesses with ½-inch dual-density insulation sandwiched between, creating an effective radiated sound barrier. Insulation shall be as specified for terminal casing. The control blade of the air valve shall be 16-gauge, designed to operate through a 45-degree arc. Multi-blade dampers and single blade HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 79 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

4.

5.

2.44

volume controllers (operating through 90º) are not acceptable. The control blade shall be bolted or welded to a continuous shaft which rotates in self-lubricating nylon bearings. Blade shall close against a closed-cell gasket seat; it shall be preloaded to insure a tight seal. Blade shall not deflect at inlet pressures up to 6" w.g. Eliptical or oval dampers are not an acceptable substitution. Controls Terminal unit control shall be furnished by the ATC Contractor and factory installed by the terminal box manufacturer. See ATC Specification Paragraph 2.51. The terminal box manufacturer shall bear all costs associated with mounting the controls. Terminal boxes shall be provided with a sheetmetal control enclosure. Provide a factory-applied typed label unique to each VAV terminal box indicating DDC address, TAG, maximum flow setting, minimum flow setting. Pressure-Independent Models with Pressure Differential Controller Pressure differential reset controller shall maintain setpoint (CFM) within 5%, regardless of system pressure change. CFM limiting devices are not acceptable. The reset controller shall constantly monitor thermostat input, air flow (CFM), and system static and total pressures in a manner as to minimize under-or overcontrolling in relation to the space temperature requirements. The reset controller shall be capable of field adjustment of minimum and maximum CFM settings without the use of tools. Flow curve for field balancing shall be affixed to terminal casing. Differential flow taps and factory-set CFM shall be provided is so noted at terminal schedule on the drawings. Controller shall maintain pressure independence to as low as .03" w.g. Averaging sensor shall be mounted in the inlet of the terminal and shall provide a minimum of one air pickup point for each 2-1/2" of inlet diameter. Single-point differential sensors are not acceptable. Hot Water Coil Terminals shall include a hot water coil. Coil shall be attached to the terminal with slip-and-drive connection, to allow removal for maintenance or cleaning. Coil shall be constructed of pure aluminum fins of .005" to .010" thickness, with die-formed spacers. Fins shall be mechanically fixed to .017" copper tubes for maximum heat transfer. Coils shall be tested at 320 p.s.i.g. air-under-water.

THERMOMETERS A.

Thermometers shall be of sizes, types and capacities specified herein, and shall be located as indicated on the drawings. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Taylor Company, Mueller Company or Foxboro Company.

B.

Thermometers shall be industrial type with 9 inch scale, red perma colored liquid, black scale divisions on white background, union hub, separable brass well and adjustable swivel base. Provide extension wells on insulated lines. Locate wells so as to provide minimum restriction to flow.

C.

Thermometer ranges shall be as follows: Hot Water (All) Chilled Water Makeup Water

30-240 Degrees F. 0-110 Degrees F. 0-110 Degrees F.

Note: Mount all thermometers so as to be read from the floor. Provide two (2) spare thermometers of each range indicated. 2.45

UNIT HEATERS HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 80 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.46

A.

Unit heaters shall be of sizes, capacities for the throw and mounting heights indicated on the drawings. Equipment shall be of manufacturer and size scheduled on the drawings, or approved equal as manufactured by Sterling, Vulcan, Rosemex or Rittling.

B.

Horizontal unit heaters shall have direct driven propeller fan, steel fan guard, vertically adjustable louvers, horizontally adjustable fins and built-in motor thermal overload protection.

C.

Vertical unit heaters shall have direct driven propeller fan, steel fan guard, adjustable outlet diffusers and built-in motor thermal overload protection.

VALVES A.

All valves shall conform to requirements of this specification for the services indicated. Manufacturer’s numbers referenced are intended as a guide only. The supplier shall verify valves submitted are in accordance with specified materials and construction.

B.

All valves of a given type shall be by one (1) manufacturer. The acceptable standard of quality shall be as follows. Gate Valves: Jenkins, Grinnell or Crane

C.

Nominal Size Service Pressure Rating Body

Steam Condensate, Chilled Water Condenser Water & Hot Water 125 PSIG Steam, 200 PSIG WOG ASTM B-62 Bronze; Threaded ASTM B-62 Bronze; Rising Stem N.A.

Bonnet Bolts Gaskets Packing Stem Wedge

N.A. Non-Asbestos Graphite/Aramid Fiber ASTM B-371 Alloy C69400 or ASTM B-99 Alloy C65100 H04 ASTM B-62 Bronze

Conformance D.

Through 2”

WW-V-54 Class A, Type I & MSS-SP-80

2½” and above Steam Condensate, Chilled Water, Condenser Water & Hot Water 125 PSIG Steam, 200 PSIG WOG ASTM A-126 Class B; Flanged ASTM A-126 Class B; Bolted OS&Y ASTM A-307 Non-Asbestos Graphite/Aramid Fiber Non-Asbestos Graphite/Aramid Fiber ASTM B-16 UNSC36000 ASTM A-126 Class B Cast Iron WW-V-58 Class 1, Type 1 & MSS-SP-70

Globe Valves: Jenkins, Grinnell or Crane Nominal Size Service Pressure Rating Body

Through 2” Steam Condensate, Chilled Water Condenser Water & Hot Water 125 PSIG Steam, 200 PSIG WOG ASTM B-62 Bronze; Threaded

2½” and above Steam Condensate, Chilled Water, Condenser Water & Hot Water 125 PSIG Steam, 200 PSIG WOG ASTM A-126 Class

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 81 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

ASTM B-62 Bronze; Rising Stem N.A.

Bonnet Bolts Gaskets

Packing Stem

Non-Asbestos Graphite/Aramid Fiber

ASTM B-371 Alloy C69400

Seat Disc

ASTM B-62 Bronze

Seat Ring

N.A.

Conformance E.

N.A.

WW-V-51 Class A, Type I & MSS-SP-80

B; Flanged ASTM A-126 Class B; Bolted OS&Y ASTM A-307 Non-Asbestos Graphite/Aramid Fiber Non-Asbestos Graphite/Aramid Fiber ASTM B-16 UNSC36000 ASTM B-584 Alloy C84400 Bronze or ASTM A-126 Class B Cast Iron ASTM B-584 Alloy C84400 Bronze MSS-SP-85

Butterfly Valves: Jamesbury, Grinnell or Rockwell

Nominal Size Service Pressure Rating Body Liner Disc Disc Coating Shaft Bearings Bushings Operator

Conforma nce

Two-Way

Three-Way

3” and above

3” and above

Bubble Tight, Dead End for Steam, Condensate, Chilled Water, Condenser Water & Hot Water 125 PSIG Steam, 200 PSIG WOG ASTM A-395 60-40-18 or ASTM A576 65-45-12 Ductile Iron; Lug Style Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer ASTM A-351 Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer ASTM A-276 Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTM B-584 Alloy C93200 Bronze ASTM B-584 Alloy C93200 Bronze Infinite Lever w/Memory Stop (to 6”φ); Chain Wheel w/Gear Operator (above 6”φ) MSS-SP-67 & 46CFR56.2015(b)(1)

Bubble Tight, Dead End for Steam, Condensate, Chilled Water, Condenser Water & Hot Water 125 PSIG Steam, 200 PSIG WOG ASTM A-395 60-40-18 or ASTM A576 65-45-12 Ductile Iron; Lug Style Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer ASTM A-351 Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer ASTM A-276 Type 316 Stainless Steel ASTM B-584 Alloy C93200 Bronze ASTM B-584 Alloy C93200 Bronze Chain Wheels w/Gear Operators Interconnected MSS-SP-67 & 46CFR56.2015(b)(1)

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 82 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

F.

Ball Valves: Jamesbury, Grinnell or Watts Nominal Size Service Pressure Rating Body Thrust Washer Ball Seats Stem Packing Packing Nut Operator Conformance

G.

To 3” φ Steam, Condensate, Chilled Water, Condenser Water & Hot Water 125 PSIG Steam, 400 PSIG WOG ASTM B-584 Alloy 845 Bronze, Threaded (to 2”φ) or Soldered (2½”φ & 3”φ) Reinforced Polytetrafluoro ethylene ASTM B-584 Alloy 845 Bronze; Full Port Reinforced Polytetrafluoro ethylene (Teflon) ASTM B-371 Alloy 694 Silicon Bronze Reinforced Polytetrafluoro ethylene (Teflon) ASTM B-16 Infinite Lever w/Memory Stop WW-V-35, Type II, Class A, Style 3

Swing Check Valves: Grinnell or Watts Nominal Size Service Pressure Rating Body Bonnet Bolts Gaskets Disc Hanger Seat Ring Conformance

H.

2½” and above Steam, Condensate, Chilled Water, Condenser Water & Hot Water 125 PSIG Steam, 200 PSIG WOG ASTM A-126 Class B; Flanged ASTM A-126 Class B; Bolted ASTM A-307 Non-Asbestos Graphite/Aramide Fiber ASTM B-584 Alloy C84400 Bronze ASTM B-584 Alloy C84400 Bronze ASTM B-584 Alloy C84400 Bronze MSS-SP-71 Type I

Silent Check Valves: Grinnell or Watts Nominal Size Service Pressure Rating Body Stem Disc Spring Seat Ring Conformance

2½” and above Condensate, Chilled Water, Condenser Water & Hot Water 125 PSIG @ 200°F., 230 PSIG WOG ASTM A-48 Class 35; Globe Style, Flanged ASTM A-582 Alloy S30300 Stainless Steel ASTM B-584 Alloy 836 Bronze ASTM A-313 T304 Stainless Steel ASTM B-584 Alloy 836 Bronze N.A.

I.

Temperature Control Valves: Shall be provided by the Automatic Temperature Control Subcontractor in conformance with the standards specified above. Valves shall be installed by the HVAC Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the ATC Subcontractor.

J.

Valves five inches (5”) and larger shall be independently supported. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 83 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

K. Sprocket Wheels and Chains: Sprocket wheels and chains shall be furnished and installed on all hand operated valves 2½ inches in diameter and larger which cannot be operated from any mechanical room floor. 2.47

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A.

General 1. The Contractor shall provide a complete adjustable frequency controller as indicated on the drawings. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation and start-up of the equipment covered by this specification. 3. The adjustable frequency controller shall be furnished by a single vendor who has actively been manufacturing adjustable frequency controllers for a period of at least five (5) years. 4. Complete drawing shall be furnished for approval and shall consist of master wiring diagrams, elementary or control schematics, including coordination with other electrical control devices operating in conjunction with the adjustable frequency controllers. Suitable outline drawings showing details necessary to located conduit stub-ups and field wiring shall be furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture. 5. The adjustable frequency controller shall be UL and CSA certified and shall comply with the latest applicable standards of ANSI, IEEE, NEMA and national Electrical Code. 6. Adjustable frequency controller manufacturer shall maintain and staff engineering service, within one hundred (100) actual miles of the site, to provide start-up service, emergency service calls, repair work, service contracts, maintenance and troubleshooting training of customer personnel.

B.

Construction 1. The adjustable frequency controller shall be rated 460 volt, 3 phase, with feature and options as specified. 2. The adjustable frequency controller shall be rated for the motor HP as shown on the drawings. The controllers shall provide digitally-based speed adjustment of three phase motors. The adjustable frequency and voltage output shall provide constant volts per hertz excitation of the motor up to 60 hertz. 3. The adjustable frequency controllers shall have a 110% overload rating for one (1) minute, every ten (10) minutes and a 140% overload rating for two (2) seconds, every fifteen (15) seconds. 4. The controller shall be capable of converting incoming 3 phase, 460 volt (+10%) and 60 hertz (+/- 2 hertz) power to a fixed potential DC bus level. The DC voltage shall be inverted by a full wave diode bridge rectifier or a pulse width modulated (PWM) inverter to an adjustable frequency output. The controller shall maintain power factor at .95 or greater at any speed or load. The controller shall have a minimum efficiency of 95% at rated load. The motor current shall closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be varied with frequency to maintain desired motor magnetization current suitable for centrifugal pump and fan (variable torque) control. 5. The adjustable frequency AC controller shall employ a full wave rectifier to prevent line notching, for conversion of AC power to DC power. The inverter section shall use Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT) (p -n substrate) as switching devices. The IGBT, operating as a MOS-gated, input inverted Darlington transistor with a MOSFET (n -n substrate in n-channel enhancement mode) input shall support high input impedance, low drive power and fast HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 84 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

6.

7. 8.

9. 10. 11.

12. 13. 14.

15. C.

(40+k/sec) switching speeds. The bipolar output stage shall enable low conduction losses with high currents. A DC bus choke and DC capacitors shall control internal harmonic generation. a. Silicon controller rectifies (SCR's), current source inverters and paralleling of devices are unacceptable. Sine wave approximation and voltage vector control shall be used to allow operation at rated motor shaft output at nominal speed with no de-rating. This voltage vector control shall be designed to minimize harmonics to the motor to maximize motor efficiency and life. The inverter shall operate in an ambient temperature of 0ºC to 40ºC for elevations up to 3,300 feet above sea level and humidity of 0% to 95% noncondensing. The controller enclosure shall be NEMA 1, wall-mounted. The controller shall have easily removable assemblies and shall be front accessible. No side clearance shall be required for cooling of wall mount units and all power and control wiring shall be done from the bottom. All enclosures shall be not less than 16-gauge steel with surfaces to be thoroughly cleaned and phosphatized prior to painting. They shall be primed with a corrosion-resisting coating. Cabinet finish paint to be ANSI 161. Doors shall include plastic device holders for mounting up to six (6) operator devices. Factory mounted operator devices shall be factory wired. The operating handle of the disconnect switch shall always remain connected to the breaker and shall not be mounted on the door. The position handle shall indicate ON, OFF or TRIPPED condition of the circuit breaker. The handle shall have provisions for padlocking in the Off position with at least three (3) padlocks. Interlock provisions shall prevent unauthorized opening or closing of the controller door with the disconnect handle in the ON position. All logic control boards shall be interchangeable. The VFD and options shall be tested to ANSI/UL Standard 508. the complete VFD, including all specified options, shall be listed by a nationally recognized testing agency such as UL, ETL. The VFD's full load amp rating shall meet or exceed NEC Table 430-150. The VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, 110% of rated current for sixty (60) seconds and 220% of rated current for up to one (1) second while starting. Drive shall be capable of operating a motor up to 1,000 feet away without de-rating or field modification. Provide detuning output filters and shielded cabling.

Interface 1. Start, stop and speed control potentiometer terminations. 2. Linear independent timed acceleration and deceleration adjustable. 3. Non-isolated process signal follower for 0-10 VDC control of output frequency. 4. Variable torque performance from 2 to 60 hertz. 5. Frequency stability of 0.5% for twenty-four (24) hours with voltage regulation of +/-2% of maximum rated output voltage. 6. Individual door-mounted lights or LED's for indication of run, power on and interruption due to over-current, over-voltage, over-frequency, under-voltage, overtemperature and phase loss. 7. 115 volt AC isolated control power for operator devices. 8. Motor slip dependent speed regulation. 9. Logic power carryover during utility loss shall be sufficient to extend double the interval required for internal losses to decay the load inertia to zero. 10. Insensitive to input line rotation. 11. Fixed dwell time at start to increase motor starting torque. 12. Auto restart to automatically restart on phase loss, over-voltage and under-voltage HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 85 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

19.

20. 21. 22. 23.

24. 25. 26. 27.

trips only. Local/Hand, Stop/Reset and Remote/Auto selector switches shall be provided to start and stop the drive and determine the speed reference. Provide a 24 VDC, 40 mA max, output signal to indicate that the drive is in Remote/Auto mode. Digital manual speed control. Potentiometers are not acceptable. Lockable, alphanumeric backlit display keypad. VFD's up to 300 HP shall use the same control panel. A quick setup menu with preset parameters shall be provided on the drive. The drive shall be fitted with RS 485 serial communications port and be supplied with software to display all monitoring, fault, alarm and status signals. The software shall allow parameters changes to be made to the drive settings, as well as storage of each controller's operating and setup parameters. a. The drive shall be fully able to communicate with PLC's, CDS's and DDC's. DDC's shall be able to monitor drive feedback signals which shall include, but shall not be limited to: i. Output Speed/Frequency ii. Current (in amperes) iii. Torque iv. Power v. Kilowatt-Hours vi. Relay Outputs vii. Diagnostic Faults The RS 485 serial communications port and software shall allow parameter changes to be made to the drive settings, as well as storage of each controller's operating and setup parameters. a. Serial communications shall include, but shall not be limited to: i. Run-Stop Control ii. Speed Set Adjustment iii. Proportional-Integral Controller Adjustment iv. Current Limit v. Acceleration/Deceleration Time Adjustment. Set point control interface (Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control) shall be standard in the unit. Floating point control interface shall be provided to increase/decrease speed in response to switch closures. An elapsed time meter with kWh meter shall be provided. The following displays shall be accessible from the control panel in actual units. a. Reference Signal Percent b. Output Frequency c. Output Amps d. Motor Horsepower e. Motor Electrical Demand (kW) f. Motor Electrical Energy Consumption (kW-hr) g. Output Voltage h. Drive Temperature (% until trip) i. Motor speed expressed in engineering units per application (in percent speed, GPM, CFM). Drive will sense the loss of lead and signal a no load/broken belt warning or fault. The VFD shall store in memory the last three (3) minimum faults and record all operational data. Minimum six (6) programmable digital inputs shall be provided for interfacing with the systems control and safety interlock circuitry. Minimum six (6) programmable relay outputs shall be provided for remote HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 86 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

28. 29. 30.

indication of drive status. Two (2) programmable analog inputs shall be provided and shall accept a director-reverse acting signal. Analog reference inputs accepted shall include 0-10 VDC, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA. Two (2) programmable analog outputs shall be provided for indication of drive status. These outputs shall be programmable for output speed, voltage, frequency, amps and input kW. The VFD shall accept an external contract closure command. Through an integrally mounted Interface Terminal Block (ITB), to automatically disable the VFD and transfer the motor to full line signal. Automatic by pass shall be used to permit the facility fire alarm system to override the normal VFD operation and default to nominal motor speed.

D.

Protective characteristics 1. Input AC circuit breaker with an interlocked pad lockable handle mechanism. 2. AC input line current limiting fuses for fault current protection of AC to DC converter section. 3. Electronic cover-current trip for instantaneous overload protection. 4. AC input line under-voltage and phase loss protection. 5. Over-frequency protection. 6. Over-temperature protection. 7. Surge protection form input line transients. 8. Electrical isolation between the power and logic circuits, as well as between the 1150 volt AC control power and the static digital sequencing. 9. Ability to withstand output terminal line-to-line short circuits without component failure. 10. dV/dT and dI/dT protection for converter semi-conductors. 2 11. Class 20 I t electronic motor overload protection for single motor applications and thermal-mechanical overloads for multiple motor applications. 12. Protection against input transients, loss of AC line phase, short circuit, ground fault, over voltage, under voltage, drive over temperature and motor over temperature. The VFD shall display all faults in plain English. Codes are not acceptable. 13. Protect VFD from sustained power or phase loss. The VFD shall incorporate a five (5) second control power loss ride through to eliminate nuisance tripping. 14. The VFD shall incorporate a motor preheat circuit to keep the motor warm and prevent condensation build up in the stator. 15. Drive shall have semi-conductor rated input fuses to protect power components. 16. The drive shall be fitted with output line reactors to limit the rate of output voltage rise over time (dv/dT), reduce motor operating temperature and RFI and EMI. To prevent breakdown of the motor winding insulation, the dV/dT must be below 1500 V/µsec per IEC recommendations. The supplier shall include with the quotation the dV/dT values of the drive. 17. Drive shall be capable of starting into a rotating load operating forward or reverse up to full speed. VFD shall be capable of accelerating or decelerating to set point without safety tripping or component damage (flying start). 18. VFD shall be rated for 100,000 amp interrupting capacity (AIC).

E.

Independent Adjustability 1. VFD shall have an adjustable carrier frequency of 1 to 12 kHz through 75 HP and 3 kHz (fixed) above 75 HP. a. Minimum Speed: 4 to 60 hertz. b. Maximum Speed: 40 to 90 hertz/ 2. Three (3) variable-torque V/Hz patterns shall be provided with the ability to select a constant torque start pattern for each of them. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 87 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3. 4.

5.

6. 7.

a. Volts per hertz: Adjustable from 3.83 to 11.5 volts per hertz. Twenty (20) preset speeds shall be provided. Minimum two (2) acceleration and two (2) deceleration ramps shall be provided. The shape of these curves shall be adjustable. a. Acceleration: .5 to 30 hertz per second with ranges of 2-120 seconds for 0-60 Hz. b. Deceleration: .5 to 30 hertz per second with ranges of 2-120 seconds for 0-60 Hz. c. The VFD shall also accept remote input acceleration and deceleration rams via direct digital programmable inputs. If VFD trips on one of the following conditions, the VFD shall be programmable for automatic or manual reset and restart. a. Over voltage. b. Under voltage. c. Current limit. d. Inverter overload. e. Motor overload. f. Loss of input signal. The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from 9 to 5 (minimum) and the time between attempts shall be adjustable for 0 to 120 seconds. Four (4) current limit setting shall be provided. Low frequency Boost: Up to 60 volts at 2 Hz.

F.

Bypass 1. Provide a manual by pass consisting of a door interlocked main fused disconnect pad lockable in the off position, a built-in motor starter and a four position DRIVE/OFF/LINE/TEST switch controlling three contactors. a. The DRIVE position shall allow the motor to be operated at an adjustable speed form the drive. b. The OFF position shall allow the motor and drive to be disconnected. c. The LINE position shall allow the motor to be operated at full speed form the AC power line. Power shall be disconnected from the drive, so that service can be performed. d. The TEST position shall allow the motor to be operated at full speed from the AC line power. This shall allow the drive to be given an operational test while continuing to run the motor at full speed in bypass. 2. External normally closed dry contact shall be interlocked with eh drives safety trip circuitry to stop the motor whether the DRIVE or BYPASS mode in case of an external safety fault.

G.

Required Options 1. Full time adjustable current limit shall sense an overload on the motor when current exceeds a preset limit. Output frequency, and therefore motor speed, shall be reduced. If current decreased with speed, the speed shall decrease until current drops below the limit. Once current is reduced to normal, the frequency shall return to the original setting. 2. AC output contactor. 3. Motor over current relay. 4. Isolated process signal follower for use with grounded input process signal. 5. Output load ammeter, voltmeter and speed indicating meters. 6. Door mounted NEMA 4 operator controls with heavy duty industrial rated devices. 7. Process control output signal of 0-10 VDC, proportional to controller frequency, including gains and bias adjustments. 8. Controller status relay with two (2) Form C relay pairs, rated 2 amps resistive at HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 88 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

9.

115 volt AC for indication of "ON" condition. Bypass contactor arrangement with overload relay complete with all control circuitry to disconnect the controller from the motor and reconnect the motor to line power, after a suitable time delay, when initiated manually.

H.

Quality Assurance 1. To ensure quality and minimize infantile failures at the job site, the complete VFD shall be tested by the manufacturer. The VFD shall operate a dynamometer at full load and the load and speed shall be cycled during the test. 2. All optional features shall be functionally tested at the factory for proper operation. 3. Provide a written copy of the factory start-up results for inclusion in the close-out documentation.

I.

Compliance to IEEE-519 1. The variable (adjustable) frequency drive manufacturer shall provide calculations specific to this installation showing that the Total Harmonic Distortion for the VFD's, reflected into the electrical distribution system is limited to the level defined by IEEE-519 (latest edition) for general systems. Harmonic analysis shall be included with VFD submittal to support the request for approval from the Engineer. a. The calculations shall proceed from Owner-provided power quality and harmonics information for all retrofit, renovation and restoration projects. 2. The VFD manufacturer shall conduct on-site harmonic measurements before and after start-up of the VFD's. Results of the measurements, showing the harmonic contribution of the VFD's, shall be provided to the Engineer as part of the Project Commissioning, prior to Final Acceptance by the Owner. 3. If site measurements show that the IEEE-519 levels have been exceeded: a. New Facilities: i. The VFD manufacturer shall provide proper filtering to attain the IEEE-519 levels, at no additional cost to the Owner. b. Existing Facilities: i. Should the quality of the existing power be consistent with the Owner-provided information, the VFD manufacturer shall provide proper filtering to attain the IEEE-519 levels, at no additional cost to the Owner. ii. Should the quality of the existing power be inconsistent with the Owner-provided information, the VFD manufacture shall provide recommendations concerning proper filtering to attain the IEEE518 levels, for consideration by the Owner. 4. Three phase alternating current input line reactors shall be provided as a minimum with all VFD's. The line reactors are to provide attenuation of the line side voltage transients, and shall prevent overload trips or other unnecessary VFD shutdowns, and provide a reduction in harmonic distortion. 5. Inlet line reactors shall be: a. 2-1/2% line impedance (minimum). b. 150% continuous current rating for one (1) minute. c. Saturation rating of not less than 2.5 times the continuous current rating. d. UL listed.

J.

Approvable Manufacturers: The variable (adjustable) frequency AC drives shall be manufactured by Graham, Square D, Asea Brown Boveri, Cutler Hammer or Mitsubishi.

K.

The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide written confirmation of coordination of drives and motor starters of all equipment with the Electrical Subcontractor. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 89 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.48

VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS A.

Provide vibration isolation and seismic restraint systems as identified by the requirements of this section and the contract documents. Attention is directed to the structural, architectural, mechanical and electrical documents which identify HVAC equipment and systems requiring vibration isolation treatment and seismic restraint.

B.

The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide vibration isolation components such that all equipment shall operate without objectionable noise or vibration being transmitted to the structure.

C.

The HVAC Subcontractor shall provide seismic restraint of non-structural building components (HVAC). Restraint systems are intended to withstand the stipulated seismic accelerations applied through the component’s center of gravity.

D.

The work in this section includes the following: 1. Vibration isolation elements for equipment. 2. Equipment isolation bases. 3. Piping flexible connectors. 4. Seismic restraints for isolated equipment. 5. Seismic restraints for non-isolated equipment. 6. Certification of seismic restraint designs and installation supervision. 7. Conform to vibration isolation and seismic restraint types herein specified. Examine the contract documents for sizes, horsepowers, rotational speeds, equipment location, length of span between columns and beams and construction type to determine the isolator selection type and deflection required for each piece of mechanical equipment.

E.

F.

Conform to the requirements of the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Handbooks, “HVAC Applications” 1995 Edition; Chapter 43 “Sound and Vibration Control”, and Chapter 50 “Seismic Restraint Design”.

G.

Isolators and restraints of the same type shall be the product of the same manufacturer. The manufacturer shall publish and maintain a full line of materials, engineering and application data and operating and maintenance instructions.

H.

Seismic Certification and Analysis: 1. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. All performance of products (such as strut, cable, anchors, and clips) associated with restraints must be supported with manufacturer’s data sheets or certified calculations. 2. Seismic restraint calculations must indicate specific code paragraph references (see CODE AND STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS) for each acceleration criteria. Seismic calculations shall indicate the component values required to determine the force to be restrained (Fp = Av Cc P ac Wc). Specifically, Av value from Contour Map, USE GROUPS, SEISMIC HAZARD EXPOSURE GROUP, SEISMIC PERFORMANCE CATEGORIES, MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL COMPONENT AND SYSTEM SEISMIC COEFFICIENT (Cc) Attachment Amplification Factor (ac) AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA FACTOR (P) must be determined and the resultant values shall be clearly indicated in the certified calculations. Note: For roof mounted equipment both the seismic acceleration and wind load shall be calculated, the highest load shall be utilized for the design of the restraints and isolators. 3. Seismic restraint calculations must be provided for all connections of equipment to the structure. Performance of all products (such as strut, cable, anchors, and clips) HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 90 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

associated with restraints must be supported with manufacturer’s data sheets or certified calculations. Seismic restraint calculations must be based on the acceleration criteria shown in TABLE A acting through the equipment’s center of gravity. For roof mounted equipment both the seismic acceleration and wind loads (30 psf) shall be calculated, the highest load shall be utilized for the design of the restraints and isolators. Certification of calculations to support seismic restraint designs must be stamped by a professional engineer registered to practice in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts, with at least five years of seismic design experience. Analysis must indicate calculated dead loads, derived loads and materials utilized for connections to equipment and structure. Analysis must detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment and/or weld length. An in-force $1,000,000.00 coverage limit Seismic Design Errors and Omissions insurance certificate must accompany submittals. Manufacturer’s product liability insurance certificates are not an acceptable substitution.

I.

Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall assume the following responsibilities: 1. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. 2. Provide equipment vibration isolation and seismic restraints as specified. Furnish manufacturer’s product data covering each isolator and restraint type for style, characteristics, and finish. 3. Guarantee specified isolation system deflections. 4. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to insure proper installation and performance of systems. 5. Isolator quantities, dimensions, deflections, capacities and type shall remain the responsibility of the manufacturer and the Contractor.

J.

Provide project specific catalog cuts and/or data sheets on the vibration isolators and restraints proposed for inclusion on this project. Reference each and every “TYPE” and detail each compliance with this specification. 1. Provide an itemized list of all isolated and non-isolated equipment. Provide detailed schedules showing isolator and seismic restraints proposed for each piece of equipment, referencing material and seismic calculation drawing numbers. 2. Show base construction for equipment; include dimensions, structural member sizes and support point locations. 3. When walls and slabs are used as seismic restraint locations, details of acceptable methods for duct and pipe must be included. 4. Indicate isolation devices selected with complete dimensional and deflection data before condition is accepted for installation. 5. Provide specific details of seismic restraints and anchors; include number, size and locations for each piece of equipment. 6. Coordination or contract drawings shall be marked-up with the specific locations and types of restraints shown for all pipe and duct. Rod bracing at various installation angles and assigned load at each restraint location shall be clearly delineated. Any and all tributary loads shall be considered for proper restraint sizing. 7. For ceiling suspended equipment provide minimum/maximum installation angle allowed for restraint system as well as braced and unbraced rod lengths at each allowable installation condition. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 91 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

8.

Calculate thrust for fan heads, for axial and centrifugal fans, to determine whether thrust restraints are required.

K.

Housekeeping pad attachment shall be by the project Structural Engineer. Material and labor required for attachment and construction shall be by the Division 3 subcontractor. 1. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated with the Seismic Restraint vendor and sized to provide a minimum edge distance of 10 bolt diameters of clearance all around the outermost anchor bolt to allow for the use of full anchor ratings.

L.

Supplementary support steel and connections shall be provided by the HVAC Subcontractor for all equipment, piping, and ductwork including roof mounted equipment, as specified.

M.

The HVAC Contractor shall provide restraint attachment plates to the General Contractor, to be cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double sided beam and clamps by the Division 3 Subcontractor, in accordance with the requirements of the Seismic Restraint vendor.

N.

Definitions: 1. The term EQUIPMENT will be used throughout this specification and it includes ALL non-structural HVAC components within the facility and/or serving this facility, such as equipment located in out buildings or outside of the main structure on grade within five feet of the foundation all. Equipment buried underground is excluded. Entry of services through the foundation walls is included. Equipment requiring vibration isolation and seismic restraint includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Air cooled condensing units b. Rooftop air handling units c. Air separators d. Boilers e. Cabinet heaters f. Ductwork g. Fans (all types) h. Motor control centers i. Piping j. Pumps (all types) k. Rooftop units l. Tanks (all types) m. Unit heaters n. Variable frequency drives o. Chillers p. Cooling towers q. NOTE: HVAC equipment and systems not listed herein above are still included in this specification. 2. Life Safety Systems defined: a. All systems involved with fire protection such as fire dampers. b. All systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply including smoke evacuation. c. All medical and life support systems. d. Fresh air relief systems on emergency control sequences including air handlers, ductwork, and dampers. 3. Positive attachments are those locations at which equipment, piping, and HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 92 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4. 5. O.

ductwork are tied to the facility structural elements by incorporating: a. Cast-in or wedge type expansion anchors, or b. Double sided beam clamps, or c. Welded or through bolted connections to the structure. Transverse bracing are those restraints applied to limit motion perpendicular or angular to the centerline of the pipe or duct. Longitudinal bracing are those restraints applied to limit motion along the centerline of the pipe or duct.

Substitution of internally or externally isolated and restrained equipment in lieu of the isolation and restraints specified in this section is acceptable provided all conditions of this section are met. The equipment manufacturer shall provide a letter of guarantee from their Engineering Department stamped and certified per the section on Seismic Restraints and Analysis stating that the seismic restraints are in full compliance with these specifications. Letters from field offices or representatives are unacceptable. 1. All costs for converting to the specified vibration isolation and/or restraints shall be borne by the equipment manufacturer in the event of non-compliance with the preceding. 2. In the event that the equipment is internally isolated and restrained, the entire unit assembly must be seismically attached to the structure. This attachment and certification thereof shall be by this section. TABLE A "G" FORCES FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS (SEISMIC ZONE 2 - AV > 0.1 ≤ 0.2 PIPE AND DUCT

RIGIDLY MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

FLEXIBLY MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

ALL LIFE SAFETY

.25

.40

.40

.60

P.

All vibration isolation and seismic devices described in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industries shall be considered the Base Manufacturer of these specifications for the purposes of establishing a standard of equality; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems strictly comply with intent, structural design, performance and deflections of the Base Manufacturer.

Q.

Seismic Restraint and Vibration Isolation Devices: 1. All isolation and seismic restraint devices shall be capable of accepting, without failure, the “G” forces as determined by the seismic certification and calculations as described in this section of the specifications. 2. Corrosion protection for outdoor applications shall be as follows: a. Springs cadmium plated, zinc electroplated or electrostatically deposited, baked enamel powder coated. b. Hardware cadmium plated. c. All other metal parts hot spray or hot dipped galvanized. 3. Seismic Restraint Types: a. All seismic restraint devices shall maintain the equipment in a captive position and shall not short circuit isolation devices during normal operating conditions. b. All seismic restraint devices shall have provisions for bolting and/or welding to the structure. c. Welding of springs to isolator housing, base plans is strictly prohibited. d. TYPE I: Spring Isolator – Restrained HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 93 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

i.

e.

f.

g.

h.

Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height ratio of 0.8:1 at rated deflection. ii. Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to solid height) of 50% of the rated deflection. iii. Ductile top cut with adjusting bolt tapped for equipment attachment locking cap screw. iv. Minimum 1/4” thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup on underside, unless designated otherwise. v. Integral restraining bolts with elastomeric cushions preventing metal-to-metal contact. vi. Internal spring adjusting nut or bolt with leveling capability. vii. Built-in all-directional limit stops with minimum 1/4” clearance under normal operation. viii. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval “R” number from California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load ratings. ix. Cast or aluminum housings, (except ductile iron) are not acceptable. a) Mason Industries, Type SLR Type II: Where required, each corner or side of equipment base shall incorporate a seismic restraint snubber having an all directional resilient pad limit stop. Restraints shall be fabricated of plate, structural members or square metal tubing. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. i. Mason Industries Type Z-1225/Z-1011 Type III: Restraints for suspended systems: i. Vibration isolated systems shall be braced with multiple 7 x 19 strand galvanized cable rope. a) Mason Industries Type SCB ii. Non-isolated systems shall be braced with structural steel strut type with approved fastening devices to equipment and structure. a) Mason Industries Type SSB iii. Steel angles (by HVAC Subcontractor) shall be provided to prevent rod bending of hung equipment where indicated by the Seismic Restraint vendor’s submittals. Steel angles shall be attached to the rods with a minimum of three ductile iron clamps at each restraint location. Welding of support rods to angles is not acceptable. Rod clamp assemblies shall have Anchorage Preapproval “R” number from California OSHPD. a) Mason Industries Model SRC iv. Pipe clevis cross braces are required at all restraint locations. They shall be special purpose preformed channels deep enough to be held in place by bolts passing over the clevis cross bolt. Clevis cross braces shall have Anchorage Preapproval “R” number from California OSHPD. a) Mason Industries Model CCB Type IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel casing. i. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval “R” number from California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load ratings. a) Mason Industries Type RC or BR Type V: Rigid attachment to structure utilizing wedge type expansion anchors for bolting and steel plates, either cast-in or anchored with

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 94 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4.

wedge type expansion bolts, for welding. Powder shots are not acceptable. Concrete anchor bolt spacing shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published standards. Vibration Isolator Types: a. Type A: Spring Isolator – Free Standing i. Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height ratio of 0.8:1 at rated deflection. ii. Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to solid height) of 50% of the rated deflection. iii. Ductile top cut with adjusting bolt tapped for equipment attachment locking cap screw. iv. Minimum 1/4” thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup on underside, unless designated otherwise. a) Mason Industries Type SLF b. Type B: Spring Isolator – Restrained i. Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height ratio of 0.8:1 at rated deflection. ii. Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to hold height) of 50% of the rated deflection. iii. Ductile top cup with adjusting bolt tapped for equipment attachment locking cap screw. iv. Minimum 1/4” thick neoprene acoustical base pad or cup on underside, unless designated otherwise. v. Integral restraining bolts with elastomeric cushions preventing metal-to-metal contact. vi. Internal spring adjusting nut or bolt with leveling capability. vii. Built-in all-directional limit stops with minimum 1/4” clearance under normal operation. viii. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval “R” number from California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load ratings. a) Mason Industries Type SLR, SSLFH c. Type C: Spring Hanger Isolator i. Spring shall have a minimum outer diameter to overall height ratio of 0.8:1 at rated deflection. Spring element shall have a steel upper spring retainer and a lower elastomer retainer cup with an integral bushing to insulate lower support rod from the hanger box. ii. Reserve deflection (from published load ratings to solid height) of 50% of the rated deflection. iii. Steel hanger box shall be capable of 30 degree misalignment between the rod attachment to structure and the connection to the supported equipment. Hanger boxes shall withstand three times the rated load without failure. a) Mason Industries Type 30 d. Type D: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel casing. i. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval “R” number from California OSHPD, certifying the horizontal and vertical seismic load ratings. a) Mason Industries Type RC or BR e. Type E: Elastomer Hanger Isolator i. Molded neoprene element with an integral bushing to insulate lower support rod from the hanger box. ii. Steel hanger box shall withstand three times the rated load HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 95 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

f.

g.

h.

i.

j.

k.

l.

without failure. a) Mason Industries Type HD Type F: Combination Spring/Elastomer Hanger Isolator i. Spring and neoprene elements in a steel hanger box with the features as described for Type C and E isolators. a) Mason Industries Type 30N Type G: Pad type elastomer isolator i. Neoprene pad shall have 0.75” minimum thickness, deflection rating of 0.1 inch under rated load. Supports shall be connected in the center by a 1/8” tear strip to facilitate trimming to desired size in two inch increments. ii. 1/16” galvanized steel plate between multiple pad layers. iii. Load distribution plate where attachment to equipment bearing surface is less than 75% of the pad area. iv. When bolting is required for seismic compliance, neoprene and duck washers and bushings shall be provided to prevent short circuiting of bolt. a) Mason Industries Type Super Waffle (SW) pad Type H: Pad type elastomer isolator i. Laminated canvas duck and neoprene maximum loading 1000 psi, minimum 1/2” thick. ii. Load distribution plate where attachment to equipment bearing surface is less than 75% of the pad area. iii. When bolting is required for seismic compliance, neoprene and duck washers and bushings shall be provided to prevent short circuiting. a) Mason Industries Type HL Pad Type I: Thrust Restraints i. A spring element same as Type A shall be combined with steel angles, backup plates, threaded rod, washers and nuts to produce a pair of devices capable of limiting thrust movement of air moving equipment to 1/4”. ii. Restraints shall be easily converted in the field from a compression type to tension type. iii. Unit shall be factory pre-compressed. a) Mason Industries Type WB Type J: Telescoping Riser Guide i. Telescoping arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2” thickness of Type H pad. a) Mason Industries Type VSG Type K: Resilient Pipe Anchors and Guides i. All directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2” thickness of Type H pad. ii. Vertical restraints shall be provided by a similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. iii. Allowable loads on neoprene pad shall not exceed 500 PSI and the design shall be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. a) Mason Industries Type ADA Type M: Flashable restrained isolator i. Shall have all features of Type B isolator. ii. Shall have waterproof spring covers for adjustment or removal of springs.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 96 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

iii.

5.

Unit shall have a structural top plate for welding or bolting of supplementary support steel. iv. Isolator shall accept 2” roofing insulation and be flashed directly into the waterproofing membrane. v. To be complete with wood nailer and flashing. a) Mason Industries Type RFS. m. Type P: Elastomer Isolator i. Double deflection neoprene compression mountings shall have all metal surfaces neoprene coated. ii. Non-skid top and bottom surfaces. iii. Threaded bolting sleeves shall be embedded in the isolator. iv. Drilled tie-down bolt holes shall be provided in the base plate. a) Mason Industries Type ND Equipment Bases: a. All curbs and roof rails are to be bolted or welded to the building steel or anchored to the concrete deck to attain specified acceleration criteria and shall also be capable of resisting a minimum psf wind loads (nonsimultaneous). b. Type B-1: Integral Structural Steel Base: i. Constructed of structural members to prevent base flexure at equipment startup and misalignment of driver and driven units. th Perimeter members shall be a minimum of 1/10 the longest unsupported span. ii. Centrifugal fan bases shall be complete with motor slide rails and drilled for driver and driven units. iii. Height saving brackets shall be used to reduce operating height and maintain 1” operating clearance under base. a) Mason Industries Type MSL, WFSL c. Type B-2: Concrete Inertia Base i. Steel concrete forms for floating foundations. Bases for pumps shall be large enough to support elbows and/or suction diffusers. The base depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 the longest unsupported span, but not less than 6” or greater than 12”. ii. Forms shall include concrete reinforcement consisting of steel bars or angles welded in place on 8” centers both ways in a layer 1½” above the bottom. iii. Isolators may be set into pocket housings which are an integral part of the base construction or utilize height saving brackets set at the proper height to maintain 1” clearance below the base. iv. Base shall be furnished with steel templates to hold anchor bolt sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. a) Mason Industries Type KSL or BMK d. Type B-3: Spring Roof Curb i. Spring isolation curbs that bear directly on the roof support structure and are flashed and waterproofed into the roof’s membrane waterproofing system. Equipment manufacturers or field fabricated curbs shall not be used. ii. All spring locations shall have removable waterproof covers to allow for spring adjustment and/or removal. Disassembly of the weather and air seal to gain access to the isolators is not acceptable. iii. Springs shall have all of the features of Type B. iv. Curbs shall have continuous sheet metal sides and have HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 97 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

e.

f. g. h.

i.

6.

provision for 2” insulation to be installed and furnished by the Roofing Contractor. v. Waterproofing shall consist of a continuous galvanized flexible counter flashing nailed over the lower curb’s waterproofing membrane and joined at the corners by EPDM bellows. vi. Wood nailer and flashing shall be provided. vii. Shall have a California OSHPD Seismic Anchorage Preapproval “R” number. viii. Shall include a means of incorporating a sound barrier package, supported from the top isolated rail consisting of two layers of waterproof gypsum board furnished and installed by the General Contractor. ix. Contractor shall have the option of ordering the curb built to the roof pitch or field leveled in accordance with all seismic provisions of this section. x. Overhung condensing units (when applicable) shall be supported by Type B isolators and spanning (width) steel support angle. These isolators shall in turn be supported on a field built curb (by others). a) Mason Industries Type RSC Type B-4: Flashable Roof Rail System – Isolated i. Continuous structural support rails that combine equipment support and isolation mounting into one unitized assembly. ii. Rails shall incorporate Type B springs which are adjustable, removable and interchangeable after equipment has been installed. iii. The system shall maintain the same installed and operating height with or without the equipment load and shall be capable of being utilized as a blocking device. iv. The entire assembly shall be an integral part of the roof’s membrane waterproofing. v. Unit to be supplied with continuous upper and lower galvanized flashing. a) Mason Industries Type RIR Type B-5: Not Used. Type B-6: Non-isolated roof curb i. Same as B-3 without spring isolation. a) Mason Industries Type URC Type B-8: Non-isolated. i. Same as continuous support rails, Type B-4 without the spring isolation. a) Mason Industries Type RUR Type B-9: Steel Rails i. Steel members of sufficient strength to prevent equipment flexure during operation. ii. Height saving brackets to reduce operating height. iii. Rails shall be cross braced at support and equipment attachment points when used in seismic zones. a) Mason Industries Type R, ICS

Flexible Connectors: a. All connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of shutoff valves; horizontal and parallel to equipment shafts whenever possible. Piping shall be supported and/or anchored to resist pipe movement beyond the HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 98 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b. c.

d.

e.

f.

allowable movement of the flexible connector. Installations must include check valves and/or other design and installation precautions to reduce the threat to life safety when subjected to the specified seismic accelerations. Type FC-1: Spherical Elastomer Connector i. Manufactured of peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners and polyester tire cord frictioning. Curing must take place in steel molds closed within heated hydraulic presses. ii. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised faced rubber flanged ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. iii. Sizes 2” and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a molded-in ductile iron external ring between spheres. Bolted-on strap type reinforcing are not acceptable. Flanges shall be split ductile iron with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16” to 24” may be single sphere. iv. Threaded one piece bolted flange assemblies with female threaded ends for sizes 3/4” to 1½”. v. Rated at 250 psi up to 170° F. with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 170 psi at 250° F. for sizes through 14”. 16” through 24” single sphere minimum ratings are 180 psi at 170° F and 130 psi at 250°F. vi. Factory tested at 150% of rated pressure for 12 minutes before shipment. Safety factor to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3:1. vii. Concentric reducing expansion joints with equal ratings and features may be substituted. viii. Connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the connector under pressure. ix. Control rods are required in unanchored installations where the installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods. a) Control rods shall have 1/2” thick neoprene washer bushings large enough in diameter to take the thrust at 1,000 psi maximum on the washer area. x. Connectors bolted to Victaulic type coupling or gate, butterfly or check valves to have a minimum 5/8” flange spacer (by others) installed between the connector and the coupling flange. Connectors must mate to a flat faced flange in all instances. a) Mason Industries SAFEFLEX Type SFU, SFEJ, SFDEJ or SFDCR Type FC-2: Flexible Stainless Steel Hose i. Stainless steel hose and braid rated with 3:1 safety factor. ii. 2” diameter and smaller with male nipples, 2½” and larger with fixed flat faced steel flanges. iii. Lengths shall be: 9” for 2½” through 4”; 11” for 5” and 6”; 12” for 8”; 13” for 10”; 14” for 12” through 16”. a) Mason Industries Type BSS Type FC-3: Upbraided Exhaust Hose i. Low pressure stainless steel annularly corrugated with one floating and one fixed flanged end. ii. Maximum temperature of 1500 degrees F. a) Mason Industries Type SSE Type FC-4: Flexible Bronze Braided Hose i. Metal hose and braid rated with a minimum 3:1 safety factor.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 99 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

ii. 2.49

2.50

2.51

(Minimum 150 PSI) Copper tube ends. a) Mason Industries Type BBF

WATER FLOW MEASURING DEVICES A.

Flow meter fittings shall be installed as indicated on the drawings and in the following piping systems and locations for balancing and testing purposes: 1. Each chilled water, condenser water and hot water pump or common manifold for paralleled pumps with full stand by. 2. Each chilled water cooling coil. 3. At condenser water and chilled water piping to each chiller.

B.

Venturi fittings for 3/4 inch through 2 inch flow fittings shall have NPT connections for threaded pipe and the 2½ inch through 10 inch flow fittings shall fit between a pair of pipe flanges with gaskets, nuts and special bolts. All flow fittings shall have “slide valve” enabling fitting to be used with portable flow meter, gauge, purge and drain attachment and cleaning attachment and when withdrawn shall automatically close the “slide valve”.

C.

Provide combination balancing valve and flow device where indicated on the drawings or specified. Flow device - valve assembly shall have ball valve construction of bronze, suitable for use as bubble-tight service valve, calibrated balance setting indicator plate, shrader valve connections with caps for meter hose connections. Units shall be Taco circuit setters.

WATER SYSTEM ACCESSORIES A.

Equipment shall be sized for the service indicated on the drawings. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, or Thrush.

B.

Piping system air vents shall be provided with indicated on drawings and at high points of all hot water and chilled water piping sections. Vents shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, or Thrush. Any vents not accessible shall be piped to an accessible location. 1. Air vents, except where noted otherwise, shall be manual air vents suitable for 150 PSIG system pressure as manufactured by Bell & Gossett #4V coil-operated type. 2. Air vent at the high point of each system shall be high capacity industrial automatic air vents of the float type with drain connection for water overflow as manufactured by Armstrong, Model #1-AV, B&G 107 or Spirax Sarco 13W.

C.

Provide adjustable type water make-up pressure regulating valves for each water system indicated on the drawings and not noted to be furnished under Section 15000. Valves shall be as manufactured by Bell & Gossett #6; Taco #335 or Thrush #21. 1. Valves shall be suitable for minimum of 125 psi inlet pressure and shall be adjustable to the system pressure. 2. Valves shall be provided with assemblies consisting of inlet pressure gauge, shut-off valves, inlet strainer, outlet pressure gauge and quick fill bypass with globe valves.

AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS A.

General 1. Furnish and install, as hereinafter specified, a native BACnet, Web-Based Direct Digital Control (DDC), automatic temperature control system as manufactured by HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 100 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3.

B.

Johnson Controls or approved equal. The DDC Contractor shall be fully licensed at the time of bid to do business in the job site area. The DDC Contractor must be either a wholly owned factory branch office or a licensed dealer of the manufacturer’s listed above with a technical staff, complete spare parts inventory, and test and diagnostic equipment to keep systems in operation 24 hours per day, seven days per week. He shall have emergency service available in the local area for temperature control systems for which he is currently performing on-call emergency service 24 hours per day, seven days per week. Wholesale, distributor, or representative type ATC Contractors are unacceptable. This requirement will be strictly enforced. It is the responsibility of the ATC sub-contractor to provide a fully operable system. Any components required for specified operation that are not provided by equipment manufacturers shall be provided by the ATC sub-contractor, regardless of equipment manufacturer’s specification.

Scope of Work 1. The ATC contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories, and wiring required for a complete and functioning web based building management system. 2. The control system shall consist of, but not limited to all temperature controls as specified herein including all CPU’s, DDCP’s, CRT’s, printers, sensors, software, thermostats, valves, actuators, dampers, damper operators, relays, control panels, and other accessory equipment and appurtenances, including electrical wiring, to fulfill the intent of the specifications and provide for a complete and operable system. 3. Provide actuators for equipment such as dampers and inlet guide vanes where such actuators are not provided by the equipment manufacturers. Refer to floor plans for location and numbers of required actuators. Actuators shall be Belimo, or equal. Coordinate requirements with the HVAC subcontractor. 4. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this type of work and shall not be custom designed especially for this project. All components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use. 5 The Contractor shall furnish and install all control and interlock wiring for chillers, boilers, fuel oil, day tanks, alarms, and emergency generators unless specifically and clearly stated to be provided by others. 6. The ATC contractor shall review and study all HVAC drawings and the entire specification to familiarize themselves with the equipment and systems operation and to verify the quantities and types of dampers, operators, alarms, and bells he has to provide. Numerous references to the ATC contractor are made throughout this specification identifying work to be performed under the HVAC section in addition to work specifically indicated under this paragraph. It will be assumed that, if no specific inquiries are made during the bidding period, the HVAC/ATC subcontractors have reviewed all requirements and interfaces between equipment and controls, to result in a complete, integrated and fully operational HVAC system. 7. The Automatic Temperature Control Contractor shall provide one (1) copy of ADS server software to be installed on customer provided server, located in Technology Office. 8. The automatic temperature control contractor shall furnish and install power meters. Meters shall be networked into the building management system and shall provide point mapping of all available data to the new workstations. Meters shall be manufactured by Veris Model H8206. Exact location and installation of meters shall be coordinated with electrical sub-contractor. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 101 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

9. 10. 11.

The ATC contractor shall provide one year warranty for entire Building Management System, commencing on date of final acceptance. Include manufacturer’s agreement to provide necessary programmed maintenance and to maintain systems for one year from date of final acceptance, within contract sum. As part of above maintenance provide 24 / 7 active monitoring of up to 60 I/O points resident in the system. BAS technicians dedicated to performing this service and be on-line on a continuous basis 24 / 7 / 365. This service shall be provided remotely via the web access LAN connection provided by the Town of Beverly. Access to Beverly Middle School LAN shall be provided via a VPN connection.

C.

Work by Others 1. Automatic temperature control valves, duct humidifiers and separable wells for immersion elements furnished by the control manufacturer shall be installed by the HVAC contractor under the ATC contractor’s supervision. 2. Automatic dampers that are specified to be furnished by the ATC contractor shall be installed by the HVAC subcontractor, under the ATC contractor’s supervision. 3. Concrete foundations shall be provided by the general contractor. The HVAC Contractor shall furnish dimensional drawings to the general contractor. 4. All finished painting required for the temperature control piping and equipment, shall be by the general contractor. 5. All cutting and patching necessary for the installation of the temperature control system, shall be by the HVAC contractor. 6. Installation of duct smoke detectors shall be by the HVAC subcontractor, under the ATC contractor’s supervision.

D.

Submittals and Shop Drawings 1. Submit shop drawings and obtain written review comments before ordering or installing any equipment or material. 2. Submit shop drawings of all equipment. Shop drawings shall consist of but not limited to manufacturer’s scaled drawings, valves and damper schedules, cuts and catalogs, including descriptive literature which shall indicate the construction, material, physical dimensions and complete operating data. All ATC shop drawings shall also contain a written description of the Sequence of Operations, enumerating and describing the function of each component. 3. Submit the following for approval: a. Control drawings with detailed wiring diagrams, including bills of materials and written sequences of operation, for each system type. b. Valve and damper schedules showing sizes, configurations, capacities, pressure drops and locations of equipment. Include type and quantities of actuators. c. Data sheets for control system components. d. Complete software information including names of software packages provided, control sequences performed, complete information on user programmability (commands, language details, and programming sequences), and detailed printouts of the actual software within each DDCP including user definable comment statements inserted throughout the program to guide a novice operator through the various sequences of the actual program. e. Graphics samples in full color clearly indicating level of detail to be provided on this project. e. Calculations for valve coefficients (CVs). f. Operators user’s manuals. g. Complete point-to-point check-out procedures to ensure that all physical HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 102 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

points are consistently tested and verified for this project. E.

Equipment Operation Instruction and Maintenance Manuals 1. On completion and acceptance of the work, furnish for approval three copies of written instructions on the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment and apparatus furnished under this section. 2. Each manual shall be provided with an index sheet listing the contents in alphabetical order and shall contain but not limited to the following material: a. Updated copies of all submittal data and shop drawings as specified previously. b. Manufacturer’s instructions regarding the installation, maintenance and calibration of each component used in the ATC system installed by the ATC contractor. c. Copies of all warranties and guarantees issued by each equipment manufacturer. d. “As-built” interconnecting wiring diagrams and wire lists of the field installed system with complete, properly identified numbering of each system component and device. e. A set of “User’s Manual” detailing the operation of the Building Management and Control System (BMCS). The manual shall describe the hardware operation as well as provide instructions in computer access and programming. This manual shall be submitted under separate cover. The User Manual shall be written for an inexperienced user. It shall describe in layman’s language, the functions and procedures of “using” the system.

F.

Acceptance Testing 1. At substantial completion of the work, the ATC contractor shall prepare a punch list of all items remaining to be completed or corrected. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the ATC contractor to complete all work in accordance with the contract documents. This list shall be delivered to the engineer prior to the ATC contractor’s request for formal acceptance testing. 2. Additionally, the ATC contractor shall provide an equipment list and point list to the engineer prior to formal acceptance testing. Each material item and point must be initialed by the installing DDC technician that the item has been physically inspected for proper installation, functionality, and database entry. The verification form shall be similar to the following: DDC Floor

Point Point Point Point Sensor Oper. Test Test Cabinet # Name Type Address On/Off Reading Initials Time Date

3.

The engineer will prepare a list of items to be corrected or completed that shall include the punch list items identified by the ATC contractor, and any additional items found to be incomplete or incorrect. All items on both lists shall be completed or corrected before acceptance testing may proceed. The ATC contractor shall notify the engineer when he is ready to proceed with the acceptance test that system is complete and operates per the requirements of the contract documents. Acceptance Test Procedure: a. The ATC contractor shall demonstrate in the presence of the Engineer that all functions of the ATC and BMCS systems are operating as specified in the contract documents, including any required change orders. The final checkout will include, but not be limited to, the following

4.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 103 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b.

items: 1) Verification of the location, calibration and proper wiring/connection of all BMCS input and output devices. 2) l BMCS software and output functions shall be tested individually. 3) The proper operation and calibration of all ATC devices and actuators shall be verified individually. 4) When system performance is deemed satisfactory by the Architect, system parts shall be accepted for beneficial use. Warranty shall begin. All minor deficiencies found will be noted in writing by the Engineer. All deficiencies so noted shall be corrected by the ATC contractor before the final acceptance will be issued. 5) The ATC contractor shall allow sufficient time to complete the acceptance test procedure. Acceptance testing shall be coordinated with the Commissioning Agent. Refer to specification section 019100 for additional requirements.

G.

Training/Owner’s Instruction 1. The ATC contractor shall provide three copies of an operator’s user’s manual describing all operating and routine maintenance service procedures to be used with the system as specified previously. The ATC contractor shall instruct the Owner’s designated representatives in these procedures during the start-up and test period. The duration of the instruction period shall be no less than 40 hours and shall take place at the site. The training sessions shall be delineated such that at least 16 hours of training occur after the completion of system testing and balancing and commissioning. This training shall include instruction in the use and operation of the point editor function and graphics. 2. Training sessions shall be coordinated with the Commissioning Agent. Refer to specification section 019100 for additional requirements.

H.

Warranty 1. The ATC contractor shall guarantee the control system free from defects in material and workmanship and guarantee performance of the systems per the requirements of the contract documents for one year of normal use and service beginning on the date the Owner has accepted the system. 2. The ATC contractor shall through the warrantee period, schedule visits to the site in order to provide two seasonal system review sessions with the building operators. The intent is for system review to take place at the time of seasonal system changeover. The contractor shall establish diagnostic trend logs on the OWS for the purposes of evaluating all major systems in the building, and a sample of terminal systems. Following any calibrations and adjustments the logs shall be submitted to the Architect for review. 3. As part of above maintenance provide 24 / 7 active monitoring of up to 60 I/O points resident in the system. BAS technicians dedicated to performing this service and be on-line on a continuous basis 24 / 7 / 365. This service to be provided remotely via the web access LAN connection provided by the Town of Abington. Access to Abington Co-Located Pre-K Middle High School LAN to be provided via a VPN connection

I.

Products 1. The Building Management and Control System (BMCS) shall consist of Network Level 1 controllers and Level 2 DDC controllers to monitor and control equipment per the control sequences. Level 1 controllers shall provide overall system coordination, accept control programs, perform automated DDC and energy HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 104 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

management functions, control peripheral devices and perform all necessary mathematical functions. The controller shall be a microcomputer of modular design. The word size shall be 16 bits or larger, with a memory cycle time of less than 1 microsecond. Level 1 controllers will share information with and from the entire network of Level 1 and Level 2 controllers for full global control. Level 1 controllers shall permit multiuser operation from workstations and laptop computers connected either locally or over the Level 1 network. Level 2 controllers, also referred to as local control units shall provide intelligent, stand alone control of HVAC, lighting equipment, and access control. Each unit shall have its own internal RAM memory and will continue to operate all local control functions in the event of a failure to any Level 1 controller. In addition, it shall be able to share information with and from the entire network for full global control. System shall be Trane Tracer SC or approved equal.

J.

Communications Processing 1. The BMCS shall operate as a true token-pass peer-to-peer communication network. Resident processors in each Multi-purpose controllers shall provide for full exchange of system data between other Multi-purpose controllers on the high performance peer to peer communications network. Systems that limit data exchange to a defined number of system points are not acceptable. 2. Systems that operate via polled response or other types of protocols that rely on a central processor or similar device to manage interpanel communications may be considered only if a similar device is provided as a stand-by. Upon a failure or malfunction of the primary device, the stand-by shall automatically, without any operator intervention, assume all BMCS network management activities. 3. The failure of any Multi-purpose controller on the network shall not affect the operation of other Multi-purpose controllers. A panel failure shall be annunciated at the specified graphical workstation, alarm printers, or operator terminals.

K.

Color Graphic Workstation (located in Custodians Office). 1. The operator workstation will be furnished by the automatic temperature control contractor. The workstation shall consist of the latest generation of PC and shall operate at speed commensurate with the requirements of the ATC graphics and trending requirements. The ATC contractor shall furnish the PC with a dedicated UPS. 2. Network Connection: Graphical workstations shall allow for access to the BMCS network through a pull-down menu approach using only a mouse or similar point device. The keyboard shall be required only when entering text or for programming functions. a. The workstation shall be used as an interface to the BMCS network and shall not be required to process any control or energy management algorithms nor manage any BMCS network communications. 3. Graphical Software a. Software Description - workstation functions will include monitoring and programming of Level 1 and Level 2 controllers. Monitoring consists of alarming, reporting, graphic displays, long term data storage, automatic data collection, and operator-initiated control actions such as schedule and setpoint adjustments. The workstation software must be able to communicate to all Level 1 and Level 2 controllers, and where necessary integrate information that is common to one or more controllers. It shall be possible to program off-line from any Level 1 or Level 2 controller. The software will be oriented towards operators and programmers. In the operator’s mode, all information will be available in graphic or text displays. Graphic displays will feature animation effects to enhance the presentation of the data, to alert operators of problems, and to facilitate location of information throughout the DDC system. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 105 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b. c.

d.

e.

f.

All operator functions shall be selectable through a mouse. A “windows” environment shall be used to allow multiple functions to be displayed on the screen simultaneously. Operating System - The software will utilize the IBM’s OS/2 Warp multiuser, multi-tasking operating system or equivalent. Provide Microsoft’s OS/2 Lan Manager software for operation of the file server. Network Communications - The network consists of a high speed LAN comprised of Level 1 controllers, workstations and a file server. The file server acts as the central database for the workstations, so that all additions or changes made by one operator are immediately available to other operators on the network. System Database - The workstation database shall consist of all points and programs in each of the controllers that have been assigned to the network. In addition, the database will contain all workstation files including graphic slides, alarm reports, text reports, historical data logs, schedules, and polling records. The software shall conform to the following: i. Utilize Microsoft’s SQL database server. ii. Whenever a new controller is added to the system, the software will automatically update that controller with its assigned points and programs. The system will also be able to verify that the point database in each controller is identical to the one at the workstation. If any discrepancy is found, it will automatically modify its database or notify an operator of the error. iii. The database shall also contain host level points consisting of variables which can be used for host level reports and alarming. These variables can be setpoints or the result of any boolean algebra expression. iv. Object Tree - It shall possible for an operator view the entire database through a graphical object tree display. This tree will present all controllers and their associated points, programs, graphics, alarms, and reports in an easy to understand structure. System Configuration - Configuration of the database shall be through application modules, each having a unique “icon” for easy visual identification. Each module will provide a windowed menu in which to enter the required data base information. System configuration shall have the following features: i. Each site, whether local or remote, shall have a separate record for storing pertinent communication parameters. ii. Controllers will be associated with a specific site file. The controller record will also contain the controller passwords and communication logon and logoff text strings. iii. Point records will include as a minimum a 32 character point description, engineering units, logging parameters, point status, and point value. iv. All database records will be available to the user at all times, regardless of the current tasks being performed by the workstation. Color Graphic Displays - The system shall allow for the creation of user defined, color graphic displays for the viewing of mechanical and electrical systems, or building schematics. These graphics shall contain point information from the database including any attributes associated with the point (engineering units). In addition operators shall be able to

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 106 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

g.

h.

i.

command equipment or change setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse. Requirements of the color graphic subsystem include: i. SVGA, bit-mapped displays. The user shall have the ability to import CAD-generated picture files in the OS/2 Metafile format as background displays. Updates to imported CAD drawings will not affect workstation added animation. ii. A library of built in stencils, symbols and display shapes common to the HVAC industry. iii. An online graphics drawing editor that provides for all standard geometric shapes, multiple line thicknesses, shading, up to 16 colors, cutting and pasting of objects, inclusion of text, and zooming. iv. Built-in control panel objects such as buttons, knobs, gauges, and line graphs to enable operators to interact with the graphic displays in a manner that mimics their mechanical equivalents found on field installed control panels. v. Status changes or alarm conditions can be highlighted by objects changing screen location, size, color, text, blinking or changing from one display to another. vi. Ability to link graphic displays through user defined objects, alarm testing, or the result of a mathematical expression. Operators will be able to move from one graphic to another by selecting an object with a mouse, no menus will be required. vii. The graphic system shall allow for one touch modification of any analog or digital point in the database regardless of its location in the network. Automatic Monitoring - The software shall allow for the collection of data and reports from any Level 1 or Level 2 controller through either a hardwire or modem communication link. The time schedules and content of the polling shall be user configurable and include any subset of the controller’s data base including application programs. Alarm Management - The software shall be capable of both accepting alarms directly from Level 1 controllers, or generating alarms based on polling of data in controllers and comparing to limits or conditional equations configured in the host software. Any alarm (regardless of its origination) will be integrated into the overall alarm management system and will appear in all standard alarm reports, be available for operator acknowledgment, and have the option for displaying graphics, reports, or initiating communication to another controller or remote computing device. Alarm management features shall include: i. A minimum of 255 alarm levels. Each alarm level will establish a unique set of parameters for controlling alarm display, acknowledgment, keyboard annunciation, alarm printout and record keeping. ii. When an alarm occurs the Alarm counter will be incremented by one. iii. Printout of the alarm or alarm report to an alarm printer or report printer. iv. Print the alarm acknowledgment or Return to Normal message. v. Sound an audible beep on alarm initiation or acknowledgment. vi. It shall be possible to direct alarm displays to all or any of 16 groups of workstations on the network. Each configured path can be assigned on a unique basis to individual alarm levels. Report Generation - The software will contain a built-in report generator, featuring word processing tools for the creation of custom building

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 107 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

j.

k.

reports. i. Reports can be of any length and contain any points with the database of Level 1 and Level 2 controllers. ii. The report generator will have access to the user programming language in order to perform mathematical calculations inside the body of the report, control the display output of the report, or prompt the user for additional information needed by the report. iii. It shall be possible to run other executable programs whenever a report is initiated. iv. Report Generator activity can be tied to the alarm management system, so that any of the configured reports can be displayed in response to an alarm condition. Scheduling - It shall be possible to configure and download from the workstation schedules for any of the controllers on the network. i. Time of day schedules shall be in a calendar style configured for either monthly or weekly operation. Scheduling shall be programmable up to one year in advance. ii. Each schedule will appear on the screen as a monthly calendar correctly showing the day, weekday, month and year. It shall be possible to scroll from one month to the next and view or alter any of the schedule times. iii. Schedules will be assigned to specific controllers and stored in their local RAM memory. Any changes made at the workstation will be automatically updated to the corresponding schedule in the controller. iv. It shall be possible to configure multiple Holiday schedules in a yearly format. Holiday schedules will override the standard operating schedule for those days that have been defined as holidays. Holidays shall be differentiated on the calendar through color coding of the date. Any changes to a holiday schedule will be automatically updated to the standard schedule to which it has been superimposed. v. There shall also be a provision for Special Day schedules. Special Day schedules will override both the standard schedule and its associated Holiday schedule. Special Days will be differentiated on the calendar through color -coding of the date. Any changes to a Special Day schedule will be automatically updated to the standard schedule to which it has been superimposed. vi. The use of Holiday or Special Day schedules is strictly optional. Standard schedules do not require either of these two types of schedules. vii. The Scheduling application shall include built-in editing tools to permit users to copy and paste portions of schedules to different days, weeks or months. Users can select from a particular day, a range of days, or a nonconsecutive group of days over which to edit a schedule. Programmer’s Environment - the programmer’s environment will include access to a superset of the same programming language supported in the Level 1 controllers. Here the programmer will be able to configure application software off-line (if desired) for custom program development, write global control programs, system reports, wide area networking data collection routines, and custom alarm management software.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 108 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

l.

m.

Security i. The software shall employ a two tiered password system. The first tier shall consist of the user’s name. The second tier shall be a unique password consisting of up to 8 alphanumeric characters. ii. Each password shall have a unique access level. At least 8 levels will be defined as follows: ◊ No Access - View only graphics as presented in the log-in program. ◊ View Only - View all applications, but perform no database modifications. ◊ Acknowledge Alarms - View Only privileges plus the ability to acknowledge alarms. ◊ Change Values - View and Control point information, Acknowledge Alarms and modify Time Schedules. ◊ Enable / Disable - Change Value level plus allow the enabling or disabling of points and alarms. ◊ Configure - Minimal program level functions including creating and editing any object. ◊ Program - All privileges except password and create users ◊ Administrative - All privileges. Saving/Reloading Programs i. The workstation software shall have an application to save and restore field controller memory dumps. The site and device record files shall serve as a menu tree to coordinate save/reload records. Each record shall have a minimum 12 character record name and a 32-character description. ii. The Save/Reload application shall have the capability to set the system clock in a Level 1 controller. iii. Default values store in the workstation database shall be sent to the controller during a reload operation either automatically or at the user’s option. iv. If during a poll of a controller, the workstation determines that the controller program has been lost, it shall be possible for the workstation to automatically reload the program without operator involvement. a) The software shall provide, as a minimum, the following functionality: Graphical viewing and control of environment Scheduling and override of building operations Collection and analysis of historical data Definition and construction of dynamic color graphics Editing, programming, storage and downloading of controller database. b) The graphical interface shall allow for all system operations and applications to be quickly and easily selected using the mouse in conjunction with groups of drop-down menus, lists, graphics and icons. Provide functionality such that all operations can also be performed using the keyboard as a backup interface device. Provide additional capability that allows at least ten (10) special function keys to perform often-used operations.

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 109 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

c)

d)

e)

f)

Software shall provide for a windowed approach which supports concurrent viewing and commanding of system operations. The software shall provide a multitasking environment that allows the user to run several applications simultaneously. The mouse shall be used to quickly select and switch between multiple applications. This shall be accomplished through the use of Microsoft Windows or similar industry standard software that supports concurrent viewing and controlling of systems operations. The software shall be capable of simultaneously displaying and performing a minimum of two of the functions listed below in any workstation: i) Dynamic color graphics and graphic control ii) Alarm reporting and acknowledging iii) Time-of-day scheduling iv) Trend data definition and presentation v) Graphic definition vi) Graphic construction Graphic displays shall be high-resolution, multi-colored presentations of actual building data and parameters. Graphic displays may be quickly and easily viewed via any or all of the following methods as a minimum: - Graphic links - Drop down menus - Special functions keys for points in alarm i) Graphic links shall be standard symbols which can be located on graphic displays as desired by the user. These links shall allow the user to view any graphic display, either in a hierarchical fashion or as otherwise defined. The quantity of possible links shall be limited only by the space available on each display. ii) Drop-down menus may be used to view graphic displays by selecting from customized lists which include all graphics available for viewing. Provide the capability to quickly scroll through all lists. Special function keys shall be used to quickly view graphic alarm displays and user-defined default graphics, such as campus or building site plans. From the alarm display, the user may quickly view the graphic on which the associated point in alarm resides. Provide static and dynamic graphic display capabilities. Static displays such as site plans, building layouts, floor plans and schematics shall provide the user with maps to allow for quick and easy access to any building information. Dynamic graphic displays may represent any real-time system information. Any system point or group of points may reside on a dynamic display. Dynamic displays such as schematics of any mechanical system or piece of equipment shall allow the user to monitor and control actual building operating parameters. Point values such as temperature,

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 110 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

g)

h)

i)

j)

humidity and flow, and point status such as on/off, normal and alarm shall automatically and continually update to indicate current operating conditions. As a minimum, symbols, text and colors shall be dynamic in nature. Provide functionality to allow for any analog point value to be displayed as an individual dynamic display window for use as a convenient control and diagnostic tool. The display window shall include the following information as a minimum: - Point name - Point description - Setpoint - Current value - Range of values - High and low limit setpoints i) All values shall be displayed in both text and symbolic form, such as an analog bar, gauge or other standard measurement device. Setpoint values shall be changed by simply moving a pointer to the desired setting on the measurement device. After user verification of the correct setting the system shall control at the new setpoint. Provide the capability to superimpose these displays on their associated schematic graphics or on separate displays in user-defined groups. Provide the capability to control any point from a dynamic graphic display. Relevant point information windows may be accessed by pointing to a symbol or text. Setpoints may be changed by simply entering the new value. Status may be changed by selecting from predefined lists. The display shall ask the user to verify the change before allowing the system to respond. Provide alarm annunciation capabilities, such that alarm status shall be displayed automatically on the screen regardless of system operation or application modes. The quantity of current alarms shall be displayed via a flashing icon or similar symbol. In addition, provide an audible signal to indicate the occurrence of new alarms. An alarm window may be displayed to view the alarms. From the alarm window the user shall be able to view the graphic and display a customized message of at least 250 characters associated with the point in alarm. When the graphic id displayed, the symbol of the point in alarm shall be flashing and shall have changed color. The user shall also be able to acknowledge, respond to and clear selected alarm conditions as desired. Provide a graphical spreadsheet-type format for simplification of time-of-day scheduling and overrides of building operations. Provide the following spreadsheet graphic types as a minimum: - Weekly schedules

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 111 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

k)

- Zone schedules - Monthly calendars i) Weekly schedules shall be provided for each building zone or piece of equipment with a specific occupancy schedule. Each schedule shall include columns for each day of the week as well as holiday and special day columns for alternate scheduling on -user-defined days. Equipment scheduling shall be accomplished by simply inserting occupancy and vacancy times into appropriate information blocks on the graphic. In addition, temporary overrides and associated times may be inserted into blocks for modified operating schedules. After overrides have been executed, the original schedule will automatically be restored. ii) Zone schedules shall be provided for each building zone as previously described. Each schedule shall include all commandable points residing within the zone. Each point may have a unique schedule of operation relative to the zone’s occupancy schedule, allowing for sequential starting and control of equipment within the zone. Scheduling and re-scheduling of points may be accomplished easily via the zone schedule graphic. iii) Monthly calendars for a 24-month period shall be provided which allow for simplified scheduling of holidays and special days in advance. Holidays and special days shall be user-selected with the pointing device and shall automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the weekly schedules. Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserve records of system activity over an extended period of time. Any system point (physical or calculated) may be trended automatically at predetermined time-based intervals or changes of value, both of which shall be user-definable. Trend data may be stored on hard disk for future diagnostics and reporting. Any point, regardless of physical location in the network, shall be collected and stored in each DDC controller’s point group. Each DDC controller panel shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 70,000 samples. i) Trend data report graphics shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended point data. Reports may be customized to include individual points or pre-defined groups of at least six points. Provide additional functionality to allow any trended data to be transferred easily to an off-the-shelf spreadsheet package

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 112 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

l)

m)

such as Lotus 1-2-3 or Microsoft Excel. This shall allow the user to perform custom calculations such as energy usage, equipment efficiency and energy costs and shall allow for generation of these reports on high-quality plots, graphs and charts. ii) A collection schedule function shall be provided to automatically collect trend data. A menu shall prompt for days of the week and time of day for collection of selected points. Provide a minimum of 12 user-selected time schedules per day. Provide additional functionality that allows the user to view trended data on trend graph displays. Displays shall be actual plots of both static and real-time dynamic point data. Up to four points may be viewed simultaneously on a single graph, with color selection and line type for each point being user-definable. Displays shall include an “X” axis indicating elapsed time and a “Y” axis indicating a range scale in engineering units for each point. The “Y” axis may be manually or automatically scaled at the user’s option. Different ranges for each point may be used with minimum and maximum values listed at the bottom and top of the “Y” axis. All “Y” axis data shall be colorcoded to match the line color for the corresponding point. i) Static graphics shall represent actual point data that has been trended and stored on disk. Exact point value may be viewed on a data window by pointing or scrolling to the place of interest along the graph. Provide capability to print any graph on the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics tool. ii) Dynamic graphs shall represent real-time point data. Any point or group of points may be graphed, regardless of whether they have been predefined for trending. The graphs shall continuously update point values. At any time the user may redefine sampling times or range scales for any profit. In addition, the user may pause the graph and take “snapshots” of screens to be stored on the PC disk for future recall and analysis. As with static graphs, exact point values may be viewed and the graphs may be printed. A full screen, forms based point editor and programming function shall allow for point additions, deletions, changes, program modification and creation and point and program storage. This program shall be similar to a word-processing format such that full documentation of program changes may be available. This program shall provide the user with the capability to insert full English narratives to describe the control program. Search,

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 113 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

n)

o)

insert, find, cut and paste functions shall allow for quick program modifications. Provide a general purpose graphics package such as PC Paint Plus “In-a-Vision” which shall allow the user to quickly and easily define or construct color graphic displays. In addition, provide a library of standard HVAC equipment and symbols such as Rooftop air handling units, chillers, cooling towers and boilers and standard electrical symbols that shall aid the user in definition of standard or custom graphics. Additional libraries of standard symbols may be easily added to the package or the user can define or construct symbols as desired for additional customization. Graphic displays may be defined or created to represent any building parameter, mechanical system or group of system points as described to facilitate building operation and analysis. i) Provide the user with the capability to easily define all system operating parameters. ii) Libraries of standard application modules such as temperature, humidity and static pressure control may be used as “building blocks” in defining or creating new control sequences. iii) The user shall have the capability to easily create and archive new modules and control sequences as desired via a word processing type format. iv) Provide a library of standard forms to facilitate definition of point characteristics. Forms shall be self-prompting and incorporate a fill-in-the-blank approach for definition of all parameters. v) The system shall immediately detect an improper entry and automatically display an error message explaining the nature of the mistake. Provide the capability to backup and store all system databases on the PC hard disk. In addition, all database changes may be performed while the PC is on-line without disrupting other system operations. Changes shall be automatically recorded and downloaded to the appropriate multi-purpose control units. Similarly, changes made at the multi-purpose control units shall be automatically uploaded to the PC, ensuring system continuity. The user shall also have the option to selectively download changes as desired. i) The workstation shall provide for automatic upload and download of program changes. Any program change made at the workstation shall be downloaded to the respective multipurpose control unit. Any program change made at the multi-purpose control unit shall be uploaded to the workstation disk. ii) Should a multi-purpose control unit lose its RAM database, the workstation shall automatically download that control unit’s program from the hard disk. iii) An auto-boot function shall allow an

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 114 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

n.

L.

Multi-Purpose Controllers 1. Provide multi-purpose DDC controllers. Each multi-purpose controller shall be a microprocessor-based direct digital control unit and shall be capable of operating as a standalone controller on a high performance peer to peer network. Provide each multi-purpose controller with sufficient memory to operate in a truly independent manner; that is, each controller shall support its own inputs and outputs, operating system, database and programs necessary to perform control sequences and energy management routines. Additionally, each multi-purpose controller shall have sufficient memory to support the application specific controllers and LAN control panels connected to it over the local area networks. 2.

3. 4.

M.

unattended workstation to automatically restart from a power failure. p) Provide context-sensitive help menus to provide instructions appropriate with operations and applications currently being performed. q) Multiple user security levels shall be provided to allow for various degrees of system access and control. Provide a minimum of four levels of access, with each increasing level allowing control of additional system operations and applications. A minimum of twelve unique passwords, including user initials, shall be provided. The system shall automatically generate a report of log-on/log-off time and system activity for each user. Provide automatic log-off capability to prevent unauthorized system use. Automatic log-off time shall be user-definable in one-minute increments and may be disabled if desired. r) The workstation shall be provided with a key element display that records logos, log-offs, TOD overrides, alarms and alarm acknowledgments. Provide a 500 element circular buffer for recording purposes. Key element reports may be filtered by operator name and may be run for a user defined time interval. All points mapped to the workstation shall be available in both text and graphic format. All operator functions available on the text side of the workstation must also be available on the graphics side.

Each multi-purpose controller shall be capable of full operation either as a completely independent unit or as a part of the building-wide control system. All units shall contain the necessary equipment for direct interface to the sensors and actuators connected to it. Control strategies shall be owner definable at each multi-purpose controller, and for all control units in the system from any one operator terminal. Each control unit shall provide the ability to support its own operator terminal if so desired. Each multi-purpose controller shall include its own microcomputer direct digital controller, power supply, input/output modules, and battery. The battery shall be self-charging and be capable of supporting all memory within the control unit if the commercial power to the unit is interrupted or lost for a minimum of 100 hours. Upon a power failure at the remote unit, operator intervention shall not be required to maintain the database.

Networking Communications 1. General - the network architecture shall consist of two levels. The top level shall be a high speed Ethernet LAN designed to support network controllers, central HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 115 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

N.

plant controllers, work stations and a file server. The second level shall be a RS485 Token passing bus to support a family of dedicated local controllers for control of HVAC equipment, lighting, and access control. The second level bus shall communicate bidirectionally with the high speed LAN through Level 1 controllers for transmission of global data. High Speed LAN - this Ethernet local area network shall operate at a minimum speed of 10 Mb/sec utilizing a TCP/IP communications architecture. The high speed LAN will provide transfer of point data, alarms and file activity among Level 1 controllers, work stations and the file server. The high speed LAN shall support a minimum of 50 nodes consisting of Level 1 controllers or workstations. Any data from a Level 2 controller can also be transmitted onto this bus through a Level 1 controller. The high speed LAN shall support multi-user communications and multi-session activity. That is, all global data sharing shall occur simultaneously with the transmission of alarm data or user activity. Field Bus - the level 2 bus, or field bus, supports local control units of modular size for operation of the building’s HVAC, lighting and access control systems. This RS485 bus shall operate at a minimum speed of 19200 baud, with a minimum length of 4000 feet or 32 nodes before requiring a network repeater. A minimum of 127 Level 2 controllers shall be configureable on the field bus. Manufacturers with baud rates of less than 19200 shall be limited to 64 Level 2 controllers to insure adequate global data and alarm response times. The field bus shall permit peer to peer communications among all Level 2 controllers and allow simultaneous communications with laptop computers that are connected to a Level 2 controller. Failure of the Level 1 controller will not impair the operation of its associated field bus. Network Transparency - all points contained on Level 1 and Level 2 controllers shall be considered global points. Any program in any controller on the network shall be able to reference any point in any controller regardless of its location on the network. Workstation Communications - workstations shall be connected directly to the high speed LAN. Workstations shall be able to communicate to any Level 1 controller, Level 2 controller, to additional workstations or the file server. Work stations shall also be able to communicate via modems to remote controllers via a RS232 connection. Telephone communications shall operate simultaneously with communication to any controllers connected on the high speed LAN. Laptop Communications - the laptop computer shall communicate with either Level 1 or Level 2 controllers. Through the laptop, operators shall be able to view points and change parameters on any Level 1 or Level 2 controller on the network. Dial-up Communications - it shall be possible to access the network remotely through a standard dial-up modem. This modem shall permit direct access to the high speed LAN via a Level 1 controller. It shall be possible to configure multiple modems in Level 1 controllers to enable multi-user communications when more than 1 telephone line is available.

DDC Controllers: 1. A Level 1 controller has its own on-board CPU, clock/calendar, EPROM, RAM, ROM, communication port(s), and network connections to the high speed LAN and the field bus. The Level 1 controller may either have on-board or remote mounted I/O. Level 1 controllers are capable of complete standalone operation. Level 1 controllers are available with an optional user display. The firmware shall consist of the operating system, communication software, programming language, and resident control application software. The firmware may optionally contain user interface software to support dumb terminal HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 116 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

10.

11. 12. 13.

O.

operation. Where this is not provided the Level 1 controller must be optionally programmable from the laptop computer. The custom application software shall reside in battery backed RAM or EPROM. RAM will also be used for storing trend data and clock/calendar information. Level 1 controllers shall provide communication to both the high speed LAN and the field bus. In addition, a minimum of 1 RS232 or RS485 port shall be provided for connection to a workstation or laptop computer. When the port is RS232, it shall optionally support communication to a modem or printer. Where multiple RS232 ports are available, multi-user communications shall be supported. Analog Inputs - the Analog Input (AI) function shall monitor each analog input, perform A/D conversion, and hold the digital value in a buffer for interrogation. The A/D conversion shall have a minimum resolution 12 bits. Input ranges shall be within the range of 0-10 VDC or 4 - 20 mA. Digital Inputs - the Digital Input (DI) function shall accept dry contact closures and voltage level transitions. A voltage level below 1 volt shall be read as ON (closed), a voltage level above 3 volts shall be read as OFF (open). Pulse Accumulator Inputs - the pulse accumulator input function shall have the same characteristics as the DI, except that, in addition a buffer shall be included to totalize pulses between interrogations. Each input shall accept pulses at a minimum of 2 per second. Temperature Inputs - temperature inputs originating from a thermistor, shall be monitored and buffered as an AI, and provide automatic conversion to degrees F or C without any additional signal conditioning. Input Wiring - all inputs shall be two wire devices and shall not require shielded wire for accurate operation. Outputs - output types shall include digital, universal and tri-state. Outputs shall be available with built-in hand-off-auto switches for local overrides. Digital Output - the Digital Output (DO) function shall provide contact closure for momentary (Pulse Width Modulation) and maintained operation of field devices. Output pulse width shall be selectable between 0.1 and 3200 seconds with a minimum resolution of 0.1 seconds. Isolation and protection against voltage surges up to 180 VAC peak shall be provided. Contact rating shall be a minimum of 1 amps at 24 VAC. Each digital output shall be equipped with an optional ON/OFF/AUTO switch to manually obtain either output state. Manual overrides shall be reported to the controller at each update. An LED shall be provided to indicate the state of each digital output. Universal Output - a Universal Output shall provide 0-20VDC, 0-20 mA control signal (with a maximum resolution of .1 volt and .1 mA), and standard Form C relay operation (1 amps, 24 VAC). It shall be possible to select the mode of output operation for each output by simply wiring to the appropriate terminations on the controller. No circuit boards or output cards shall have to be exchanged to select the desired output mode. A three-position manual override switch shall allow selection of the ON, OFF, or AUTO output state. In addition each UO shall be equipped with an override potentiometer to allow manual adjustment of the analog output signal over its full range, when the 3 position manual override switch is placed in the ON position. The Form C output mode shall be capable of standard digital output operation including pulse width modulation. All current outputs shall be fuse protected to 120VAC. Tri-State Outputs - tri-state outputs shall consist of two 24VAC relays for control of bi-directional motors and actuators. Each tri-state output is capable of PWM (pulse width modulation) to a resolution of .1 second.

DDC Controller Resident Software Features HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 117 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.

2.

General: a. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in this specification shall be provided. b. The software programs specified in this Section shall be provided as an integral part of DDC Controllers and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution. Control Software Description: a. Software Description - The application software shall be configured for each Level 1 controller either locally through a laptop computer or through a workstation. Level 1 controllers shall contain PROM as the resident operating system. Application software will be RAM resident. Application software will only be limited by the amount of RAM memory. There will be no restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the system. Each Level 1 controller shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all I/O facilities of the processor. This execution of control function by Level 1 controllers shall not be interrupted due to normal user communications including; interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for storage. b. Real-Time Operating System - Provide a real time operating system in PROM memory requiring no operator interaction to initiate and commence operations. The program shall include: i. Operation and management of all devices. ii. Error detection and recovery from arithmetic and logical faults iii. Editing software to allow the user to develop or alter application programs. iv. System self-testing v. Multi-user. vi. Multi-tasking. c.

d.

Editor - When programming a controller through either a dumb terminal or laptop computer, editing and word processing features will include as a minimum: i. Cut, copy, paste, and undo. ii. Search and replace. ii. Comments. iv. Scrolling. v. Character, line, and page cursor control. When programming in terminal mode, the system will allow full screen, character editing for correction or modification of any portion of a program. Syntax errors will be highlighted, and programmers must make corrections prior to the program being compiled. When programming Level 2 controllers, the programming environment will be identical to Level 1 programming with automatic uploading and downloading of the compiled code to the controller. Point Identification - Users must be able to assign unique identifiers for each connected point. Identifiers must have at least twelve alpha/numeric characters. All references to these points in programs, reports, and command messages shall be by these identifiers. Each point name can have up to a 40 character description, and optionally engineering units (up to 8 characters).

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 118 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

e.

f.

g.

h.

i.

j.

k.

User Programming Language - The application software shall be user programmable. This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be English language and programmable by the user. The language shall be structured to allow for the easy configuration of control programs, schedules, alarms, reports, telecommunications, local displays, mathematical calculations, passwords, and histories. The language shall allow the creation of timers anywhere in the logic of a program. Each timer shall increment in seconds and increment to a maximum of 365 days. The language shall be self-documenting. Users shall be able to place comments anywhere in the body of a program. Program listings shall be configurable by the user in logical groupings. Application Software - The system shall contain include ROM based, built-in software modules for the creation of standard application programs. Modules will include as a minimum: i. PID Algorithm ii. Self-tuning PID iii. Calendar Functions (Seconds, minutes, hour, day of week, day of month, day of year, month and year) iv. Curve fit v. Optimum Start Mathematical Functions - Each controller shall be capable of performing basic mathematical functions (+,-,X,/), squares, square roots, exponential, logarithms, boolean logic statements, or combinations of both. The controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical statements including operators such as >,<,=, and,or,exclusive or. These must be able to be used in the same equations with the mathematical operators and nested up to five parenthesis deep. Passwords - Level 1 controllers will have up to 8 levels of passwords. The highest level will allow access to all functions within the system. The remaining 4 levels will be definable by the user to include any subset of system commands. History Logging - Each controller shall be capable of logging any system variable over user defined time intervals ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes. Any system variables (inputs, outputs, math calculations, and flags) can be logged in history. A maximum of 32767 values can be store in each log. Each log can will record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logs can be automatic or manual. If shall be possible to find the average of a log, the standard deviation, the sum, minimum or maximum. It shall also be possible to reference any value within a log for use in a control program. Reporting - The system shall be able to create user definable reports containing any combination of text and system variables. Report templates will be created by users in a word processing environment. Reports can be displayed based on any logical condition or through a user command. Numerical displays shall be up to 10 digits in length, with up to 4 digits to the right of the decimal point. The format of each numerical display shall be user definable. Alarming - For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 119 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

l.

m.

P.

Q.

reports. Messages and reports can be sent to the optional display panel, a local terminal, to the Host Computer, via modem to a remote computing device. Debugging Tools - The language shall have built in program debugging tools for program simulation and error detection. When a control program is placed in a debug mode, a continuous record shall be kept of the last 128 steps before discarding the oldest data. Up to 4 control programs can be placed in a debug mode concurrently. Overriding Programs - It shall be possible to disable any point in the system and modify it to a user definable value. Any points that have been disabled will be kept in a log and viewable by an operator at any time.

Control Valves 1. All automatic valves shall be fully proportioning with packing glands designated for hot or chilled water service. All valve bodies shall be designated for 125 psig service and shall have bronze trim and throttling plug inner valves for modulating control. Valves shall be either normally open or closed and each shall be sized for the allowable pressure drop. 2. All two-way valves shall have external spring adjustment with a self-sealing Vring packing arranged to tighten the seal as the water pressure increases so that no manual adjustment is necessary. 3. All other heating coil valves shall be either normally open or closed as specified. The interiors of all such valves shall be designed for 100% tight shut-off against the operating pressure. 4. All automatic valves and separable sockets shall be furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor and installed in the lines by the Mechanical Contractor. Dampers 1. All automatic dampers shall be furnished by this Contractor. Automatic control dampers shall be Ruskin CD60 or approved equal. All dampers for modulating control shall be of the proportioning type with adjacent louvers rotating in opposite directions. Damper frames shall be constructed of 16 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Bearings shall be nylon with oil impregnated sintered iron bushings. All linkages shall be fastened to blades within the damper. Provide double linkages on damper panels over 42” wide. 2. Replaceable rubber seals shall be provided with the dampers. Seals shall be installed along the top, bottom and sides of the frames and along each blade. Seals shall provide a tight closing, low leakage damper. Leakage and floor characteristics charters shall be submitted to the architect prior to approval of dampers. 3. Electronic Actuator a. Actuators for damper control shall be direct coupled over the shaft, enabling it to be mounted directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The fastening clamp assembly shall be of a “V” bolt design with associated “V” shaped toothed cradle attaching to the shaft for maximum strength eliminating slippages. Spring return actuators shall have a “V” clamp assembly of sufficient size to be directly mounted to an integral jackshaft of up to 1.05 inches when the damper is constructed in this manner. Single bolt or set screw type fasteners are not acceptable. b. The actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to prevent damage to the actuator throughout the entire rotation of the actuator. Mechanical end switches or magnetic clutch to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation are not acceptable. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 120 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

c.

4. 5.

For power failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Nonmechanical forms of fail-safe operation are not acceptable. d. All spring return actuators shall be capable of both clockwise or counterclockwise spring return operation by simply changing the mounting orientation. e. Actuators shall be Belimo, or equal. All of the automatic dampers shall be furnished by the Temperature Control Contractor and installed by the Sheetmetal Subcontractor. Combination smoke/fire control dampers amperage draw of motor shall be provided by temperature control contractor. Dampers shall meet UL555S leakage class 2 standards and shall be equipped with wall sleeves and factory mounted electric actuators. Dampers shall be Ruskin S050 or approved equal.

R.

Electronic Sensors 1. All mixed air and coil discharge sensors shall utilize industry standard thermistor with averaging elements. Sensing elements shall be a minimum of 25 ft. and temperature sensed shall be averaged over the entire length of the element. 2. Space type sensors shall have an accuracy of +/-.5 degrees over sensed temperature range (20/120F). 3. Well type sensors used for liquid immersion shall have stainless steel removable wells. Sensing element shall have an accuracy of +/- .5 degrees over amperage draw of motor the range (70/220F or 20/120F) of the sensor. Each sensor shall have a suitable electrical box to enclose all wiring connections. 4. Temperature control wells shall be installed by mechanical contractor under supervision of temperature control contractor.

S.

Smoke Detectors 1. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish smoke detectors to be installed in ductwork by the Sheetmetal Subcontractor. The Electrical Contractor shall wire from the detectors to the associated HVAC unit control circuit for shutdown of fans. The Electrical Contractor shall wire the normally closed contacts in series to the fan starter holding coil. All wiring to smoke detectors shall be by the Electrical Contractor. 2. All units shall utilize smoke detectors, as specified.

T.

Safety Low Limit Thermostats 1. All fan systems introducing outdoor air with hot water coils shall be equipped with two safety low limit thermostats wired in series designed to stop the fan while closing the outdoor air damper any time the discharge temperature falls below 38 degrees. The safety thermostats shall utilize a 20 foot sensing element responsive to the lowest temperature along its entire length. Provide one thermostat for each 16 square foot coil surface as a minimum.

U.

Current Sensors 1. Current sensors shall be analog type, sensitivity dated for the application with a 4-20 ma or 0-10 Vdc output. Span and sensitivity shall be adjustable. Sensors shall be used for all fans and pumps.

V.

Air Static Pressure Transmitter 1. Transmitter shall have range of 0-1” or 0.5” w.g. and send a 4-20 milliamp output signal. Zero set range and span set range +/- 5% of full range output. A combined static error (non-linearity, non-repeatability, and hysteresis) +/- .5% of full range output. Transmitter ranges shall be selected by ATC contractor as appropriate for intended use. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 121 Design Development / 12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School

W.

Water Differential Pressure Transmitter 1. Low differential pressure transducer for wet-wet application. 4-20 milliamp output signal. Setra C230 or equal.

X.

Building Management and Control System Wiring 1. All input and output control wiring to the control units shall be #18 twisted and shielded cable. All shield to be grounded at the control panel, shields at the sensors or transducers to be folded back and taped. 2. Communication trunk wiring shall be #18 twisted and shielded cable. Trunk isolator/extenders shall be installed on either end of trunk. 3. All cable splices shall have joints soldered and taped including the shield. No mechanical connections will be acceptable. 4. No digital input or output points shall be more than 250 feet from its respective panel. 5. All wiring within the panels must be made with connectors of appropriate size and design for the terminals being applied. 6. All connections within the panels must be made with connectors of appropriate size and design for the terminals being applied. 7. All cables must be labeled and identified on corresponding termination drawings. A copy of the termination drawing will be adequately protected and left in its respective panel. Control Wiring 1. Electrical work will be in accordance with NFPA 70, ANSI C2 and Division 16 of these specifications. Electrical wiring, terminal blocks and other high voltage contacts will be fully enclosed and marked to prevent accidental injury. 2. All wiring associated with the installation will be the responsibility of the Contractor. The term “wiring” is construed to include furnishing of wire, conduit, miscellaneous material and labor to install a total working system. 3. It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to provide adequate connections and extensions from 120 volt power sources to the various items of equipment requiring power under this contract. Branch circuits serving equipment under this contract will be separate and used only for such equipment. All branch circuit conductors 120 volts or greater will be at least 14 gauge copper, type THW, 600 volt insulation, installed in minimum 3/4 inch conduit (EMT). 4. Transient Protection - All electronic equipment including processors, relays, monitoring devices, temperature sensors and other non-computerized solid state equipment will be adequately protected against power line transients or RFI interference. Equipment that fails to operate properly due to transient or other electrical interference, in the opinion of the Engineer, will be required to be retrofitted with the appropriate protection device(s).

Y.

Z.

Points List: (the following points list is the minimum required points that will be available to all user interface devices) 1. Boilers: a. Boiler enable/disable. b. Boiler status. c. Boiler sequencing. d. Boiler firing rate. e. Boiler isolation control valves. f. Hot water supply temp. g. Hot water return temp. h. Boiler failure alarms. i. Hot water reset control. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 122 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Boiler pumps: a. Pump status. b. Lead/lag control. c. Differential pressure sensors. d. Variable frequency drives % command. e. Pump failure alarms. Chillers: a. Chiller enable/disable. b. Chiller status. c. Chilled water supply temp. d. Chilled water return temp. e. Chiller failure alarms. f. Chiller connected load in tons. g. Chilled water reset control. h. Minimum evaporator chilled water flow control. i. Evaporator heater. Chilled water pumps: a. Pump status b. Pump lead/lag control. c. Differential pressure sensors. d. Variable frequency drives % command. e. Pump failure alarms. Rooftop Energy Recovery Units (ERU): a. Unit enable/disable. b. Supply fan status. c. Supply fan VFD % command. d. Return fan status. e. Return fan VFD % command. f. Discharge air temp. set point (winter) g. Discharge air temp. set point (summer) h. Discharge static pressure. i. Discharge air humidity. j. Return air temp. k. Return air humidity. l. Recirculation air damper command. m. Filter status. n. Occupied set point. o. Unoccupied set point. p. Freezestat. q. Return air CO2 monitoring (where applicable). r. Hot water valve command/position. s. Outside air entering temperature. (DB/WB) t. Supply air temp. leaving enthalpy wheel. (DB/WB) u. Supply air temp. leaving chilled water coil. (DB/WB) v. Supply air temp. leaving heat pipe. (DB/WB) w. Exhaust air temp. leaving heat pipe. (DB/WB) x. Exhaust air temp. leaving enthalpy wheel. (DB/WB) Rooftop air handling units (RTU): a. Supply fan status. b. Supply fan enable/disable. c. Supply fan VFD % command. d. Return fan status. e. Return fan enable/disable. f. Return fan VFD % command. g. Discharge air temp. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 123 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

7.

8.

9. 10.

11.

12.

13. 14. 15.

h. Discharge static pressure. i. Discharge air humidity. j. Supply air CFM. k. Supply air temperature reset. l. Return air temp. m. Return air humidity. n. Return air CFM. o. Mixed air temp. p. Mixed air damper command. q. Outside air CFM. r. Outside air minimum CFM set point. s. Filter status. t. Return air CO2 monitoring (where applicable). u. Room occupancy sensor (where applicable). v. Hot water valve command/position. w. Chilled water valve command/position. Kitchen Make-up Air Unit: a. Unit enable/disable. b. Fan status. c. Fan enable/disable. d. Fan Speed Control. e. Unoccupied set point. f. Kitchen hood exhaust fan interlock. g. Return air and outside air damper position command. h. Gas furnace staging command. Fancoil Units: a. Room temperature. b. Room temperature set point. c. Occupied set point. d. Unoccupied set point. e. Chilled/hot water valve command/position. Exhaust Fans: a. Exhaust fan enable/disable. b. Exhaust fan status. Unit heaters/Cabinet unit heaters: a. Room temperature. b. Room set point. c. Heating valve command. Fintube Radiation and Convectors: a. Room temp. b. Room set point. c. Heating valve command. Radiant Panels: a. Room temp. b. Room set point. c. Heating valve command. Hot Water Heater a. Setpoint temperature. b. Operational status (on/off) Acid Neutralization System a. System failure alarm. b. High Level Alarm. IDF/MDF Ductless Split Fancoil Units a. High temperature alarm. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 124 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

16.

AA.

2.52

b. DFC failure alarm. Global Points: a. Outdoor air temp. (DB/WB) b. Outdoor air humidity. (Rh)

Hard Wired Alarms 1. The following hard wired alarms shall be provided by the ATC sub-contractor, which shall include a relay output (through a contact closure) and wiring to the MDF room with 30’ coiled and labeled at the backer board for connection to the system: a. Boiler failure alarm. b. ACC-1 failure alarm. c. ACC-2 failure alarm. d. Hot water pump failure alarm. e. Chilled water pump failure alarm. f. Building high and low temperature alarm via thermostat monitoring. 2. The access control contractor will take the coiled wire, attach it and program it into the system.

HOISTING MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT A.

All hoisting equipment, rigging equipment, crane services and lift machinery required for the work by this Filed Subcontractor shall be furnished, installed, operated and maintained in safe conditions by this Filed Subcontractor, as referenced under Section 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1

3.2

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A.

All materials installed in this work shall be new, unless noted for re-use, without damaged functional or aesthetic components. All equipment finished shall be touched up with matching finishes where slight scratches occur. Equipment or material subject to severe deterioration shall be completely refinished or replaced as directed by the Architect.

B.

All labor utilized in the installation of work shall be experienced in the respective trade required. The installation of exposed finished materials shall be neatly done flush, straight and/or plumb, without distortion, meeting the building finished surfaces.

C.

All HVAC materials and equipment shall conform to the Standards listed within this Section of the Specifications and wherever such standards have been established, items shall bear its respective label.

D.

Where labor to be furnished must meet specific Code requirements, only individuals certified to do such shall be used.

E.

All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations with adequate clearance for access for maintenance.

COORDINATION A.

This Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades and to the General Contractor and shall furnish any information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. If this Contractor installs his work before coordinating with other trades, he shall make the necessary changes in his HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 125 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

work to correct the condition, without extra charge. In areas, if due to construction conditions, more than one trade is required to use common openings in beams, and conduits, this Contractor must plan and locate the positions of the items of piping, ducts, and conduits, which are under the scope of his Contract with that of items under the scope of other Contractors, in order that all items are properly located and may be accommodated within the space available. Location and positioning shall be done prior to installation and to the satisfaction of the Architect and/or Engineer.

3.3

B.

This Contractor shall obtain detailed printed information from the manufacturer of equipment which he is to provide for the proper methods of installation. He shall also obtain all information from the General Contractor and other Contractors which may be necessary to facilitate his work and the completion of the whole project. All equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

C.

The work to be accomplished under this Section includes work within existing areas adjacent to the site of new construction. Continuity of services within existing areas shall be maintained. Any interruption of services necessary to accomplish the work shall be made only with the consent of the General Contractor and at such time(s) as the Owner designates.

D.

This Contractor shall not unnecessarily disturb or interfere with the Owner's use of the facilities associated with or adjacent to this Contract. When interference is necessary, permission shall be obtained from the General Contractor before any operation or service line is disturbed or disconnected.

E.

This Contractor shall include under coordination work the installation of all systems in conformance with governing codes. This Contractor is advised that no piping, ducts or equipment foreign to the electrical equipment shall be permitted to be installed in, enter or pass through such spaces or rooms provided for switchboards and panelboards in accordance with Article 384 of the National Electrical Code.

F.

Diffusers, grilles and registers located in the ceiling shall be located as shown on the Architectural Reflected Ceiling Plan and coordinated with ceiling grid, lights, and speakers. Items shown on the HVAC Drawings, but not located on the Reflected Ceiling Plan shall be coordinated to be located as indicated on the HVAC Drawings.

COORDINATION DRAWINGS A.

Coordination Drawings shall be initiated under this Section of the Specifications. It is this Contractor's responsibility for preparation of project Coordination Drawings showing the installation of all equipment, piping, ducts and accessories to be provided under this Section of the Specifications. These Drawings shall be prepared at not less than 3/8 inch = 1'0" scale and shall show building room layouts, structural elements, ceiling grid, diffusers, registers, grilles, ductwork and lighting layouts out of function. A reproducible copy of each Drawing prepared shall then be submitted to each Contractor working under the Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Sections of this Specification, who shall be responsible to coordinate their equipment and systems and shall show these on the Drawings submitted. After each Trade Contractor has fulfilled their obligations, they shall return the Drawings to the HVAC Contractor. After each Drawing has been coordinated between trades, each trade shall sign each Drawing indicating acceptance of the installation condition. This Contractor shall then print the coordination original, and these prints shall be submitted, through the General Contractor to the Architect, for review and comment, similar to Shop Drawings. Comments made on these Drawings shall result in a correction and resubmittal of the Drawings. A master small scale Drawing of the entire building shall be initially prepared showing all areas involved and the Drawing numbers HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 126 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

covering each area. 3.4

3.5

PROTECTION AND CLEAN UP A.

This Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance and protection of all materials and equipment furnished by him during the construction period from loss, damage or deterioration until final acceptance by the Owner. All materials and equipment on the job site shall be stored and protected from the weather. All piping and equipment openings shall be temporarily closed during construction to prevent obstruction and damage.

B.

All equipment with damaged finished surfaces shall be cleaned and repainted with the same paints as were factory applied.

C.

Clean-Up: Keep the job site free from the accumulation of waste materials and rubbish daily. At completion of the work, remove all rubbish, construction equipment and surplus materials from the site and leave the premises in a clean condition

OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.

3.6

This Contractor shall provide four (4) complete sets of operating and maintenance manuals to the Owner prior to the operating instruction period. Maintenance manuals shall be submitted for approval. The receipt of approved maintenance manuals by the Owner shall be a prerequisite to system acceptance. Each manual shall include the following: 1. A complete set of Shop Drawings arranged in accordance with their appearance in the Specifications. Drawings shall be folded and included in envelopes and bound into the manual. 2. A complete set of operational and servicing instructions for each piece of equipment, bound into the manual adjacent to the corresponding Shop Drawing. 3. A complete listing of all equipment suppliers, together with local agent's names, addresses and telephone numbers. 4. A complete set of valve listings. 5. Copies of all service contracts provided for the guarantee period. 6. Copies of all equipment and system warranties.

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A.

This Contractor shall provide competent representatives of his firm and also qualified representatives for his major equipment to instruct Owner-designated personnel on the start-up, operation, shut-down and servicing of all equipment and systems furnished and installed under this Section. No less than ten (10) days’ notice shall be given to the Owner for the beginning of the instruction period to permit scheduling of Owner personnel. The instruction period shall be a prerequisite to system acceptance. This contractor shall coordinate this requirement with the Commissioning Agent. Refer to specification section 019100 for additional requirements.

B.

Training of the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s representatives. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s Representatives after submission and approval of formal training plans. Refer to Commissioning Specifications, Section 019100 for contractor training requirements. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 127 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

C.

3.7

At the conclusion of the operating instructions, this Contractor shall have the Owner's personnel sign-off stating they have received the required instruction. Separate statements shall be required for each piece of equipment and system. These statements shall include date, names of Owner's representative, name of instructor, and brief description of equipment or system.

SYSTEM START-UP AND OPERATION A.

This Contractor shall provide all labor and materials and services necessary for the initial start-up and operation of all systems and equipment furnished and installed under this Section of the Specifications.

B.

This Contractor shall provide the services of qualified factory representatives for all major equipment pre-start set-up, start-up and initial operation. Such periods shall be sufficient to insure proper operation of systems and equipment.

C.

This Contractor shall check all equipment during the initial start-up to insure correct rotation, proper lubrication, adequate fluid flows, non-overloading electrical characteristics, proper alignment and minimal vibration. Systems shall be checked for air and/or steam and/or water flows throughout without blockages. Rooftop air handling units shall be checked for proper damper connections and positions aligned and adjusted belt drives, proper lubrication, temporary air filters installed, non-excessive electrical characteristics and minimal vibration. Miscellaneous equipment shall be started and operated as described above, as applicable. This Contractor shall prepare and submit monthly start-up and status reports for all equipment and systems as indicated on the schedules. Initial form of this report shall be submitted for review with the initial submittals. Upon closing in of the structure or upon first equipment start-up, the report filing shall be started. One copy of this report shall be submitted to the Testing and Balancing Contractor for his record purposes. Submittal of these reports is a prerequisite for processing and evaluating requisitions. 1. Contractors’ tests shall be scheduled and documented in accordance with the commissioning requirements. Refer to Commissioning Specifications, Section 019100 for additional requirements. 2. System verification testing is part f the commissioning process. Verification testing shall be performed by the contractor and witnessed and documented by the Commissioning Agent. Refer to Commissioning Specification Section 019100 for system verification tests and commissioning requirements.

D.

During operation of systems, qualified licensed personnel shall be provided and designated for maintenance of the equipment and systems in good running order. Items such as strainer cleanout, bearing lubrication, packing replacement and other consumables shall be provided without cost to the Owner. Failure of equipment during this period due to lack of proper supervision is the responsibility of this Contractor, and continued failures shall be grounds for the Owner to provide such services with backcharges to this Contractor.

E.

Prior to building flush out, all filters installed within all air handling equipment shall be replaced with filters having minimum rating of MERV 13 unless such equipment was specified with filters having a higher rating. Air handling equipment shall include but not be limited to air handling units, rooftop units, energy recovery units, make-up air units, fancoil units and classroom unit ventilators. Upon completion of building flush out, all filters installed within all air handling equipment shall be replaced with filters having minimum rating of MERV 13 unless such equipment was specified with filters having a HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 128 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

higher rating. F. 3.8

Coordinate all start-up, operation, and testing activities with the Project Manager, General Contractor and the Commissioning Agent per specification section 019110.

SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION A.

General: 1. All equipment, ductwork and piping furnished under this Section shall be marked for ease of identification in accordance with ANSI A13.1-1981 Standard or as indicated below by this Contractor. 2. Marking shall be done using painted stenciling applied to clean, smooth surfaces. 3. Lettering type and size shall be in accordance with paragraph 3.4 and Table 3 of ANSI Standard, with sharply contrasted background for ease of identification. Duct labeling shall not be less than 3 inches in height. Colors shall be in accordance with paragraph 3.2 and Table 2 of the ANSI Standard.

B.

Equipment: 1. Equipment markings shall be prominently painted on each normally visible side of equipment. Equipment intended for installation in finished areas shall have markings located behind normally used access panels mounted so as to be readily found. 2. Equipment identification designations shall be taken from equipment schedules as indicated on the Drawings. 3. All rooftop air handling units, energy recovery units and make-up air units shall be numbered on at least two (2) sides in 4” to 6” letters of contrasting color. Number shall be associated with the street or occupancy address preceding the HVAC unit number (example, 23-1). LED or keyed remote test switch shall be labeled with device number information corresponding to rooftop designation. Where rooftop units with duct smoke detectors are above a suspended ceiling, the tile grid shall be marked with a red dot if an LED is not present.

C.

Piping: 1. Piping marking, except as noted below, shall be prominently painted on all piping concealed and exposed to view, at entries to shafts and at all valving. Marking spacing shall be every 20 feet and at all changes in direction. 2. Piping markings shall indicate direction of flow with piping designation taken from piping legend indicated on Drawings. 3. In lieu of painting pipe marking for outside diameters of no less than 3/4 inches but less than 6 inches labeling shall be on semi-rigid plastic which shall be wrapped entirely around the item being identified and attached to itself to form a non-removable band. 4. In lieu of painting pipe marking for outside diameters of 6 inches or greater, springs or metal bands secured to the corners at each end of the semi-rigid plastic marker so as to hold each end of the marker firmly against the pipe may be utilized. 5. In lieu of painting, for outside diameters less than 3/4 inches, labeling of 1/2 inch high lettering on 1-1/2 inch minimum diameter tags shall be attached so as direction of flow arrows will indicate proper flow direction when tag is being read.

D.

Ductwork: 1. Ductwork marking shall be prominently painted on all ductwork concealed and exposed to view. Marking spacing shall be every 20 feet at all dampers and at all changes in direction. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 129 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. 3.

E.

3.9

Ductwork marking shall indicate direction of air flow with ductwork designation to consist of the equipment designation to which it is connected and indicate either high or low velocity system. Access doors at service openings for fire dampers, smoke dampers and smoke detectors shall be identified with letters no less than 1/2 inch in height to indicate the location of the fire protection device(s) within.

Valve Tags: 1. Valve tags shall be 1-1/2 inch diameter brass with 1/4 inch high lettering for service designation over 1/2 inch high valve number designation and shall be provided for all valving. 2. Two (2) sets of valve lists shall be prepared showing tag numbers, valve locations and valve service. Valve tag numbers shall be marked on Record Drawings. One valve list shall be prepared based on sequenced room numbers of valve locations; one valve list shall be prepared based on valve numbers. One set of lists shall be framed under glass and duplicate list laminated between plastic sheets. 3. One (1) additional copy shall be framed under glass and mounted on the wall in location as designated by the Architect.

SHEET METAL WORK REQUIREMENTS A.

Furnish and install all sheet metal work as herein specified for all air handling systems shown on drawings and/or described in the specifications.

B.

All sheet metal work shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner with ductwork following building lines and in straight lines with smooth transitions and offsets to suit actual installation. Sheet metal work which does not conform to drawings and/or specifications or is poorly done shall be repaired and/or replaced as described by the Architect.

C.

Reference shall be made to the paragraph covering Coordination Drawings for the responsibility in the preparation of same.

D.

Sheet Metal Contractor shall include in his work furnishing and installing volume dampers in accordance with SMACNA requirements; additional dampers in the duct system for the purpose of balancing by the Balancing Contractor, as well as dampers shown on the drawings.

E.

Sheet Metal Contractor include in his work furnishing and installing automatic control, fire, smoke and combination fire/smoke dampers.

F.

Air handling systems shall conform to the following: 1. All sheet metal work required for ductwork casing and plenums of all low pressure air handling systems shall be galvanized steel and shall conform to requirements of sheet metal work. Exceptions to this requirement shall be as specifically listed below or as indicated on the drawings. 2. All sheet metal work required for ductwork, casings and plenums of air handling system with scheduled total static pressure equal to or greater than 3 inches shall conform to the requirements for the static pressure scheduled. This construction shall apply from the outside air and return air dampers at the unit HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 130 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3. 4.

inlet and extend to the system terminal boxes. Sheet metal supply and return ductwork for the surgery areas from the terminal boxes to the supply diffuser (including plenum) and from the exhaust registers for 10 feet shall be aluminum. Sheet metal exhaust ductwork for lab exhaust and all other fumehoods shall be 316 stainless steel. All joints and seams shall be welded to provide a continuous seal.

G.

All casings and plenums shall be provided with 54 inch high, 20 inch wide access doors, except where larger door is required for equipment replacement, or when casing or plenum will not accommodate this size door. When alternate door of larger size is required, it shall be sized to meet requirements of equipment being served. For doors smaller than 54” x 20” the largest following door size which can be accommodated shall be provided: 48” x 20”; 36” x 18”; 24” x 18”; 18” x 18”; 18” x 12”; or 12” x 22”. In all cases the bottom of the door opening shall be a minimum of 6 inches above the plenum’s bottom.

H.

Two-piece streamliner shall be furnished and installed at no additional cost to the Owner around each conduit, beam or other obstruction passing through ductwork. Obstructions in ductwork shall be allowed only when offsets around ducts are not possible and shall be indicated on Coordination Drawing.

I.

Sealants: All seams in sheet metal work shall be permanently sealed airtight by the use of appropriate mastic compounds. Joints between dissimilar materials shall be provided with lead gaskets. Louver plenums shall be provided with lead gaskets. Louver plenums shall have all bottom seams and side seams up to distance of 12 inches sealed using solder.

J.

Duct Liners: Where ducts indicated on drawings or specified are to be lined, such lining shall conform to the requirements specified under Acoustic Liner indicated in Paragraph “Sheet Metal Work”. Duct sizes indicated on the drawings are nominal internal dimensions and therefore shall be increased accordingly to accommodate duct lining.

K.

The Sheet Metal Contractor shall install all duct mounted smoke detectors, heat detectors and other devices furnished by the Electrical Contractor for mounting in the ductwork or air handling equipment.

L.

Fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Fire dampers shall be capable of maintaining the integrity of the required fire-resistance rating and shall be accessible. Where ductwork is rearranged to facilitate coordination or installation, the fire dampers shall be provided at locations where air distribution systems penetrate assemblies required to have a fire-resistance rating. 1. Exception when approved by the Architect and Engineer are as follows: 2. When proper fire tests have shown that fire dampers are not necessary to maintain the integrity of the fire-resistance rated assembly. 3. Sub-ducts extending 22 inches vertically upward may be used in lieu of fire dampers for exhaust ducts penetrating a fire-resistance rated shaft wall. 4. Penetrations of tenant separation and corridor walls in buildings equipped throughout with an approved automatic fire suppression system. 5. When the ducts are constructed of steel and are part of an engineered smoke removal system. 6. Penetrations of corridor walls when the ducts are constructed of steel and do not have openings which communicate the corridor with adjacent spaces or rooms. 7. Penetrations of a roof assembly when ducts are open to the atmosphere. 8. Hazardous exhaust systems as defined in the Mechanical Code.

M.

All prefabricated duct sections shall be cleaned prior to storage on the site and be HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 131 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

provided with protective covering on all openings to maintain the interior of the ductwork clean and free of dust and other materials prior to installation. Field assembled duct sections shall be cleaned during assembly and similarly protected until installation.

3.10

N.

Blank off all portions of louvered openings not required for ventilation systems.

O.

Access doors shall be provided adjacent to each fire damper, smoke damper, combination fire/smoke damper, and smoke detector. The access opening shall be large enough to permit inspection, maintenance and resetting of the device. Where the size of the duct permits, the minimum size door should be 18 inches x 16 inches.

P.

Testing for ductwork shall be performed for all duct systems specified to be constructed to a static pressure class of 4” w.g. or greater and to all stainless steel exhaust systems serving laboratory hoods or other systems designed to convey hazardous fumes or materials. The leakage class shall be in accordance with Table 4-1 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, First Edition 1985.

R.

The Sheet Metal Contractor shall install automatic control dampers furnished by the Automatic Temperature Control System manufacturer and shall include all safing and/or duct transitions to complete damper installation.

PIPING SYSTEM INSTALLATION A.

Installation of Pipe, Fittings and Valves: 1. Furnish and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. 2. Keep pipes close to walls, partitions and ceilings; offset only where necessary to follow walls, as indicated. 3. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space them at distances to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. 4. Piping shall be accurately cut to measurements established in the field and worked into place without springing or forcing. All piping shall be assembled using standard manufacturer’s screwed or welded fittings. Where standard fittings are not available for branch connections, use “Threadolets” or “Weldolets” as appropriate to suit pipe sizes, neatly cut and welded into the line. 5. All piping shall be reamed to be free of burrs. 6. Keep pipe free from scale and dirt; protect open pipe ends whenever work is suspended during construction to prevent foreign bodies entering and lodging there. Use temporary plug or other approved material for protection. 7. Use all long radius ells on welded piping. 8. Provide bypass line with globe valve with isolation valves to provide bypass around all control valves which serve air handler coils and other central system equipment. Bypass valves are not required for terminal units, radiation, fancoils, cabinet heaters, unit heaters and similar equipment served from a central system. Bypass valve size shall be a minimum of one-half the supply line size. 9. Prior to installation of any piping, submit shop drawings indicating location of all pipes larger than 2 inches in diameter. Piping may be shown on Coordination Drawings in lieu of shop drawings. 10. Provide cap and chain for 3/4 inch hose connection for all drain valves.

B.

Installation for Chilled Water and Hot Water Systems: 1. Pitch all piping in direction of flow. 2. Automatic vent valves shall be installed in the piping systems, where indicated on the drawings or all high points of any piping system. 3. Drain valves shall be located at the base of all low points in the piping systems HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 132 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4. 5.

and at all water connections to associated equipment and pumps. Drain valves shall be 3/4 inch gate valves with 3/4 inch drain hose threaded adapters. Provide blow-down line with ball valve on each strainer with cap and chain. Provide pressure relief valve and piping to allow bypass of discharge from each pump back to pump inlet where pump shut off head exceeds the maximum rated working pressure of any pipe segment, fitting, valve, or other device. Relief valve shall be sized to recirculate adequate flow to maintain system pressure below the rated working pressure. When provided, the bypass piping shall be connected between the pump and isolation valves.

C.

DX Systems: 1. Charging of refrigerant piping shall be done subsequent to pressure testing. 2. Evacuate system to 2.5 mm of mercury and hold vacuum for eight (8) hours and then break vacuum with dry nitrogen. Re-evacuate piping to 2.5 mm and break vacuum with refrigerant charge. 3. Pipe sizing, where indicated on drawings, are the sizes estimated for specific manufacturer’s equipment and anticipated piping installation. a. The Contractor shall provide piping sized for actual piping installation requirements for the field installation conditions in accordance with the system equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. All refrigerant systems which require field piping shall include a filter-dryer, moisture indicator, liquid line sightglass, refrigerant charging connections and solenoid valves. Devices not furnished with the refrigeration equipment shall be provided by this Contractor.

D.

Installation of Unions: 1. Provide unions, screwed or flanged, in the following locations: a. In long runs of piping to permit convenient disassembly for alterations or repairs. Provide unions in all trench piping located every 20 feet and at all connections in branch and mains leaving the trench. b. In bypass around equipment. c. In connections to traps, tanks, pumps, and other equipment.

E.

Installation of Valves: 1. Provide shut-off valves where indicated and in the following locations: a. Risers and main branches at points of take-off from their supply or return mains. Valves shall be arranged so that piping mains for the building and for each floor can remain in service while branch line piping is out of service. Balancing valves suitable for shut-off service shall be used in returned piping. b. Individual equipment, control valves, strainers, traps and other piping systems devices at inlet and outlet to permit unit removal for repairs without interfering with remainder of system. 2. Locate valves for easy access and operation. 3. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. 4. Provide balancing valve at outlet of each equipment connection. In water piping systems, locate balancing valve as shown on drawings where piping details are provided.

F.

Pipe Welding: Welding backing rings shall be used at each pipe weld. All pipe welders shall be tested and qualified under the National Certified Pipe Welders Bureau. Welders for high pressure steam shall be certified for ASME Code welding.

G.

Expansion: 1. Provide for taking up expansion in hot water, steam, condenser water and chilled water by means of loops, offsets, guides and anchors, where indicated and/or HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 133 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3.

3.11

3.12

required. Use swing or swivel joints for connections from mains to risers and from risers to radiators, unit heaters and other heating units; use at least five (5) fittings from main to riser, including tee in main; use at least four (4) fittings from riser to radiator or unit heater, including tee in riser. When installing expansion loops, they may be cold sprung. Cold springing shall compensate for approximately half of the total expansion.

H.

Drains: All coiling coils shall have drip pans, trapped and condensation discharge piped to nearest suitable receptor except as noted otherwise. All traps shall be located inside to prevent freezing. Trap seals shall be appropriate for respective units scheduled pressure differential plus 50 percent on coils downstream of fans, and a minimum 3 inches for coils upstream of fans.

I.

Gas Piping: This Contractor shall provide for piping all vent lines to outdoors for the specific type of pressure reducing valves or other gas train devices requiring venting to outdoors under the Gas Codes.

J.

Intake and exhaust plenums not detailed to have through-louver drainage shall have a 1 inch drain connection with a serviceable 3 inch deep trap provided within a heated space to prevent freezing and piped to the nearest floor drain or janitor sink. Bottom of plenum shall pitch toward drainage opening. Drain lines indicated on the drawings to terminate through the wall to outdoors shall not be required to include a trap.

PIPING SYSTEM FLUSHING AND CLEANING A.

This Contractor shall make temporary connections and required adjustments to the piping system for the purpose of cleaning and flushing.

B.

Steam and return piping shall be blown out by operating steam with all returns run to waste until the system is thoroughly cleaned out. During the above period, all strainer and thermostatic trap interiors shall be removed and strainers and traps cleaned, together with dirt pockets. The system shall be left free from oil, scale and dirt. The strainer and trap interiors shall be replaced after the system has been cleaned.

C.

Hot water and chilled water lines shall be chemically cleaned by circulating water solution for not less than four (4) hours, flushed out and cleaned with water run to waste. All strainers shall be removed, cleaned and replaced. All equipment such as pumps, coils and heat exchangers shall be checked to insure all foreign material has been eliminated. This Contractor shall submit chemical cleaning treatment and method to the Architect for approval.

D.

Compressed air lines shall be blown out using compressed air. All filters and instruments shall be removed from system during this flushing and then replaced.

E.

Chemical treatment required for cleaning shall be provided a specified under “Chemical Treatment”.

PIPING SYSTEM PRESSURE TESTS A.

All piping systems furnished and installed under this section shall be pressure and/or vacuum tested prior to being buried, concealed, and/or insulated. This Contractor shall make all necessary temporary connections and gauges required and shall isolate all equipment which may be damaged by testing procedures. This Contractor shall notify HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 134 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Architect in writing of his testing schedule to permit observation of procedures. Tests shall be initiated only after testing medium has reached ambient temperatures. Systems which fail testing shall be repaired in a manner approved by the Architect and testing repeated. Testing of sections of extensive systems are permitted. Written summary of all testing shall be submitted upon completion of testing indicating system, date of test, testing medium, initial and final pressures and temperatures, repair procedures and supervisor’s name. B.

The following systems shall be tested as indicated:

SYSTEM

TEST MEDIUM

Hot Water S&R (All) Chilled Water S&R Make-Up Water Chemical Feed Refrigerant Refrigerant Note 1: Note 2: Note 3: Note 4:

3.13

TIME PERIOD HOURS 4

ALLOWED DEVIATION PERCENT 0

NOTES

Water

TEST PRESSURE PSIG 100

Water Water Air Nitrogen Vacuum

100 90 350 250 29.5” Hg

4 4 4 4 4

0 0 -5 -5 -5

1 1 1 3 3

1

Water shall be clean, clear liquid. Compressed air shall be oil-free. Dry nitrogen shall be used for pressure test followed by vacuum test. Introduce refrigerant into piping to break vacuum. Water shall be plant demineralized water.

C.

For testing of piping systems exposed to low ambient conditions, this Contractor shall assume responsibility of taking suitable precautions to prevent freezing within piping systems.

D.

Fuel oil systems shall be tested in accordance with requirements of applicable requirements of NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 and in accordance with all governing code requirements

INSULATION APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A.

Insulation materials shall be installed in accordance with the applicable insulation classes for piping, ductwork and equipment.

B.

Insulation shall be applied in a workmanlike manner so as to provide a neat and smooth surface, suitable for painting. Work and/or material that is poorly done or done in a manner not conforming to the specifications and/or drawings shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Architect.

C.

Insulation shall not be applied to piping and related equipment until the completion of pressure testing. Insulation shall not be applied to ductwork and related equipment until air systems have been sealed and/or pressure tested.

D.

Sections of piping and equipment may be covered as the work progresses, provided the above requirements have been met for pressure testing and tightness.

E.

All piping and equipment to be covered shall be clean and dry prior to the application of insulation. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 135 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

F.

Insulation shall not be applied when ambient temperatures within the space are below 40 degrees F.

G.

Piping and duct insulation shall be carried full thickness through all floor and wall openings, except when installed through sleeves through fire-rated construction, insulation shall be discontinued at the penetration and replaced with caulking material specified for sleeves.

H.

All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted.

I.

All voids and/or seams in insulation shall be filled with insulating cement plaster or insulating cement.

J.

All insulation ends shall be finished to a 45 degree level with insulation cement troweled to a neat and smooth finish.

K.

Equipment nameplates, pressure vessel code labels and equipment access doors shall be left exposed with insulation edges finished as described in Paragraph J. above.

L.

Piping installed outdoors with the exception of underground conduit and condenser water piping shall be furnished with layers of insulation of equal thicknesses with the total thickness twice that specified in insulation thickness schedule. The double layer insulation shall be installed so that all seams are staggered. Apply 45 pound roofing felt with 2 inch overlap at joints. All joints to be sealed with asphalt. Wire jacket in place with 16 gauge copper annealed wire on 9 inch centers.

M.

Under no circumstances shall pneumatic control tubing be covered with insulation.

N.

When installation thickness specified exceeds that provided as manufacturer’s standard, then multiple layered material shall be used to achieve specified thickness.

O.

Any piping, ductwork or equipment which may convey a fluid gas or air below 75 degrees F. at any time in its normal operation shall be provided with insulation with an external vapor barrier except where explicitly indicated otherwise.

P.

Where specified under Pipe Hangers, Supports and Hangers, insulated chilled water, cold make-up water or refrigerant suction lines shall have calcium silicate used at all points of support. Calcium silicate sections shall be of the same thickness as the adjacent insulation with vapor barriers continued unbroken through the support section. Support sections shall be three times the pipe diameter in length or not less than 12 inches nor more than 24 inches. 14 gauge galvanized sheet metal saddles the same length and diameter as the calcium silicate section and covering not less than 120 degrees of arc shall be provided at support points.

Q.

Insulated hot water lines shall be provided with welded pipe saddles at all support points. Saddles shall fit the insulation outside diameter with insulation filling the void between pipe and saddle.

R.

All chilled water, cold make-up water or other piping insulation with vapor barriers shall not be stapled. Sections of insulation which are stapled shall be removed and replaced with new material as specified. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 136 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.14

S.

Insulation for piping and equipment shall be provided with wire or band supports to prevent sagging and cracking of finished surface or vapor barrier. Supports shall be applied in accordance with insulation manufacturer’s recommendations. Supports shall generally be located beneath finish jacketing.

T.

Valves which are specified to be insulated shall be covered to top of bonnets.

U.

Insulation for piping systems shall be provided up to coil connections and the exterior casing, including tube returns or manifolds external to casing shall also be insulated except where noted otherwise.

V.

Engine exhaust pipes, fittings, and silencers shall be covered with 4 inch calcium silicate insulation. Insulation shall be applied in two (2) layers with staggered joints. Secure insulation in place with heavy gauge stainless steel bands. Seal all seams and joints in each layer with high temperature cement. Cover insulation with reinforced glass fiber cloth.

W.

All unlined supply and return ductwork located outdoors shall have a minimum thickness of 2 inches of rigid board insulation and an aluminum weatherproof cover applied over the vapor barrier.

SYSTEM BALANCING A.

This Contractor, as part of his contract, shall obtain the services of a testing and balancing agency that specializes in this type of work, to perform the work required under this section. 1. The testing and balancing agency selected shall not have installed, fabricated or engineered any part of the system that the testing and balancing work shall be performed on, so as to prevent any conflict of interest. This shall include but not be limited to drilling and patching holes, taking apart and re-assembling equipment, removing and replacing fan guards, removing and replacing control box covers, and changing belts and sheaves. 2. In addition, the selected company shall not be a subsidiary of or be associated with persons having financial interests in the accessories, ductwork, and controls, undergoing these tests so that the Owner will receive a completely unbiased test and balance report upon completion of the work. 3. Additionally, the testing and balancing agency shall complete no work on the HVAC systems, where such work involves the installation or modification to the HVAC systems. Such work is solely assigned to the HVAC sub-contractor and their employees. Note that it is the intention of the paragraphs herein to assign full responsibility for labor, tools, corrections, installation of balancing dampers, installation or test openings, pullet changes, belt changes, and all other “work”, which involves modifications or corrections to the HVAC system to HVAC subcontractor. Where the testing and balancing agent is assigned “work” herein, such work shall be limited to testing, reporting, and providing sufficient information to the HVAC sub-contractor such that they can make necessary modifications or corrections for proper system operation.

B.

The selected testing and balancing agency shall be a certified member of the AABC or the NEBB. Minimum criteria for this project shall be the General Membership Standards of the Associated Air Balance Council, as published nationally in AABC NSFMI Volume One, #81266 or as otherwise noted herein.

C.

All work performed by the approved agency shall be done in full accordance with minimum standards as set forth in AABC National Standards, Fourth Edition (1982) and HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 137 Design Development / 12.2.15

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Beverly Middle School ASHRAE Systems Manual (1984). In addition, vibration readings shall be taken on all rotating equipment in this section and recorded in mills of deflection.

D.

Submittals: 1. The TAB Agency shall submit a company resume listing personnel and project experience in air and hydronic system balancing and a copy of the agency’s Test and Balance Engineer (TBE) certificate. 2. The TAB Agency shall submit the TAB procedures and agenda proposed to be used. 3. The TAB Agency shall submit sample forms, which shall include the minimum data required by the AABC National Standards.

E.

This Contractor shall cooperate with the test and balance agency in the following manner: 1. Provide sufficient time before final acceptance data so that tests and balancing can be accomplished and reviewed. 2. Provide immediate labor and tools to make corrections when required without undue delay. Install balancing dampers where required by the test and balance agency. 3. Put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems and equipment into full operation and shall continue the operation of same during each working day of testing and balancing. 4. The testing and balancing agency shall be kept informed of any major changes made to the system during construction, and shall be provided with four (4) complete sets of Construction and Coordination drawings, one (1) set of which shall be turned over to the Owner with ductwork systems differentiated by coloring each system’s ductwork in a distinguishing color and diffusers, registers and grilles identified with a number corresponding with the respective item on the balancing report. 5. Include the costs of test openings, dampers, pulley and belt changes in his contract.

F.

The test and balance agency shall test and balance all air handling systems and equipment and shall also test and balance all hot water and make-up water systems. All systems shall be adjusted so that they achieve within 10 percent of design quantities, except over-all pressure relationship shall be maintained. 1. Where provided, air flow measuring devices shall be utilized to balance air system. Accuracy also shall be verified by the balancing agency. 2. Final adjustments to each variable volume and constant volume box shall be provided by the balancing agency. 3. Where combination balancing valve and flow measuring devices, or flow devices, are indicated, the balancing agency shall utilize them for balancing the water system.

G.

The items requiring testing, adjusting and balancing include the following: 1. Air Systems: a. Supply Fan AHU’s b. Return Fans c. Exhaust Fans d. Zone Branch and Main Ducts e. VAV Systems f. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles g. Coils (Air Temperature) h. Induction Units HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 138 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

Hydronic Systems: a. Pumps b. System Mains and Branches c. Boilers d. Coils

H.

TAB Preparation and Coordination: 1. Shop drawings, submittal data, up-to-date revisions, change orders, and other data required for planning, preparation, and execution of the TAB work shall be provided to the TAB agency no later than 30 days prior to start of TAB work. 2. System installation and equipment start-up shall be complete prior to the TAB agency’s being notified to begin. 3. The building control system shall be complete and operational. The Building Control System Contractor shall install all necessary computers and computer programs, and make these operational. Assistance shall be provided for reprogramming, coordination, and problem resolution. 4. All test points, balancing devices, and identification tags shall be accessible and clear of insulation and other obstructions that would impede TAB procedures. 5. Qualified installation or start-up personnel shall be readily available for the operation and adjustment of the systems. Assistance shall be provided for coordination and problem resolution.

I.

Reports: 1. The TAB agency shall submit the final TAB report for review by the Engineer. All outlets, devices, and HVAC equipment shall be identified, along with a numbering system corresponding to report unit identification. The TAB agency shall submit an AABC “National Project Performance Guaranty” assuring that the project systems were tested, adjusted and balanced in accordance with the project specifications and AABC National Standards. 2. Submit four (4) copies of the final TAB Report.

J.

Deficiencies: 1. Any deficiencies in the installation or performance of a system or component observed by the TAB agency shall be brought to the attention of the appropriate responsible person. 2. The work necessary to correct items on the deficiency listing shall be performed and verified by the affected contractor before the TAB agency returns to retest. Unresolved deficiencies shall be noted in the final report. 3. System balance reports which, upon field inspection of the systems, are found to be erroneous, shall have the questioned systems corrected by the test and balance agency until a proper balance is achieved. Such correction work shall be done at no cost to the Owner. Balancing Contractor shall field verify balancing settings and measurements as randomly selected by the Architect.

K.

All instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibrated. Calibration and maintenance of all instruments shall be in accordance with the requirements of AABC National Standards.

L.

The specified systems shall be reviewed and inspected for conformance to design documents. Testing, adjusting and balancing on each identified system shall be performed. The accuracy of measurements shall be in accordance with AABC National Standards. Adjustment tolerances shall be + or – 10% unless otherwise stated. 1. Equipment settings, including manual damper quadrant positions, manual valve indicators, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices shall be HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 139 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

M.

marked to show final settings. All information necessary to complete a proper TAB project and report shall be per AABC Standards unless otherwise noted. The descriptions for work required, as listed in this section, are a guide to the minimum information needed.

Air Systems: 1. The TAB agency shall verify that all ductwork, dampers, grilles, registers and diffusers have been installed per design and set in the full open position. The TAB agency shall perform the following TAB procedures in accordance with the AABC National Standards. 2. For Supply Fans: a. Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve maximum or design CFM. b. Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure fan motor is not in or above the service factor. c. Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of main supply and return ducts, as applicable to obtain total CFM. d. Test and adjust the outside air on applicable equipment using a pitottube traverse. If a traverse is not practical use the mixed air temperature method if the inside and outside temperature difference is at least 20 degrees F. or use the difference between pitot-tube traverses of the supply and return air ducts. e. Test and record system static profile of each supply fan. 3. For Return Fans: a. Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve maximum or design CFM. b. Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure fan motor is not in or above the service factor. c. Perform a pitot-tube traverse of the main return ducts to obtain total CFM. d. Test and record system static profile of each return fan. 4. For Exhaust Fans: a. Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve maximum or design CFM. b. Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure motor is not in or above the service factor. c. Perform a pitot-tube traverse of main exhaust ducts to obtain total CFM. d. Test and record system static profile of each exhaust fan. 5. The Balancing Contractor shall make all necessary tests and measurements and provide information to provide for replacement of adjustable sheaves utilized for initial balancing with optimum sized fixed sheave and select optimum replacement sheave sizes for existing equipment fan drives for systems indicated to be modified. All adjustable sheaves replaced shall be tagged to indicate which unit it was on and turned over to the Owner. 6. For Zone, Branch and Main Ducts: a. Adjust ducts to within design CFM requirements. As applicable, at least one zone balancing damper shall be completely open. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completely open. 7. For VAV Systems: a. Set volume regulators on all terminal boxes to meet design maximum and minimum CFM requirements. b. Identify the type, location, and size of each terminal box. This information shall be recorded on terminal box data sheets. HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 140 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

8.

9.

10.

N.

For Diffusers, Registers and Grilles: a. Test, adjust and balance each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design requirements. Minimize drafts. b. Identify the type, location, and size of each grille, diffuser and register. This information shall be recorded on air outlet data sheets. For Coils: a. Once air flows are set to acceptable limits, take wet bulb and dry bulb air temperatures on the entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering and leaving side of each coil. Where air balancing can not be completed due to lack of air flow and the reason for the lack of air flow can not be identified, a static profile shall be performed to identify the reason for loss of adequate air flow.

Hydronic Systems: 1. The TAB agency shall, as applicable, confirm that all hydronic equipment, piping, and coils have been filled and purged; that strainers have been cleaned; and that all balancing valves (except bypass valves) are set full open. The TAB agency shall perform the following testing and balancing functions in accordance with the AABC National Standards. 2. For Pumps: a. Test and adjust hot water pumps to achieve maximum or design GPM. Check pumps for proper operation. Pumps shall be free of vibration and cavitation. Record appropriate gauge readings for final TDH and BlockOff/Dead Head calculations. b. Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate limits to ensure pump motor is not in or above the service factor. 3. For System Mains and Branches: a. Adjust water flow in pipes to achieve maximum or design GPM. 4. For Boilers: a. Verify that boilers have been filled and started by others, and are in operation. b. As applicable, test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplate and limits to ensure motor is not in or above the service factor. c. Test and adjust water flow through water boilers. d. Test and record temperature and pressure profiles of water boilers. 5.

For Coils: a. Test, adjust and balance all chilled water and hot water coils within 10% of design requirements. b. Verify the type, location, final pressure drop and GPM of each coil. This information shall be recorded on coil data sheets.

O.

The TAB agency shall conduct sound testing in the following areas per AABC National Standards and to the criteria listed, using sound meter with octave band analyzer: 1. Test Area Number of Locations NC Level Acceptable General Office 16 30-35 Computer/Equipment Rooms 4 40-45 Schools/Classrooms 16 25-30

P.

The TAB agency shall conduct vibration testing on the following equipment per AABC HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 141 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

National Standards. Test deflection in mils and velocity in inches per second shall be measured and the results compared to requirements in equipment specification sections. 1. EQUIPMENT Fans over 3.0 Horsepower Pumps over 3.0 Horsepower Q.

Indoor Air Quality Verification: 1. The TAB agency shall take measurements at design outside air. It shall measure temperature and humidity uniformity throughout the space, check filter installation for proper fit, seal, and operation and verify condensate drain operation. The TAB agency shall note any water damage or obvious contamination sources from inside or outside. 2. The TAB agency shall conduct the following air sampling tests for every 2,500 square feet of space: a. Carbon Dioxide b. Carbon Monoxide c. Ozone d. Nitrogen Oxides e. Formaldehyde 3. The TAB agency shall prepare a report showing the results, location, time and date of each test. A summary of the HVAC operating conditions, and a listing of any discrepancies shall be provided. 4. All IAQ readings are applicable only to the date and time noted in 3.06C.

R.

The TAB agency shall review the project documents and Contractor submittals for their effect on the TAB process and overall performance of the HVAC system. It shall submit recommendations for enhancements or changes to the system within 30 days of document review.

S.

During construction, the TAB agency shall inspect the installation of pipe systems, sheet metal work, temperature controls, and other component parts of the HVAC systems. Inspections shall be conducted a minimum of two times. (Typically, these are performed when 60% of the total system is installed and again when 90% of the total system is installed, prior to insulation of the duct and piping.) The TAB agency shall submit a written report of each inspection.

T.

The Installing Contractor shall isolate and seal sections of ductwork for testing. The test pressures required and the amount of duct to be tested shall be described by the Engineer in the appropriate duct classification section. All testing shall be based on one test per section only unless otherwise noted.

U.

The TAB agency shall be assisted by the Building Control Systems Contractor in verifying the operation and calibration of all HVAC and temperature control systems. 1. Automatic Temperature Control Contractor shall have all automatic valves adjusted and calibrated prior to balancing. 2. 3. 4.

The Balancing Contractor shall make all necessary tests and measurements and provide information by the Automatic Temperature Control Contractor to select the optimum range of sensing and control devices. Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and are functional, including all electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire and freezestats, and other safety devices. Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 142 Ai3 Architects, LLC /12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

conditions. V.

To verify system control and operation, a series of three temperature tests shall be taken at approximately two hour intervals in each separately controlled zone. The resulting temperatures shall not vary more than two degrees F. from the thermostat or control setpoint during the tests. Outside temperature and humidity shall also be recorded during the testing periods.

W.

At the time of final inspection, the TAB agency may be required to recheck, in the presence of the Owner’s representative, specific or random selections of data recorded in the certified report. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by the Owner’s representative. Measurements and test procedures shall be the same for the initial work for the certified report. Selections for recheck, specific plus random, will not exceed 10% of the total number tabulated in the report.

X.

The TAB agency shall test and adjust fume hood total air flow by duct pitot-tube traverse. If a pitot-tube traverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the appropriate data sheet. Test and record face velocities under design operating conditions using a maximum of a one square foot grid pattern across the entire open face. The TAB agency shall set sash height on hoods to obtain face velocities within 20% of 100 feet per minute unless specified otherwise. It shall test and adjust VAV controllers to obtain design exhaust air flows and make-up air flows to maintain design hood pressures and face velocities, and design room pressurization. The TAB agency shall test for turbulence and proper air flow patterns at the face and inside the hoods using a hand-held smoke puffer or other approved smoke-emitting device.

Y.

The TAB agency shall test and adjust building/zone pressurization by setting the design flows to meet the required flow direction and pressure differential. For positive pressure areas, it shall set the supply air to design flow, and gradually reduce the exhaust air rate to obtain the required flow or pressure difference. For negative pressure areas, it shall set the supply air to design flow, and gradually increase the exhaust air rate to obtain the required flow or pressure difference.

Z.

The TAB agency shall test and record life safety control operation on the HVAC equipment. It shall verify the installation of required smoke detectors in air handling equipment (AHE), and shall verify operation of the smoke detector by activating the smoke detector and observing air handler shut-down. With the controls and alarm contractors, the TAB agency shall verify the operation of interconnected systems such as the AHE smoke detector’s activation of the fire alarm system and the alarm system’s activation of the life safety control sequences. END OF SECTION

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 00 00 - 143 Design Development / 12.2.15

DO NOT REMOVE THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL INDEX PART 1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 1   1.1   GENERAL PROVISIONS ........................................................................................................ 1   1.2   GENERAL REFERENCES ..................................................................................................... 1   1.3   SCOPE OF WORK ................................................................................................................. 1   1.4   RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE ........................................................................ 2   1.5   DEFINITIONS ......................................................................................................................... 2   1.6   EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ................................................... 3   1.7   RECORD DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................ 3   1.8   SHOP DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................. 3   1.9   MOCK-UPS ............................................................................................................................. 4   1.10   CODES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS .............................................................................. 4   1.11   INTENT ................................................................................................................................... 5   1.12   DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................... 5   1.13   GIVING INFORMATION ......................................................................................................... 5   1.14   OBTAINING INFORMATION .................................................................................................. 5   1.15   MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................. 6   1.16   ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ....................................................................................... 6   1.17   TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER ....................................................................................... 6   1.18   OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS .................................................................. 6   1.19   GUARANTEE AND SERVICE ................................................................................................ 7   1.20   DEBRIS REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP .................................................................................... 7   1.21   COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 7   PART 2 PRODUCTS ....................................................................................................................... 7   2.1   NAMEPLATES ........................................................................................................................ 7   2.2   ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARD .............................................................................................. 8   2.3   PANELBOARDS ..................................................................................................................... 9   2.4   PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES AND WIREWAYS ......................................................... 10   2.5   OUTLET BOXES AND ACCESSORIES ............................................................................... 11   2.6   CONDUIT .............................................................................................................................. 11   2.7   WIRE AND CABLE ............................................................................................................... 12   2.8   WIRING DEVICES ................................................................................................................ 13   2.9   WIRING DEVICE PLATES .................................................................................................... 14   2.10   LIGHTING FIXTURES .......................................................................................................... 15   2.11   ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES .............................................................................. 17   2.12   DISCONNECT SWITCHES .................................................................................................. 17   2.13   FUSES .................................................................................................................................. 17   2.14   STARTERS ........................................................................................................................... 20   2.15   THERMAL SWITCHES ......................................................................................................... 21   2.16   ACCESS PANELS ................................................................................................................ 21   2.17   DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS ............................................................................................. 21   2.18   EMERGENCY STANDBY SYSTEM ..................................................................................... 22   2.19   TIME CLOCKS ...................................................................................................................... 29   2.20   FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ......................................................................................................... 30   2.21 PUBLIC SAFETY SIGNAL BOOSTER SYSTEM ................................................................ 46   2.22   ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY ............................................................................ 48   2.23   CABLE TRAY ........................................................................................................................ 48   2.24   SCOREBOARDS .................................................................................................................. 49   2.25   DRY TYPE K-RATED TRANSFORMERS ............................................................................ 51   2.26   LIGHTNING PROTECTION .................................................................................................. 54   ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 1 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.27   COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM ............................................................................................. 57   2.28   ZERO SEQUENCE HARMONIC FILTERS ........................................................................... 57   2.29   LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................................................... 60   2.30   SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD’s) ........................................................................... 75   2.31   THEATRE AND STAGE EQUIPMENT ................................................................................. 81   2.32   SHORT CIRCUIT/COORDINATION/SELECTIVE COORDINATION STUDY ...................... 81   2.33 MINERAL INSULATED METAL SHEATHED CABLE (MI CABLE) .......................................... 83   2.34   FANS (DESTRATIFICATION) ............................................................................................... 86   PART 3   EXECUTION ............................................................................................................... 88   3.1   INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................... 88   3.2   CLEANING, ADJUSTING AND TESTING ............................................................................ 88   3.3   SLEEVES, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS ............................................................................... 89   3.4   EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS ............................................................................................. 89   3.5   MOTOR AND CONTROL WIRING ....................................................................................... 89   3.6   HVAC WIRING ...................................................................................................................... 90   3.7   CONCRETE WORK .............................................................................................................. 90   3.8   GROUNDING ........................................................................................................................ 90   3.9   CONDUIT WORK .................................................................................................................. 91   3.10   WIRE AND CABLE ............................................................................................................... 92   3.11   INSTALLATION OF OUTLETS ............................................................................................. 93   3.12   EXTERNAL TELEPHONE SERVICE .................................................................................... 94   3.13   EXTERNAL CABLE TV SERVICE ........................................................................................ 94   3.14   ELECTRIC SERVICE ............................................................................................................ 94   3.15   UNDERGROUND DUCTBANK ............................................................................................. 95   3.16   FIRE STOPPING .................................................................................................................. 97   3.17   SPECIAL COORDINATION INSTRUCTIONS ...................................................................... 97   END OF SECTION ............................................................................................................... 98  

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 -2

Design Development / 12.2.15

Design Development

Beverly Middle School Ai3 Architects, LLC

SECTION 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL (Filed Sub-Bid Required as Part of Section 26 00 01) PART 1 GENERAL 1.1

GENERAL PROVISIONS A.

1.2

GENERAL REFERENCES A.

1.3

Sub-Bid Requirements: As provided under Section 26 00 01 – Electrical Filed Sub-Bid Requirements and supplemented under the Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract, and applicable parts of Division 1 – General Requirements. 1. Work of this Filed Sub-Bid includes all individual Specification Sections listed in Section 26 00 01.

Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, General Conditions Contract for Construction Services and Division 1, General Requirements are hereby made a part of this Section.

SCOPE OF WORK A.

The scope of work consists of the installation of all materials to be furnished under this Section, and without limiting the generality thereof, consists of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, plant, transportation, rigging, staging, appurtenances and services necessary and/or incidental to properly complete all electrical work as shown on the Drawings, as described in the Specifications, or as reasonably inferred from either, in the opinion of the Architect as being required.

B.

The work of this Section includes: 1. Primary Electric Service. 2. Secondary Electric Service and Metering. 3. Switchboard. 4. Grounding. 5. Sleeves, Inserts and Openings. 6. Pullboxes, Junction Boxes and Wireways. 7. Panelboards. 8. Dry-type Transformers. 9. K-rated Transformers. 10. Conduit. 11. Wire and Cable. 12. Electrical Supporting Devices. 13. Outlet Boxes and Accessories. 14. Wiring Devices and Plates. 14. Floor Outlets. 16. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps. 17. Starters. 18. Disconnect Switches. 19. Emergency Standby System. 20. Fire Alarm System. 21. Public Safety Signal Booster System. 22. Zero Sequence Harmonic Filters. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 1 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. C.

1.4

The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for all cutting related to the work of this Section except in finished surfaces. Patching is the responsibility of the trade effected. 1. For coordination of cutting and patching refer to Section 01 31 00, Project Management and Coordination. 2. For cutting and patching Specifications, refer to Section 01 73 00, Execution.

RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A.

1.5

Lightning Protection System. Building preparation for Communications System, Specifications Sections 27 10 00, 27 21 33, 27 40 00, 27 50 00 and 27 70 00. Building preparation for Electronic Safety and Security Systems, Specifications Sections 28 00 00. Surge Protective Devices (SPD’S) Cable Tray and Accessories. Lighting Control System. Nameplates. Fuses. Thermal Switches. Access Panels. Timeclocks. Scoreboards. Installation of Theatrical Lighting Equipment as furnished by Section 11 61 11 and wiring and conduit to connect Theatrical Lighting Equipment and Building preparation as indicated on Drawings. Short Circuit/Coordination/Selective Coordination Study. Mineral Insulated Metal – Sheathed System (MI Cable). Destratification Fans.

The following related work or material shall be provided under the designated Divisions: 1. Excavation, backfill, pumping, and shoring: Division 31, “Earthwork.” 2. Concrete work: Division 03, “Concrete.” 3. Flashing and counterflashing for all roof openings: Division 07, “Thermal and Moisture Protection.” 4. Field Painting: Division 09, “Finishes.” 5. Specialty Equipment: Division 11, “Equipment.” 6. Elevator: Division 14, “Conveying Systems.” 7. Sprinkler System: Section 21 00 00, “Fire Suppression.” 8. Plumbing Equipment: Section 22 00 00, “Plumbing.” 9. HVAC Equipment: Section 23 00 00, “HVAC.” 10. Door Hardware: Section 08 71 10. 11. For restrictions concerning the hanging of materials, piping, mounts, brackets, hangers, hooks and other items from metal decking. Steel Decking, Section 05 31 00.

DEFINITIONS A.

“E.C.” or “Contractor” as used herein after in this Section shall mean the “Electrical Subcontractor,” i.e., the filed bid subcontractor under this Section 26 00 00. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 2 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.6

1.7

1.8

B.

“Concealed” shall be defined as areas where conduit and wiring is located in chases, walls, partitions, shafts, and above finished ceilings.

C.

“Underground” shall mean conduit and wiring exterior to or within the Building that is buried. All other conduit and wiring shall be considered “exposed.”

D.

“Exposed” shall mean conduit and wiring run on the surface of the Building construction.

E.

“Conduit” shall mean in addition to conduit, all fittings, hangers and other accessories relating to such conduit systems.

F.

“Provide” shall mean “provided complete in place,” that is, “furnished and installed.”

EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.

Bidders are advised to visit the site and inform themselves as to conditions under which this work will be performed. Failure to do so will, in no way, relieve the successful bidder from the responsibility of furnishing any materials or performing any work in accordance with the true intent and meaning of the Drawings and Specifications.

B.

No claim for extra compensation will be recognized if difficulties are encountered which an examination of the site conditions and contract documents prior to executing the contract would have revealed.

C.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for ordering and furnishing the correct quantity of material required. Routing and equipment arrangements shown on the Drawings are approximate only and are not warranted to be accurate.

D.

Arrangements shall be made with the Owner prior to the visit for inspection of the existing Buildings.

RECORD DRAWINGS A.

General: Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, Section 01 78 00, Closeout Submittals for Requirements.

B.

The Record Drawings required to be furnished under this Section are of the “E”, “T”, “TAV”, “TL” and “TR” Series Drawings.

SHOP DRAWINGS A.

General: Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, for submittal provisions and procedures.

B.

In accordance with Division 1, General Requirements, submit to the Architect for approval complete sets of detailed information consisting of manufacturer’s' bulletins, capacities, Shop Drawings, and parts lists of all material to be provided for this project.

C.

Any manufacturer’s names and/or model numbers identified herein are intended to assist in establishing a general level of quality, configuration, functionality, and ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 3 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

appearance required. This is NOT a proprietary Specification unless otherwise noted and it should be noted that or approved equal applies to all products denoted herein. It is understood that all manufactures will have minor variations in configuration, appearance, and product Specifications and such minor variations shall not eliminate such manufacturers as an approved equal. It is the intent of this Specification to encourage open and competitive involvement from multiple manufacturer’s that are able to supply similar products.

1.9

1.10

MOCK-UPS A.

General: Refer to Division 1, General Requirements, Section 01 43 29, MockUps for requirements.

B.

The Electrical Subcontractor will be required to mock-up (1) typical classroom and (1) typical science classroom as described in Section 01 43 29.

CODES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS A.

All work done under this Section shall conform to the Codes and regulations governing such work as follows: 1. ANSI American National Standards Institution 2. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials 3. CS Commercial Standards 4. FS Federal Specifications 5. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 6. IES Illuminating Engineering Society 7. NEC National Electrical Code 8. Massachusetts Electrical Code 9. NECA National Electrical Subcontractors Association 10. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association 11. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 12. UL Underwriters Laboratory 13. NESC National Electrical Safety Code 14. IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association 15. EEI Edison Electrical Institute 16. EIA Electronic Industry Association 17. All Local Governing Codes.

B.

Give notices, file plans, obtain and pay for permits and licenses and obtain necessary approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Permits shall be secured through the City. Deliver certificates of inspection to Architect. No work shall be covered before examination and approval by Architect, inspectors and authorities having jurisdiction. Imperfect or condemned work shall be replaced with work conforming to requirements, without extra cost to Owner, subject to the approval of the Architect. If work is covered before due inspection and approval, the Electrical Subcontractor shall pay costs of uncovering the installed work, whether it meets contract requirements or not. Refer to Section 00 21 13 Instruction to Bidders and General Conditions Contract for Construction Services for payment of fees.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 4 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.11

INTENT A.

1.12

1.13

1.14

It is not intended that the Drawings show every conduit, fitting and appurtenance. All such parts necessary for the complete execution of the work, in accordance with the best practices of the trade and to the satisfaction of the Architect shall be provided whether these parts may have been specifically mentioned or not, or indicated on the Drawings.

DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A.

The Drawings and Specifications are complementary each to the other, and any labor or material called for by either, whether or not by both, or necessary for the successful operation of any components shall be furnished and installed.

B.

Before installing any work, verify that it does not interfere with the clearances required for other work. Installed work which interferes with existing necessary services shall be modified as directed by the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.

C.

Be familiar with the Drawings and Specifications of all other trades to prevent interferences and assure complete coordination.

GIVING INFORMATION A.

Keep fully informed as to the shape, size and position of all openings and foundations required for all apparatus furnished under this Section and give full information to the General Contractor sufficiently in advance of the work, so that all such openings and foundations may be built in advance. Furnish all sleeves and supports herein specified, so the General Contractor may install same in place.

B.

In the case of failure to give proper information as noted above, assume the cost of having necessary changes to the work made by the General Contractor.

OBTAINING INFORMATION A.

Obtain detailed information from the manufacturers of apparatus which is to be provided, for the proper methods of installation. Obtain all information from the General Contractor and other Subcontractors which may be necessary to facilitate the work and the completion of the whole project.

B.

Electrical Subcontractor shall inspect the site associated with this project prior to submitting his bid and shall investigate all conditions under which this work will be performed. This shall include determination of exact locations of items indicated as existing on the Drawings. Such existing locations are diagrammatic and shall not be construed as exact enough to use for equipment and labor estimating purposes. Failure to inspect existing conditions or to fully understand the work which is required shall not excuse the Electrical Subcontractor from his obligation to supply and install work in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings and under all existing site conditions. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Subcontractor to investigate and locate all existing underground utilities which may conflict with the installation of this electrical work. Coordinate elevations of conduits required to be installed under this Contract to avoid ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 5 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

interference with any existing underground utilities. 1.15

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.

1.16

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS A.

1.17

1.18

All materials and equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and of the best grade for the service intended. The manufacturers mentioned in the Specifications are intended to indicate the quality desired. Any substitutions shall be approved by the Architect as herein provided by the “or equal” clause, in addition to meeting the limitations of space and capacity shown or specified. Rebuilt materials and equipment will not be accepted.

In general, and unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Specifications or noted on the Drawings, all new Building service, heating, ventilating, air conditioning and plumbing equipment shall be of the following characteristics: 1. Motors up to and including 1/3 HP shall be suitable for 120 volt, single phase operation. 2. Motors larger than 1/3 HP shall be suitable for 480 volt, three phase operation.

TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A.

Provide capacity the local utility company power lines, make arrangements with the local utility company for temporary service and pay all expenses related thereto.

B.

Refer to Division 1, Section 01 50 00 for requirements.

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.

At least two (2) months prior to the time of turning over this contract to the Owner for use and occupancy or substantial completion, secure and deliver to the Architect three (3) complete indexed files containing approved operating and maintenance manuals, Shop Drawings and other data as follows: 1. Operation description of all systems. 2. Complete Shop Drawings of all equipment. 3. Preventive maintenance instructions for all systems. 4. Spare parts lists of all system components. 5. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of all suppliers of the systems.

B.

Non-availability of operating and maintenance manuals or inaccuracies therein may be grounds for cancellation and postponement of any scheduled final inspection by the Owner until such time as the discrepancy has been corrected and/or retainage of sufficient monies to prepare same.

C.

Provide qualified trained personnel to insure proper operation of the systems and to train the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the systems. Instruction period shall be five (5) eight-hour days. 1. Training of the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Tenant’s and ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 6 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Building Owner’s Representatives. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to provide instruction to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location, operation and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be scheduled in coordination with the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s Representative after submission and approval of formal training plans. Refer to Commissioning Specification, Section 01 91 00, for Electrical Subcontractor training requirements. 1.19

GUARANTEE AND SERVICE A.

1.20

1.21

The Electrical Subcontractor shall guarantee the performance of the installation and all equipment included in this Section in writing for one year from the date of final acceptance of same. Should any defects in materials or workmanship appear during this period, they shall be corrected or replaced by the Electrical Subcontractor to the satisfaction of the Architect, and at no additional expense to the Owner.

DEBRIS REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP A.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall, at the end of each day’s work, remove waste materials and debris resulting from the installation of the electrical system. The Electrical Subcontractor shall deposit such waste and debris in a dumpster onsite. Dumpster shall be provided by the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the emptying of dumpster when required.

B.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall, at the completion of his work, remove from the property all tools, equipment and surplus materials resulting from the installation of the electrical system.

COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS A.

An independent Commissioning Agent (CA) will be retained for this project. The commissioning process will be implemented in accordance with the LEED for Schools v2009 and Commissioning Credits EAp1 – Fundamental Commissioning of Building Energy Systems and EAc3 – Enhanced Commissioning.

B.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall assist and support the CA as necessary in accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 01 91 13 – Commissioning Requirements/Plan. 1. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this Section is part of the construction process. Documentation and testing of these systems, as well as training of the Tenant’s and Building Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel, is required in cooperation with Tenant’s and Building Owner’s Representatives and the Commissioning Agent. Project Closeout is dependent on successful completion of all commissioning procedures, documentation and issue closure. Refer to Commissioning Requirements/Plan, Section 01 91 13, for detailed commissioning requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1

NAMEPLATES A.

Nameplates shall be furnished and installed on the switchboard and switchboard circuit breakers, panelboards, dry-type transformers, junction boxes, cabinets for ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 7 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

all special purpose switches, motor disconnect switches, starters and other controls furnished under this Contract, to designate the equipment controlled and function.

2.2

B.

Nameplates shall be laminated white bakelite with 1/4” high black recessed letters. Nameplates shall be securely attached to the equipment with galvanized screws or rivets. Adhesives or cements will not be permitted.

C.

Power branch circuit junction boxes shall be identified with circuit’s panel(s) orgin and circuit number(s) by means of black fibre pen.

D.

All pull boxes and junction boxes shall be identified as to system and function by means of black fibre pen.

ELECTRICAL SWITCHBOARD A.

Furnish and install a NEMA One, Class One Switchboard. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified by actual seismic testing to meet all applicable seismic requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) Site Classification as based on installed location zip code. The manufacturer shall provide the tested baseline mounting location information to the Electrical Subcontractor. The installing Electrical Subcontractor shall complete all required installation calculations and mount the unit based on the engineered to site plans.

B.

Switchboard shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt-on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure.

C.

All sections of the switchboard shall be a minimum of 90 inches high and group distribution sections shall be no more than 30 inches deep. All vertical sections shall rear align.

D.

All switchboard components shall be either front or side accessible. Where space for future is called for, all necessary bus extensions except devices connecting straps shall be provided.

E.

The switchboard assembly and all circuit breakers shall be rated for shortcircuited stresses as indicated on Drawings.

F.

Fully Rated equipment shall be provided; Series Rated equipment is not acceptable.

G.

All main bus bars shall be silver-plated copper. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on NEMA standard temperature rise criteria of 65 degrees C over a 40 degrees C ambient (outside the enclosure). No portion of the horizontal bus shall extend within 8 inches of the bottom or within 8 inches of the front inside any vertical panel section of the switchboard structure.

H.

All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 8 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

cleaned and finished with gray enamel over a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating.

2.3

I.

The switchboard shall have an UL service entrance equipment label.

J.

The switchboard layout and rating shall be as indicated on the plans and shall have the following features: 1. Service entrance shall be by means of conduit entering from the bottom. 2. Provide a main molded case circuit breaker for ratings 1600 amperes and below. Provide main insulated case circuit breaker for all ratings 2000 amperes and above. Circuit breakers which are rated at 1200 amps or more shall have Arc Energy Reduction complying with National Electrical Code 240.87. 3. Provide Digitrip or equal electronic trip unit with integral GF protection on all main breakers. Provide thermal magnetic or ETU for feeders as shown on Drawings. 4. Provide National Electrical Code compliant arc reduction maintenance protection with separate maintenance settings, activation switch and light for all main breakers. 5. Main section shall be equipped with a line side digital power quality meter style IQ 260 or equivalent. Unit shall monitor voltage, amperes, power usage, and harmonic content displayed on the board and available for interface via modbus communications. Mount the unit in a separate compartment with system rated AIC disconnect device and shorting block for Line mounted CT’s. 6. Each switchboard section shall have full ampere bussing with full neutral capacity. A ground bus bonded to each cubicle shall run throughout the switchboard and all buses shall be copper. 7. Internal busing and circuiting shall conform to the power riser diagram shown on the plans. 8. Distribution sections shall consist of circuit breakers group mounted with bolted connectors to bus all front accessible. See schedule on Drawings for frame size and trip unit types. 9. Where shown on drawings provide Electric Utility Company metering section that meets all local electric utility company requirements. Provide CT and PT units if required by the electric utility company. Provide all required documentation for electric utility company compliance review prior to construction of the switchboard.

K.

The switchboard shall be a Pow-R-Line C as manufactured by Eaton, Square D, Siemens, or equal.

PANELBOARDS A.

At each location indicated on the plans, furnish and install an appropriate panel of the ampacity and voltage rating shown on the Drawings.

B.

All panels shall be of the safety dead front circuit breaker type for service on three phase, four wire mains unless otherwise specified. All panels shall be of code gauge steel.

C.

Panels shall be surface or flush mounted, as indicated on the plans, and installed so that the top circuit breaker is no more than 6'-0” above the finished floor.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 9 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.4

D.

The panelboards shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories Label.

E.

All buses shall be copper. All panelboards shall have a circuit directory card mounted in a frame with plastic cover installed on the inside of the door. All directory cards shall be properly filled in, using a typewriter, and indicating areas and devices served by each circuit.

F.

All circuit breakers shall be of quick-make and quick-break type on manual operation, trip-free, and with inverse time characteristics and shall have bolted bus connections; plug-in circuit breakers will not be allowed.

G.

Panelboard trims shall have single doors. Trims and doors shall be made of code gauge, full finish sheet steel. The trim and doors shall be factory finished on both sides. All panelboards shall be keyed alike.

H.

Panelboards shall contain circuit breakers indicated on panelboard schedule on the Drawings. Two and three pole breakers shall be common trip type.

I.

All panelboards shall be equipped with a neutral bar having one solderless connector for each circuit as indicated and with all required knockouts.

J.

Panelboards requiring 200% neutrals and isolated ground shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

K.

Panelboards shall be Square D, Type NQOB for 120/208 volt, Type NEHB for 277/480 volt, and I-Line for main distribution panelboards, Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Siemens, or equal.

L.

Provide panelboards with Nema 4X enclosure in Kitchen, Servery, and other wash down areas.

M.

Circuit breakers which are rated at 1200 amps or more shall have Arc Energy Reduction complying with National Electrical Code 240.87.

N.

Fully Rated equipment shall be provided; Series Rated equipment is not acceptable.

PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES AND WIREWAYS A.

Pull boxes shall be of code gauge galvanized steel with screw covers to match. Pull boxes and wireways shall be as shown on Drawings and/or comply with the National Electrical Code and/or job conditions, with steel barriers separating systems.

B.

Wireways shall be of code gauge steel, baked enamel manufactured standard sections and fittings, with combination hinged and screw covers, as manufactured by Square D “Square-Duct,” Bee Line, Cope or equal.

C.

Conductors passing through pull boxes and wireways shall be identified to indicate their origin and termination. Provide nameplates for all pull boxes.

D.

Weatherproof junction boxes installed in grade shall be polymer concrete with ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 10 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

gasketed cover, minimum 6” X 8” as manufactured by Quazite, Nordic Fiberglass, High Line Products, or approved equal. 2.5

2.6

OUTLET BOXES AND ACCESSORIES A.

Outlet boxes and accessories shall be as manufactured by Steel City, Appleton, Raco, or equal.

B.

Lighting outlets in concrete ceilings, walls and columns shall be 4” octagonal rings, 4” deep with round bottom plate. Where concrete slab is less than 5” thick, boxes shall be 2-1/2” deep.

C.

For wood framing and furred ceilings use 4” octagonal outlet boxes, bar hangers and covers. 4-11/16” boxes and covers shall be used where 1” conduit is involved.

D.

Where outlets occur in beams or ribs of pan type concrete construction, a 4” shallow pan outlet, 3/4” deep, shall be used with conduit entering the back of the box.

E.

All fixture outlet boxes shall have 3/8” solid make fixture studs and all auxiliary fixture stems shall be supported from 3/8” male fixture studs.

F.

All outlets in walls other than lighting outlets in concrete shall be Series 52171, 4” square boxes with single of 2- gang raised covers, Series 52C50, of the proper depth required for the particular wall construction and finish. Where the wall construction or finish will not permit a neat cut around the raised cover, Series GW235 boxes shall be used.

G.

Outlets in 2” partitions shall be 4” square, 1-1/4” deep, with raised cover.

H.

Outlet boxes for weatherproof concealed work and exposed rigid conduit work shall be suitable cast or malleable iron conduit fittings, Crouse-Hinds Company, Appleton, Killark, or equal, and shall have threaded conduit hubs.

I.

Floor outlets shall be as indicated on Drawings.

J.

Fire rated poke through’s shall be as indicated on Drawings.

CONDUIT A.

Electric metallic tubing shall be electrogalvanized or sherardized steel and the rigid steel conduit shall be hot-dipped galvanized or sherardized, inside and outside, manufactured by one of the following: Pittsburgh Standard, Republic Steel Corp., Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. or equal.

B.

Flexible metal conduit shall be galvanized steel and shall contain a separate copper grounding conductor. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit shall be similar, but shall also have an extruded moisture and oil proof outer jacket of polyvinyl chloride plastic.

C.

Non-Metallic Conduit (NMC): Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) shall be Schedule 40, rated for use with 90 degree conductors, UL rated or approved equal, conforming to industry standards and NEMA TC-2, NEMA TC-3, Fed. Spec. WC-1094, and UL 651. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 11 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.7

D.

Rigid steel conduit fittings, couplings and connectors shall be threaded and shall be galvanized or cadmium plated. Conduit fittings and outlet boxes shall be held in place by fittings of a type approved by the Architect. Steel supports or racks shall be galvanized steel channel and fittings, Unistrut, Kindorf or Husky Products Company, or equal.

E.

Couplings and connectors for electric metallic tubing shall be galvanized steel of the compression type other than the identer type and with insulated throat or setscrew type.

F.

Steel support rods or support bolts for conduits shall be 1/8” diameter for each inch or fraction thereof of diameter of conduit size, but no rod or bolt shall be less than 1/4” in diameter.

G.

Conduit shall be supported from the Building structure, and shall be independent of ducts, pipes, ceilings and their supporting members.

WIRE AND CABLE A.

Wiring shall be a minimum of #12 AWG solid, except motor control circuit wiring and fire alarm system wiring may be #14 AWG. Wiring for 120V branch circuits which exceed a distance of 100' from the panel to the last outlet shall be #10 AWG, 200 ft. from the panel to the last outlet shall be #8 AWG and 300 ft. from the panel to the last outlet shall be #6 AWG minimum, wiring for 277V branch circuits which exceed a distance of 200' from the panel to the last outlet or light fixture shall be #10 AWG, and 300 ft. from the panel to the last outlet or light fixture shall be #8 AWG minimum. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be required to perform voltage drop calculations on all branch circuits in which the actual proposed routing of the circuit exceeds 100 ft. to insure a maximum voltage drop of 3% is not exceeded. Wire sizes shall be increased to maintain the maximum 3% voltage drop.

B.

Wires and cables shall be single conductor, except as otherwise specified or indicated on Drawings. Wires of sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. Wires of sizes smaller than #8 AWG shall be solid. Conductors shall be of soft drawn copper and shall have a conductivity of not less than 98% of the ANSI Standard for annealed copper. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the order and delivery time of solid conductors in the smaller sizes will delay progress of the installation, the Electrical Subcontractor may use stranded conductors instead of solid. If this permission is granted, pressure type connectors (not wire nuts) shall be used in making all such conductor splices, and particular care shall be taken when cutting insulation from ends of conductors not to score or sever conductor strands. Pressure type connectors shall also be used at all terminals.

C.

Wire shall be Type THWN-2, XHHW or approved equal, rated 90 degrees C. minimum and suitable for wet and dry locations.

D.

MC cable may be used for branch circuit wiring only, where run concealed, where allowed by Code and approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Type MC cable shall be supported and secured at intervals not exceeding six feet.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 12 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.8

E.

Wire and cable shall be by one of the following: Phelps Dodge Copper Products Corp., General Cable Co., AFC Cable Systems, Triangle Conduit and Cable Co., or equal.

F.

Terminal lugs and splice connectors shall be of an ampacity equal to the circuit on which they are utilized.

G.

Emergency feeders that cannot be run in conduit below grade shall be Mineral Insulated Metal – Sheathed Cable (MI Cable), refer to Specification Section.

H.

All wiring where run in environmental air plenums shall conform to Article 300-22 of the National Electrical Code.

I.

Wiring shall be supported from the Building structure, and shall be independent of ducts, pipes, ceilings and their supporting members.

WIRING DEVICES A.

Light Switches 1. All local wall switches shall be of the flush quiet toggle type, single pole, double pole, three-way or four-way, and as manufactured by Pass and Seymour, Inc., Hubbell, Leviton Manufacturing Co., or equal. 2. All switches shall be suitable for the control of tungsten filament lamps, and shall carry the proper marking of the Underwriters' Laboratories. 3. Local switches shall be installed in such a position that they shall bear evenly and truly, and be secured on the axis of the supporting members. 4. Under no circumstances are wooden wedges, shims or blocks to be used in truing up local switches. Should the outlet box in any case come too far back of the finished surface, recess boxes and screws of the proper length to reach the box shall be used of such a size as to form a shoulder at exactly the proper point to retain the switch in position. 5. Switches shall be equal to the following: Single Pole Pass and Seymour 20 AC-1 (20 AMP-1P) Double Pole Pass and Seymour 20 AC-2 (20 AMP-1P) Three-Way Pass and Seymour 20 AC-3 (20 AMP-1P) Four-Way Pass and Seymour 20 AC-4 (20 AMP-1P) Switch with pilot light Pass and Seymour 20 AC-1-CPL (20 AMP-1P) Key switches shall be equal to corresponding switches above. 6. Dimmer switches shall be slide control dimmers with preset, Pass and Seymour, Leviton Manufacturing Company, Lutron, Wattstopper or equal, rated for 2000 watt, 120 volt AC operation. 7. Color of switches shall be white, unless otherwise noted.

B.

Receptacles 1. Duplex receptacles shall be grounding type, rated 20 amperes, 125 volts. Receptacles shall be back and side wired with screw type terminals or pressure type, screwless terminals having suitable conductor release arrangement. 2. Ground fault duplex receptacles shall be furnished and installed where shown on the plans. 3. Special receptacles for single equipment, where required, shall have additional grounding leg and shall be of capacity for the equipment to be connected. 4. In general, convenience receptacle circuits shall be independent of lighting circuits and shall not be controlled by lighting circuit breaker ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 13 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

5.

6.

7. 2.9

switches or lighting switches, unless specifically indicated on the Drawings. Receptacles shall be as follows, or as manufactured by Hubbell, Leviton Manufacturing Co., or equal: a. Normal circuit duplex receptacles - Pass and Seymour 5362 (Provide child proof tamper resistant receptacles in the Child Development Areas or Rooms). b. GFCI Duplex receptacles - Pass and Seymour 2091S c. Receptacles with isolated ground - Pass and Seymour IG 5362 – Color of receptacles shall be orange. d. Computer circuit duplex receptacles – Transient surge suppression – Pass and Seymour 5362-GRYSP – Color of receptacles shall be gray. e. Computer circuit duplex receptacles – Pass and Seymour 5362GRY – Color of receptacles shall be gray. All receptacles circuited to “C” panelboards shall be gray. f. Emergency circuit duplex receptacles – Pass and Seymour 5362-R – Color of receptacles shall be red. g. GFCI duplex receptacles installed on the exterior of the Building shall be “Weather Resistant” Type. USB Charger Devices shall be as follows, or as manufactured by Hubbell, or equal: a. 20 amp, 2 USB chargers and duplex tamper resistant receptacle (3.0 amp) – USB20X2W. b. 20 amp, 4 USB charger receptacle (5.0 amp) – USB4W. Color of receptacles shall be white, unless otherwise noted.

WIRING DEVICE PLATES A.

All device plates shall be Specification Grade, .032” thick, Type 430, stainless steel, brushed finish. Plates shall be of appropriate type and size for all wiring and control devices.

B.

Plates shall be set so that all edges are in contact with the mounting surface. Plaster fillings will not be allowed. Multi-device locations shall have one common device plate.

C.

Nameplate designation for device plates shall be engraved directly on plates and filled in black.

D.

Device plates shall be by the same manufacturer as devices.

E.

All receptacle device plates for circuits other than 120V, 2 wire, shall be engraved with 1/4” high letters, filled black, indicating voltage characteristics of the outlet.

F.

Plates for surface type boxes shall not overlap boxes and shall be designed for use with surface boxes.

G.

Device plates for circuits connected to the emergency distribution system shall have engraved nameplates marked “Emergency Circuit,” 1/4” high letters, filled in black.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 14 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

H. 2.10

Device plates for weatherproof receptacles shall be clear Polycarbonate “In-Use” type, pad lockable.

LIGHTING FIXTURES A.

Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required for a complete installation of lighting equipment specified on the lighting fixture schedule. This shall include plaster frames for all recessed fixtures whether or not itemized or specified on lighting fixture schedule which appears on Drawings.

B.

Electrical Subcontractor shall assume all responsibility for the safe handling of all lighting fixtures which are furnished under this Section and other accessories and lamps until the final inspection has been made by the Architect.

C.

Special fittings and materials that may be required to support fixtures shall be supplied as well as supports or grounds required to secure surface or pendant mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings unless otherwise noted. Fixtures shall be supported from the Building structure, and shall be independent of ducts, pipes, ceilings and their supporting members. This support shall be in addition to regular fixture support bars, and saddles. Fluorescent fixtures mounted in association with suspended or integrated ceiling systems shall be supported above ceiling by threaded 1/4” diameter continuous galvanized steel hanger rods or #12 jack chain. Each such fixture shall have two supports per fixtures. Where duct work, pipes, type of Building construction materials and structural framing members provide obstructions or difficult support means, hanger rods shall be used in association with horizontal sections of steel support channels in an approved manner. Steel support channels shall be Unistrut, Kindorf, Huskey Products, or equal. Rigid steel conduit may be used instead of steel support channels for size and method of support. Exact mounting height of all stem supported lighting fixtures shall be determined on the job by Architect.

D.

Ballasts for fluorescent fixtures shall be the series type, classified for sound rating A, be CBM rated and shall have automatic resetting thermal protection as per latest Class P requirements as set forth by Underwriters Laboratories, 800 m.A. ballasts shall be sound rated Class B, and 1,500 m.A. ballast shall be a minimum sound rating of Class C.

E.

Ballasts shall be of the normal power factor type unless otherwise noted. Proper ballast shall be furnished and installed for all lighting fixtures normally designed for operation with ballasts, whether or not such ballasts are specifically itemized on fixture schedule. This shall include not only fluorescent type fixtures but also all other fixtures employing high intensity discharge lamps.

F.

Ballasts for fluorescent or other high intensity discharge lamps used outdoors shall be of the low temperature type, designed for operation down to a temperature of minus 20 degrees F.

G.

If fluorescent fixtures operate improperly due to overheating, Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install ballast heat radiators to alleviate the condition, at no cost to the Owner.

H.

Furnish and install a complete set of new lamps for all fixtures. Lamps shall be General Electric, Philips, or Osram/Sylvania. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish to the Owner, at the completion of the project, spare lamps equal to 10% ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 15 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

of the installed quantity for each type of lamp installed. I.

Fixtures, part or parts thereof (including lamps) determined defective upon completion of electrical installation shall be replaced by Electrical Subcontractor, at no cost to Owner.

J.

Consult with General Contractor regarding arrangement of framing members to permit centering of recessed fixtures.

K.

Consult with Ceiling Subcontractor and coordinate fixture locations and supports with suspended ceiling system.

L.

Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for furnishing the specified recessed fixtures with proper mounting arrangement to be compatible with the type of ceiling construction in which fixture is to be mounted. If necessary, the type mounting arrangement shall be changed from that specified or indicated on fixtures schedule to conform to this requirement, at no additional cost to Owner. Submission of Shop Drawings of such recessed fixtures shall be interpreted to indicate that Electrical Subcontractor has verified ceiling construction, type and material with the Architect for the various areas of the project in which these fixtures shall be mounted. Shop Drawings of such fixtures shall be accompanied by a written statement indicating Electrical Subcontractor has verified such mounting arrangements with Architect and the date verified.

M.

All suspended lighting fixtures shall be hung in association with improved aligner type hangers, except where noted.

N.

In addition to fixture supports, surface mounted lighting fixtures shall be secured to surface which they mount at a minimum of two points on fixture housing to prevent rotation or movement of fixture out of its normal position of alignment.

O.

After installation and lamping of permanent lighting fixtures and with approval of the Architect, these fixtures may be used for lighting, and will not require relamping prior to completion of project, except where lamps are faulty or burnt out.

P.

Lamping color temperature shall be 3500°K for interior lighting fixtures, unless otherwise noted.

Q.

Lamping color temperature shall be 4100°K for exterior lighting fixtures, unless otherwise noted.

R.

Lamps which are to be dimmed shall be provided with minimum 100 hours of burn in time; Electrical Subcontractor shall not install lamps in dimmable lighting fixtures until this process is completed.

S.

Lighting fixtures with multi wattage ballasts and drivers shall be labeled from the factory for the wattage specified to ensure compliance with Energy Code calculations.

T.

All lighting fixtures that utilize LED (light emitting diodes) lamp sources shall be Energy Star rated or DLC (Designlights Consortium) qualified product listed, a kelvin temperature as scheduled having a color rendering index of 80 minimum and minimum L70 lifetime rating of 50,000 at 25°C ambient. LED array and driver packages shall have published IESNA LM-79 and LM-80 testing data as a ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 16 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

standard manufactured offering. Individual component testing will not be accepted. LM-79 must be conducted at a laboratory listed in the U.S. Department of Energy’s LED Lighting Facts approved testing laboratories list. Testing must be conducted within the accreditation effective and expiration dates detailed for a given laboratory. In-house LM-80 reporting of LED array from LED manufacturer will be accepted. U.

2.11

2.12

2.13

Where lighting fixtures other than the specified products are provided, the Electrical Subcontractor shall provide light level calculations in accordance with IESNA standards to justify that substituted fixtures are of equal performance to the specified products (applies to all lighting fixtures in all spaces).

ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES A.

All conduit and fittings on all work are to be secured by one or more of the following: 1. Masonry - metal clips secured by toggle bolts or lead expansion sleeves. 2. Woodwork - metal clips secured by wood screws. 3. Bar joists - wedge hangers. 4. Flanged beams - flange clips.

B.

All pipe hangers and equipment supports shall be constructed and installed in accordance with Seismic Zone requirements as outlined in the State Building Code. The Electrical Subcontractor shall submit one (1) copy of Shop Drawings and calculations detailing seismic hanger restraints to the local Building Authority and Architect, along with a letter of compliance signed by a registered structural engineer confirming that the piping hangers meet State Seismic Code requirements. Cable provided for seismic systems shall be color-coded and prestressed.

DISCONNECT SWITCHES A.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install disconnecting means to comply with the National Electrical Code for all motors. Disconnect switches shall be fused or unfused as shown on the Drawings, NEMA Type HD safety switches for heavy duty, with interlocking cover, side operated with provisions for padlocking the switch handle in the off position.

B.

All motor isolating switches indicated on the Drawings shall be rated in horsepower, and shall be rated for the voltage of the motor and shall be furnished and installed at the motor location whether or not the motor is within sight of the motor feeder disconnecting means.

C.

Disconnect switch enclosures shall be of the proper NEMA type for the intended location as defined by NEMA and shall be phosphate coated or equivalent code gauge galvanized sheet steel with USAFI No. 24 dark gray baked enamel finish.

D.

Disconnect switches shall bear the Underwriters' Laboratories label and be manufactured by Square D Company, Eaton/Cutler-Hammer, Siemens, or equal.

FUSES A.

General 1. Furnish and install a complete set of fuses for all fusible equipment on the project as specified by the Electrical Drawings. Final tests and inspection shall be made prior to energizing the equipment. This shall ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 17 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

include tightening all electrical connections and inspecting all ground conductors. Fuses shall be as manufactured by Mersen, Cooper Bussman, and Littelfuse, or equal. B.

Mains, Feeders and Branch Circuits 1. Fused circuits rated 601 amperes and above shall be protected by current-limiting Class L A4BQ fuses. Fuses shall be time delay and shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 4 seconds, clear 20 times rated current in .01 seconds or less and be UL listed and CSA certified with an interrupting rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. 2. Fused circuits rated 600 amperes or less shall be protected by currentlimiting Class RK1 time delay A2D (250V) or A6D (600V) or Class J time delay AJT fuses. Fuses rated 8 amperes and above shall have the Smart Spot blown fuse indicator. This indicator shall provide guidance for ascertaining if the opening was caused by an overload or a short circuit. No holes are permitted in the fuse body for the indicator function. Fuses shall hold 500% of rated current for a minimum of 10 seconds (30A, 250V Class RK1 case size shall be a minimum of 8 seconds) and shall be UL listed and CSA certified with an interrupting rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. 3. Metal end caps of fuses rated 61 through 600 amperes shall be electrically connected to the fuse blades to facilitate safe voltage testing during OSHA required LOTO (lock out/tag out) procedures.

C.

Motors and Motor Controllers 1. Motor Protection a. All individual motor circuits shall be protected by Class RK1, Class J, or Class L time delay fuses.

- Motors under 10 H.P.

b.

2.

3.

4.

ATDR fuses (Class CC) may be used on motors rated less than 10 H.P. at 480VAC and rated less than 5 H.P. at 240VAC. Fuse holders for Class CC fuses shall incorporate blown fuse indication. Fuse sizes for motor protection shall be chosen from tables published for the appropriate fuse. Heavy load and maximum fuse ratings are also shown for applications where typical ratings are not sufficient for the starting current of the motor.

Motor Controllers a. IEC style and NEMA style motor controllers shall be protected from short circuits by time delay fuses. Controllers and fuses shall be coordinated for Type 2 protection of the motor controllers based upon the motor controller manufacturer’s published recommendations. The fuses shall be Class RK1 A2D (250V) or A6D (600V) or Class J AJT, Class CC ATDR or Class L A4BQ. AC and DC Variable Speed Drives a. AC and DC drives not internally protected by high speed fuses shall be provided branch circuit protection by High Speed Class J (HSJ) fuses. Class J time delay AJT fuses are an acceptable alternative to the HSJ in by-pass applications. Motor Control Centers ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 18 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

a.

To minimize arc flash incident energy, MCC’s shall have fusible mains and maximum fuse ratings shall be as follows: - A4BQ1200 for bolted fault currents greater than 40,000A - A4BQ800 for bolted fault currents greater than 16,000A - AJT600 for bolted fault currents greater than 14,000A - AJT400 for bolted fault currents greater than 5,000A Unit inserts (buckets) shall be fusible and protected by currentlimiting Class J time delay (AJT) or Class RK1 time delay (A2D, A6D) fuses selected for Type 2 protection of the motor controllers based upon the motor controller manufacturer’s published recommendations.

D.

Other Equipment 1. Lighting and control circuits rated 600VAC and less shall be protected by Class CC time delay ATDR or ATQR fuses, sized according to the Drawings. 2. Switchboards, panelboards, and load centers shall utilize fully rated and listed components. Series rated overcurrent protective devices are not acceptable.

E.

Labeling 1. Industrial control panel labels shall include a SCCR (short circuit current rating) and shall specify the overcurrent protection device upon which this rating is based as per the National Electrical Code. 2. Switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and motor control centers shall include a label warning qualified personal of the potential arc flash hazard. The label shall be visible with equipment door closed.

F.

Spares 1. Spare fuses amounting to 10% (minimum three) of each type and rating shall be supplied. These shall be turned over to the Owner upon project completion. Fuses shall be contained and cataloged within the appropriate number of spare fuse cabinets (no less than one), located per Drawings. Spare fuse cabinets shall be equipped with a key lock handle, be dedicated for storage of spare fuses and shall be ATFC.

G.

Execution 1. To prevent mechanical damage to fuses; main, feeder, and branch circuit fuses are to be removed from equipment during transit and re-installed when equipment is to be energized. 2. As installed Drawings, showing actual fuses installed, shall be submitted to the Engineer after completion of the project. 3. Fuseholders capable of accepting Class H fuses are not acceptable.

H.

Substitution 1. Fuse sizes indicated on Drawings are based on fuse performance and selectivity ratios. Alternative submittals to furnish materials other than those specified shall be submitted to the Engineer along with short circuit, selective coordination, and arc flash hazard studies. 2. Performance of any fuses submitted for substitution shall have: a. Indication integral with the fuse so that it indicates the voltage transient when the fuse is opened. This is a relative measure of ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 19 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b.

c.

2.14

how severe the fault was and gives information to the maintenance people to make them more efficient. No holes are permitted in the fuse body for the installation of indicators. Only the listed UL categories must be used, in order to reduce the possibility of arc flash injuries. Class RK5 and Class H are prohibited and could cause major liability should an arc flash occur. All end-caps of fuses must be electrically connected to the fuse blades to prevent misreading of electrical testers during the required OSHA LOTO (Lock-Out Tag-Out) procedures. Misreading on the LOTO final voltage check could cause hazardous shock.

STARTERS A.

Motor starters shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor except as noted otherwise in other Sections of this Specification.

B.

All motor starters shall be of the maintained contact type and have individual running overload protection in each phase and shall be provided with two sets of auxiliary contacts (one normally open and one normally closed).

C.

Starters shall be of size and type required for the particular motor horsepower and voltage.

D.

Locate starters adjacent to panel feeding same unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

E.

Manual starters shall be of the toggle mechanism type for full voltage starting.

F.

Magnetic starters shall be across-the-line type, with means for remote control, except maintained contact type starters shall be used only where noted for specific items of equipment.

G.

All starters shall have overload reset button, pilot light to indicate on or off and hand-off-auto switch in cover unless otherwise indicated.

H.

Starters shall be furnished in the enclosures called for on the Drawings and shall be grouped whenever possible.

I.

Motor starters, where grouped, shall be mounted on a new 3/4” thick exterior grade plywood mounting board finished to match starter enclosures.

J.

All starters and remote control stations furnished under this Section shall have laminated plastic engraved nameplates designating the equipment controlled. Letters shall be 1/4” high.

K.

Motor starters and controls shall be Square D, General Electric, Siemens, or equal.

L.

All magnetic starters furnished under this Section which are connected to circuits operating at more than 120V shall have built-in control transformers with 120V secondary control supply. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 20 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

M. 2.15

2.16

2.17

Thermal trips for all motor starters supplied under this Section shall be ambient temperature compensated.

THERMAL SWITCHES A.

Thermal switches shall be NEMA Type 1 toggle switch for normal duty with thermal overload relay. Switch enclosures shall be of a type approved for the location and atmosphere in which it is mounted. Thermal switches shall be installed where called for or where required by Code. Thermal switches shall be provided with pilot where called for on the Drawings.

B.

Thermal switches shall be as manufactured by Square D, Eaton, Siemens, or equal.

ACCESS PANELS A.

Provide access panels for access to concealed junction boxes and to other concealed parts of system that require accessibility for operation and maintenance. In general, electrical work shall be laid out so access panels are not required.

B.

Access panels shall be located in a workmanlike manner in closets, storage rooms, and/or other non-public areas, positioned so that junction can be easily reached and size shall be sufficient for purpose (minimum size 12” x 16”). When access panels are required in corridors, lobbies, or other habitable areas, they shall be located as directed by the Architect.

C.

Access panels shall be as specified under Section 08 31 00, Access Panels and Doors.

DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A.

Transformers shall have separate primary and secondary windings. Transformers shall be UL listed insulation systems of 220 degrees C., with 150 degrees C. temperature rise above 40 degrees C. ambient, except sizes less than 10 KVA may be 185 degrees C., UL listed insulation system with 150 degrees C. temperature rise above an ambient of 40 degrees C. Transformers larger than 10 KVA shall be of ventilated type.

B.

Core and coil assembly shall be supported from the enclosure base and shall have sound insulation pads between core and coil assembly and the enclosure base. KVA and voltage ratings shall be as indicated on Drawings.

C.

Transformers shall be designed for natural draft cooling conforming to applicable ANSI and IEEE Standards. Six 2-1/2% full capacity taps shall be provided, two above and four below rated voltage. Noise level shall not exceed 45DB on 15 to 50 KVA, 50DB on 51 to 150 KVA transformers and 55 DB on transformers over 150 KVA.

D.

Connection to transformers shall be made with liquid- tight flexible conduit with grounding conductor. Transformers shall be installed in association with Korfund vibration isolation pads to reduce noise level to a minimum. Refer to schedule on ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 21 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Drawings for mounting arrangement. Transformers shall be manufactured by Square D, Cutler-Hammer, Siemens, or equal. 2.18

EMERGENCY STANDBY SYSTEM A.

Furnish and install a complete and operating emergency power system as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings.

B.

The system shall be arranged to provide automatic and instantaneous power upon loss of normal power. This system shall meet all Code requirements for emergency lighting and power.

C.

Furnish complete, install and leave in good running condition a 500 KW diesel fueled engine driven generating set continuously rated for standby service. The KW rating shall be continuously available during any power outage. The unit shall be as hereinafter described and as shown on the Drawings, complete with all controls, attachments, accessories, fuel and exhaust systems.

D.

The unit shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of this type of equipment as manufactured by Kohler Company, Caterpillar Corporation, Onan Corporation or equal.

E.

The unit shall be capable of accepting the incoming loads of the Automatic Transfer Switches.

F.

Operation: 1. The operation of this unit shall be automatic and upon the closing of a remote starting contact in Automatic Transfer Switch, the engine shall start and attain rated voltage and frequency within ten (10) seconds. 2. All necessary accessories shall be provided to assure starting within the time described above under the ambient conditions described herein. 3. Furnish and install all electrical work and equipment required for the proper operation of this system. The General Contractor will provide the necessary structured supports for the emergency generator. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide weight information, as well as dimensional information of the generator to the General Contractor, prior to installing the supports, if necessary.

G.

Emissions; 1. The proposed generator set shall be EPA Tier 3 Certified and in compliance with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts Emission regulations at the time of installation/commissioning. Actual engine emissions values must be in compliance with EPA Tier 2 emissions standard per ISO 8178 – D2 Emissions Cycle at specified ekW/bHP rating. Utilization of the “Transition Program for Equipment Manufacturer’s” also known as “Flex Credits” to achieve Tier 3 certification is not in compliance with MA Regulations “310 CMR 7.02 U Plan Approval and Emission Limitations” and will not be accepted.

H.

Engine: 1. The engine shall be unit-mounted radiator cooled, 4 cycle, industrial type, heavy duty, diesel fueled, and a maximum RPM of 1800. Ratings shall be for standard conditions of 29.92 barometer and 60 degrees air ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 22 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. 3.

temperature. Lubrication shall be a full pressure system using an engine driven geartype lube oil pump with replacement element full flow lube oil filter. Oil cooler shall be required. Base Mounted Fuel Tank: There shall be a double wall diesel fuel storage tank and rupture alarm supplied as an integral part of the base of the unit. The tank shall be furnished and constructed in accordance with Commonwealth of Massachusetts and City requirements for fuel storage. The fuel tank shall be installed in the generator manufacturer's factory and all fuel connections, vents, returns and fills shall be installed and tested prior to shipment. Field or dealer installed tank installations are not acceptable. Tank shall be sized to provide 48 hours of run time, at 100% load. The fuel tank shall meet all CMR 527 and Board of Fire Preventions Regulations and be accompanied with approval seal. This installation shall include but shall not be limited to the following: -Double wall steel fuel tank of the rated capacity -Enlarged steel skid base -Fuel lines including supply, return and vent lines -Fuel fill -Fuel level gauge -Low fuel warning float switch -Rupture basin and alarm -Low fuel level alarm relay

4.

5. 6.

All required appurtenances recommended or required by the manufacturer for a complete and correct installation shall be supplied and the entire assembly shall be factory primed and painted in the manufacturer’s standard color to protect against corrosion. Diesel Fuel System a. The engine fuel system shall include all equipment normally supplied and recommended by the generator set manufacturer for standby generator service. The fuel engine system equipment shall include (but not be limited to) the following: -fuel injection system -fuel line solenoid valve -flexible fuel connections Governor: a. The engine shall be equipped with a isochronous governor capable of +/- 0.25% steady-state frequency regulation. Starting System: a. The engine shall have a 24 V.D.C. starting system with 24 volt positive engagement solenoid shift starting motor and 35-ampere minimum automatic battery charging alternator with solid state regulation. b. Batteries - One set of starting batteries with cables and steel battery rack, shall be included, capable of delivering the manufacturer's recommended minimum cold-cranking amps required at 0°F, per SAE Standard J-537. c. Float type battery charger shall be supplied to maintain the starting batteries at full charge. The charger shall be a 10ampere automatic float and equalize battery charger with +/- 1% ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 23 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

7.

8.

9.

10.

constant voltage regulation from no load to full load over +/- 10% AC input line variation, current limited during engine cranking and short circuit conditions, temperature compensated for ambients from -40°C to +60°C, 5% accurate voltmeter and ammeter, fused, reverse polarity and transient protected. Alarm circuit board to meet the requirements of NFPA 110 for low battery voltage, high battery voltage, and battery charger malfunction shall be provided. d. There shall be a belt driven battery charging alternator with regulator and charge rate ammeter for charging the batteries while the engine is running or the float type battery charger may be arranged to charge the batteries from the normal source when the engine is shut down and from the generator output when the generator is operating. This shall be accomplished by a relay energized from the generator output. Jacket Water Heater: a. An engine jacket water heater shall be provided to maintain the engine jacket at a temperature high enough to assure starting the engine and attaining rated voltage and frequency within ten (10) seconds. The jacket water heater shall be of the capacity recommended by the generator set manufacturer to meet the above conditions. Input to the voltage heater shall be 208 volt, single phase. Safety Shutdown: a. The engine shall be equipped with safety contacts for: -Low lube oil pressure -High jacket water temperature -Overspeed -Overcrank Engine Instruments: a. The following engine instruments shall be connected either in an engine instrument panel or in the generator control panel: -Lube oil pressure -Water temperature -D.C. ammeter Any other instruments considered necessary by the manufacturer shall be included. Exhaust System: a. A critical grade exhaust silencer suitable for residential type silencing complete with condensate drains shall be supplied of the size recommended by the generator set manufacturer, but in no case less than 4 inches. Silencer shall be as manufactured by Kettell, Maxim or Burgess Manning. An octave band center frequently in Hertz data sheet shall accompany all muffler shop Drawings. A section of seamless, flexible stainless steel exhaust connection of the size and type recommended by the generator set manufacturer, but in no case less than 4-inch diameter and eighteen (18) inches long shall be supplied. If the engine is Vee type, a single exhaust outlet header shall be supplied. The generator stack shall comply with 310 CMR 7.26 (42). Stack height shall be a minimum of 10’-0” above the emergency generator weather housing for generators rated equal to or greater than 300KW but less than 1MW. For emergency ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 24 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

11.

I.

generators rated 1MW and above, the stack shall be 1.5 times the height of the height to the top of the generator enclosure. Manufacturer to verify required height to meet 310 CMR 7.26 (42). Mounting: a. The engine and generator shall be close coupled and mounted on a structural steel base designed to maintain proper alignment of the unit. b. The unit shall be certified by the manufacturer to be free from any critical torsional vibrations within a range of plus or minus 10% of synchronous speed. c. Vibration isolators of the type shall be supplied with the unit. The number of isolators shall be as recommended by the generator set manufacturer.

Generator: 1. Rating - 500 KW, 625 KVA, 0.8 P.F., 3 phase, 60 cycle, 480/277 volts. 2. Type - Revolving field, 4 pole, single bearing, drip-proof. 3. Exciter - Brushless, direct connected, fully tropicalized, SCR rectifiers, static voltage regulator, rheostat, excellent motor starting capability. 4. Voltage Regulation - Plus or minus 1% of any preset value over the three (3) phase load range. Instantaneous voltage dip or rise, when measured with an oscilloscope, will not exceed 20% upon full load applications or rejection, and will return to preset value within 0.5 seconds. 5. Waveform - Deviation factor of output voltage will not exceed 5% and the value of any individual harmonic will not exceed 2% of the fundamental when operating with an unbalanced load. 6. Temperature Rise - Temperature rise of any component will not exceed the rise permitted by NEMA standards. 7. Rotor - One (1) piece laminations welded and secured to shaft by a key and press fit. Armortisseur windings installed and connected between poles as an aid to parallel operation and improved waveform during unbalanced loads. Field coils machine would on insulated pole body and securely braced. Rotor statically and dynamically balanced. 8. Stator - One (1) piece laminations welded together. Stator coils form wound and placed in insulation slots. Stator pressed and welded in a rigid steel frame. 9. Bearing - Double sealed ball bearing, lubricated for life. 10. Insulation - NEMA Class F insulation. 11. Varnish - Three (3) coats modified polyester type, will not support fungus growth. 12. Cooling - Cast aluminum fan mounted on generator shaft. 13. Radio Suppression - Radiated or conducted radio interference will not affect normal commercial apparatus. 14. Controls: a. Unit Mounted - The engine generator set shall include a combination engine generator control panel shock mounted at the generator end of the unit. This unit mounted panel shall include (but not be limited to) the following: -Water temperature gauge -Oil pressure gauge -D.C. battery charge rate ammeter -A.C. voltage regulator -Voltage adjusting rheostat ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 25 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b. c. d.

-Start-stop switch -A.C. voltmeter -A.C. ammeter with current transformers -Combination VM-AM phase selector switch -Frequency meter -Elapsed time meter -Automatic start stop control with: overcrank protection (manual reset) high water temperature overspeed overcrank selector switch - “off, auto, manual” -Common failure relay (wire to fire alarm control panel as trouble alarm) -Manual reset line circuit breakers as indicated on Drawings furnished with generator, 277/480 volts. Mounted in NEMA 1 enclosures with interrupting capacity of 65,000 amps symmetrical. Circuit breakers which are rated at 1200 amps or more shall have Arc Energy Reduction complying with National Electrical Code 240.87. Fully Rated equipment shall be provided; Series Rated equipment is not acceptable. The control shall be designed to start the engine upon a closure of a remote contact, arm all safeties, and shutdown the engine when the remote contact is reopened. The control must be manually reset following any fault condition. Control power shall be from the engine start battery.

J.

Annunciator Panel: 1. A remote mounted engine generator annunciator panel shall be built, tested and supplied by the generator supplier. The annunciator panel shall monitor, visually and audibly, the following: -Alarm Silence -Generator Test -Line Power -Generator Power -System Ready -Alarm Switch off -Generator Switch off -Overcrank -Low Battery Voltage -High Battery Voltage -Overspeed -Emergency Stop -Low Oil Pressure -High Water Temperature -Low Fuel -Low Water Temperature -Approach Low Oil Pressure -Approach High Water Temperature -Main Tank Rupture

K.

Automatic Load Transfer Switches: 1. Automatic transfer switches shall be furnished with full load current rating ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 26 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

7. 8. L.

Test: 1.

as indicated on Drawings, 277/480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 4 pole, 60 Hertz, A.C. normal and emergency. Minimum AIC rating shall be 65,000. The transfer switches shall be capable of switching all classes of load, and shall be rated for continuous duty when installed in a non-ventilated enclosure that is constructed in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., standard UL-1008. Emergency loads (ATS-2) shall be Step 1, while Optional Standby loads (ATS-1) shall be Step 2. The transfer switches shall be double throw, actuated by a single electrical operator momentarily energized; and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple overcenter type linkage with a total transfer time not-to-exceed one-half (1/2) second. The transfer switches shall be capable of transferring successfully in either direction with 70% of rated voltage applied to the switch terminals. The normal and emergency contacts shall be positively interlocked mechanically and electrically to prevent simultaneous closing. Main contacts shall be mechanically locked in position without the use of hooks, latches, magnets, or springs; and shall be silver-tungsten alloy protected by arcing contacts, with magnetic blowouts on each pole. The transfer switches shall be equipped with a manual operator that is designed to prevent injury to the operating personnel, if the electrical operator should suddenly become energized during manual transfer. The manual operator shall provide the same contact-to-contact transfer speed as the electrical operator to prevent a flash-over from switching the main contacts slowly. The transfer switches shall be equipped with an elevator pre-signal contact. Engine starting contacts shall be provided to start the generating plant, if any phase of the normal source drops below 70% of rated voltage, after an adjustable time delay period of three (3) to thirty (30) seconds, to allow for momentary dips. The transfer switches shall transfer to emergency, as soon as the voltage and frequency have reached 90% of rated voltage. After restoration of normal power on all phase to 90% of rated voltage, an adjustable time delay period of 0-30 minutes shall delay re-transfer to normal power, until it has had time to stabilize. If the emergency power source should fail during the time period, the time delay shall be by-passed, and the switches shall return immediately to the normal source. After the switches have retransferred to normal, the engine generator shall be allowed to operate at no load for an adjustable period of time (0-5 minutes) to allow it to cool before shutdown. The transfer switches shall include a test switch to simulate normal power failure pilot lights on the cabinet door to indicate the switch closed on normal or emergency and four (4) auxiliary contacts on the main shaft; two (2) closed on normal, the other two (2) closed on emergency. Included engine exerciser with 0-168 hours’ timer. Load transfer switches shall be as manufactured by Russelectric, ASCO, Westinghouse, or equal. Provide two hour rated stop/start circuit from generator to all automatic transfer switches. The supplier of the equipment shall provide at no additional charge, any information or supervision required for the proper installation of the equipment. Upon completion of the installation of this unit, a test run of four hours shall be conducted by the equipment manufacturer's factory ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 27 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3.

4.

5.

M.

trained serviceman in the presence of the City Electrical Inspector. Using load banks to test full generator KW, at this time adjustments shall be made for correct operation of the equipment and the following readings taken at 15-minute intervals. -Engine jacket water temperature -Generator temperature -Oil pressure -Battery charge rate -A.C. volts -A.C. amps (all legs) -Engine air exhaust temperature -Engine oil temperature The unit test shall also be made by utilizing available connected load. The supplier of this equipment shall also furnish and install lube oil in the engine and also drain and refill the engine with new lube oil after the engine-generator test has been completed. If the engine-generator unit should fail this initial test run, as determined by the representative of the Owner, after proper corrective measures have been implemented, replace engine lube oil again after the second test. If any additional tests are required to prove the performance of the engine-generator unit, lube oil shall be replaced after each test run. Prior to shipment of generator to the job site, conduct a 3-hour full load shop test utilizing inductive load to attain full rated load. A written report of this test shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval prior to shipment. All expense for these tests shall be carried by the Electrical Subcontractor. A power outage test will be conducted by the Electrical Subcontractor, witnessed by the Commissioning Agent, using the Building load when all systems are completed. Electrical Subcontractor shall demonstrate proper operation of the emergency system to supply power to all emergency equipment during the simulated power outage and return back to normal utility service. The Electrical Subcontractor shall pay for all fuel required for testing and shall leave the fuel tank full of fuel and the radiator full of antifreeze at the completion of testing and acceptance of the emergency generator.

Weather Housing 1. Weather housing shall be constructed of a minimum 16 gauge steel material. Fixed louvers shall be installed front and back to prevent blowing snow or rain from entering the housing. Roof shall have a crease down the length to prevent water from standing. Roof shall be braced, if necessary, to support the weight of silencer. Side panels and rear panels shall be lockable and removable for access to junction box. Locks must be heavy duty. Housing shall be free of any manufacturer’s stickers and logos. 2. The enclosure shall be fabricated and mounted by the generator set manufacturer so as to insure compatibility of all systems. Seller-installed enclosures and enclosures provided by other than the manufacturer of the generator will not be acceptable. The complete assembly shall be factory finished and painted inside and out in the standard color of the manufacturer to help prevent against weathering and corrosion and to maintain an aesthetically pleasing appearance. 3. The enclosure shall be completed lined with a sound installation barrier. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 28 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4.

N.

2.19

This barrier must be not less than 1” thick and have a minimum density of 2 lbs. /3 cu. ft. In addition, material must meet UL-94 classification HF-1. This material is intended to absorb airborne noise within the enclosure. The enclosure shall be sized such that all accessories specified herein including but not limited to: -Engine/Generator -Jacket heaters -Batteries -Battery charger -Base fuel tank -Exhaust -Line circuit breakers shall be housed within the enclosure.

Provide a cantilevered catwalk and railing assembly with a single stair that will attach to the base mounted diesel fuel tank that provides access to all enclosure doors and maintenance compartments. The catwalk, railing and stair assembly shall be manufactured of a non-rusting metal material and shall have grating on all walking surfaces. Stairs and railings shall conform to all federal and local building/safety codes. The entire assembly shall be epoxy painted. The assembly shall be shipped loose for installation on site.

TIME CLOCKS A.

Furnish and install time clocks where shown on the Drawings for the control of lighting.

B.

Time clocks shall be shall be Tork DLC400BP, Intermatic, Paragon, or equal. 1. Provide a 4 zone lighting controller with photosensor input (Tork model EPC2 photosensor to be supplied with controller). 2. Memory Module shall be capable of being programmed at any one location and inserted into DLC400BP (with memory module socket) in any other remote location. 3. Optional programmer shall be available (Model MMP), capable of accomplishing Windows based settings on a PC for easy duplication of Memory Modules or individualized programs for multiple locations. 4. Each zone shall be capable of independent, user settable turn On and Off light level set points ranging from 1 to 100 footcandles. 5. Three position slide switches shall be provided for each of the 4 zones allowing for user settings based on a. time of day or b. combination time of day and light level or c. light level. 6. Controller shall provide 30 Amp general purpose isolated contacts (unpowered) for each zone as well as a 500 ma, 24VDC output. 7. Controller shall have 1 digital input per channel for: a. remote contact closure which can be used to turn corresponding outputs On/Off outside of the normal control time or b. remote timed override which can be accomplished for the corresponding outputs with the use of Tork model SSA200R-24. 8. Enclosure shall provide separate wiring compartments for power connections and auxiliary connections. 9. Controller shall be capable of local override On or Off to the next scheduled event using the keypad for each zone. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 29 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

10. 11. 12. 13. 14.

15. 2.20

Each zone shall be capable of astronomic function, adjustable from 1060 degrees Northern or Southern latitude. Each zone can additionally be offset +/- 1-299 minutes for both sunset and sunrise. Controller shall provide automatic daylight saving time (which can be omitted). Leap year adjustment shall be compensated for automatically. Controller shall have 365 day holiday capability with 24 single dates and 4 seasons of unlimited duration. Controller shall be capable of 99 set points with separate scheduling for each day of the week. Controller shall have back-up capability: a. Schedule shall be retained for 40 years without power, b. real time shall be retained for 6 months using a field replaceable 9V lithium battery. Unit shall have a NEMA type 3, metal indoor/outdoor enclosure.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM A.

B.

C.

Furnish and install an addressable fire alarm system as indicated on the Drawings and as herein described. The equipment and installation shall comply with the current applicable provisions of the following standards: 1. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2. NFPA 71 Central Station Signaling Systems-Protected Premises Unit. 3. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code 4. State Building Codes. 5. All requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 7. Massachusetts Electrical Code. 8. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code 9. Americans with Disabilities Act The system and all components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire Protective Signaling Systems under the following standards as applicable: 1. UL864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 2. UL268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 3. UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications. 4. UL 217 Smoke Detectors, Single and Multiple Station. 5. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 6. UL 228 Door Closers-Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 7. UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances. 8. UL 1638 Visual Signaling Appliances. 9. UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. 10. UL 1481 Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 11. City Fire Alarm Regulations. General Requirements 1. Submittals a. Submit complete documentation for the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System showing the Model Number, type, rating, size, style, Manufacturer's Names, and Manufacturer's Catalog Data Sheets for all items to ensure compliance with these Specifications. b. Upon Contract Bid approval, and prior to start of system installation, submit Shop Drawings to and obtain written approval ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 30 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3.

from the Fire Department, prior to ordering fire alarm equipment. General requirements are as follows: i. Submittal of fire rated sealant for penetrations. ii. A riser diagram of the complete fire alarm system. (Typical riser diagrams are not acceptable). iii. A complete point to point installation diagram. (Typical installation diagrams are not acceptable). iv. A complete list of current drain requirements during normal supervisory, trouble, and alarm condition. v. Battery standby calculations showing total standby power required to meet the specified system requirements. vi. Supplier’s qualifications indicating years in business, service policies, warranty definitions, and list of similar installations. vii. Electrical Subcontractor qualifications, indicating years in business, prior experience with installations that include the type of equipment that is to be supplied, and installers license number and type of license. c. All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein, shall meet or exceed the fire alarm equipment standards. For equipment other than that specified, the Electrical Subcontractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment does in fact equal or exceed the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. Submit this information for approval by the engineer at least ten (10) days prior to bid. Equipment Manufacturer’s a. All references to manufacturer's or supplier's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent equipment (compatible UL Listed) from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment. General Equipment and Material Requirements a. All equipment and components shall be supplied by a factory authorized Notifier/NESCO affiliate. All equipment and material shall be new and unused and listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific intended purpose. All control panel components and field peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty without degradation of function or performance. All equipment covered by this Specification or noted on Installation Drawings shall be the best equipment suited for the application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or be recognized and U.L. listed as compatible by both manufacturers. b. Furnish and install a full Microprocessor Based, Fire Alarm System according to the following Specifications and as shown on the Drawings. c. The system will permit maximum system expansion and owner flexibility with a minimum of additional field wiring. The system shall be wired, connected, tested, and left in first class operating ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 31 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

d. e.

f.

g. h. i.

j. D.

condition. The system shall be totally solid state, microprocessor based, to ensure reliable operation, low maintenance costs, and long life. The equipment and completed installation shall meet the approval of the Fire Department, the Authorities having jurisdiction, and in accordance with applicable Sections of NFPA 72 for Auxiliary Fire Alarm Systems, and National Fire Codes. All fire alarm control panels shall be predominately red in color and have a white label with the words FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL on the front of the panel with a minimum four (4) inch letter size. No other functions shall be allowed in the panel (e.g. security system). All fire alarm control panels shall provide 30% excess power supply capacity for future expansion. All equipment shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Approved Equipment Suppliers i. Equipment and materials shall be as manufactured by Notifier or approved equal as manufactured by Edwards or F.C.I. Equipment designations and model numbers herein specified are those of Notifier. It will be the responsibility of the Engineered System Distributor to ensure proper Specification adherence for system operation, final connection, test, turnover, warranty compliance, and after-market service. The distributor of the equipment specified shall be factory trained and certified. All equipment shall be provided by one manufacturer, Notifier, Edwards, or F.C.I.

System Operation 1. The system shall provide means to detect fire conditions within a protected property, transmit the alarm to the Fire Department, alert Building occupants in which the alarm occurred with the use of a new fire alarm system communicator, to supervise each system for conditions which would impair proper system operation and to annunciate such abnormal conditions. 2. Except as permitted by the Fire Marshal, the operation of any alarminitiating device shall cause the evacuation alarm to sound and be displayed on all evacuation signaling devices in all areas of the Building. 3. Systems designed to sound/display evacuation signals only in designated areas shall be provided with means to sound/display the evacuation signal on all connected devices. This means shall be provided at the control panel. 4. Audible/Visual devices shall be speaker / strobes listed for fire alarm service except as otherwise permitted. 5. Visual signaling devices shall be approved for the purpose and shall operate only in those areas where the evacuation signaling is required to be sounded and shall have the word "FIRE" permanently inscribed on their surfaces. 6. The system shall be electrically/electronically supervised against component failure of the entire audio path including wiring, switches and electrical contacts and shall detect opens, shorts, grounds or loss of signal, which might impair the function of the system. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 32 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

E.

Main Fire Alarm Control Panel: 1. The FACP shall be a Notifier Model NFS2-640 or equal as manufactured by Edwards, or F.C.I. and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: addressable detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices. 2. Network Control Modules a. Network Communications Module (NCM-F) shall provide Fire Alarm Control Panels with a means to connect to NOTI•FIRE•NET. b. Main FACP located in school shall be equipped with a NCA-2 Network Control Annunciator. c. Nodes shall be interconnected via fiber-optic cable in minimum of 2” conduit. 3. System Capacity and General Operation a. The control panel shall provide 318 intelligent addressable devices and be expandable to 636 intelligent addressable devices. b. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display, individual, color coded system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad for the Field Programming and Control of the Fire Alarm System. c. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the Fire Alarm Control Panel. d. The FACP shall provide the following features: i. Drift Compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. ii. Sensitivity Test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72. iii. Maintenance Alerts to warn of excessive compensation. iv. System Status Reports to display or printer. v. Alarm Verification, with verification counters. vi. PAS pre-signal, meeting NFPA 72 requirements. vii. Rapid manual station reporting (less than 2 seconds). viii. Non-Alarm points for general (non-fire) control. ix. Periodic Detector Test, conducted automatically by software. x. Pre-alarm for advanced fire warning. xi. Counting "cross-zone" options. xii. Temporal coding. xiii. Walk Test, with check for two detectors set to same address. xiv. Control-By-Time for non-fire operations, with holidays. xv. Day/Night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity. xvi. Device Blink Control for sleeping areas. e. Central Microprocessor i. The Microprocessor unit shall communicate with, monitor, and control all external interfaces with the control panel. It shall include EPROM for system program storage; non-volatile memory for Buildingspecific program storage; and a "watch dog" timer circuit ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 33 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

ii.

iii.

f.

F.

to detect and report microprocessor failure. The Microprocessor unit shall contain and execute all control-by-event programs for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system. Such control-by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs. The Microprocessor Unit shall also provide a Real-Time Clock for time annotation of system displays, printer, and history file. The Time-of-Day and date shall not be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail. The Real Time Clock may also be used to control non-fire functions at programmed time-of-day, day-of-week, and day-of-year.

Display i. The Display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system operator and may also be used to program all system operational parameters. ii. The Display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric labels for all Intelligent Detectors, Addressable Modules, and Software zones. iii. The Display shall provide an 80-character backlit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). It shall also provide 8 Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs) that will indicate the status of the following system parameters: POWER, FIRE ALARM, PRE-ALARM, SECURITY, SUPERVISORY, SYSTEM TROUBLE, SIGNALS SILENCED and POINT DISABLED iv. The Display shall provide a full QWERTY key touch pad with control capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information, and field programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control or programming. v. The Display shall include the following operator functions: SIGNAL SILENCE, RESET, DRILL, ACKNOWLEDGE and LAMP TEST.

System Functional Operation 1. System Alarm Detection and Reporting. a. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices or appliances, the following functions shall immediately occur: i. The System Alarm LED shall flash. ii. A local Piezo-Electric signal in the control panel shall sound. iii. The 80-character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the Fire Alarm condition, including: type of alarm point, its location within the protected premises, and the time and date of that activation. iv. All system output programs assigned via control-byevent equations to be activated by the particular point in ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 34 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3.

alarm shall be executed, and the associated System Outputs (Alarm Indicating Appliances and/or relays) shall be activated. a) A signal shall be sent to the Fire Department via masterbox. Provide a Gamewell 16 zone masterbox and antenna. Installation shall meet all Fire Alarm system requirements for masterbox connections as provided by the Fire Department. A signal shall be sent to a central station via telephone dialer. Provide (2) Cat 5E cable to Building telephone terminal board. b) Close all fire doors. c) Capture the elevator. d) Shut down all HVAC units equipped with duct smoke detectors. v. Unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages, and if such an Alarm occurs during a Trouble sequence, the Alarm condition will have display priority. System Trouble Detection. a. When a trouble condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: i. The System Trouble LED shall flash. ii. A local Piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound. iii. The 80-character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the Fire Alarm trouble condition, including: type of trouble point, its location within the protected premises, and the time and date of that activation. iv. If any of the available optional serially connected equipment is being used, then each of the connected peripherals will display/print the information associated with the Fire Alarm Control Panel condition, including the time/date stamping of the change of status event. v. If applicable, all system output programs assigned via control-by-event equations to be activated by the particular point in trouble shall be executed, and the associated System Outputs (Trouble Indicating Appliances and/or relays) shall be activated. b. Unacknowledged alarm messages shall have priority over trouble messages, and if such an Alarm occurs during a Trouble sequence, the Alarm condition will have display priority. System Common Control Switch Operation. a. Acknowledge (ACK/STEP) Switch. i. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to a single new Alarm and/or Trouble condition shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the System Alarm or Trouble LED from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If additional new Alarm or Trouble conditions exist or are detected and reported in ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 35 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b.

c.

d.

e.

the system, depression of this switch shall advance the 80-character LCD display to the next Alarm or Trouble condition. ii. In this case, the local piezo sounder shall not silence, and the Alarm/Trouble LEDs shall not transfer to their steady-on mode, thus signaling to the operator that more Alarm/Trouble conditions are present in the system. iii. Alarm conditions shall always have display priority before Trouble conditions. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall cause a corresponding (timestamped) message to be displayed on all system peripheral equipment (if used). iv. Occurrence of any new Alarm or Trouble conditions in the system shall cause the Control Panel to resound the Local Piezo sounder and repeat the Alarm or Trouble sequences. Signal Silence Switch. i. Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all programmed Alarm Indicating Appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of indicating circuits and relays, which are silenceable by this switch, shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards. System Reset Switch. i. Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all electronically latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. ii. If the alarm condition(s) still exist, or if they re-occur in the system after System Reset Switch activation, the system shall then resound the alarm conditions. Alarm Verification i. The FACP shall provide Alarm Verification per point with tally. Each of the Intelligent/Addressable Smoke Detectors in the system may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm verified detector. The Alarm Verification Function shall be from 0-60 seconds and each detector shall be able to be enabled/disabled during the field programming of the system, or any time after system turn-on. The Alarm Verification shall not require any additional hardware to be added to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. System Reports. i. The system will be able to generate and print a summary of all of the Detectors, Modules, Pull Stations, and Zones, which are currently active in the System. This printout will require password protection to prevent unauthorized user access, and will automatically print the system report using "soft" (single push) keys. No computer expertise will be required to initiate the System Report sequence. Provide one (1) printer.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 36 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

f.

g.

h.

Signal Silence Inhibit Time i. The Fire Alarm System shall be equipped with a Signal Silence Inhibit feature, which will prevent the operator from silencing any of the signals for a period of seconds. (0-300 seconds). The function of this Signal Silence Inhibit Timer shall be field programmable and its limit shall be field definable, without the need for the installation of any hardware modules into the system. Automatic Signal Cutout Time i. The Fire Alarm System shall be equipped with an Automatic Signal Silence Cut-Out feature which will automatically silence all of the signals after a period of seconds. (000 none; 600 to 900 seconds). The function of this Automatic Signal Silence Cut-Out Timer shall be field programmable and its limit shall be field definable, without the need for the installation of any hardware modules into the system. System Point Operations i. Device Disable a) Any Device in the system may be Enabled or Disabled through the system keypad without the need to reprogram or deprogram any of the operational parameters of the point such as Control-By-Event linkages ii. Output Point Control a) Any system output point may be turned on or off from the system keypad. iii. Point Read a) The system shall be able to perform a point status diagnostic function without the need for peripheral equipment to make the readings. Each point will provide the following parameters: i) Device Status ii) Device Type iii) Custom Device Label (32 character extended) iv) Zone CBE Selection v) Current Alarm Reading (percent) vi) Alarm Sensitivity Level vii) Pre-Alarm Sensitivity Level viii) Cooperative Multi-Detector selection ix) Alarm Verification x) Device SLC Address xi) Switch Inhibit (on/off) xii) Silenceable/Non-silenceable xiii) Walk Test iv. Point Status Report a) Upon command from a password-authorized operator of the system, a report will be generated which details each and every installed detector, module, zone, and annunciator, as well as any and all field programmed parameters which have been assigned to these points and ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 37 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

x.

xi.

xii.

xiii.

(optionally) printed. System History Recording and Reporting a) The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall contain a History Buffer, which will be capable of storing up to 800 system output/input/control activations plus a separate 200 event alarm-only file. Each of these activations will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation, until a password authorized operator requests that the contents be either displayed, or printed. The contents of the History Buffer may be manually reviewed; one event at a time, and the actual number of activations may also be displayed and or printed. History Buffer Reports (whether Displayed or Printed), will be instantly distinguishable from all other displayed or printed system reports through the use of a semicolon in the time/date stamp of the data. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert a) The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall automatically interrogate each Intelligent System Detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time. The FACP shall provide three levels of Maintenance Alert. i) Low Chamber Value. This warning shall indicate that there is a hardware problem in the detector. ii) Maintenance Alert. This warning shall indicate that the dust accumulation is near but below the allowed level and that the detector needs maintenance before the detector performance is compromised. iii) Maintenance Urgent. This warning shall indicate that the dust accumulation is above the allowed limit. Voice Control Module. a) The voice control (speaker-circuit) module shall provide four fully supervised Class A Style Z NAC speaker circuits. An expansion circuit board will allow for expansion up to eight circuits per module. b) Each speaker circuit shall be capable of switching up to 30 watts maximum per circuitor 60 watts per four circuit module. c) The module shall provide green ON/OFF LEDs and yellow trouble LEDs. d) Each speaker circuit module shall be provided with removable wiring terminal blocks for ease of installation and service. The terminal strips shall be UL listed for use with up to 12 AWG wire. Voice Control Center. a) Shall provide hand held microphone with priority

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 38 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b) c)

push to talk switch. Shall provide all call switch and indicator to quickly activate all speaker circuits. Shall provide custom digital message, tone generator and amplifiers.

G.

Monitor Module 1. Monitor Modules, Model No. FMM-1, shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional Alarm Initiating Devices (any N.O. dry contact device, including 4-wire smoke detectors, manual pull stations, waterflow devices and supervisory devices), to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops. The Monitor Module shall mount in a 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep electrical box, to a surface mounted back box, or directly into the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 2. The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. The Monitor module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code, which the Fire Alarm Control Panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

H.

Control Module 1. Control Modules, Model Number FCM-1, shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional Indicating Appliance Circuit (IAC) of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized Audio/Visual Indicating Appliances. The Control Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox, or directly in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 2. The IAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y IAC (Up to 48 Watts of Audio Speaker or 1 Amp of Inductive A/V Signal, or 2 Amps of Resistive A/V Signal) operation. 3. Audio/Visual Power shall be provided by a separate supervised Power Loop from the main Fire Alarm Control Panel or from a supervised, U.L. Listed Remote Power Supply or Amplifier. 4. The Control Module shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code, which the Control Panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Control Module is operational and is in regular communication with the Control Panel.

I.

Relay Module 1. The addressable relay module, FRM-1, shall provide the system with a dry-contact output for activating a variety of auxiliary devices, such as fans, dampers, and control equipment. Addressability allows the dry contact to be activated, either manually or through panel programming. The Relay Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox, or directly in the Fire Alarm Control Panel.

J.

Isolator Module 1. Isolator Modules, Model Number ISO-X, shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on an SLC loop. The Isolator Module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be rendered ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 39 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC Loop. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the Isolator Module shall automatically open-circuit (disconnect) the SLC loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the Isolator Module shall automatically re-connect the isolated section of the SLC loop. The Isolator Module shall not require any address setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an Isolator Module after its normal operation. The Isolator Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch deep electrical box, in a surface mounted backbox, or in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. It shall provide a single LED, which shall flash, to indicate that the Isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated. K.

Addressable Manual Stations 1. Addressable Manual Stations, Model Number NBG-12LX, shall be provided to connect one addressable, supervised Manual Station to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops. 2. The Manual Station shall, on command from the Control Panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall be non-crush tube type with a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual Emergency Operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and shall clearly show the word “ACTIVATED” upon activation. Manual Stations shall be constructed of LEXAN with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches or larger. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox, or semi-flush mounting on a standard single gang box, and shall be installed within the limits defined by the American with Disabilities Act (ADA). The Manual Station shall provide address-setting means using rotary decimal switches and shall also store an internal identifying code, which the control panel shall use to identify the type of device. An LED shall be provided which shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Manual Station is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. The LED may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. The station shall provide a key reset. The key shall be the same as used for the fire control panel. 3. Color of device shall be red.

L.

Intelligent and Addressable Photoelectric Smoke Detectors 1. The Intelligent Photoelectric Detectors, Model Number FSP-851, shall be Intelligent and Addressable, and shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit Loops. The detectors shall use the photoelectric principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. 2. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself, by activating a magnetic switch, or may be activated remotely on command from the control panel. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 40 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

4.

5. 6.

head using rotary decimal switches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use binary jumpers or dipswitches to set the address are not acceptable. The detectors shall also store an internal identifying code, which the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs providing 360 degree viewing angle. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel. Both LEDs may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the flashing mode operation of the detector LEDs shall be controlled through the system field program. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. Detectors that do not provide a 360-degree viewing angle will not acceptable. The detector sensitivity shall be set through the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. There shall be 9 levels of alarm sensitivity and 9 levels of pre-alarm sensitivity to choose from. The detector shall also have the ability to be set for Self-Optimizing that will allow the detector to set itself to the best suited sensitivity. The detector shall display its address, at the detector, during Walk Test.

M.

Intelligent Addressable Duct Smoke Detector 1. The Intelligent Addressable Photoelectric Duct Detectors, DNR with FSP-851R shall be Intelligent and Addressable devices, and shall be connected with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuits. 2. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the fire alarm control panel and appropriate action is taken to shut off fans and blowers and change over air handling systems, throughout the areas served by the duct system. 3. Remote Test Station, RTS1515KEY, shall be provided as shown on the plans. 4. The Electrical Subcontractor shall wire from the duct smoke detector to its respective unit motor starter to shut the unit down upon detection of smoke. The duct smoke detector shall activate the Building’s alarm notification appliances.

N.

Intelligent Heat Detectors 1. The Intelligent Heat Detectors, Model Number FST-851, shall be Intelligent and Addressable devices, and shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line circuits. 2. The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal condition caused by a fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of such thermal measurements. The heat detector shall provide a Fixed 135 degree or a 135-degree Rate of Rise detection as indicated on the Drawings. 3. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base. 4. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel. 5. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using a decimal switch. Because of the possibility of installation error, ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 41 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

6.

7. 8. O.

systems that use binary jumpers or dipswitches to set the address are not acceptable. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs providing 360 degree viewing angle. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions. In certain applications, LEDs may be selected to be polled without flashing through system programming. Both LEDs may be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. Detectors that do not provide a 360degree viewing angle will not be acceptable. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED. The heat detector shall display its address, at the detector, during Walk Test.

Carbon Monoxide Detectors 1.

Furnish and install, where shown on the plans, carbon monoxide detectors, Ultraguard Model CODET 12-24 or equal. Carbon monoxide detectors shall operate on 24 volts and shall be wired through a separate monitor module as a zone and power supply. Altronix Model AL300ULXR or equal.

2.

Carbon monoxide detectors shall be wired as a supervisory signal. Provide all necessary relays and wiring.

P.

ADA High Intensity Strobe Audio-Visual Alarm Indicating Appliances 1. Notifier Model SPSR speaker/strobe with multi candela capability shall be listed with Underwriter's Laboratories for use with Fire Protective Signaling Systems. speaker/strobe shall have a minimum sound output of 96dB @ 10 feet and shall be flush mounted. The speaker shall sound in a Temporal pattern. The strobe shall have a candela rating that meets or exceeds the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and shall be of such rating as shown on the Drawings. The device shall be rated at 24 VDC nominally and have an acceptable operating range of 20-30 VDC. 2. The device shall mount to a 4" square deep with extension ring. 3. All strobes shall be synchronized. 4. Color for ceiling mounted device shall be white and color for wall mounted device shall be red, unless otherwise noted.

Q.

ADA High Intensity Strobe High Audio Output/Audio-Visual Alarm Indicating Applicances 1. Wheelock high performance speakers (ET70-W) and series speaker strobes (ET70-24MCW-FW) shall provide high audio output, clear audibility and field selectrable taps from 1/8 to 8 watts. 2. Any additional amplifiers shall be provided to accommodate required wattage. 3. The device shall mount to a 4” square deep with extension ring. 4. All strobes shall be synchronized. 5. Color of devices shall be white, unless otherwise noted.

R.

ADA High Intensity Strobe Only Unit 1. Notifier Model SR as shown on Drawings, shall be listed with Underwriter's Laboratories for use with Fire Protective Signaling Systems ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 42 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. 3.

and accepted by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. The strobe shall meet or exceed the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and shall be of such rating as shown on the Drawings. The device shall be rated at 24 vdc and shall have a flash rate of 1 HZ. All strobes shall be synchronized. Color for ceiling mounted device shall be white and color for wall mounted device shall be red, unless otherwise noted.

S.

Exterior Strobe Light 1. Maxi-Signal 490S series. The exterior strobe shall also be of weatherresistant rain tight construction. 2. Provide weatherproof backbox. 3. Weatherproof strobe shall be installed where directed by the Fire Department. 4. Color of device shall be red.

T.

Magnetic Door Holders 1. Furnish and install, where shown on the plans, magnetic door holders, Notifier Model FM series. Magnetic door holders shall operate from 120VAC. 2. The housing and contact plates shall be brushed zinc finish. Units shall have a holding force of approximately 35 pounds.

U.

Stopper Covers 1. Provide Notifier Model STI1100 stopper covers on all manual pull stations. The protective shield shall be tamper proof, clear lexan with red frame installed over the fire alarm pull station. When the protective shield is lifted to gain access to the manual pull station, the protective shield shall sound a loud, piercing warning horn. The horn shall be battery powered and may be silenced by lowering and re-aligning the protective shield. Each stopper cover shall include a battery and the Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish two dozen spare batteries for replacement parts.

V.

LCD Alphanumeric Display Annunciators: 1. The Alphanumeric Display annunciators shall be a supervised, local or remotely located back-lit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English test. 2. The LCD annunciators shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system. 3. The annunciators shall connect to an EIA 485 interface, 4. Up to 32 LCD annunciators may be connected to the interface, each with Acknowledge, Silence and Reset controls for the FAC. 5. Provide a graphic annunciator adjacent to each LCD annunciator. The graphic annunciator shall conform to Fire Department requirements.

W.

Fire Alarm/Life Safety System Installation 1. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and Specifications, all applicable Codes, and manufacturer’s' recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of National Electrical Code, Power Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits or if required may be reclassified as nonELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 43 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8.

power limited and wired in accordance with National Electrical Code. Upon completion, the Electrical Subcontractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner. Removal of a smoke detector will not interfere with the transmission of signal from manual stations, waterflow switches, and other initiating devices. All Equipment shall be attached to a non load-bearing wall, and shall be held firmly in place. Fastening and supports shall be adequate to support the required load, and provide a safety factor of five. As indicated on the Riser/Connection Diagram Drawings, each system alarm point or zone in the system shall be uniquely labeled within the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Names of the system point(s)/zone(s) shall be as defined by the Engineer. Fire Sprinkler Activation detecting System(s) shall each be indicated on a separate zone in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Fire Alarm Control Panel will be mounted with the center of panel 60 inches above floor level. All junction boxes shall be sprayed red and labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring color codes shall be maintained throughout the installation. Cable and Wiring. a. Conduit and Conductors: Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment. Unless otherwise specified within the Installation Manual of the specific equipment being used, all field wiring shall be minimum #14 Type in separate conduit, maximum 40% full, and shall be approved for use as Fire Alarm cable. Conduits of proper size shall be installed from the Control Panel; Equipment to field devices. All field devices shall be mounted upon U.L. Listed Electrical junction boxes. All splices in field wiring shall be made in U.L. Listed Electrical junction boxes. All Electrical junction boxes shall be labeled as "Fire Alarm System" with decal or other approved markings. The Fire Alarm/Life Safety Installation shall comply fully with all Local, State and National Codes, and the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). b. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Main Power Distribution Panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire Alarm Control Panel Primary Power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The Control Panel Cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. Conduit shall enter into the Fire Alarm Control Panel backbox only at those areas of the backbox, which have factory conduit knockouts. c. All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power failure, disconnected standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or any open circuits in the field wiring; an audible and visual trouble signal will be activated until the system and its associated field wiring are restored to normal condition. d. Fire alarm MC cable shall be allowed above ceilings, in attics and in other areas allowing surface wiring if so approved by the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction. e. Cable shall be the type listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety use and shall be installed per National Electrical Code. f. Cable for Addressable/Intelligent Alarm Initiating Appliances ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 44 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

g.

h.

i.

j. k. l.

m.

X.

(Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, and Smoke Detectors) shall be connected as shown on the riser diagram. Cable shall be installed from the Fire Alarm Control Panel to all devices in that Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) loop. The connection and continuity of the wires, which make up that SLC loop will be continuously supervised for shorts, opens, and ground circuit conditions. Cable for Alarm Initiating Devices and Appliances (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, and Smoke Detectors) shall be connected to the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and labeled as shown on the riser diagram. Cable shall be installed from the Fire Alarm Control Panel to all devices in that Initiating Device Circuit (IDC) loop. The connection of the cable to that loop will be continuously supervised for shorts, opens, and ground circuit conditions. Cable for Alarm Indicating Appliances (Audible or Visual or combination signal(s)) shall be connected on a per zone basis. Cable shall be installed from the Fire Alarm Control Panel to all devices in that Indicating Appliance Circuit (IAC) loop. The connection of the cable to that loop will be continuously supervised for shorts, opens, and ground circuit conditions. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, as per National Electrical Code. All exposed cable below 84 inches from the surface of the finished floor, or other locations where the cable may become exposed and/or damaged, must be within a steel conduit. Conduits must also be provided in elevator shafts and hoist ways. Cables within ducts or plenums must conform with the Specifications of the National Electrical Code. Conduit shall not enter the Fire Alarm Control Panel, or any other remotely mounted Control Panel equipment or back boxes, except where conduit entry knockouts have been provided by the factory. Cable shall meet all the manufacturer's requirements including shielding, twists, capacitance, resistance and gauge. The cable shall not be installed without approval of the manufacturer in writing.

Final System Acceptance. 1. The system will be accepted only after a Factory-Trained Distributor in the presence of the Electrical Subcontractor, the owner’s representative and the Local Fire Marshal have accomplished a satisfactory test of the entire system, in accordance with NFPA 72. Upon completion of a successful test, the Electrical Subcontractor shall so certify in writing to the Owner. The Electrical Subcontractor shall pay all back charges assessed by the Fire Department for all fire alarm system tests. 2. The Electrical Subcontractor shall submit, in the Shop Drawings, a letter confirming that they will provide a U.L. listed testing company to provide the acceptance test. 3. The Electrical Subcontractor will present a complete set of "As- Built" Fire Alarm/Life Safety system Drawings, and the factory supplied Operator's Manual to the Building Owner's Representative and the local AHJ. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 45 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4.

5.

Y.

2.21

The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide the on-site services of an Authorized, Factory Trained technical representative to supervise all connections and fully test all devices and components of the system during installation phase. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide comprehensive Training on the operation, proper use, and testing of the installed Fire Alarm System to the Building Owner's Representative, and the local AHJ

Warranty 1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system, wiring and equipment, to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of the completed and certified test or from the date of the first beneficial use.

PUBLIC SAFETY SIGNAL BOOSTER SYSTEM A.

Furnish and install a signal booster system complete with all components and wiring required for compliance with all applicable Codes and Regulations. The system shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. One donor antenna to be located on the roof. Run a ½” plenum rated non-radiating coaxial cable from the directional antenna to the Bidirectional Amplifier (BDA). Cable shall be equal to ICA12-50JPLW (1/2” plenum coax). 2. This Specification is based upon an NFPA Compliant TX/RX Rescue Line SBII system. The BDA shall be a TX/RX Rescue Line SBII, Motorola, and Bird Technologies, or equal. Frequencies shall be coordinated with the Fire and Police departments and the amplifier shall meet all Fire and Police department communications requirements. 3. Furnish a ½” plenum rated radiating cable from the BDA to above the corridor ceilings on each floor. At minimum provide radiating plenum rated radiating cable above the corridor ceilings paralleling the routing of the cable tray shown on the Drawings. Radiating cable shall be supported every 5’-0” from the cable tray with a 3” standoff. Provide antennas at a minimum of one every 200’ along the radiating cable routing. Provide any additional cabling in strict accordance with manufacturer’s Specifications as well as current National Electrical Code to provide complete coverage for the system. A pre and a post signal strength test shall be provided at the job site. Signal strengths shall be noted on a set of plans both pre and post test.

B.

Vertical riser backbone cabling and associated splitters, couplers, and taps shall be installed in two hour rated electric rooms and shafts. Splitters, couplers, and taps throughout system shall be accessible for testing, future service, and/or replacement. Provide access panels where required. Where vertical riser backbone cabling exits two hour rated enclosure provide fire stopping around penetrations.

C.

Signal Strength 1. The Fire and Police Department radio test shall check the signal reception in several locations on the floor area. Signal strength shall provide for clear reception throughout the Building utilizing the type of hand held radio unit that is used by the Fire and Police Department. Quantity of test locations shall be determined and conducted by the local

 

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 46 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

department representative. Each floor of the Building shall be divided into a grid of approximately twenty (20) equal areas. A maximum of one (1) area will be allowed to fail the test per floor. A spot located approximately in the center of a grid area will be selected for the test. Once the spot has been selected, prospecting for a better spot within the grid area will not be permitted. Field strength testing instruments are to be recently calibrated (1 year) and of the frequency selective type incorporating a flexible antenna similar to the ones used on the hand held transceivers. D.

Required Signal Levels: 1. Signal strength shall provide for clear reception throughout the Building utilizing hand held radio units of the type(s), which are used by the Fire/Police Department. Signal strength testing shall follow TSB-88 standards using delivered audio quality measurements (DAQ). 2. A minimum signal strength of –95 dBm (DAQ4) shall be available on over 99% of the floor area required to be covered when transmitted from the fire department. 3. A minimum signal strength of –95 dBm (DAQ4) shall be received at the fire department system from over 99% of the floor area required to be covered.

E.

Primary Power 1. The emergency responder radio coverage system shall be powered by a dedicated independent circuit of sufficient size. The circuit shall be clearly marked. The location of the electrical panel shall be clearly marked at location approved by the fire official. The primary power source shall be supplied from a dedicated twenty (20) ampere branch circuit and comply with NFPA 72.

F.

Secondary Power 1. The emergency responder radio coverage system shall be equipped with a secondary source of power. The secondary source of power shall be a backup battery system which is serially connected to the BDA system (no UPS units). The secondary power supply shall supply power automatically when the primary power source is lost. The secondary source of power shall be capable of operating the emergency responder radio coverage system for a period of at least 12 hours at 100% system operation capacity. All components of the battery backup system shall be housed completely in a NEMA 4 or 4X cabinet and mount below the BDA. System shall have front panel display and alarms. Monitoring the integrity of power supplies shall be in accordance with NFPA 72. Unit shall be TX/RX 6160 Battery Option.

G.

Alarm Monitoring Panel 1. A dedicated monitoring panel shall be provided adjacent to the fire alarm control panel to annunciate the status of the signal booster. The monitoring panel shall provide visual and labeled indication of the following for the booster: a. Normal AC power b. Signal booster trouble c. Loss of normal AC power d. Failure of battery charger e. Low battery capacity ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 47 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

2.22

2.23

The above mentioned alarm points shall be outputs from the BDA system as dedicated relay points. These can be monitored via addressable monitor modules to the fire alarm system in lieu of a dedicated BDA monitoring panel.

H.

All equipment shall have a current FCC Certification.

I.

Equipment integrator shall be a certified service center with factory certified technician(s).

J.

Warranty: The BDA shall include a 5 year equipment warranty. Include any necessary costs for equipment to contain this warranty level.

K.

Submittals: 1. Submit manufacturer’s data on system and components including Shop Drawings, floor plans with layout of all equipment, cabling, riser diagram for project (typical riser diagram is not acceptable), and mounting equipment and details. 2. Provide copies of personnel certifications in submittal.

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY A.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for properly preparing the project for installation by the Electronic Safety and Security Integrator, Section 28 00 00 as specified.

B.

Responsibilities of the Electrical Subcontractor shall include: The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all related Building preparation including, but not limited to: outlet boxes, pathways, power, cableways and J hooks to facilitate a neat and orderly installation of cables, cable protection, surface raceways, cable supports, conduits with bushings, conduit stubs with bushings. Sleeves with bushings (all conduits, stubs, and sleeves shall be brought to an accessible hallway ceiling or accessible area below floor), backboxes, pull strings, bonding, grounding, core drilling, cutting, patching, fireproofing of penetrations and openings, environmental seals, smoke and fire stopping seals including all conduits, raceways, sleeves, and slots where cables pass from one location to another, removal and re-installation of ceiling tiles to install concealed cabling, seismic supports, supplementary steel and channels, for a completely operational system as specified. The Electrical Subcontractor shall also accept delivery and properly store and secure all equipment and materials required by the Systems Integrator. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install all specialized backboxes.

C.

Responsibilities of the Electronic Safety and Security Integrator for this Section: The Electronic Safety and Security Integrator shall be responsible for providing, installing, programming, troubleshooting, training and warranty service of all cabling and equipment specified in this Section for a completely operational system. The Electronic Safety and Security Integrator shall furnish all specialized backboxes to the Electrical Subcontractor for their installation.

CABLE TRAY A.

Conform to NEMA VE1.

B.

Ladder Type Cable Trays: ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 48 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

C.

2.24

Material: Aluminum 6036-T6 alloy. Width: 20 inches overall. Inside depth: 6 inches. Cross rung spacing: 9 inches. Minimum fitting radius: 24 inches. Design Load: Provide tray capable of supporting 50 pounds per linear foot, when supported on 12 foot centers. Hangers: 1/2 inch diameter threaded steel rods; furnish with pair of 1/2 inch nut and washers for each rod. Rods shall be supported from the structural floor above, independent of furred or suspended ceilings, unless otherwise noted.

Cable Tray Accessories 1. Fittings: Furnish tees, crosses, risers, elbows, and other fittings as indicated, manufactured with the same materials and finishes as the cable trays. 2. Cable tray supports and connectors, including bonding jumpers, as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

SCOREBOARDS A.

Furnish as hereinafter specified wall mounted Fair-Play electronic scoreboards as indicated on Drawings. Each scoreboard shall include all equipment as hereinafter specified and shall be a Model BB-1620-4 LED Digit with metric clock. Equipment in this Section shall be as manufactured by Fair-Play, Daktronics, Nevco, or equal. 1. Scoreboard Construction a. BB-1620-4 LED Digit scoreboard Provide BB-1620-4 scoreboards as indicated on Drawings, 9' 0" x 5' 0" displaying: ◊ Automatic second-by-second display of time remaining or time elapsed in minutes and seconds for periods up to 99:59 minutes or less. Metric clock shows tenths of a second and seconds during last minute, also two hour memory in case of power loss. ◊ Period number 0 through 9 ◊ Bonus arrows ◊ Team scores 0 through 199 ◊ Team fouls 0 through 99 ◊ Uniform number 0 through 99 ◊ Total fouls for individual player 0 through 9 ◊ Volleyball and wrestling captions ◊ Time Advantage Clock ◊ Next possession indicators ◊ Gloss white enameled captions: “HOME” and “VISITOR” ◊ Operator’s master console with running time display, 10 ft. flexible cords to operate all functions and carrying case required ◊ Control receptacles with covers ◊ Assortment of spare lamps and fuses ◊ Complete set of operating and maintenance instructions Scoreboard housing shall be of rigid completely enclosed, all aluminum construction, and are provided with brackets for wall mounting. Service access for ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 49 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b.

c. d.

e. f. g.

C.

exchange of lamps of plug-in components is from the front of the housing and no tools shall be required. Exposed exterior surfaces shall be immersion etched and finished in dark non-reflecting enamels with gloss white captions and trim. Color to be selected by Architect. ◊ Receiver for wireless control. Display Modules LED digit numerals 12 in. high, for time and score and 10 in. high for period. All LED digits have a life expectancy of over 100,000 operating hours. Each numeral is covered by Lexanâ material protecting them from damage due to stray basketballs and volleyballs. Numerals shall appear amber, red and green on a jet-black background. Bonus arrows and possession arrows are red. Electronic Systems Electronics to be solid state low voltage encased in completely “plug-in” paks. Battery Operated Control Console with Wireless Transmitter i. Shall be Model MP-70 with padded carrying case. Requires 120V AC power of battery source and draws 12 watts. Construction shall be an aluminum case 123/4” long by 2-1/4” high by 8” deep with 4 rubber slideresistant feel. Operating features shall include a two-line LCD readout showing information as sent to the scoreboard display as well as constant display of time remaining or time lapsed; a changeable color coded keypad to allow key identification change by sport, numeric key pad, plus and minus keys for quick sequential data entry, a push-type horn button and a positive action rocker switch for the “Time In” and “Time Out” function. ii. Electronic features shall include a program mode allowing change in sport controlled or accommodation of a sport rules change, a memory circuit to retain information if power interrupted and electronic foul memory. iii. Furnished with one battery with charger and one transmitter for battery operated wireless control. iv. Provide one Control Console for each scoreboard. Horn i. The horn is a special Electronic constant duty scoreboard horn with a decibel level of 100. Power Requirements i. Model BB-1620-4: 120V.AC, 1 phase, 50/60Hz - 168 watts. E.T.L./Electrical Testing Laboratory Approval i. This scoreboard carries the E.T.L. label signifying this organization’s testing and approval as a safe and dependable design.

Furnish and deliver as hereinafter specified Fair-Play electronic LED digit shot timers as indicated on Drawings. The shot timers shall be a Model ST-1410-4 ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 50 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

LED digit and include all the equipment as hereinafter specified. 1. Shot Timer System a. ST-1410-4 Timer System The timer system operates from the MP-70 Scoreboard Control and consists of the following: ◊ Provide a Shot Timer Hand Switch for each Control Console provided. ◊ Display modules with vibrating horn and 18" power cord ◊ 10 Ft. cords w/plugs on each end. ◊ Receiver for wireless control. b. Shot Timer Construction The timer display unit shall be constructed of an all metal frame for indoor use and shall be approximately 17" x 20". Approximate wt: 50 lbs. c. Display Modules LED digit numerals shall be 12" high. All LED digits have a life expectancy of over 100,000 operating hours. Each numeral is covered by Lexanâ material protecting them from damage due to stray basketballs and volleyballs. Electrical connection to the timer display is by flat flexible printed Mylar circuitry. Insuring proper socket and connector alignment. Numerals shall appear red on a jet black background. Each display incorporates a vibrator horn and comes with 18" power cord.

2.25

DRY TYPE K-RATED TRANSFORMERS A.

Description 1. This Specification describes the design of a copper wound, multishielded, three phase, K-factor rated, high efficiency, power conditioning isolation transformer. The power conditioning transformer specified must be a continuous duty rated, 600 volt class, convection cooled, dry type, isolation transformer to support harmonic rich non-linear loads while maintaining safe operating temperatures and shall include superior transverse and common mode noise attenuation. The power conditioning transformer shall meet NEMA TP 1-2002 dry type transformer efficiency standards. In addition, the transformer shall be designed to achieve NEMA TP 1-2002 Table 1-1 efficiencies under K-13 non-linear load at or between 35% to 50% of its rating as outlined in Section G, 10, of this Specification Section.

B.

Standards 1. The power conditioning system shall be designed in accordance with applicable portions of the following standards: a. NEMA TP 1-2002 Dry Type Distribution Transformer Efficiency Standards. b. American National Standards Institute (ANSI C57.110 and C62.41-1991). c. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE 519-1992). d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). e. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS Pub 94). ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 51 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

f. g.

UL Listed to Standard 1561. C-UL listed to CSA Standard C22.2, No. 47-M90.

C.

Submittals 1. Manufacturer Requirements: a. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001:2008 “Quality Assurance Certified” and shall upon request furnish certification documents. b. The manufacturer shall be a United States based manufacturer with at least 15 years’ experience in design and fabrication Krated, shielded, power conditioning isolation transformers. 2. Product Data: a. The manufacturer shall supply documentation for the installation of the system, including wiring diagrams and cabinet outlines showing dimensions, weights, BTUs, input/output connection locations and required clearances. b. Factory test results and design data shall be provided to show compliance with the requirements.

D.

Manufacturer’s 1. The equipment specified is the Ultra-K, Series 600K, manufactured by Controlled Power Company. Equipment shall be as manufactured by Controlled Power Company, Acme, Siemens, or equal.

E.

Input Specifications 1. The nominal AC input voltage rating of the power conditioner shall be 480 VAC 3 phase with sufficient margin to sustain a constant input of +10% without saturation. 2. The nominal operating frequency shall be 60 hertz + 3 hertz. 3. The power conditioning transformer primary shall be configured in a three phase delta. Transformers below 500kVA shall include full capacity taps at 2½ % increments, two (2) above and four (4) below the nominal voltage tap. 4. When energized, the current inrush shall not exceed a maximum of 10 times the full load input current for a 1/2 cycle.

F.

Output Specifications 1. The nominal AC output voltage rating of the power conditioning transformer shall be 208 VAC wye derived, 60 hertz. 2. The output impedance of the power conditioning transformer shall be 3% - 4% typical. 3. The power conditioning transformer shall be K-13 rated in accordance 2 2 with: K = ∑ Ih(pu) h 4. The power conditioning transformer shall provide a continuous duty, full load output power as indicated on Drawings.

G.

Performance Specifications 1. The output voltage of the power conditioning transformer shall be maintained within +2.5% or less of nominal, from no load to full load. 2. The overload rating of the power conditioning transformer shall be 500% for 10 seconds, and 1,000% for one cycle.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 52 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3. 4. 5.

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

The power conditioning transformer shall add no more than 1% total harmonic distortion to the output waveform under a linear load. Output voltage shall remain sinusoidal with no flat topping when high crest factor (3.0:1), non-linear loads are present at the output. The audible noise of the power conditioning transformer shall be no greater than measurements indicated below: a. 50 dB for 15 KVA to 112.5 KVA units measured at 1 meter. b. 55 dB for 150 KVA to 225 KVA units measured at 1 meter. c. 60 dB for 300 KVA to 500 KVA units measured at 1 meter. The power conditioning transformer shall incorporate a solid copper foil, triple electrostatic shield to minimize inner winding capacitance, transient and noise coupling between primary and secondary windings. Transformer shall be triple-shielded and capable of 146dB common mode noise attenuation. Transformer shall be capable of transverse mode noise attenuation of 3 dB down at 10kHz, decaying 20 dB per decade. The power conditioning transformer shall have an efficiency of 98% typical and shall meet NEMA TP 1-2002 dry type transformer efficiency standards on models 15kVA and above. The power conditioning transformer shall be designed to achieve NEMA TP 1-2002 Table 1-1 efficiencies listed below under a K-13 non-linear load at or between 35% to 50% load and at an operating temperature of 75 degrees C. kVA 15* 30 45 75 112.5 150 225 300 500

Efficiency 97.00% 97.50% 97.70% 98.00% 98.20% 98.30% 98.50% 98.60% 98.70%

*15kVA model efficiency applicable to K4 and K7 loading only. 11.

H.

The power conditioning transformer shall incorporate a fused (with front panel mounted, blown fuse lamp indicator) 3 phase, secondary connected, 6 mode spike suppression network. The suppressor shall be comprised of high energy metal oxide varistors with less than a 5 nanosecond response time and a maximum peak current handling capability of 40,000 amps (8x20µsec) per mode. The suppression network system shall remain functional when subjected to ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category B-3 waveforms. The spike suppression network will increase the transverse mode noise attenuation to 3 dB down at 10kHz, decaying 40 dB per decade.

Main Transformer Construction 1. The transformer windings shall be all copper conductor construction, with separate primary and secondary, isolated windings. The transformer shall conform to National Electrical Code that specifies a separately

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 53 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9.

2.26

derived power source. The neutral conductor shall be provided at 2 times the ampacity of the phase conductor. Terminals shall be provided for isolated three phase output conductors, neutral conductor and ground. Output neutral shall be bonded to ground via a removable jumper wire or bus bar. All leads, wires and terminals shall be labeled to correspond with the circuit wiring diagram. Basic Impulse level shall be no less than 10,000 Volts. Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) shall be no less than 200,000 hours. Grain oriented, M6 grade, silicon transformer steel shall be utilized to provide maximum efficiency. Flux density shall not exceed 15k gauss. Core losses shall be limited to 0.6% or less of the KVA rating. Class N, 200°C insulation system shall be utilized throughout with a maximum temperature rise above ambient of 115°C under a linear load, not to exceed 130°C under non-linear loading per UL 1561. The transformer shall be designed for natural convection cooling.

I.

Cabinet Construction 1. The cabinet shall be a NEMA type 2 general purpose, floor mounted, indoor enclosure. Dimensions shall not exceed TABLE 1-2 dimensions below. 2. Cabinets shall be manufactured from 14 gauge steel with base substructure suitable for fork lifting. 3. The cabinet shall have a baked on powder coat paint finish with proper pre-treatment. 4. Input and output power connections shall be hardwired to copper stand off bus located behind the front panel of the transformer cabinet. Input and output locations shall be available on either side of transformer cabinet.

J.

Environment 1. Temperature: The power conditioning system shall be required to operate without overheating in an ambient temperature range of -20°C to +40°C. 2. Humidity: The power conditioning system shall operate in a relative humidity of 0 to 95% non-condensing. 3. Altitude: The power conditioning system shall operate up to 5000 feet above sea level without de-rating.

K.

Warranty 1. Manufacturer shall guarantee the power conditioning transformer to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 2 years following shipment from the factory.

LIGHTNING PROTECTION A.

General: 1. Scope a. The work covered by this Section of the Specifications consists of providing services of a qualified lightning protection engineer, labor and materials required for the design and installation of a ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 54 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2.

3.

B.

functional and unobtrusive lightning protection system. System shall comply with the latest issue of Underwriters’ Laboratories, Incorporated Master Label Code 96A and NFPA Code No. 780 Lightning Protection Systems. At the completion of the installation an Underwriters’ Laboratories, Incorporated Master Label shall be furnished to the Owner. b. If any departure from the Drawings or Shop Drawings covered below are deemed necessary by the Electrical Subcontractor, details of such departures and reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practicable to the Architect for approval. No such departures shall be made without prior written approval of the Architect. Quality Assurance a. The system to be furnished under this Specification shall be the standard product of the manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of lightning protection systems and shall be the manufacturer’s latest approved design. The equipment manufacturer shall also be an approved manufacturer. All material specified in this Section is manufactured by Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Company, Inc., 11291 Moore Road, Springfield, New York 14141. Lightning protection shall be as manufactured by Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Company Inc., Boston Lightning Rod Inc., East Coast Lightning Equipment, Inc., or approved equal. Submittals a. Complete Shop Drawings showing the type, size, and locations for all equipment, grounds and cable routings, shall be submitted to the Architect for approval prior to start of work. b. Samples and pertinent catalog data shall be submitted to the Architect for approval upon request,

Products: 1.

Standard a. All equipment shall be new, the product of a single manufacturer as outlined above, and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted industry standards. b. Equipment i. All materials shall be copper or bronze and of the size, weight and construction to suit the application where used in accordance with requirements for Class I structures and as per manufacturer recommendations. ii. Conductors shall be copper, 29 strands, 17 gauge minimum, Heary Bros. Cat. No. HB-29-17C. iii. Air terminals shall be solid, round copper bar of 3/8” minimum diameter. Heary Bros. Cat. No. HB308C, and shall project 10” minimum above the object to be protected. Locate and space according to requirements. iv. Air terminal bases shall be of cast bronze with bolt pressure cable connections and shall be securely mounted with stainless steel screws or bolts. Crimp type connectors are not acceptable. v. Heary Bros. Cat. No. HB16C, 32C, 38C. and 25C. Bases ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 55 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

vi.

vii.

viii.

ix. x. C.

on built-up tar and gravel roofs shall be secured with a proper adhesive and shall have a minimum surface contact area of 18.5 sq. inches, Cat. No. HB23C. Ground rods shall be a minimum 5/8” in diameter and 10’-0” long. Heary Bros. Cat. No. HB106GR. They shall be connected to the system with a two-bolt cast bronze clamp. Heary Bros. Cat. No. HB111X, having a minimum length of 1-1/2” and employing stainless steel cap screws. Cable fasteners shall be substantial in construction, electrolytically compatible with the conductor and mounting surface and shall be spaced according to requirements. Heary Bros. Cat. No. HB66C, 72C, 64C. Bonding devices, cable splicers and miscellaneous connectors shall be of cast bronze with bolt pressure connections to cable. Cast or stamped crimp fittings are not acceptable. Splicers similar to Heary Bros. Cat. No. HB57C, 26C, 501C bonding devices similar to Heary Bros. Cat. No. HB54C, 97C, 178B, 57XXC, 42C. Equipment on stacks and chimneys shall be protected from corrosion and sized in accordance with requirements. All miscellaneous bolts, nuts and screws shall be brass, bronze or stainless steel.

Execution: 1.

2.

Installation a. The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installer. The installer shall work under the direct supervision of a manufacturer as listed above or his authorized representative. b. All equipment shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner in the most inconspicuous manner as possible. The system shall consist of a complete cable network on the roof involving all air terminals, splices and bonds with cable downloads routed concealed in the Building construction in conduit to ground rod. c. Downlead cables shall not be brought directly through the roof. Conduit through proper roof flashings shall be utilized for this purpose. d. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all necessary PVC conduit for concealed down conductors. e. Copper equipment shall not be connected to aluminum surfaces except by means of a bi-metal transition fittings. Lead coating is not to be accepted as a bi-metal transition. Coordination a. The lightning protection installer will work with other trades to insure a correct, neat and unobtrusive installation. b. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to assure a sound bond to the main water service and to assure interconnection with other Building ground systems, including both telephone and electrical. Proper arresters shall be installed on the power and telephone service by either the utility or the Electrical Subcontractor as applicable. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 56 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

2.27

2.28

Completion a. The lightning protection installer shall secure and deliver the AsBuilt Shop Drawings to the Architect for the Owner upon completion of the installation.

COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM A.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for properly preparing the project for installation by the Communications Integrator, Section 27 10 00, 27 21 33, 27 40 00, 27 50 00 and 27 70 00 as specified.

B.

Responsibilities of the Electrical Subcontractor shall include: The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all related Building preparation including, but not limited to: outlet boxes with plaster rings, floor boxes, poke through devices, pathways, power, cableways, J hooks, cable tray including cable tray over each rack and cabinet to facilitate a neat and orderly installation of cables, cable protection, wiremold, surface raceways, cable supports, conduits with bushings, conduit stubs with bushings. Sleeves with bushings (all conduits, stubs, and sleeves, shall be brought to an accessible hallway ceiling or accessible area below floor), backboxes, plaster rings, pull strings, bonding, grounding, core drilling, cutting, patching, fireproofing of penetrations and openings, environmental seals, smoke and fire stopping seals including all conduits, raceways, sleeves, and slots, where cables pass from one location to another, removal and re-installation of ceiling tiles to install concealed cabling, seismic supports, supplementary steel and channels, for a completely operational system as specified. The Electrical Subcontractor shall also accept delivery and properly store and secure all equipment and materials required by the systems integrator. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install all specialized backboxes (clock, speaker, and amplifier) and any exterior antennas provided by the Systems Integrator. 1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for providing and installing: conduits from each IDF location back to the MDF location to comply with Code for applicable sound, voice, data and video cabling: conduits from the Point of Demarcation to the MDF location to comply with Code for applicable sound, voice, data and video cabling: conduits from the Video Headend location back to the MDF location to comply with Code for applicable video cabling.

C.

Responsibilities of the Communications Integrator for this Section: The Communications Integrator shall be responsible for providing, installing, programming, troubleshooting, training and warranty service of all cabling, terminal equipment, headend equipment specified in this Section for a completely operational system. The Communications Integrator shall furnish all specialized backboxes (clock, speaker, and amplifier) and all exterior antennas to the Electrical Subcontractor for their installation.

ZERO SEQUENCE HARMONIC FILTERS A.

Quality Assurance 1. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 57 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. 3. 4. 5.

Transformers shall be CSA certified and UL listed. Transformers shall be EPA Energy Star listed. Transformers shall be factory tested to CSA C9. Transformers shall meet all relevant CSA, EPA, IEEE, NEMA, NFPA, and UL standards.

B.

Submittals 1. Shop Drawings shall include: a. Enclosure dimensions. b. Mounting devices. c. Terminals. d. Taps. e. Internal and external component layout. f. Amperage (neutral). g. kVA rating. h. Voltage. i. Frequency. j. BIL level. k. Insulation class.

C.

Operations and Maintenance Manuals 1. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall include: a. Recommended environmental conditions. b. Recommended periodic inspections and maintenance.

D.

Materials 1.

Type ‘I0Filter’, Zero Sequence Harmonic Filter (Dry Type) to CSA C9.

E.

Product Description – The design of the zero sequence harmonic filter, described in this Specification, shall be optimized for harmonic rich environments that are characterized by high neutral currents. These filters shall: 1. Provide an ultra-low zero sequence impedance path for all third order, load-generated zero sequence harmonic currents, including I3, I9, I15, I21. 2. Reduce neutral current between the point of filter application and the power source. 3. Reduce voltage and current distortion. 4. Reduce voltage and current imbalance. 5. Reduce CMN (neutral-ground voltage) at the point of application. 6. Reduce current crest factor. 7. Reduce average and peak phase. 8. Increase voltage stability during single-phase disturbance. 9. Reduce system losses. 10. Improve system power factor. 11. Harmonic cancellation shall be by electromagnetic means only. No capacitors or electronics shall be used.

F.

Device Configuration 1. Type: ANN. 0 2. Insulation Class: 220 C. 3. Temperature Rise: 150 Deg. C. 4. System Frequency: 60 Hertz. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 58 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

5. 7. 8.

System Voltage: 208 Volts. BIL: 10,000 Volts (windings 1000V or less). Rating: As indicated on Drawings.

G.

Filter Characteristics 1. Key Requirements a. Zero sequence reactance at 60Hz: <0.3. b. Zero sequence impedance at 60Hz: <0.9. c. Neutral connection shall be rated at three times the ampacity of the phase current. 2. Basic Requirements: a. Built to the following Standards: CSA C9-M1981, CSA22.2 No.47-1977, UL-506, ANSI C75.110, and NEMA ST-20. b. Three-phase, common core construction. c. Convection air-cooled. d. Copper Windings. e. Type: ANN. f. Insulation Class: R. 0. g. Temperature rise: 150 h. Voltage Class: 1.2kV. i. BIL Rating: 10kV. j. Magnetic field at 1.5 feet: max. 0.1 Gauss. k. Full load Efficiency at 170°C: EPA Energy Star requirements. l. Sound level: per C57.12.91. m. Enclosure: ventilated, drip-proof NEMA-1. n. Finish: PQI super white power coat. o. Anti-vibration pads shall be used between the core and the enclosure. 3. Options: a. Over-temperature alarm - wired to internal terminal strip: i. Contact (one per set point): normally closed. ii. Set point: 180°C. iii. Epoxy vacuum impregnation.

H.

Vendor Information: 1. Evidence of significant relevant application experience. 2. Quantitative performance data including before/after effect on voltage distortion at load panels that demonstrates the capability to achieve the harmonic mitigation called for in this Specification. 3. Product technical Specification. 4. Pertinent product application information.

I.

Certification: 1. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. 2. Device shall be CSA certified and UL listed. 3. EPA Energy Star listed.

J.

Warranty: 1. Manufacturer shall guarantee that the product will perform as described in Section E of this Specification Section. 2. Manufacturer shall warranty the product against defective materials and workmanship. 3. Minimum terms and conditions: 15 year, with standard limited liability clauses. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 59 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

K.

2.29

Acceptable Mfr and Product: 1. Power Quality International, Inc. – I.Filter™, Powersmiths, Square D, or equal.

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM A.

Equipment provided under this Section shall be all manufactured by a sole manufacturer. Submittals with multiple manufacturers will not be accepted.

B.

Introduction 1. The work covered in this Section is subject to the requirements in the General Conditions of the Specifications. Electrical Subcontractor shall coordinate the work in this Section with the trades covered in other Sections of the Specification to provide a complete and operable system.

C.

System Description 1. Extent of lighting control system work is indicated by Drawings and by the requirements of this Section. It is the intent of this Section to provide an integrated, energy saving lighting control system including Lighting Control Panels, Occupancy Sensors, and Daylighting Controls from a single supplier. Electrical Subcontractor is responsible for confirming that the panels and sensors interoperate as a single system.

D.

Quality Assurance 1. Manufacturer’s: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. 2. Comply with NEC, NEMA, and FCC Emission requirements for Class A applications. 3. UL Approvals: Relay panels and accessory devices are to be UL listed under UL 916 Energy Management Equipment. Configured to order or custom relay panels shall be UL Listed under UL 508, Industrial Control Panels.

E.

Submittals 1. Submit manufacturer's data on lighting control system and components including Shop Drawings, detailed point to point wiring diagrams, and floor plans showing occupancy and daylighting sensor locations. Provide typical mounting details for occupancy and daylighting sensors for this application.

F.

Manufacturer’s 1. This Specification is based upon products from WattStopper. Equipment shall be as manufactured by WattStopper, Lutron, Philips Controls, Crestron, Cooper, or equal. All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified herein, shall meet or exceed the equipment standards. For equipment other than that specified, the Electrical Subcontractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment does in fact equal or exceed the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. 2. All references to manufacturer's or supplier's model numbers and other ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 60 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent equipment (compatible UL Listed) from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment. G.

Lighting Control Panels 1. Provide lighting control panels in the locations and capacities as indicated on the plans and schedules. Each panel shall be of modular construction and consist of the following components: a. Enclosure/Tub shall be NEMA 1, NEMA 3R, or NEMA 4 as indicated on the plans, sized to accept an interior with 1-8 relays, 1-24 relays and six (6) four pole contactors, or 1-48 relays with six (6) four pole contactors. b. Cover shall be configured for surface or flush wall mounting of the panel as indicated on the plans. The panel cover shall have a hinged and lockable door with restricted access to line voltage section of the panel. c. Interior assembly shall be supplied as a factory assembled component specifically designed and listed for field installation. The interior construction shall provide total isolation of high voltage (class 1) wiring from low voltage (class 2) wiring within the assembled panel. The interior assembly shall include intelligence boards, power supply, DIN rails for mounting optional Class 2 control devices, and individually replaceable latching type relays. The panel interiors shall include the following features: i. Provision for one or two optional control and automation cards. ii. Removable, plug-in terminal blocks with screw-less connections for all low voltage terminations. iii. Individual terminal block, override push button, and LED status light for each relay iv. Switch inputs associated with each relay and group channel shall support two or three wire, momentary or maintained contact switches or 24VDC input from occupancy sensors. v. Automatic support for occupancy sensor sequence of operation. Low voltage inputs automatically reconfigure when connected to a WattStopper occupancy sensor head. Occupancy sensor shall switch lighting on and off during unoccupied periods but shall not turn lighting off during scheduled occupancy periods. vi. Isolated contacts within each relay shall provide true relay state to the electronics. True relay state shall be indicated by the on-board LED and shall be available to external control devices and systems. vii. Automatic sequenced operation of relays reduces impact on the electrical distribution system when large loads are controlled simultaneously. viii. Group, channel, and pattern control of relays shall be provided through a simple button-press interface within the panel. Any group of relays can be associated with a channel for direct on/off control or pattern (scene) control via a simple programming sequence using the relay and ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 61 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

ix.

x.

channel override push buttons and LED displays. Relay group status for each channel shall be provided through bi-color operation of the LED indicators. Solid red indicates that all relays in the group are on, solid green indicates that the group is in a mixed state, and blinking green indicates that the relays have blink warned and are currently timing out. Each relay and channel terminal block shall provide a 24V pilot light signal. It shall be possible to configure the system for support for any Class 2 pilot light voltage with the use of an auxiliary power supply.

xi.

d.

e.

Single pole latching relays with modular plug-in design. Relays shall provide the following ratings and features: a) Electrical: i) 30 amp ballast at 277V ii) 20 amp ballast at 347V iii) 20 amp tungsten at 120V iv) 30 amp resistive at 347V v) 1.5 HP motor at 120V vi) 14,000 amp short circuit current at 347V b) Mechanical: i) Individually replaceable, ½” KO mounting with removable Class 2 wire harness ii) Actuator on relay housing provides manual override and visual status indication, accessible from Class 2 section of panel iii) Dual line and load terminals each support two #14 – #12 solid or stranded conductors iv) Tested to 300,000 mechanical on/off cycles v) Isolated low voltage contacts provide for true relay status feedback and pilot light indication. c) Power supply shall be a multi-voltage transformer assembly with rated power to supply all electronics, occupancy sensors, switches, pilot lights, and photocells as necessary to meet the project requirements. Power supply to have internal over-current protection with automatic reset and metal oxide varistor protection. The Dataline wire will be supplied by the equipment manufacturer and will include the manufacturer’s name, catalog number printed on the wire jacket. The Electrical Subcontractor, at its own expense, will replace an improper dataline wire. Panels shall be digitally addressed and support bi-directional communication between each other and other intelligent field devices specified elsewhere. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 62 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

H.

Advanced Communications, Integration and PC Connectivity 1. Provide an advanced communications network that supports optional features like PC connectivity, TCP/IP connections, advanced programming system documentation, enhanced diagnostics, historical and runtime accumulation, and graphic programming and control. a. The system shall support the following advanced operating scenarios: i. Adjustable override periods for after hour use based upon the day of the week. ii. Preemptive override before OFF to prevent blink warning and to start a new override time delay. iii. Allow common areas to remain ON when specific relays in a panel are ON. Egress timer starts a countdown when the last watched relay turns OFF. iv. Master Switch Control with blink option to provide a blink warning and five minute countdown for occupants when a master switch is turned OFF v. Interior daylighting control to turn OFF lights when available natural light meets occupants’ lighting needs. Lights will only come on during occupied periods when enough natural light is not available. vi. Occupancy Sensor Integration: Allows relays to automatically follow occupancy sensors’ status, or interlock the sensors with daily schedules (Relays stay ON during scheduled ON time, and follow sensors only during afterhours). b. Communications i. Each panel shall support RS232 twisted pair and optional RS-485 connections. Either protocol may be used for programming, monitoring, and control. The dataline shall allow simultaneous operation of multiple communications access points to support multiple operator terminals and communications with other Building automation systems. ii. Each panel shall be capable of stand-alone automatic operation and the network shall achieve full distributed processing. iii. All programming shall be accomplished with a Windows based PC running compatible software package. c. Hardware Features i. Each communication control card shall be capable of providing all logic, control, runtime data, status information, and communications functions for up to 48 relays in a panel. ii. EEPROM power loss memory and clock holdup time: 30 days iii. Self-diagnostics: Automatic diagnostics on all memory, input/output card modules, relays, and dataline. iv. Clock: Digital with time, day of week, and date. Automatic leap year compensation. Programmable Daylight Savings Time and Standard Time adjustment. d. WinControl Software i. Schedules ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 63 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

a)

Each communication control card shall support up to 24 unique weekly schedules out of a total of 1,000 available per system. Each schedule shall allow up to eight events per day for a repeating seven day week. b) Up to 32 holidays may be defined for any specific date. On that date any of the three holiday schedules may be assigned. c) Relays may be programmed to switch to a different weekly schedule on any specific date, and then revert back to normal at another time. This allows for future schedule changes to be programmed ahead of time. d) "Spring Ahead" and "Fall Back" dates for daylight savings time changes may be entered full two years ahead. Software also supports the ability to "Auto fill" in the next two occurrences of each of these dates. Time Delay / Blink Warning a) Used during unoccupied periods, assignable for each relay. i) Time delays from 2 to 1,440 minutes. ii) Blink Warning: 1-second OFF blink followed by a 5 minute grace period before OFF. iii) An optional second blink warning one minute before OFF. b) Operates automatically for all scheduled OFFs and time delay overrides. c) Occupant overrides may be entered before the blink warning to prevent a scheduled blink and shutdown.

ii.

iii.

iv. v.

Analog Photocell Configuration a) Enable any group switch card input (eight per group switch card) to act as an analog input into the panel for use with photocells or other analog devices b) Select the photocell from list of available types including: i) Indoor, 0 - 500 foot candles ii) Indoor, 0 - 50 foot candles iii) Skylight, 0 - 6000 foot candles iv) Outdoor, 0 - 200 foot candles c) Establish trigger parameters for each analog input with: i) Separate on and off set points ii) Separate on and off time delays iii) Load to be controlled by the input A total of 32 sets of trigger parameters may be established per panel Analog Photocell Monitoring a) Actual foot candle light levels per photocell and

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 64 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

vi.

vii.

viii.

I.

the current trigger state of the loads may be read using the Operators Software. Telephone Override a) Each relay shall respond to up to eight different telephone override codes. Maximum of 9999 telephone codes can be programmed. Runtime Counters for Each Relay a) Cumulative runtime (up to 31 years) and number of cycles (up to 17 million) since last reset. User re-settable. b) Daily runtime for the current day and each of the prior 40 days. c) Monthly runtime for current and 14 prior months. Activity Logs a) Store previous relay events including the time, new state, and cause for the change in state. b) Annunciate over the dataline and RS232 port when the table is 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% full.

Operator’s Software 1. User programming and editing may be conducted both online or offline in a Windows based software application. 2. Data shall be entered through a simple menu-driven user interface. 3. The software shall simplify integration with other software products by allowing the lighting control manufacturer’s components to be embedded into other Windows applications. These features shall include the following: a. BACnet connectivity with optional WebLink. b. Drag and Drop interface programming supported throughout the program. 4. Basic operating software provides the following: a. Site wiring documentation for all connected relay panels and system components. b. English descriptions of each relay's circuit designation, circuit description, switch and calculated load. c. RS232 and TCP/IP Connection to Lighting Control Panel d. Monitor/Control all relays. Software shall show actual relay states, with an optional menu showing how and when the relay state occurred, and when next scheduled to change. e. Simulate all functions. 5. System Parameters a. System software to be sized based appropriately for the system – 250, 500, 750 or unlimited relays. Any number of sites may be programmed from a single software package (based on hard drive space). b. Passwords Matrix Features allowed per site. c. User defines functions accessible for each password (Document, Program, Initialize, Transfer from PC, Transfer to PC, Control, Simulate/Test). d. Configure software to automatically contact remote sites using a modem or I/P address. 6. Other Features a. Online help brings up a context sensitive help screen. b. One step menu option to back up all site information to a backup drive. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 65 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

c.

7.

The software shall include Trends and Relay Runtime Analysis that will allow the operator to analyze the operation of specific areas and identify those exceeding normal runtimes. Individual relays may be assigned a kWh weighted value or simply analyzed on a runtime basis. In both cases, the relays may be assigned to logical groups and plotted for the last 30 days or 12 months. System Design Capability a. From the lighting control system software database, the software shall be able to automatically create a system single line Drawing, panel schedules and Specifications that can be exported in DXF format for use in standard CAD Drawings.

J.

Central Programming, Monitoring, and Control Work Station 1. Desktop Computer (PROVIDED BY OWNER) work station will provide monitoring, programming and control of the system. 2. The computer will be a Pentium 4 class personal computer with monitor for enhanced color graphics display. The system shall be shipped complete with all memory, cables, and peripheral devices. The complete system shall be factory tested prior to shipment. The system shall include at a minimum: a. 3 GHz, Intel Pentium 4 based personal computer b. 17” SVGA flat panel color monitor c. 60 GB hard disk d. 256 MB RAM e. CD +R/+W drive f. Lighting control software, WinXP Pro

K.

Ethernet Multi-user Connectivity - Weblink 1. System Description a. A network appliance will provide multi-user, simultaneous access to the lighting system using standard TCP/IP and the WinControl software. b. All IT infrastructure that is required for connectivity shall be specified elsewhere and is not considered part of the lighting control system requirements. c. The network appliance will include the following hardware: i. Ethernet, Serial and Parallel port ii. Optional 56K BAUD internal modem iii. Video graphics card 2.

3.

Features a. Multiple users (each with a licensed copy of WinControl) will be able to simultaneously connect to the IP address of the WebLink. b. Users may be connected via an Intranet, or Internet depending upon network security limitations. c. Provide the capability to monitor the status of each relay and to override each relay using only a web browser d. A single user may connect using WinControl, via the internal modem of the WebLink. e. The WebLink will provide all the features of a direct connected site to the simultaneous users. BACnet Integration with Building Automation System ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 66 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

a. b. c. d.

e.

L.

Provide an Ethernet or BACnet IP connection for connectivity to the BAS Each lighting control panel shall be exposed to the BAS as a BACnet Device with an individual BACnet Device ID. The lighting control relays within each panel shall be exposed as BACnet Binary Output objects with read/write capability for control and status monitoring. System group codes shall likewise be exposed as Binary Output objects and shall provide capability for a single command from the BAS to control multiple relays in multiple panels simultaneously via the lighting control network. To facilitate a seamless integration with the BAS, the BACnet object Description Property fields shall be automatically populated with the relay, group code, and panel text descriptions from the lighting control system database as created by the WinControl software.

Digital Dataline Switches 1. Intelligent digital switching shall be provided operating on the dual twisted pair communication wire. Switches shall be available in single, dual, quad, or octal (1-button, 2-button, 4-button, or 8-button) designs. The single, dual, and quad devices shall mount in a standard single-gang box, the octal version in a two-gang box. a. Each button shall be individually programmable. Programming of buttons shall not require the use of a computer or other programming device. It shall be possible to assign relays or channels to buttons using a simple button press interface. Each button can control any one of the following options: i. Any individual relay in any single panel. ii. Any group of relays in any single panel. iii. Any group of relays in the system (via network clock, Automation Appliance, or WinControl software package). b. For applications that require pattern switching, buttons shall function as a scene control using an ON/OFF/Not Controlled pattern of relays instead of the normal All ON/OFF. c. Switches shall be constructed of non-breakable Lexan on all exposed parts and shall include a matching screw-less Lexan wall plate. d. Individual buttons shall have a removable clear cover to allow standard 9 mm (3/8 inch) labeling tape to be used to identify the controlled loads. e. Each switch shall use a bi-color LED pilot light for the individual buttons to indicate status of the controlled relay or group of relays. LED indications are Red for All ON, Green for Mixed State (some relays in the group ON and others OFF), and No LED for All OFF. f. Switch LED pilot lights shall flash green to indicate impending off sweep during the five-minute grace period following blink warning of the lights. Once the button is pressed, the LED will change to Red to acknowledge the occupant’s override command to keep lights ON. g. Multiple dataline switches programmed to control the same relay or relay group shall indicate the same status automatically. h. Each switch shall also include a locator light illuminating the switch for easy location in the dark. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 67 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

i.

M.

The dual, quad, and octal switches shall all include a single master button that will override all relays controlled by the individual buttons OFF, or Restore them to their original state. Each switch’s master button configuration can be altered to perform a Master ON/OFF, OFF Only, or Disabled function if desired. j. Switches can be configured to follow a “Cleaning” scenario. This specific scenario shall prevent the cleaners from overriding OFF any relays previously turned ON by an occupant. k. Each switch is available in a Key lock override version. Once a key is inserted, the individual buttons will function for five minutes. Occupancy Sensors 1. Product Numbers: a. Ceiling sensors: WT-605, WT-600, WT-1105, WT-1100, WT2205, WT-2200, WT-2250, WT-2255, W-500A, W-1000A, W2000A, W-2000H, UT-300, UT-305, UT-355, WPIR, DT-200, DT205, DT-300, DT-305, DT-355, CX-100, CX-105, CI-200, CI-205, CI-300, CI-305, CI-355, CI-12, CI-24 b. Wall switch sensors: PW-100, PW-100-24, PW-200, WS-250, WD-170, WD-180, WD-270, WD-280, WN-100-120, WN-100277, UW-100, UW-100-24, UW-200, DW-100, DW-100-24, DW200. c. Power and Auxiliary Packs: BZ-50, BZ-150, C120E-P, C277E-P, S120/27-P, AT-120, AT-277 d. Low Temperature: CB-100 e. Digital Time Switches: TS-400, TS-400-24 2. Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of occupancy at desktop level up to 300 square feet, and gross motion up to 1000 square feet. 3. Wall switch sensors shall accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 0 to 1200 watts at 277 volts and shall have 180˚ coverage capability. 4. Wall switch products shall utilize Zero Crossing Circuitry which increases relay life, protects from the effects of inrush current, and increases sensor’s longevity. 5. Wall switch sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode for safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection. 6. Where specified, wall switch sensors shall provide a field selectable option to convert sensor operation from automatic-ON to manual-ON. 7. Where specified, vandal resistant wall switch sensors shall utilize a hard lens with a minimum 1.0mm thickness. Products utilizing a soft lens will not be considered. 8. Passive infrared sensors shall utilize Pulse Count Processing and Detection Signature Processing to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. 9. Passive infrared sensors shall provide high immunity to false triggering from RFI (hand-held radios) and EMI (electrical noise on the line). 10. Passive infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented Fresnel lens, in a multiple-tier configuration, with grooves-in to eliminate dust and residue build-up. 11. Where specified, passive infrared ultrasonic and dual technology sensors ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 68 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

12. 13. 14. 15.

16. 17. 18. 19.

20. 21.

22. 23.

shall offer daylighting foot-candle adjustment control and be able to accommodate dual level lighting. Dual technology sensors shall be wall mounted, corner mounted or ceiling mounted in such a way as to minimize coverage in unwanted areas. Dual technology sensors shall consist of passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies for occupancy detection. Products that react to noise or ambient sound shall not be considered. Ultrasonic sensors shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing to adjust the detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout controlled space. Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled at 25 kHz within ± 0.005% tolerance, 32 kHz within ± 0.002% tolerance, or 40 kHz ± 0.002% tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor cross-talk. Sensors using multiple frequencies are not acceptable. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems and rated motor loads. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity. Settings shall be located on the sensor (not the control unit) and shall be recessed to limit tampering. In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation. Where specified, sensor shall have an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options. Sensors utilizing separate components or specially modified units to achieve this function are not acceptable. All sensors shall have UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures. Circuit Control Hardware - CU a. Control Units - For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit(s) shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2" knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide lowvoltage power. Control unit shall provide power to a minimum of two (2) sensors. b. Relay Contacts shall have ratings of: 13A - 120 VAC Tungsten 20A - 120 VAC Ballast 20A - 277 VAC Ballast c. Control wiring between sensors and controls units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG, stranded U.L. Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where applicable. d. Minimum acceptable wire gauge from the circuit control hardware relays shall be #14 AWG. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 69 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

N.

Classroom Lighting Controls 1. The Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this Section covers the following equipment: a. Digital Room Controllers – Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relays controllers with 0-10 volt control for ballasts (if applicable) and single relay application-specific plug load controllers. b. Digital Occupancy Sensors – Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications. c. Digital Switches – Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches, dimmers, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications. d. Digital Photosensors – Single-zone closed loop and multi-zone open loop daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications can provide switching or dimming control for daylight harvesting. e. Configuration Tools – Handheld remote for room configuration provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and allow send and receive of room variables and store of occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings. 2. Digital Wall or Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensor System a. Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) passive infrared (PIR), ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company’s system which accommodates the square-foot coverage requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters. b. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following: i. Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables: Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments Time delay – 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments Test mode – Five second time delay Detection technology – PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re-activation. Walk-through mode Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network. ii. One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network. iii. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls. iv. Device Status LEDs including: ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 70 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

PIR Detection Ultrasonic detection Configuration mode Load binding v. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools. vi. Manual override of controlled loads. c. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings. d. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required. e. Product Numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC Digital Wall Switches a. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration; white; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. Wall switches shall include the following features: i. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls. ii. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttons and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall. iii. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission. iv. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics: Bi-level LED Dim locator level indicates power to switch Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active v. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps. vi. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network. vii. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve multi-way switching. viii. The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool: a) Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa). b) Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only. c) Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change. d) Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours. e) Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch. f) Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependent; ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 71 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

each button may be bound to multiple loads. Product Numbers: LMSW-101, LMSW-102, LMSW-103, LMSW-104, LMSW-105, LMSW-108, LMDM-101. Room Controllers a. Room Controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room Controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install and will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration. The control units will include the following features: i. Automatic room configuration to the most energyefficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room. ii. Simple replacement – Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup. iii. Device Status LEDs to indicate: Data transmission Device has power Status for each load Configuration status iv. Quick installation features including: a) Standard junction box mounting b) Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable v. Plenum rated vi. Manual override and LED indication for each load vii. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz) viii. Zero cross circuitry for each load. b. On/Off Room Controllers shall include: i. One or two relay configuration ii. Efficient 150 mA switching power supply iii. Three RJ-45 DLM local network ports iv. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space. One relay configuration only Automatic-ON/OFF configuration v. Product Numbers: LMRC-101, LMRC-102, LMPL-101 c. On/Off/Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include: i. Real time current monitoring ii. One, two or three relay configuration iii. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply iv. Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports. v. One 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers. vi. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool: Establish preset level for each load from 0-100% Set high and low trim for each load Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours vii. Discrete model listed for connection to receptacles, for ix.

4.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 72 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

5.

occupancy-based control of plug loads within the space. One relay configuration only Automatic-ON/OFF configuration viii. Product Numbers: LMRC-211, LRMC-212, LRMC-213 Digital Photosensors a. Digital photosensors work with room controllers to provide automatic switching or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Closed loop photosensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone. Open loop photosensors measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones. Photosensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring. b. Digital photosensors include the following features: i. An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum, and has a response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers. ii. Sensor light level range shall be from 1-10,000 footcandles (fc). iii. The capability of switching one-third, one-half or all lighting ON and OFF, or raising or lowering lighting levels, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room controller(s). iv. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a deadband or a separation between the “ON Setpoint” and the “OFF Setpoint” that will prevent the lights from cycling after they turn off. v. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a userselectable minimum level. vi. Optional programmable wall switch override to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise and lower lighting levels for a selected period of time or cycle of occupancy. vii. Infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls. viii. Red configuration LED that blinks to indicate data transmission. ix. Blue status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding. x. Recessed switch to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF. xi. One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network. xii. An adjustable head and a mounting bracket to accommodate multiple mounting methods and Building ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 73 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

6.

O.

materials. The photosensor may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox. c. Open loop digital photosensors include the following additional features: i. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room. ii. Automatically establishes setpoints following calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software. iii. A proportional control algorithm for dimming daylight harvesting with a “Setpoint” to be maintained during operation. iv. Product Number: LMLS-500. Room Network (DLM Local Network) a. The DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a Building. Digital room devices connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors which provide both data and power to room devices. Features of the DLM local network include: i. Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached. ii. Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup. iii. Push n’ Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network. iv. Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor, wall switch or IR receiver.

Configuration Tools 1. A configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks, and is used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool features infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface. Provide two (2) handheld commissioning tools, one (1) for Electrical Subcontractor, one (1) for Owner. 2. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include: a. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet. b. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu-driven operation. c. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers and buttons on digital wall ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 74 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

switches. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors. e. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting. f. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during autocommissioning and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls. Product Numbers: LMCT-100 DLM. d.

3.

2.30

P.

Category 5E Cable 1 Category 5e cable shall be provided by lighting control manufacturer.

Q.

Emergency Lighting Control Panel 1. Where indicated, lighting control panels designated for control of emergency lighting shall be provided with factory installed provision for automatic by pass if relays controlling emergency circuits upon loss of normal power. Panels shall be properly listed and labeled for use on emergency lighting circuits and shall meet the requirements of UL924 and NFPA 70 – Article 700.

R.

Support Services 1. System Start Up and Commissioning a. Manufacturer shall provide a factory authorized technician to confirm proper installation and operation of all lighting control system components. The startup requirement is intended to verify: i. That all occupancy and daylighting sensors are located, installed, and adjusted as intended by the factory and the contract documents. ii. The occupancy sensors and daylighting sensors are operating within the manufacturer’s Specifications. iii. The sensors and relay panels interact as a complete and operational system to meet the design intent. b. Manufacturer to provide a written statement verifying that the system meets the above requirements. 2. System Training a. Manufacturer shall provide factory authorized technician to train owner personnel in the operation, programming and maintenance of the lighting control system including all occupancy sensors and daylighting controls. 3. System Programming a. Manufacturer shall provide system programming including: i. Wiring documentation. ii. Switch operation. iii. Operating schedules.

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD’s) A.

Scope 1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install the Surge Protective Device (SPD) equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings, and modifications as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. To maximize performance and reliability and to obtain the lowest possible ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 75 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

let-through voltages, the ac surge protection shall be integrated into electrical distribution equipment; switchboard emergency panelboards, optional standby emergency panelboards, and the computer panelboards. B.

References 1. SPD units and all components shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable UL standard (ANSI/UL rd 1449 3 Edition).

C.

Submittals – For Review/Approval 1. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: a. Provide verification that the SPD complies with the required ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). Compliance may be in the form of a file number that can be verified on UL’s website or on any other NRTL’s website, as long as the website contains the following information at a minimum: model number, SPD Type, system voltage, phases, modes of protection, Voltage Protection Rating (VPR), and Nominal Discharge Current (In). 2. Where applicable the following additional information shall be submitted to the engineer: a. Descriptive bulletins b. Product sheets

D.

Submittals – for Construction 1. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: a. Final As-Built Drawings and information for items listed shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process.

E.

Qualifications 1. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly. 2. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. 3. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (5) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. 4. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC.

F.

Manufacturer’s 1. Eaton / Cutler-Hammer products, Current Technologies, Liebert, or equal. 2. The listing of specific manufacturer above does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the specified ratings, features, and functions. Manufacturer listed above is not relieved from meeting these Specifications in their entirety.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 76 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

G.

Voltage Surge Suppression - General 1. Electrical Requirements a. Unit Operating Voltage – Refer to Drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. b. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) – The MCOV shall not be less than 115% of the nominal system operating voltage. c. The suppression system shall incorporate thermally protected metal-oxide varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the switchboard and computer panelboards. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes, selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may crowbar the system voltage leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards. d. Protection Modes – The SPD must protect all modes of the electrical system being utilized. The required protection modes are indicated by bullets in the following table: Configuration Wye Delta Single Split Phase High Leg Delta e.

f.

N-G ● N/A ● ●

Nominal Discharge Current (In) – All SPDs applied to the distribution system shall have a 20kA In rating regardless of their SPD Type (includes Types 1 and 2) or operating voltage. SPDs having an In less than 20kA shall be rejected. ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) – The maximum ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition VPR for the device shall not exceed the following:

MODES L-N; L-G; N-G L-L 2.

Protection Modes L-N L-G L-L ● ● ● N/A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

208Y/120 700 1200

480Y/277 1200 2000

600Y/347 1500 3000

SPD Design a. Maintenance Free Design – The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not require any user intervention throughout its life. SPDs containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not be accepted. b. Balanced Suppression Platform – The surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating replaceable SPD modules shall not be accepted. c. Electrical Noise Filter – Each unit shall include a highperformance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter. Noise attenuation for ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 77 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

d.

e.

electric line noise shall be up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method. Products unable able to meet this Specification shall not be accepted. Internal Connections – No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be soldered, hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors. Monitoring Diagnostics – Each SPD shall provide the following integral monitoring options: i. Protection Status Indicators - Each unit shall have a green / red solid-state indicator light that reports the status of the protection on each phase. a) For wye configured units, the indicator lights must report the status of all protection elements and circuitry in the L-N and L-G modes. Wye configured units shall also contain an additional green / red solid-state indicator light that reports the status of the protection elements and circuitry in the N-G mode. SPDs that indicate only the status of the L-N and L-G modes shall not be accepted. b) For delta configured units, the indicator lights must report the status of all protection elements and circuitry in the L-G and L-L modes. c) The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall indicate that damage has occurred on the respective phase or mode. All protection status indicators must indicate the actual status of the protection on each phase or mode. If power is removed from any one phase, the indicator lights must continue to indicate the status of the protection on all other phases and protection modes. Diagnostics packages that simply indicate whether power is present on a particular phase shall not be accepted. ii. Remote Status Monitor – The SPD must include Form C dry contacts (one NO and one NC) for remote annunciation of its status. Both the NO and NC contacts shall change state under any fault condition. iii. Audible Alarm and Silence Button – The SPD shall contain an audible alarm that will be activated under any fault condition. There shall also be an audible alarm silence button used to silence the audible alarm after it has been activated. iv. Surge Counter – The SPD shall be equipped with an LCD display that indicates to the user how many surges have occurred at the location. The surge counter shall trigger each time a surge event with a peak current magnitude of a minimum of 50 ± 20A occurs. A reset pushbutton shall also be standard, allowing the surge counter to be zeroed. The reset button shall contain a mechanism to prevent accidental resetting of the counter via a single, short-duration button press. In order to ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 78 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

f.

g.

h.

H.

prevent accidental resetting, the surge counter reset button shall be depressed for a minimum of 2 seconds in order to clear the surge count total. a) The ongoing surge count shall be stored in nonvolatile memory. If power to the SPD is completely interrupted, the ongoing count indicated on the surge counter’s display prior to the interruption shall be stored in non-volatile memory and displayed after power is restored. The surge counter’s memory shall not require a backup battery in order to achieve this functionality. Overcurrent Protection i. The unit shall contain thermally protected MOVs. These thermally protected MOVs shall have a thermal protection element packaged together with the MOV in order to achieve overcurrent protection of the MOV. The thermal protection element shall disconnect the MOV(s) from the system in a fail-safe manner should a condition occur that would cause them to enter a thermal runaway condition. Fully Integrated Component Design – All of the SPD’s components and diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete assembly. SPDs or individual SPD modules that must be ganged together in order to achieve higher surge current ratings or other functionality shall not be accepted. Safety Requirements i. The SPD shall minimize potential arc flash hazards by containing no user serviceable / replaceable parts and shall be maintenance free. SPDs containing items such as replaceable modules, replaceable fuses, or replaceable batteries shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring any maintenance of any sort such as periodic tightening of connections shall not be accepted. SPDs requiring user intervention to test the unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not be accepted.

System Application 1. The SPD applications covered under this Section include the switchboard, emergency panelboards, optional standby emergency panelboards, and the computer panelboards assemblies. All SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C, B, and A environments. 2. Surge Current Capacity – The minimum surge current capacity the device is capable of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table: Minimum surge current capacity based on ANSI / IEEE C62.41 location category Application Per Phase Per Mode CATEGORY C Switchboard 250 kA 125 kA A Computer Panelboards 120 kA 60 kA A

Emergency Panelboards and Optional Standby Emergency Panelboards ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 79 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

120 kA

60 kA

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

I.

SPD Type – All SPDs installed on the line side of the service entrance disconnect shall be Type 1 SPDs. All SPDs installed on the load side of the service entrance disconnect shall be Type 1 or Type 2 SPDs.

Switchboard, Emergency Panelboards, Optional Standby Emergency Panelboards, and the Computer Panelboards Requirements 1. The SPD application covered under this Section includes computer panelboards. The SPD units shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category B environments. a. The SPD shall not limit the use of through-feed lugs, sub-feed lugs, and sub-feed breaker options. b. SPDs shall be installed immediately following the load side of the main breaker. SPDs installed in main lug only panelboards shall be installed immediately following the incoming main lugs. c. The panelboard shall be capable of re-energizing upon removal of the SPD. d. The SPD shall be interfaced to the panelboard via a direct bus bar connection. e. The SPD shall be included and mounted within the panelboard by the manufacturer of the panelboard. f. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboard. g. The complete panelboard including the SPD shall be UL67 listed. 2.

Switchboard Requirements a. The SPD application covered under this Section is for the switchboard location. Service entrance located SPDs shall be tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C environments. b. The SPD shall be of the same manufacturer as the switchboard. c. The SPD shall be factory installed inside the switchboard at the assembly point by the original equipment manufacturer. d. Locate the SPD on the load side of the main disconnect device, as close as possible to the phase conductors and the ground/neutral bar. e. The SPD shall be integral to switchboard as a factory standardized design. f. All monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible from the front of the equipment.

J.

Factory Testing 1. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this Section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards.

K.

Installation 1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the Drawings.

L.

Warranty 1. The manufacturer shall provide a full ten (10) year warranty from the ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 80 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

date of shipment against any SPD part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable National or Local Code. 2.31

THEATRE AND STAGE EQUIPMENT A.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for the following: 1. Install theatrical lighting equipment as furnished by Section 11 61 00. 2. Provide all wiring and conduit to connect all theatrical lighting equipment as furnished by Section 11 61 00.

B.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for properly preparing the project for installation by the Theatre and Stage Equipment Integrator, Section 11 61 00 as specified. 1.

2.32

Responsibilities of the Electrical Subcontractor shall include: The Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all related Building preparation including, but not limited to: outlet boxes, pathways, power, cableways and J hooks to facilitate a neat and orderly installation of cables, cable protection, surface raceways, cable supports, conduits with bushings, conduit stubs with bushings. Sleeves with bushings (all conduits, stubs, and sleeves, shall be brought to an accessible hallway ceiling or accessible area below floor), back boxes, pull strings, bonding, grounding, core drilling, cutting, patching, fireproofing of penetrations and openings, environmental seals, smoke and fire stopping seals including all conduits, raceways, sleeves, and slots, where cables pass from one location to another, removal and reinstallation of ceiling tiles to install concealed cabling, seismic supports, supplementary steel and channels, for a completely operational system as specified. The Electrical Subcontractor shall also accept delivery and properly store and secure all equipment and materials required by the Theatre and Stage Equipment Integrator. The Electrical Subcontractor shall install all specialized back boxes.

SHORT CIRCUIT/COORDINATION/SELECTIVE COORDINATION STUDY A.

The Study shall be conducted by the switchgear manufacturer.

B.

The Study work shall be conducted under the applicable Standards of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) and the National Electrical Code (NEC). Specifically, the following standards shall apply: ANSI-C37.010-1972 Standard Application Guide for AC High Voltage Circuit Breakers. ANSI-C37.5-1969 Calculation of Fault Currents for Application of Power Circuit Breaker Rated on a Total of Current Basis. ANSI-C37.13-1963 Low Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers (600 Volt Insulation Class).

C.

The basic scope of the Study is the power system, from the power supplier’s service point, through the main secondary distribution system. The studies ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 81 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

organization shall identify in its proposal the limits of the system that will be studied. D.

The Study organization shall prepare a single-line diagram of the power system. This diagram shall identify all components considered in the Study and the ratings of all power devices. (This includes, but is not limited to, transformers, circuit breakers, relays, fuses, busses and cables). Reference numbers shall be used on the diagram related to key items in the report. ANSI device function numbers shall be used on protective relays.

E.

Short Circuit Study: 1. A Short Circuit Study shall be performed which shows the momentary and interrupting fault duties on each bus shown on the single line diagram. A computer shall be used to perform calculations on all 3 phase faults. In addition, an impedance listing shall be prepared showing busto-bus impedance values reduced to a common MVA base referenced to a single-line diagram for ease in reviewing data. 2. Study each fault interrupting device related to the calculated duty and recommend changes when appropriate. 3. The Study shall start from utility incoming switches and shall extend through to all panelboards.

F.

Coordination and Selective Coordination Study 1. The Study organization shall perform a comprehensive protection device coordination and selective coordination Study covering all devices identified on the single line diagram. Using a practical compromise between protection of electrical equipment and coordination of devices “downstream”, provides settings for all adjustable protective devices shown on the diagram. Selective coordination Study shall be provided as per National Electrical Code Article 700. 2. Study the application of devices versus system ends and recommend new or additional devices that are needed for adequate protection. 3. Prepare time/current coordination curves to illustrate the protection and coordination achieved with the recommended settings of protective devices. These curves shall reflect the following (where applicable): Appropriate NEC protection points Appropriate ANSI protection points Magnetizing in-rush points of transformers One-line diagram of the system identifying the device plotted Short circuit current levels used for construction

G.

The Study organization shall submit three (3) bound copies of a report which shall contain the following information: 1. An executive summary which identifies all significant problems and all recommendations for significant equipment changes. 2. A tabulation of all protective devices identified on the one-line diagram which their ratings compares with respective fault duty as calculated in the Study. 3. A tabulation of the settings recommended on all adjustable protective devices with references to the single-line diagram and to coordination curves. 4. Copies of all time/current coordination curves developed in the Study. 5. The analysis of problems that lead to specific recommendations included ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 82 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

6. 7. 8.

in the executive summary. The single-line diagram of the system studies, including all ratings, identifications described. Copies of all computer results referenced to the single-line diagram and the impedance listings. A ground fault Study for all breakers specified with ground fault, including the associated zero sequence impedance diagrams.

H.

Short circuit and ground fault Study shall be submitted with panelboard Shop Drawings to verify that available fault currents fall within panelboard/ breaker ratings. Coordination Study may follow, but shall be submitted with the switchboard Shop Drawing.

I.

Necessary field studies shall be accomplished at no additional expense to the contract.

2.33 MINERAL INSULATED METAL SHEATHED CABLE (MI CABLE) A.

Section Includes 1. Type MI mineral-insulated seamless metal sheathed cable. 2. Cable connectors and connections.

B.

References 1. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; UL 2196.

C.

Submittals 1. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. 2. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.

D.

Qualifications 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience and manufactured in North America. 2. Cable shall not off gas or propagate smoke.

E.

Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. 2. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. As suitable for purpose specified and shown.

F.

Project Conditions 1. Verify that field measurements and conditions are as shown on Drawings. 2. Cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless fully dimensioned. Route cable to meet project conditions. 3. Where cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required.

G.

Coordination 1. Coordinate work specified in this Section with work provided under other electrical work and the work of other trades. 2. Determine required separation between cable and other work. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 83 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.

Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work.

H.

Manufacturer’s – Mineral-Insulated Metal-Sheathed Cable 1. Tyco Thermal Controls/Pyrotenax System 1850 2-hour fire rated, or equal.

I.

Mineral-Insulated Metal-Sheathed Cable 1. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type MI 2. Conductor: Copper 3. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. 4. Cable Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C. 5. Termination Temp. Rating: 90 degrees C. 6. Insulation Material: Magnesium oxide refractory mineral. 7. Metal-sheath Material: Seamless soft drawn copper. 8. Fire Rating: Cable assembly including supports shall have a 2-hour fire rating as listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 9. Over jacket is available.

J.

Wiring Connectors and Terminations 1. Cable Termination: a. Tyco Thermal Controls/Pyrotenax Model Quick-Term Installation Sheet 638. (Solid M.I. conductor to approved solid rated lug is also available as a slight variation to the Quick-Term Termination.)

K.

Examination 1. Verify that cable end factory temporary seals have remained intact, that the insulation has not been exposed to air, and that no moisture has entered cable insulation. 2. Verify that work of other trades likely to damage cable has been completed

L.

Storage 1. Cables shall be shipped from the manufacturer with ends temporarily sealed against moisture ingress. 2. When cables are cut in the field, the end shall be sealed using standard sealing compound and PVC tape 3. Cable shall be stored in a clean dry location.

M.

Handling 1. Cable shall be uncoiled by rolling or rotating supply reel. Do not pull from coil periphery or center 2. Take precautions necessary to prevent damage to cable from contact with sharp objects, including pulling over foreign material or sheaves.

N.

Wiring Methods 1. Fire Rated Locations: Use only fire rated cable. 2. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.

O.

Installation 1. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Bending: a. Not less than five (5) times the cable diameter for cable not more ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 84 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b. 3.

4.

5.

than ¾ inch (250 kcmil). Not less than ten (10) times the cable diameter for cable more than ¾ inches (350 and 500 kcmil).

Pulling: a. For all cables up to and including #1 AWG use 24 inch (250mm) or larger sheaves. b. For #1/0 through 250 kcmil inclusive, use 18 inch (460mm) or larger sheaves. c. For 350 kcmil and larger cables, use 24 inch (610mm) or larger sheaves. d. On pulls of over 360 degrees, contact manufacturer for assistance. e. 350 and 500 kcmil cables shall not be pulled more than 360 degrees in total. Splicing: All fire rated splices shall be made in the factory. a. In the event a field splice is necessary, it must be approved by the engineer and made in field by personnel trained by cable manufacturer using manufacturer’s components. Terminations: a. Field made terminations shall be made with cable manufacturer’s termination kits only. Stripping tools, crimping and compression tools available from the manufacturer shall be used for proper cable termination. b. Terminations must be completed immediately once started to avoid moisture ingress from surrounding air. Prior to completing each termination, test insulation resistance and follow manufacturer’s drying procedures until insulation resistance reaches an acceptable level. c. Connections to ferrous cabinets for single conductor cables shall incorporate brass plates ¼ inch (6mm) thick by 4 inch (100mm) wide by proper length with ½ inch (12mm), ¾ inch (19mm), 1 inch (25mm) or 1-1/4 inch (32mm) drilled and tapped holes. Install per manufacturer’s’ Drawing. d. For applications using 90 degree C rating of cable, lugs shall be rated 90 degrees C.

6.

Sheath Induction Reduction: a. When multi-phase circuits have paralleled single conductors, cables shall be run in groups having one of each phase in each group. b. Each set of paralleled conductors shall be separated by at least 2.15 single cable diameters. c. On balanced three-phase wye circuits neutral conductors may be located within the 2.15 cable diameter space between groups of phase conductors. d. Each group of cables shall be fastened tightly together, at least once between each cable support on horizontal runs and twice on vertical runs, using ½ inch (13mm) wide by 0.030 inch (0.75mm) thick stainless steel straps.

7.

Exposed of Surface Installations: a. Cable may be secured directly to fire rated Building structure using an approved method such as one, or any combination, of the following: ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 85 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

i.

b. c. 8.

9.

10. P.

2.34

Straps: ½ inch (13mm) wide x 3-1/2 inch (90mm) long by 0.030 (0.75mm) thick stainless steel or copper straps. Each strap shall contain two ¼ inch (6mm) holes for securing with 3/16 inch (5mm) by minimum 1-3/4 inch (44mm) long steel anchors. ii. Steel struts and cable tray: Use only the steel strut framing system and support recommended by Pyrotenax. Aluminum or other materials are not acceptable. iii. Other approved method. Supports shall not exceed six (6) feet on center horizontally, or six (6) feet vertically. Cables shall be installed parallel to Building lines.

Embedded Installations: a. Cables will be run in the same trifoil configuration as exposed installations. b. Protect against damage during pulling, and during concrete pouring or backfill and tamping. c. Where cables emerge from grade, provide PVC conduit, metal plate or angle iron. This protection shall minimally extend from 18 inches (460mm) below grade to 8 ft. (2.5m) above grade. Wall or Floor Penetrations: a. Provide sleeve to protect cable and penetration opening during pulling. b. Provide approved fire stopping of all penetrations. Neatly train and lace cable inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

Field Quality Control 1. Inspect cable for physical damage and proper connection. 2. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer’s recommended values. 3. Verify continuity of each conductor. 4. Prior to energizing cables, measure insulation resistance of each cable. Tabulate and submit for approval.

FANS (DESTRATIFICATION) C.

Provide as shown on the plans, non-power overloading ceiling mounted destratification fan(s). Fan(s) shall be of the specified size, arrangement and capacity. Fan(s) having tip velocities greater or requiring horsepower greater than those identified as the Project Standard will not be acceptable.

D.

The fans shall bear the AMCA certified ratings seals for both air and sound performance. Fan ratings shall be based upon tests performed in strict accordance with AMCA Standard 210-67 test code for air moving devices. Each fan shall carry near the manufacturer’s nameplate, the seal authorized by AMCA indicating that ratings are certified. Fans not bearing this seal will not be acceptable.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 86 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

E.

Each fan shall have tagging identification engraved on the manufacturer’s nameplate. Units shall be manufactured by Leading Edge No. 5620-1, or equal as manufactured by Cook or Peerless.

F. 1.

Propeller Criteria: Blades diameter shall be 56” and shall be constructed of die formed, aerodynamically contoured steel. Each blade shall have a high tensile steel bracket spot welded in a minimum three (3) point suspension formation, ground smooth following assembly. Bracket shall anchor its blade to the motor rotor assembly using a minimum of two (2) machine screws to support maintainability. Blades shall be finished in epoxy enamel finish over electro-statically applied epoxy powder primer, color white. Blade sets shall be weight matched to within two (2) grams tolerance and shall be statically and dynamically balanced following the coating and assembly processes. Fans to be installed less than ten feet (10’) above the floor shall have rolled edge blades a minimum of 3/16 inches in thickness in conformance with U.L. Standard 507.

2.

3.

G. 4. 5. 6.

7. 8.

H. 9. 10.

Motor Criteria: Each fan motor shall be sized to drive its fan. Whenever starting requirements exceed operating requirements, the motor shall be selected large enough to start the fan without overheating. No motor shall operate within the service factor range. Motor shall be of the heavy duty, fixed shaft-rotating housing type carefully matched to the fan load. Motor shall be premium efficiency, 0.91 minimum power factor, poly-phase or single phase as identified on the Drawings. Motor shall be suitable for use with solid state motor speed controllers. Provide embedded automatic-reset type thermal overload protection. Fans to be so labeled in accordance with U.L. Standard 507. Motor shaft shall be steel bar rod, cold-drawn, minimum 5/8 inches in diameter. Shaft shall incorporate the necessary holes to incorporate down-rod assembly mounting and secondary safety cable mounting simultaneously. Bearings: Bearings shall be of the self-aligning, heavy duty, permanently sealed and greased chrome steel ball type. The bearings shall be of sufficient size and quality to have AFBMA B50 rated lives in excess of 100,000 hours at maximum cataloged fan operating conditions.

I.

Motor rotor/housing assemblies shall be of formed steel construction, deep drawn to provide air space for motor heat dissipation. Housing shall be finished in epoxy enamel finish over electro-statically applied epoxy powder primer.

J. 11.

Down-rod Assembly: Down-rod assembly shall consist of 3/4 inch nominal outer diameter steel pipe finished in epoxy enamel finish over electro-statically applied epoxy powder primer.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 87 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

12. 13.

K. 14. 15.

16.

Upper shackle shall secure directly to the down-rod, shall consist of nominal 1/8 inch thick formed, plated steel, and shall be rubber bushed to provide a resilient floating suspension for the mounting hook. Lower yoke shall secure directly to the down-rod and shall consist of nominal 1/8 inch thick formed, plated steel. Yoke shall provide primary support directly to the motor shaft and shall provide space for the secondary support cabling. Fan accessories shall include: Factory installed secondary support assembly connected to motor shaft with minimum six (6) feet of 1/8 inch 7x7 galvanized cable. Rated breaking strength shall be 920 lbs. minimum. Totally enclosing fan guard of twelve (minimum) spoke across bar construction: a. Radial Bars – 5 gauge. b. Circumferential Bars – 5 gauge on three (3) inch centers. c. Heavy duty 16 gauge mounting brackets shall secure the fan guard assembly directly to the fan down rod assembly. Provide a secondary support assembly connected to fan guard mounting brackets with minimum six (6) feet of 3/32 inch 7x7 galvanized cable. Rated breaking strength shall be 920 lbs. minimum. U.L. listed solid state motor speed controller shall incorporate infinite speed control with positive “Off” position. Controller shall incorporate 8 ampere rated (minimum triacs and solid copper wire toroidal choke-type RFI suppression circuitry.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1

3.2

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.

All equipment mentioned in these Specifications or those on the Drawings shall be furnished new except where noted and completely installed and adjusted and left in a clean, safe and satisfactory condition, ready for operation and all supplies, appliances, and connections of every sort and description necessary to the operation of the equipment shall be furnished and installed to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner.

B.

The Owner will not be responsible for materials and equipment until they have been tested and accepted.

CLEANING, ADJUSTING AND TESTING A.

At the completion of the work, all parts of the installation shall be thoroughly cleaned. All devices, equipment, conduits, and fittings shall be completely cleaned of grease, metal cuttings, dirt which may have accumulated during construction, and protection covers. Any discoloration or damage to parts of the Building, its finish or furnishings due to failing to properly clean the electrical system shall be repaired by the Electrical Subcontractor without cost to the Owner.

B.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall test all work and equipment as directed by the Architect and by Authorities Having Jurisdiction, furnish all equipment, necessary personnel and the electrical power. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 88 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.3

3.4

C.

The entire installation shall be tested for shorts, grounds and open circuits and all defects shall be corrected before acceptance of his work. All work shall be demonstrated to be in proper operating condition to the complete satisfaction of the Architect and Owner.

D.

Coordinate all start up, operation and testing activities with the Project Manager, General Contractor and the Commissioning Agent per Specification Section 01 91 00. 1. Electrical Subcontractor tests shall be scheduled and documented in accordance with the commissioning requirements. Refer to Commissioning Specification, Section 01 91 00, for further details. 2. System verification testing is part of the Commissioning Process. Verification testing shall be performed by the Electrical Subcontractor and witnessed and documented by the Commissioning Agent. Refer to Commissioning Specification, Section 01 91 00, for system verification tests and commissioning requirements.

SLEEVES, INSERTS AND SUPPORTS A.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall lay out and install his work in advance of the pouring of concrete floors and walls.

B.

Furnish and install all inserts, conduit hangers, anchors and steel supports necessary for the support and installation of all electrical equipment. Where openings are required in walls and floors for the passing of raceways, ducts or busways, the Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish the General Contractor with the necessary information regarding dimensions and locations so that he may install suitable concrete stops to provide these openings. Such openings shall be by the General Contractor in such a manner so as not to interfere with the fireproof integrity of the Building.

M.

The Electrical Subcontractor will be held responsible for the location of and maintaining in proper position, sleeves, inserts and anchor bolts supplied and/or set in place by him. In the event that failure to do so requires cutting and patching of finished work, such work shall be done at the Electrical Subcontractor's expense by the General Contractor.

EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A.

3.5

L.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide all connections to all equipment requiring electrical service, including power cables, branch circuit extensions, fire alarm cables, motors, controllers, lighting fixtures and all other equipment and systems specified or shown on the Drawings.

MOTOR AND CONTROL WIRING A.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide all wiring, including conduit, wire, junction boxes, disconnecting switches, and overcurrent protection, to and between all motors, starters, control devices and related electrical equipment whether specified or shown under Division 26 00 00 or other Divisions, except where such items are factory wired as well as factory mounted on the driven ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 89 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

equipment.

3.6

B.

Unless otherwise specified, the Electrical Subcontractor shall mount and align all starters, control devices, safety switches, power factor correction capacitors and other related electrical equipment whether specified in this or other Divisions of this Specification, except where such items are factory mounted on the driven equipment. The Electrical Subcontractor shall determine the correct rotation of any equipment connected to a polyphase motor and connect motor for this rotation before equipment is started.

C.

Unless otherwise specified, all wiring to motors, control equipment and related electrical equipment shall run in rigid conduit or EMT, with flexible metal conduit connections or liquid- tight flexible connections where specified elsewhere. Conduits shall be large enough to accommodate motor branch circuits and grounding conductors whether or not so indicated on Drawings. Wire sizes shall be as shown or to comply with the National Electrical Code.

HVAC WIRING A.

3.7

3.8

Wiring for low voltage temperature control equipment is included under Division 23.

CONCRETE WORK A. B.

The General Contractor shall provide concrete work for site lighting pole bases. The General Contractor shall provide duct and conduit envelopes and pads for electrical equipment. The General Contractor shall provide 4” concrete pads for all floor mounted electrical distribution equipment.

C.

The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish all equipment anchor bolts and shall be responsible for their proper installation and accurate location.

GROUNDING A.

Grounding methods shall be in accordance with the Massachusetts Electrical Code Article 250 and Local Utility Company Regulations.

B.

Furnish and install from the main service switch to the street side of the water meter a stranded copper grounding conductor in rigid steel conduit. If the water service pipe is of material which is not electrically conductive, furnish and install approved copper plates or rods buried and grounded below grade, to which the main service grounding conductor shall be connected.

C.

Connections to the water pipe shall be made by a suitable ground fitting or lug connection to a plugged tee.

D.

The required equipment grounding conductors and straps shall be sized in compliance with National Electrical Code and shall be provided with green insulation equivalent to the insulation on the associated phase conductors.

E.

Flexible metallic conduit equipment connections utilized in conjunction with branch circuits shall be provided with suitable green insulated grounding conductors connected to approved grounding terminals at each end of the flexible conduit. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 90 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

3.9

F.

The neutral conductor of all circuits shall have an identifying marking preferable a covering of white, readily distinguishable from the other conductors. This wire shall be unbroken from the distribution switch to the outlet.

G.

Each Electrical expansion fitting shall be provided with a bonding jumper.

H.

Ground metal frame of Building. Where metal of frame of Building cannot be grounded, provide concrete encased electrode as per National Electrical Code.

CONDUIT WORK A.

All wiring shall be installed in heavy wall rigid steel unless otherwise noted below and run concealed except as indicated on the Drawings. Branch circuit wiring in hung ceilings, furred spaces or exposed may be installed in electrical metallic tubing. Panelboard feeders may be run in electrical metallic tubing except panelboard feeders run underground or in concrete slabs shall be in heavy wall rigid steel conduit as specified above or PVC. All exposed conduit in spaces indicated as mechanical rooms and where installed exposed below the 8' level elsewhere on the project shall be rigid steel conduit. Conduit extensions in metal partitions may be made with flexible metal conduit, with grounding conductor.

B.

Connections to portable and permanently mounted motorized equipment and motors, as well as the equipment housing, shall be made with approved liquid tight flexible metal conduit. Flexible connections shall be a maximum of 18” long and with grounding conductor. Flexible connections shall be used prior to attachment to equipment housings.

C.

Conduit ends shall be cut square, threaded and reamed to remove burrs and sharp edges. Field threads shall be of the same type and have the same effective length as factory cut threads. Excessive exposed threads will not be allowed. Turns, wherever required in exposed conduit runs shall be made by the use of factory-made bends, or field made bends. Condulets, or in the event of a multiplicity of conduits making the same turn, a steel junction box with a removable steel cover may be used. Offsets and bends for changes in elevation of exposed conduit runs shall be made at walls or beams and not in open spaces between walls or beams. Conduits shall be routed so as not to interfere with the operation of maintenance of any equipment. The entire job shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner. Steel supports or racks shall be galvanized steel channel and fittings, Unistrut, Kindorf, Husky Products Company, or equal.

D.

All conduit work shall be carefully cleaned and dried inside before the installation of conductors. Wire shall not be pulled into conduit system until Building is completed. Plug conduit ends to exclude dust, moisture, plaster or mortar while Building is under construction. No lubricants or cleaning agents which might have a deleterious effects on conductor coverings shall be used for Drawing conductors into raceways.

E.

Drawings, in relation to routing of conduits, are diagrammatic. The number and size of conduits and wire shall be furnished and installed as indicated by the Drawings. Conduits shall be routed in the field so as to be coordinated with the Building structure. Concealed conduit shall be as short and direct as possible. Exposed conduit shall be run in straight lines parallel to walls, beams and columns and with right angle bends and threaded conduit fittings. All conduit in concrete slabs shall be run above bottom steel reinforcing, below top reinforcing and column ties. Conduits passing through floors, walls and beams shall be of ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 91 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

such size, number and in such locations so as not to impair the strength of the construction. At time of roughing conduits in concrete slab area, prior to pouring of slab, the Electrical Subcontractor shall consult the Structural Engineer for coordination and approval of size, spacing and method of conduit installation in slabs and walls, as well as penetration of such. Particular attention shall be given to the installation of conduits at grouped areas, such as panelboard, cabinet and pull box entrances.

3.10

F.

All metal conduit buried in the earth or fill shall be coated with two coats of heavy asphalt paint over its entire length, including couplings.

G.

Raceways in ceiling spaces shall be routed in such an approved manner as to eliminate or minimize the number of junction boxes required, but also shall be routed in an orderly and organized manner. Support rods and clamps shall be furnished and installed as directed by the Architect. Support of conduits by use of wire is strictly prohibited. Conduits shall be supported and secured by conduit support devices.

H.

Where rigid metal conduit is threaded in the field, a standard conduit cutting die providing 3/4” taper per foot shall be employed. Threadless coupling shall not be used on rigid metal conduit except where specifically allowed by the Architect. Running threads shall not be used on rigid metal conduit.

I.

Conduit work shall be installed in such a manner to keep exposed threads to an absolute minimum, and in no case shall more than three threads be left exposed after the conduit work is made up tight. This requirement applies to all conduit work, including conduit buried in earth or fill or in concrete.

J.

Minimum size conduit shall be 1/2” nominal trade size.

K.

A minimum 3/16” diameter twisted nylon plastic type fish cord shall be furnished and installed in all empty raceways. Provide a tag on each end of fish cord indicating the location of the other end.

WIRE AND CABLE A.

Wiring for all branch circuits and feeder circuits shall be color coded as follows: 1. 3-phase, 4-wire, 208Y/120 volts: Phase Color A Black B Red C Blue Neutral White Equip. Ground Green 2. 3-phase, 4-wire, 480Y/277 volts: Phase Color A Yellow B Brown C Orange Neutral Gray Equip. Ground Green 3. Connections to terminal shall be arranged Phase A, B and C from left to right. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 92 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4. 5.

3.11

Signal system shall be color coded differently from electrical systems described above. For large size conductors available only in black, use colored plastic tape at all ends and where connections and splices are made for the specified color code identification. Tape shall be wrapped around the conductor three complete turns.

B.

Branch circuits are in general arranged with one neutral conductor serving as “common” for 2 or 3-phase wires. In each case, the phase wires shall be connected to the phase supply mains in proper rotation to assure a balanced condition on the panel, or separate neutrals shall be used. The circuit numbers assigned on the Drawings are used for convenience only and need not designate the circuit on the panel to which that circuit may be connected. However, the circuit numbers and circuit description are required to be typewritten on the panelboard directory at the conclusion of the work, and shall represent the circuits as actually connected to the panelboard.

C.

Joints and splices shall be made in an approved manner and shall be equivalent, electrically and mechanically, to the conductor insulation. Solid conductors shall be spliced with approved wiring connectors. Conductors of Size No. 8 AWG and larger shall be connected by use of solderless pressure connectors; these joints and splices shall be taped with one wrap of varnish cambric tape and then a minimum of three wraps of No. 88 Scotchbranch (3M Company) all-weather vinyl plastic electrical tape, or equal Permacel or Plymouth Company. Each wrap of tape shall be half-lapped. Conductors of Size No. 4 AWG or larger shall have two coats of insulating varnish applied over the tape.

D.

Switch leg wiring shall be the same color as the phase conductor from which it is supplied.

INSTALLATION OF OUTLETS A.

If any discrepancy is found to exist between the electrical plans and any other Drawings associated with the project, notify the Architect at once and have location verified before outlets are installed. Any reasonable change in location of outlets and equipment prior to roughing shall not involve additional expense to the Owner.

B.

Consult with the Ceiling Subcontractor regarding the centering of outlets in ceiling tile.

C.

Whenever outlets of any system are installed in brick, masonry or concrete construction, furnish and install the necessary boxes and conduit in connection therewith so that the General Contractor may build them in as the work progresses. Box offsets shall be made at all outlets to provide for proper adjustment to finished surfaces.

D.

Through-wall boxes will not be permitted. Outlet boxes shall not be mounted back to back, but shall be staggered a minimum of 12” on center.

E.

Knockouts in any boxes shall not be left open and all boxes not having equipment mounted on them shall be provided with blank covers.

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 93 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

F.

3.12

3.13

3.14

Bar hanger type outlets shall be used in hollow framed partitions other than those of the masonry or construction block type, with bar hanger supported from two partition studs. Bar hangers shall be secured to metal type partition studs with self- threading metal screws, or drill through hangers with caddy (or equal) clips shall be used.

EXTERNAL TELEPHONE SERVICE A.

Furnish and install from utility pole to the Building, as shown on the Drawings, Schedule 40 PVC duct with pull wire for telephone cable installation. Consult with the Telephone Company regarding this service and do all work according to their requirements.

B.

The Electrical Subcontractor will be responsible for providing complete telephone service to the Building. Coordinate number of lines required with the Owner prior to installation.

C.

The Telephone Company will install the telephone cable to the Building. The Owner will pay for all backcharges incurred by the telephone company.

D.

Provide pull strings for entire run of conduit for service cabling from telephone service origination to point of demarcation. Provide pull string for spare conduit.

EXTERNAL CABLE TV SERVICE A.

Furnish and install from utility pole to the Building, as shown on the Drawings, Schedule 40 PVC duct with pull wire for Cable TV service. Consult with the Cable TV Company regarding this service and do all work according to their requirements.

B.

The Electrical Subcontractor will be responsible for providing complete Cable TV service to the Building.

C.

The Cable TV Company will install the Cable TV cable to the Building. The Owner will pay for all backcharges incurred by the Cable TV Company.

D.

Provide pull strings for entire run of conduit for service cabling from Cable TV service origination to point of demarcation. Provide pull string for spare conduit.

ELECTRIC SERVICE A. B.

Consult with National Grid, hereinafter called the Utility Company, with respect to providing service and metering to the Building. Primary Service: 1. The project shall be served from a utility company pole and shall run underground to a new pad mounted transformer. 2. Transformer shall be installed on a concrete pad where shown on the Drawings. The exact location for terminating primary and secondary conduit at the transformer shall be coordinated with the Utility Company. All 90° risers into transformer pad shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit. 3. The Utility Company shall furnish and install primary cable. 4. Transformer shall be furnished and installed by the Utility Company. Primary connections at the transformer shall be by the utility company. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 94 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

5. 6.

3.15

The Electrical Subcontractor shall coordinate all work related to installing the primary services with the Utility Company. The Owner will pay for all backcharges incurred by the Utility Company. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install an extra Schedule 40 PVC duct from the utility co. pole to the transformer pad as shown on the Drawings.

C.

Secondary Service: 1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install secondary conduit and cable from the pad mounted transformer to the main disconnecting device. Secondary connections at the transformer shall be by the Electrical Subcontractor. Terminal connectors at the transformers secondary service shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor. Secondary service characteristics shall be 480 volt, three phase, four wire. 2. The Electrical Subcontractor shall coordinate with the Utility Company to ensure the installation of the secondary service shall conform with the Utility Company's requirements. 3. Metering shall be provided at the transformer, by the Utility Company.

D.

Division of responsibility with respect to the underground service extension shall be as follows: 1. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the work and materials required for the following: a. Excavation. b. Backfill. c. Transformer pad. d. Concrete encasement of conduit. e. Resurfacing of grades. 2. All other materials, equipment and labor required for the complete ductbank shall be furnished and installed by the Electrical Subcontractor under this Section, including the following: a. Primary and secondary raceways, including handholes. b. Grounding system. c. Pull strings.

UNDERGROUND DUCTBANK A.

Furnish and install ductbank as herein specified and as shown on the Drawings. The entire length of ductbank must be inspected and approved by the Utility Company prior to being covered.

B.

Materials shall be as follows: 1. Conduit-PVC Schedule 40. 2. Conduit supports (duct system) shall be molded plastic with interlocking lugs and skeletonized structure. Minimum separation 3-1/2 inches.

C.

Duct System shall be as follows: 1. The size and number of conduit shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 2. The entire length of ductbank shall be excavated and graded before any conduit is laid. 3. The ductbank shall be set on undisturbed earth. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 95 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4. 5.

6. 7.

8.

9.

10.

11. 12.

The conduit shall be installed so that the top is a minimum of 36 inches below finished grade. Changes in direction shall be made by long sweep bends. Minimum radius 25 feet except that at the end of a run within 10 feet of termination, manufactured bends may be used having a minimum radius of 36”. Conduit base and intermediate spacers shall be installed a maximum of 5 feet on centers. Spacers shall not be placed one above the other but shall be staggered a minimum of 6”. All conduit joints shall be made watertight by means of a sealing compound before the coupling is installed. Joints in conduit shall be staggered. Minimum space between joints in adjacent conduit shall be 6”. When the required number of conduits have been installed, securely tie the assembly together at distances not exceeding 7 feet. Tie shall consist of three turns of No. 18 iron wire. Separate ties required for low tension and high tension conduit runs. Where conduit is encased, the duct envelope shall be of monolithic construction. a. Pouring of concrete shall be continuous throughout the length of construction. The end of the pour shall be interlocked or sloped. If the installation is halted, the ends of the conduit shall be plugged. b. Concrete shall not be poured until the conduit installation has been inspected and approved. After the installation is completed, each conduit shall be cleaned and identified. A standard flexible mandrel and stiff bristle brush shall be pulled through each conduit. The mandrel shall be not less than 12” long and the diameter approximately 1/4” less than the conduit. Install approximately 12” below the top of the trench above each conduit or direct buried cable a 6-inch wide plastic warning tape. Tape shall be yellow in color with black letters reading “Buried Electric Lines.” Electric handholes shall be precast and shall be installed where indicated. The exact location of each handhole shall be determined after careful consideration has been given to the location of other utilities, grading and paving. The location of each handhole shall be approved by the Architect before installation. Handholes shall be a minimum of 4'-0" by 4'-0" by 4'-0" high. Handholes shall be monolithically constructed precast-concrete having the required strength as established by ASTM A 79 Grade 60 and inside dimensions by the Drawings or Specifications. Frames and covers shall be delivered on the job unpainted and, after approval, shall be given two (2) coats of asphalt paint. In unpaved areas, the top of handhole covers shall be approximately 1-2 inch above the finished grade. Where existing grades that are higher than finished grades are encountered, provide a brick collar to elevate temporarily the handhole cover to existing grade level. Where duct lines enter handholes, the sections of duct may be either cast in the concrete or may enter the handhole through a square or rectangular opening of suitable dimensions provided in the handhole walls. Where openings are provided for the entrance of duct lines, the space between ducts and between ducts and handhole walls shall be caulked tight with lead wool installed over the handhole sump. A cable-pulling iron shall be installed in the wall opposite each duct line entrance. All handholes shall be ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 96 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

provided with double-lockable type covers. 3.16

FIRE STOPPING A.

3.17

SPECIAL COORDINATION INSTRUCTIONS A.

3.18

Electrical installations in hollow spaces, vertical shafts and ventilation or air handling ducts shall be so made that the possible spread of fire or products of combustion will not be substantially increased. Openings around electrical penetrations through fire-resistance rated walls, partitions, floors or ceilings shall be firestopped using approved methods to maintain the fire-resistance rating. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for Firestopping. All fire stopping material and installation will be by the General Contractor.

Coordination with the work of other trades is referred to within various parts of this Section. The following special instructions shall also be carefully noted: 1. The Electrical Subcontractor shall obtain from the HVAC Engineer copies of all Shop Drawing prints showing the ductwork installation as it will be put in place on the project. These Drawings shall be thoroughly checked by the Electrical Subcontractor and the routing of all conduits and installation of all outlets and electrical equipment shall be coordinated with the ductwork so as to prevent any installation conflict. Such coordination shall be done prior to roughing-in conduits, outlets and electrical equipment. 2. Locations of all wall outlets shall be verified with the Architect prior to roughing in conduits. Refer to details and wall elevations on the Architectural Drawings; mounting heights indicated on these Architectural Drawings and/or specific dimensional information given to the Electrical Subcontractor by the Architect shall take precedence over such information indicated on the Electrical Drawings. 3. Refer to all other Drawings associated with this project. Any equipment which requires an electrical supply circuit, switch, controls and connections, even though not indicated on the Electrical Drawings, shall be furnished and installed as directed by the Architect. Locations of lighting fixtures shall conform to the architectural reflected ceiling plans. 4. Refer to Architectural Drawings for areas in which the concrete slab is poured on grade. In these areas a moisture proofing membrane will be installed on the grade fill or earth prior to pouring of slab. Electrical conduits shall be so installed, where possible, to avoid the necessity of penetrating this moisture proofing membrane. Such penetration of the membrane shall only be made when specifically allowed by the Architect, and shall be made only at locations directed by the Architect.

ALTERNATES A.

Refer to Alternates, Section 01 23 00, for alternates affecting the scope of work under this Section.

B.

The work of this Section, which is required by the scope of work as stated in the Alternates, Section 01 23 00, shall comply with the applicable quality and performance requirements for similar work under this Section.

C.

The alternates which effect the Electrical Sections are: 1. Alternate No.1 – xxxx. ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 97 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

a. 3.19

Alternate Number 1: xxxx.

PROJECT CLOSEOUT A.

A certificate of completion shall be issued by the Electrical Subcontractor indicating that the installation is in conformance with the Construction Documents and all applicable Local, State and Federal Statutes and Codes. Final inspection by the Engineer shall be conducted after receipt of the Certificate of Completion. At minimum, life safety items shall be 100% complete including emergency lighting systems, the fire alarm system, and the emergency standby system before the Electrical Subcontractor request for final inspection. If final inspection by the Engineer proves that the emergency lighting systems, the fire alarm system, and the emergency standby system are not 100% complete, the Engineer will backcharge the Electrical Subcontractor at his hourly rate for reinspection. END OF SECTION

ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 - 98 Ai3 Architects, LLC / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Section 27 10 00 STRUCTURED CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS A.

The General Provisions of a Contract, including conditions of the Contract and Division 1 of the Specifications, shall apply to the Work in this Section.

B.

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all portions of the Project Manual are hereby made a part of this Section. Refer to paragraph titled “Quality Assurance” in this section and to Division 1 for requirements for Communications Subcontractors. Throughout this and related Sections, “Subcontractor” shall not be limited to the singular and masculine and shall refer to one, or more than one, Communications Subcontractor. The Terms “Communications Subcontractor” and “Communications System Integrator “shall be used interchangeably and shall be understood to represent the communications subcontractor responsible for the furnishing, configuring, testing, programming, warranting and ensuring all work is performed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations for the work identified in this SECTION.

C.

1.2

Any qualifications or certificates required in this specification may be requested by the Architect as part of the post-bid qualifications review. Such review shall commence subsequent to the bid submission, as none of this information is required as part of the bid submission. In the event that the Architect requests qualification or certification documentation such documentation shall be provided within 3 business days.

SUMMARY A.

Work Included. The scope of work of this Section consists of the installation of all materials to be furnished under this SECTION, and without limiting the generality thereof, consists of providing all labor, materials, equipment, plant, transportation, appurtenances and services necessary and/or incidental to properly complete all cabling work as shown on the drawings, as described in the specifications, or as reasonable inferred from either or, in the opinion of the Owner, as being required and in general, is as follows: 1. Fiber Backbone and Fiber distribution cable for video, horizontal Cat 6A, 6 and 5e wiring, connecting devices, terminations, faceplates, patch panels, equipment racks with vertical cabling management and all related equipment, to complete installation, and testing of the systems to be used as signal pathways for voice, high-speed data, wireless access point cabling and CCTV transmission. 2. Copper patch cords for every cabled port in the IDF closets and MDF. 3. Provide and install the following faceplates and jacks: WAP4, WALL PHONE (PH), T1B, V8B, Data face plated (D#), A1 (A1 must have a blank port) A3 (must have 2 extra blank ports for video entry system cable pathway. Coordinate jack required for PA system admin phone with 27 50 00 communications subcontractor. Must be gray in color), A2, F (fax lines), VB and CCTV (C###) (CCTV locations reflect camera locations. Actual data outlet shall be positioned as close as possible to each camera location. For indoor and outdoor surface, corner, pendant and wall mount locations, data outlet shall be installed above the finished accessible ceiling where conduit run terminates from the camera location. All data outlet locations shall be above finished ceilings or other accessible ceiling/wall spaces. For recessed ceiling locations, install data jack as close to camera position as possible in accessible ceiling location. Electrical subcontractor is responsible STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-1 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. 10.

11.

12.

1.3

for back box to mount camera with 1” conduit to accessible ceiling at every CCTV symbol on drawings (back box at CCTV location is for camera mounting (camera mount back box not required for recessed camera locations), and back box for RJ45 jack near every CCTV camera locations) and any other faceplate and jacks that are reasonably assumed to be primarily for data, wireless, CCTV or voice. CCTV cameras provided by 28 00 00. A1 (or any A faceplate with a PB designation near it) must have blank port for PB cable pass through (Coordinate with 28 00 00), Nameplates, labels and tags for cables and faceplates. Coordinate with Owner. Testing and Certification. Label all Tel/Data conduits that terminate in a room with on both ends (do not label stub ups from faceplates). Label switch end of all IDF/MDF patch cords with originating patch panel letter and port number ie: B-44. All above ceiling WAP4 outlets shall be denoted on the ceiling tile below the outlet with a ½” green dot sticker. Mark location of all CCTV back boxes above ceiling tiles in a similar fashion with a ½” yellow dot sticker. Mark all above ceiling locations for data in a similar fashion with a ½” blue dot sticker. All wall phone back boxes shall be a min of 6” away from any side wall, corner, door jamb or adjacent back box. Wall phone (PH symbol) faceplates shall be stainless steel. Coordinate, provide and install all cabling as coordinated by each communications subcontractor for 27 50 00 and 28 00 00 to complete the work in the following sections: 27 50 00 – Distributed Communications and Monitoring; 28 00 00 – Electronic Safety and Security. All cabling shall comply with the respective sections manufacturer’s requirements and shall not void any manufacturer’s warranty. Provide and install in all table tops with floor boxes below 2 blue Cat6A pass thru keystone jacks and 1 white Cat6A pass thru keystone jack. Provide and install patch cords (blue for data, white for voice, Cat6A) connecting floor box data ports to pass thru jacks in furniture. All faceplates (except PH faceplates as specified above) shall be white thermoplastic unless specified or noted on the drawings otherwise.

B.

The work of this Section is shown on Technology Drawings numbers designated by a T.

C.

No corridors, classrooms or spaces are air plenums. No cabling is required to be plenum rated.

RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A.

All Sections of Division 27 and Division 28

B.

SECTION 05 31 00 – STEEL DECKING See for restrictions concerning the hanging of material, cable tray, mounts, brackets, hooks, and other items from the roof or decking

C.

SECTION 01 23 00 - ALTERNATES

D.

The following related work or material shall be provided under the designated trades and under the listed SECTION: 1.

Specialty Equipment: DIVISION 11, “EQUIPMENT”

2.

Field Painting: DIVISION 9, “FINISHES”

3.

SECTION 23 00 00- HVAC

4.

SECTION 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-2 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

E.

5.

SECTION 22 00 00 - PLUMBING

6.

SECTIONS of DIVISION 27 and 28

7.

SECTION 12 68 00-SEAT AND TABLE ASSEMBLIES

8.

SECTION 14 – ELEVATORS

9.

SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE

Unless otherwise indicated, the following work is not included as part of the 27 10 00 Communication Systems Integrator’s responsibilities in this SECTION, except for coordination, and is to be performed by others as indicated: 1.

Empty conduits for cable pathways to accessible point above finished ceiling or below floor shall be provided by the electrical subcontractor to ensure distance limitations of cables as determined by standards. Coordinate with RCDD of this section and notify architect of any discrepancies.

2.

Cable tray, provided by the electrical subcontractor, shall be a black and a minimum of 20” wide by 6” high. All cable tray shall be within 10” above racks.

3.

Floor boxes and poke through devices shall be provided by the electrical subcontractor.

4.

Device boxes with plaster rings for data shall be provided and installed by the electrical subcontractor.

5.

Clock system backboxes shall be installed by the electrical subcontractor and provided by the 27 50 00 Communications subcontractor.

6.

Telephone system, installation and cross connections and devices provided by Owner contractor.

7.

Speaker/paging system backboxes shall be installed by the electrical subcontractor and provided by the 27 50 00 Communications subcontractor.

8.

Structural blocking to support wall and ceiling mounted equipment shall be provided by the General Contractor.

9.

Computers and monitors and final connections to wall outlets shall be provided by the Owner.

10.

Interface with public utilities telephone service shall be arranged and provided by the Owner.

11.

Wide Area Network connections shall be arranged and provided by the Owner.

12.

CATV service and connections to installed systems shall be arranged and provided by the Owner.

13.

Cabling and cable installation in Sections 274000 and 277000.

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-3 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

F.

1.4

The installation, operating cost and maintenance of the controlled environmental conditions, for equipment located on site by the manufacturer, NFPA 70B, or as specified in these specifications shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A.

General: This system shall provide a cabling infrastructure system for voice and high speed data. Furnish and install complete systems consisting of patch / cross connection panels, single mode fiber-optic cabling, multimode fiber-optic cabling, multimode cabling to the digital signs, main distribution frame (MDF) racks (2 post relay rack type AND 4 post type, intermediate distribution frame (IDF) racks (non-server type, 2 post), rack mounted power distribution units, TV suite racks (if/as shown on drawings, 4 post). Provide and terminate fiber and cabling as per the network riser detail drawing (T2.6) in all locations noted therein or as designated or inferred on the drawings. Provide appropriate amount of fiber termination ports in all areas to terminate all fiber. Provide all equipment as noted on the drawings or otherwise for a complete and functioning system. Ensure all fiber counts are correct independent of the quantities shown on T2.6. Where discrepencies occur, provide the higher cable count. Higher fiber counts may be submitted if it is economical to do so, however all fiber shall be terminated unless noted otherwise. The horizontal 4 pair Category 6A copper cabling system shall be guaranteed to exceed all TIA-568-B.2-10 link and channel performance requirements and be capable of supporting 10G Base-T (802.3an) and ISO/IEC 11801 applications for a total distance of 100 meters with equipment cords. The system shall be guaranteed to meet all Cat6A requirements

B.

This specification describes the desired form, function and performance of the backbone and horizontal cabling system. It is the responsibility of the installer of this section to design and provide a fully functional system in accordance with the intent and stated performance of this specification or better. Provide all communications wire, cable, fiber-optic cable, devices and related facilities installed complete as shown or as implied on the Contract Documents for fully functional systems, including, but not limited to: 1.

Data, Voice, Fax, Wap and CCTV horizontal cabling and Fiber Backbone Cabling System, grounding and equipment including but not limited to: a. Fiber Optic Backbone Cabling b. Fiber Optic Cabling for Video c.

Fiber Optic Connectors

d. Fiber Optic Patch Panels e. Equipment Racks and PDUs f.

Vertical Cable Managers

g. Cabling Distribution Support h. Category 6A Data cabling (BLUE) i.

Category 6A WAP (OWAP, WAP4) cabling (GREEN)

j.

Category 6A CCTV cabling (YELLOW)

k.

Category 6A Voice cabling (WHITE)

l.

Category 6A Fax line cabling (GRAY)

m. Category 6A for any other requirements (GRAY) n. Category 6A RJ-45 Style Jacks (colored to correspond to the color of cabling) p. Category 6A angled Patch Panels q. Category 6A Patch Cables as specified below. r.

Cat6 cabling for fax lines (all fax lines homerun to MDF)

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-4 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

s. t. u. v. w. x.

Electrical subcontractor shall provide cable tray sized 6”H x 20”W min. Cabling Distribution Support (J hooks where no cable tray provided) Stainless Steel Wall Phone face plates with recessed jacks 110 blocks mounted on plywood backboard and cross over cabling for fax lines. Grounding and bonding Ensure all cabling is protected from paint and paint overspray. Any cabling found with paint on the jacket shall be removed and replaced at no expense to the owner. y. Horizontal 2RU cable manager below each patch panel stack z. All cabling shall be terminated in the IDFs or MDF as shown on the zone coverage drawings. Any deviations shall be brought to the attention of the architect. aa. Provide and install two 2 inch conduit feed throughs from all sound closets to the accessible space above them for speaker and other cabling for the sound systems. Coordinate with 274000 communications subcontractor. C.

D. 1.5

Work Not Included: The following work is not included in this section: 1.

All computer workstations / printers and associated software (Provided by Owner)

2.

Telephone system and instruments (Provided by Owner)

3.

Public Address / Intercom System (Provided by 27 50 00)

4.

Master clock system and secondary clocks (Provided by 27 50 00)

5.

Video distribution system, TVs (Provided by 27 70 00)

6.

Network electronics (Provided by Owner)

7.

Wireless access point devices and controllers (Provided by 272133).

Coordination: Coordinate device locations with furnishings and equipment.

REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, STANDARDS AND CODES A.

Comply with the referenced codes and standards and with the Contract Documents. Where conflicts occur, the more stringent shall apply.

B.

Work shall meet or exceed the standards and procedures of the following: 1.

ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements.

2.

ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components

3.

ANSI/TIA/EIA 568.2 Addendum 1, Transmission Performance Specification for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Category 6 cabling

4.

ANSI/TIA/EIA 568.2 Addendum 10, Transmission Performance Specification for 4-Pair 100 Ohm Augmented Category 6 cabling

5.

ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B.3 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 3: Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-5 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

6.

ANSI/TIA/EIA 569-B Commercial Building Standards For Telecommunications Pathways And Spaces

7.

TIA-568-C.0 Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises

8.

TIA-568-C.1 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard

9.

TIA-568-C.2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components

10.

TIA-568-C.3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard

11.

ANSI/TIA/EIA 606-A The Administration Standard For The Telecommunications Infrastructure Of Commercial Building

12.

ANSI/J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding And Bonding Requirements For Telecommunications

13.

ANSI/TIA/EIA-862 Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard for Commercial Buildings

14.

ANSI/TIA-942 Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers

15.

ASTM D 4566-05, Standard Test Methods for Electrical Performance Properties of Insulations and Jackets for Telecommunications Wire and Cable, 2005

16.

BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) Current Edition

17.

BICSI Information Transport Installation Manual (ITSM) Current Edition

18.

ISO/IEC 11801 – Information Technology – Generic Cabling for Customer Premise

19.

IEEE 802.3 Standard for Information technology -Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks – Specific requirements Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications

20.

IEC 61156-1, Multicore and Symmetrical Pair/Quad Cables for Digital Communications – Part 1: Generic Specification, 2005

21.

NFPA-70 National Electrical Code 2008 edition

22.

NECA/BICSI-568-A Standard for Installing Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

23.

Federal Communications Commission Part 15 and Part 68

24.

UL 444 – Standard for Safety of Communications Cable

25.

UL 1666 – Standard for Safety of Flame Propagation Height

26. NFPA 262 – Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables. 27. BICSI Outside Plant Design Reference Manual, Current Edition In the event of conflicts, the more stringent provisions shall apply.

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-6 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.6

1.7

COORDINATION A.

When articles, materials, operations or methods related to execution of telecommunications work are noted, specified, or described in the specifications or are indicated or reasonably implied on drawings and schedules, execute work as appropriate to provide complete and proper function, operation and installation.

B.

The drawings utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate items of work. These symbols and diagrams will not typically identify dimensions nor will they identify inclusion of specific accessories, appurtenances and related items necessary and appropriate for a complete and proper installation and operation. The Communications Subcontractor shall install work complete and ready for proper operation, including related items not specifically identified, shown, indicated or specified. The work shall be installed, in accordance with the intent diagrammatically expressed on the drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on architectural drawings and on shop drawings approved by the Communications System Integrator and Architect. When abbreviations appear on the drawings or specifications in upper or lower case letters, with or without periods, the resultant work shall be as stated above.

C.

The drawings include details for various items, which are specific with regard to the dimensions and positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination for the indicated work. Work shall not proceed until actual field conditions and requirements are verified by the Communications Subcontractor.

D.

The drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and equipment unless indicated otherwise by dimensions.

E.

Where a PB symbol is present, provide a minimum of 1 blank port in the A faceplate at the PB location for PB wiring.

F.

Coordinate with HVAC contractor the exact placement of ALL AC units, condensate and drain lines, to ensure NO AC unit is installed above ANY rack or plywood backboard in the MDF and all IDFs. No drain lines shall be routed above an equipment rack.

G.

Coordinate elevator camera installation and card reader cabling with elevator contractor. Communications subcontractor of this section is responsible for all cabling and terminations of elevator CCTV camera installation except for traveller cabling. Elevator contractor is responsible for traveller cabling and connections to traveller cabling. Coordinate cabling requirements of elevator camera with 28 00 00 communications subcontractor. Equipment required for camera installation and connections to cabling (other than traveller cable) is the responsibility of the 28 00 00 communications subcontractor.

SUBMITTALS A.

General: Architect may require submittal submission within 45 days of bid award. Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, Section 01300 and Section 26 00 00. Submittals shall be made as one complete package. STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-7 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

B.

C.

The Submittal shall include, but shall not be limited to the following: 1.

Product Data for each component specified, including detailed manufacturer’s specifications. Include data on features, ratings, and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components. Provide an index and tabulated pages referencing the equipment in the specification. Any submittal received without a full index and tabulated pages shall be returned without action.

2.

Provide qualification/certification data for firms and persons specified in the “Quality Assurance” article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Provide evidence of applicable registration or certification.

3.

Field test and observation reports from qualified inspecting and testing personnel indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of the installed systems.

4.

Final schedule of cables as specified in Part 3.

5.

Shop drawings, prepared in AutoCAD, readable in AutoCAD Release 2010 or newer, detailing the cabling systems.

Shop drawing submittals shall include but shall not be limited to the following: 1.

Construction plans indicating the following: a. Locations of all voice, data & audio/visual backbone cables with identification numbers. b. Location of termination racks and backboards.

D.

2.

System riser diagram indicating general arrangement of interconnections between system components on each floor of the building, identifying number and type of cables in each raceway.

3.

Horizontal cabling, fiber, concentrator enclosures, MDF/IDF racks, and cross connect system. Include front-view details identifying all components, cabling connections, and cable identification numbers.

Cable Schedules: Prior to substantial completion, prepare and submit cable schedules for each of the communication systems installed under this section describing the as-built condition of the systems. Prepare cabling schedules in tabular form. Include the following information in each schedule: 1. Fiber Optic and Horizontal Cabling System Schedule: a. b. c. d. e.

E.

IDF/MDF room number Cable ID Origination Patch Panel & Port Number. Destination Room (old and new numbers if they change during construction) Destination Room faceplate location and jack number.

It is intended for the Submittal data to be complete and accurate at the first submission. If the submittal is returned marked “Resubmit” only one additional submission will be permitted. IF THE SECOND SUBMITTAL IS NOT ACCEPTABLE, OR IF THE SUBMITTAL IS NOT MADE WITHIN THE SPECIFIED TIME FRAME, THE RIGHT OF SUBSTITUTION AND STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-8 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

SELECTION WILL BE LOST. THE OWNER WILL SELECT THE SPECIFIED ITEM. THAT ITEM IS TO BE PROVIDED AND SHALL BE PROVIDED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST.

1.8

F.

A minimum period of 15 working days, exclusive of transmittal time, will be required in the Owner’s office each time Shop Drawings, Product Data, layout drawings, catalog data and brochures are submitted or resubmitted for review. A minimum period of 20 working days exclusive of transmittal time will be required for reviewing substitute materials or manufacturer. These time periods shall be considered when scheduling the work.

G.

If proposed equipment deviates from the Specification or Drawings, indicate in writing on Company letterhead those differences and provide sufficient data to justify acceptance. FAILURE TO INDICATE DEVIATION OR SUBSTITUTIONS IMPLIES FULL COMPLIANCE WITH DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.

RECORD DRAWINGS Provide Record Drawings in accordance with Division 1 for requirements regarding Project Record Documents. “As- Built” record documentation for telecommunications work shall include: System function diagrams. Communications flow diagrams. Manufacturers’ description literature for equipment. Connection and programming schedules as appropriate. Equipment material list including quantities. Spare parts list with quantities. Details not on original Contract Documents. Test Results Warranties Release of Liens Operation and Maintenance Manual: Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittals for requirements pertaining to Operation and Maintenance Data. The Communication System Integrator shall submit manuals in accordance with Division 1 containing manufacturers’ brochures of items installed by the Communication System Integrator. The manual shall be subdivided into separate sections with tab dividers to identify subsystems of the integrated system. Reference appropriate specification sections. Provide the following additional information for each electronic system. Information shall be edited for this project where applicable. Operations manuals for components and for system as a whole. Maintenance manuals for components and for system as a whole.

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-9 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Point-to-point diagrams, cabling diagrams, construction details and cable labeling details. List of spare parts, materials and suppliers of components. Provide name, address and telephone number for each supplier. Emergency instructions for operational and maintenance requirements. Delivery time frame for replacement of component parts from suppliers. Recommend inspection schedule and procedures for components and for system as a whole. Complete “Reviewed” shop drawings and product data for components and system as a whole. Troubleshooting procedures for each system and for each major system component. Closeout Submittals: 1. As-Built Drawings: Update Shop Drawings to create final As-Built Drawings. Submit 3 copies digitally in AutoCAD 2010 or later format on a CD. Each faceplate shall show the faceplate port number and terminating servicing closet room number with patch panel letter and port number. 2. Maintenance Data: Include three (3) copies: maintenance and repair procedures. 3. Digital copies of all training materials and DVD videos of all training provided on CD and DVDs. 4. Warranty paperwork certified and provided by both the installer (installer/subcontractor warranty min 15 years) and the cable manufacturer warranty (min 15 years). Warranty certificates shall include contact numbers. 5. Submit costs for repairs and service not covered under warranty (ie: owner requested changes, acts of God, vandalism, misuse, etc). 6. PDF of product data and O&M manuals shall contain bookmarks for every section and item submitted. 1.9

QUALITY ASSURANCE Equipment and materials required for installation under these specifications shall be the current model and new (less than one [1] year from date of manufacture), unused and without blemish or defect. A.

Installer Qualifications: Installer shall engage a registered communications distribution designer (RCDD) as part of the communications subcontractor team. Such RCDD can be an employee or consultant, but must be certified by the Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI). RCDD shall perform post bid review of the cable plant and bring any discrepencies to the attention of the architect. RCDD shall provide to Owner and Architect rack elevations for all racks in MDF and IDFs when actual cable plant is determined, to include UPS devices, patch panels (cat6A and fiber), CCTV system and NVRs, access control servers, phone equipment, intrusion system equipment, switching and wireless equipment and owner equipment. Coordinate equipment with contractors of the appropriate sections and owner. RCDD shall ensure no cable lengths are over distance limitations set forth in the standards, and shall bring any discrepancies to the attention of the architect. STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-10 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Coordinate actual rack placements in MDF and IDFs with architect and owner. RCDD shall review outdoor fiber plant design and bring any discrepancies to the attention of the architects. RCDD Is intended for post bid review and coordination. B.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturers shall be experienced in manufacturing components listed and labeled under TIA-568C.0, TIA-568C.1, TIA-568C.2, TIA 568C.3.

C.

Comply with the following: 1. TIA-568C.0, Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises 2. TIA-568C.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard 3. TIA-568C.2, Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards 4. TIA-568C.3, Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 Measurement of Optical Power Lossof Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant. 6. ANSI/TIA/EIA-14A Measurement of Optical Power Lossof Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant. 7. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. 8. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606, Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings. 9. 10.

ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications. BISCI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual Standards, most recent volume.

D.

All wiring must be run end to end with no splices (except for fiber, where splices are specified to be provided in certain locations). Terminated cables shall be punched down meeting approved methods. Any cables found to be spliced must be replaced at communications subcontractor’s expense.

E.

Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1.

F.

The Terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

Work Coordination: Coordinate Work of this Section with owner’s contractor for the telephone switch and telephone instruments, planned equipment, 27 40 00 communications subcontractor, wide area network (WAN) installed by Owner, 28 00 00 communications subcontractor for CCTV placements and the Technology Director of the School District. 1.

Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute record to all participants in the meetings.

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-11 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. Adjust the arrangements and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross connects in equipment rooms and wiring closets to accommodate and optimize the arrangement and space requirements of the telephone switch, LAN equipment, CATV Equipment and WAN equipment. G.

1.10

Communications subcontractor must be certified by the cabling manufacturer to install, terminate and warrant cabling systems. Provide proof of manufacturers’ certification for systems to be installed.

SUPPORT MATERIALS A.

Furnish support materials described below that match products installed, are packaged for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Cable: One 100ft spool of each size and type used for Project. Furnish on reels. 2. Patch Panel Units: 1 of each type for each 50 installed, but not less than 1. 3. Connecting Blocks: 1 of each type of each 100 installed, but not less than 1. 4. Outlets Assemblies: 1 of each type for each 100 installed, but not less than 1.

1.11

WARRANTY A.

General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the communications subcontractor under other requirements of the Contract Documents.

B.

Special Warranty: The data cabling system, including workstation outlets, cabling, connectors, patch panels and other connecting hardware, shall be warranted to be free from defects in material or faulty workmanship, and shall meet the performance requirements of TIA-568C.0, TIA-568C.1, TIA-568C.2, TIA 568C.3. The cabling system shall conform to the ANSI/TIAIEIA-568-B, specifications for any current or future application, which supports transmission over a properly constructed horizontal cabling system, which meets the channel, and/or basic link performance as described in TIA-568C.0, TIA-568C.1, TIA-568C.2, TIA 568C.3

C.

The warranty shall cover material, services, and operation of the cabling system, end to end to include connectors/terminations, both copper and fiber. The warranty shall cover the operation of system to run minimum 1GB transmission on horizontal cabling category 6 systems, 10GB transmission on horizontal cabling category 6A systems, and 10GB on MultiMode Fiber backbone without exceeding the standard attenuation limit. 1.

Special Warranty Period: 15 Year MINIMUM from date of acceptance. Provide warranty from Installer and manufacturer. Installer shall submit warranty tests to manufacturer on behalf of the owner and deliver the manufacturer warranty to the owner when complete.

D.

The manufacturers of connectivity and cabling will certify installing communications subcontractor on the project to be warranted.

E.

The communications subcontractor must be certified with the connectivity and structured cabling to be installed in the project that the communications subcontractor will be installing.

F.

The communications subcontractor will supply a letter or other document that will detail the

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-12 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

certification in regards to the connectivity and cabling systems installed to the Technology Services Department and/or Construction Manager prior to the final inspection and close of the project.

1.12

G.

All test results and warrantees for connectivity and structured cabling shall be submitted to the Technology Director (Minimum two (2) copies of test results will be required in electronic format). Submittals must be received prior to substantial completion. Communications subcontractor is responsible for obtaining warranties for cabling. Provide ALL warranties the cabling system qualifies for.

H.

Uncertified communications subcontractors will be required to remove structured cabling and pay for replacement by another certified communications subcontractor if the installation is not in compliance with certifying manufacturer or contract standards at no additional expense to the Owner.

J.

Certifying manufacturers may be required to do inspections of cabling systems on project.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.

Materials shall be suitably packaged by manufacturers to prevent damage during shipment and handling. Damaged materials will not be acceptable for use.

B.

Store materials on site in clean, dry storage area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS MATERIALS: Manufactured Products: Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts are available. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment or material is required, such units shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Equipment Assemblies and Components: Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer, but must meet TIA/EIA Category 6A or 6, depending on cable type, criteria as a complete permanent link. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service. Moving parts or elements of equipment of the unit normally requiring lubrication shall have means provided for such lubrication and shall be adequately lubricated at the factory prior to delivery. Factory cabling shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on cabling diagrams. STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-13 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

Any equipment listed by manufacturer and/or model number is for performance criteria comparison only. In no way is it implied that the specific product must be provided. All equipment to be provided shall be ‘or equal’ unless noted as proprietary in the specification. 2.1

NETWORK BACKBONE CABLING A.

General: 1.

The following types of backbone cables shall be used on this project: a. Single-Mode (SM) 9/125um fiber and OM4 Multimode 50/125um fiber cable for 10GB backbone distribution of data, voice, video, CCTV and video transmission backbone.

B.

2.

All Single-Mode and Multimode fiber for the backbone shall be terminated with LC style connectors.

3.

See T2.6 and other technology drawing details for fiber types and strand counts

4.

All fiber shall be run in appropriately sized innerduct. Riser-Gard by Carlon or equal by Maxcell or Pyramid for indoor fiber; Maxcell innerduct, with cells and size to fit applications for outdoor fiber or equal by Carlon or Pyramid. Armored fiber may be used in lieu of fiber and innerduct.

5.

Determine splicing locations, provide and install splices and equipment and all requirements to provide designed intent on T2.6 network riser detail an dtechnology drawings. It is the responsibility of the communications subcontractor of this section to ensure a fully functional fiber plant (both single mode and multimode). Provide a loss budget analysis to make certain the system will function appropriately in accordance with standards over the proposed link. See owner for network electronics. RCDD shall approve loss budget analysis prior to work being performed. Forward copy of loss budget analysis to the architect.

OS2 Single-Mode Fiber-Optic Cable- SM 9/125um: 1.

The fiber-optic cable shall be tightbuffer indoor/outdoor factory-fabricated, jacketed, low-loss, glass-type, fiber-optic single-mode, operating at 1310 nanometers (nm) and 1550nm. a. Strands Per Cable: as per drawing details. See T2.6 and T2.1 b. The light guide building cable shall meet the following technical specifications: 1. Fiber Dimensions: 9 micron core 250 micron coating 125 micron cladding 900 micron buffering 2. Fiber Identification: Individually color-coded PVC buffer. 3. Buffer Material: PVC 4. Jacket Material: PVC 5. Operating Temperature: -40 to 158. F

2.

In cables with more than one fiber, the fibers shall be stranded around a dielectric central member.

3.

The cable and sub-unit jacket color shall be yellow for cables containing single-mode fibers, orange for multimode fibers. (Colored tape will not be used to re-identify jacket color).

4.

The cable shall be all dielectric. STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-14 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

5.

The individual fibers shall be color coded for identification. The optical fiber colorcoding shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-A, “Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.” The coloring material shall be stable over the temperature range of the cable, shall not be susceptible to migration, and shall not affect the transmission characteristics of the optical fibers. Color-coded buffered fibers shall not adhere to one another. The following color codes will be used: a. Blue. b. Orange. c.

Green.

d. Brown. e. Slate. f.

White.

g. Red h. Black. i.

Yellow.

j.

Violet

k.

Rose

I.

Aqua

6.

Jacket Printing: The outer cable jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or UL file number, date of manufacture, fiber type, flame rating, UL symbol, and sequential length markings every two feet. The print color shall be black. The printing shall be permanent and legible for the life of the cable.

7.

The fiber-optic cable shall meet the following standards: a. ISO 11801 2nd edition b. EN 50 173 2 c.

nd

edition

TIA-568C.3

d. ANSI/TIA/EIA-492 e. TELECORDIA GR-409 f.

ICEA S-83-596

f.

OFNR rated.

g. NEC Section 770. 8.

The optical fiber shall be single mode 9/125-micron fiber with the following characteristics: a. 1310nm: maximum attenuation, .80 dB/km b. 1550nm: maximum attenuation, .50 dB/km c.

9.

The attenuation of the cabled fiber shall be uniformly distributed throughout its length such that there are no discontinuities greater than 0.2 dB in any onekilometer length of fiber.

The cable shall meet the following EIA cable tests:

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-15 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

a. Impact EIA-RS-455, FOTP-25 b. Compression EIA-RS-455, FOTP-41 c.

Flexure EIA-RS-455, FOTP-104

d. Tensile Bending EIA-RS-455, FOTP-33 e. Temperature Bending EIA-RS-455, FOTP-37 f.

Twist Testing EIA-RS-455, FOTP-85

g. Flame Test (OFNR) UL 1666 (NEC) 10.

Packing and Shipping: a. The cable shall be packaged in cartons and/or wound on spools or reels. Each package shall contain only one continuous length of cable. The cable packaging shall be constructed so as to prevent damage to the cable during shipping and handling. b. Wooden reels shall be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it would be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel.

11.

The cable shall be Mohawk OS2 SM grade cable, of type appropriate for design intent or equal by Superior Essex or Corning. Outdoor grade cable required for any exterior fiber installations.

C. OM4 Fiber-Optic cable MM 50/125um. Strands as per T2.6 and other technology drawing details. 1.

The fiber-optic cable shall be factory-fabricated, jacketed, low-loss, glass-type, fiberoptic multi-mode, graded index, operating at 850 nanometers (nm), and 1300 nm. a. Strands Per Cable: as shown on riser drawing T2.6. b. The light guide building cable shall meet the following technical specifications: 1) Fiber Dimensions: 50 micron core 250 micron coating 125 micron cladding 900 micron buffering 2) Fiber Identification: Individually color-coded PVC buffer. 3) Buffer Material: PVC 4) Jacket Material: PVC 5) Operating Temperature: -40 to 158. F 6) Storage Temperature: -40 to 158. F

2.

In cables with more than one fiber, the fibers shall be stranded around a dielectric central member.

3.

The cable and sub-unit jacket color shall be orange for cables containing multi-mode fibers. (Colored tape will not be used to re-identify jacket color).

4.

The cable shall be all dielectric.

5.

The individual fibers shall be color coded for identification. The optical fiber colorcoding shall be in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-A, “Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.” The coloring material shall be stable over the temperature range of the cable, shall not be susceptible to migration, and shall not affect the transmission characteristics of the optical fibers. Color-coded buffered fibers shall not adhere to one another. The following color codes will be used: a. Blue.

. STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-16 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. I.

Orange. Green. Brown. Slate. White. Red Black. Yellow. Violet Rose Aqua

6.

Jacket Printing: The outer cable jacket shall be marked with the manufacturer’s name or UL file number, date of manufacture, fiber type, flame rating, UL symbol, and sequential length markings every two feet (e.g., “COMPANY — 01/94 — 50/125 MICRON — Type OFNR-(UL) 00001 FEET”). The print color shall be black. The printing shall be permanent and legible for the life of the cable.

7.

The fiber-optic cable shall meet the following standards: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

8.

ANSI-FDDI. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.3-1 for 550 meter lenghts @ 10gb data rates. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14. ICEA S-83-S96. TR-NWT-000409. UL 1666. OFNR rated. NEC Section 770. ISO 11801

The optical fiber shall be multi mode 50/125-micron fiber with the following characteristics: a. 850nm: maximum attenuation, tight buffered, 3.5 dB/km Minimum Modal bandwidth, 500 Mhz.km. Loose tube max attenuation 3.0 dB/km. b. 1300nm:maximum attenuation, tight buffered, 1.25 dB/km Minimum Modal bandwidth, 500 MHz.km. Loose tube max attenuation 1.0 dB/km. c. The attenuation specification shall be a maximum attenuation for each fiber d. The attenuation of the cabled fiber shall be uniformly distributed throughout its length such that there are no discontinuities greater than 0.2 dB in any onekilometer length of fiber.

9.

The building cable shall meet the following EIA cable tests: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.

10.

Impact EIA-RS-455, FOTP-25 Compression EIA-RS-455, FOTP-41 Flexure EIA-RS-455, FOTP-104 Tensile Bending EIA-RS-455, FOTP-33 Temperature Bending EIA-RS-455, FOTP-37 Twist Testing EIA-RS-455, FOTP-85 Flame Test (OFNR) UL 1666 (NEC)

Packing and Shipping: a. The cable shall be packaged in cartons and/or wound on spools or reels. Each STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-17 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

package shall contain only one continuous length of cable. The cable packaging shall be constructed so as to prevent damage to the cable during shipping and handling. b. Wooden reels shall be plainly marked to indicate the direction in which it would be rolled to prevent loosening of the cable on the reel. 11. The cable shall be Mohawk grade 6 OM4 indoor riser distribution cable or equal by Superior Essex or Corning and Mohawk grade 6 OM4 outdoor grade loose tube or equal by Superior Essex or Corning, for all exterior applications. D.

2.2

1.

Provide/install/terminate all fiber provided as shown on the network riser drawings. All fiber shall be terminated with LC style terminations; different colors shall be used for SM and MM. The MM fiber to the digital sign shall be terminated at the sign with LC style connections, final connection shall be provided by the subcontractor responsible for the digital sign. Each fiber termination shelf shall include appropriate cable slack storage, labeling and strain relief.

2.

Fiber termination shelves shall be mounted at the top of the rack containing the electronic equipment.

3.

Cable Connectors: LC-style connectors shall be used on ALL fiber. Polish: Flat PC; Termination procedure: pigtail splice (SM) or epoxy/polish (SM/MM). Insertion loss of connectors shall not be greater than .7dB

4.

SM Fiber from V8 faceplates shall be terminated in TV Head End room at top of rack by wall.

5.

Provide/install/test splices to provide design intent.

FIBER PATCH PANELS A.

2.3

Fiber Termination Hardware:

Fiber Optic Patch Panel and Rack Mount Enclosure 1.

Patch panels shall have an anodized aluminum finish.

2.

Patch panel shall have a clear cover on rear.

3.

Patch panels shall be 6-Pack quad LC (24 fiber) type plates (as appropriate for the type of fiber being terminated) to terminate every strand of fiber in an enclosure no larger than 4U

4.

Rack enclosure shall mount in a 19” equipment rack.

5.

Rack enclosure shall have a front door with cable management and be constructed of durable polycarbonate plastic and black powder coated 16-gauge steel. Leviton Opt-X Ultra or equal by Corning or Hubbell.

NETWORK HORIZONTAL CABLING A.

General:

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-18 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

1.

The following types of data/signal cables shall be used on this project: a. 4 pair Category 6A cable for distribution of Data signals. (Blue) b. 4-pair Category 6A cable for distribution of Wireless Access Point signals. (Green) c. 4-pair Category 6A cable for distribution of CCTV signals (Yellow) d. 4-pair Category 6A cable for distribution of Voice signals (White) e. 4-pair Category 6A cable for Fax lines (Gray) f. 4-pair Category 6A cable for any other faceplate (Gray).

2.

TERMINATION HARDWARE: The following types of connectors shall be used on this project: a. Category 6A Jacks, BLUE, GREEN, WHITE, BLACK, YELLOW, RED, PURPLE.

B. Augmented Category 6 Cable DATA, VOICE, CCTV, WAP, and other faceplates as shown on drawings. 1.

The Category 6A cable shall use the color code indicated below: c.

All Category 6A cable for Data, projectors and set top boxes shall be Blue.

d. All Category 6A cable for Voice shall be White e. All category 6A cable for Fax lines shall be Gray. f.

All Category 6A cable for CCTV shall be Yellow.

g. All Category 6A cable for WAPs shall be Green. h. Any other Category 6A required shall be Gray. i.

Colored tape may not be used to re-identify jacket color.

2.

The cable shall be composed of 23-gauge bare solid copper conductors. Cable shall be insulated with a marked (every 2 ft) polyethylene vinyl chloride jacket. There shall be no shield required in the sheath.

3.

Each sheath shall contain 4 unshielded copper twisted pairs. Each pair shall have a different twist ratio per foot ranging from 12 to 24 twists per foot.

4.

The cable shall be sweep tested to 750MHz and operate up to 500MHz.

5.

The cables shall meet or exceed the following standards: a. IEEE 802.3an b. ICEA 580-576. c.

Canadian Standards Association IWC FT4.

d. National Electric Code - Article 800. e. Proposed ANSI X3T9.S requirements for UTP at 100 Mbps and 155 Mbs ATM. f.

Cable manufacturer must be ISO-9002 Certified.

g. TIA-568-C.2 CAT 6A h. ISO/IEC 11801E2.1 CAT 6A i.

IEC 61156-5 CAT 6A Horizontal cable

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-19 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

6.

In addition to complying with the above listed standards, all Augmented Category 6 cables shall meet or exceed the following criteria: a. Testing shall be in accordance with procedures in the referenced standards unless otherwise stated. b. All cables shall meet, as a minimum, the requirements of: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l.

CSA NEC UL444 TIA-568-C.2 Category 6A ISO/IEC 11801 Category 6

Factory splices of the insulated wire are not allowed in any portion of the cable, Butt-welded conductors prior to insulating are permitted. Nominal OD: .295” Conductor DCR: 6.6 ohm/100m MAX DCR Unbalanced: 3% MAX Mutual capacitance:46pF/m NOM Capacitance unbalance pair/ground: 33pF/100m MAX Characteristic impedance: 100 ohm +/- 7% (10-550MHz) Prop delay: 534 +36/ fns/100m MAX Prop delay skew: 45 ns/100m MAX Nominal velocity of propagation: 68% non plenum, 72% plenum (f=frequency in MHz from 1-500)

The cable shall be GigaLan 10 Augmented Cat 6 by Mohawk or equal by Berk-Tek or Belden. Label cables as per direction for patch panel paragraph below. 2.4

TERMINATION HARDWARE A.

Modular 8 position modules: 1.

Termination hardware shall be designed with an integral locking mechanism, which upon insertion of a modular plug provides maximum pullout strength at the plug/jack interface.

2.

All modular 8-position jacks shall be RJ-45, T 568B wired.

3.

The jacks shall meet or exceed the following standards: a. TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 Ω Augmented Category 6 Cabling and the TIA-568C.2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Standards

4.

The modular jacks shall meet the following electrical performance and certification requirements: a. The modular jacks shall meet TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 Ω Augmented Category 6 Cabling and the TIA-568C.2 Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Standards b. Near End Crosstalk (NEXT) and Attenuation measurements shall be made per applicable TIA-568B.2 standards for Cat 6A.

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-20 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

5.

The modular jacks shall meet the following requirements: a. Connector-insulation displacement connectors shall be capable of accepting 23 gauge AWG solid conductor wire. b. Terminated in accordance with EIA-568B specifications. c.

Data/Wap/Voice/Fax jacks shall be RJ45.

6.

The jack shall be approved to work in all applications up to 10 Gb/sec, including, but not limited to 1Gb/sec and 100 Mb/sec TP-PMD (100 meters over UTP, per ANSI X3T9.5), proposed 155 Mb/sec ATM, 16 Mb/sec token ring, 10 Base T and 4Mb/sec token ring.

7.

The modular jacks shall use the color code indicated below: a. Data - Blue b. WAP - Green c. Voice – White d. Fax – Red e. CCTV – Yellow f. Set top boxes – Black (first data port on all T1 locations) g. Bottom data port at VA plate: Purple. Top jack Blue. h. Data at TV location, both jacks BLACK for Set Top Box. i. Projector data in Auditorium booth purple, top left jack in D4 behind rack black for set top box. j. Library Media Seminar room projector jacks: One jack Purple one Blue. Top left jack in D4 at rack: black.

Category 6A jacks Leviton 6110g-RL6 or equal. B. CCTV cable requirements 1. Install a single gang back box at CCTV locations (for exterior camera locations, mount box inside where conduit goes outside for exterior CCTV locations) with single port faceplate and Cat6a RJ45 yellow keystone jack. Secure box to the nearest building structure. Cat6A jack shall be yellow. Provide a 2' service loop of Cat6A at the single gang box. All single gang boxes shall be hidden from view. All CCTV cabling shall be included in the Cat 6A cable tests. 2.5

PATCH PANELS A.

Category 6A- Data (including projector and set top box cabling), Wap, Voice and CCTV 1. All patch panels shall be Cat 6A angled 110 style patch panels, 24 or 48 port T568B wired, 2U maximum and all patch cords shall be routed directly into the vertical cable mangers. 6A587-U24 or 6A587-U48 by Leviton or equal. Provide each type of cable on it’s own patch panel in each rack: a. Data b. Voice c. CCTV d. WAP e Set top box and Projectors

STRUCTURED CABLING 27 10 00-21 Design Development / 12.2.15

Beverly Middle School

Ai3 Architects, LLC

2. Provide straight cat6a patch panel and horizontal 2RU cable management panel below patch panel in rack in TV head end room 4 post rack, for local TV suite data network cabling as noted on drawings. 3. Patch panel ports connected to Black jacks shall be labeled S and have a color designation of black and shall have black patch cords provided. Projector data ports (all purple jacks), shall have the patch panel ports labeled P and have a purple color designation. Purple patch cords shall be provided for these ports. 4. Other ports shall be color labeled according to their cable color (green for wap, yellow for CCTV, white for voice, blue for data). 2.6

2.7

110 BLOCKS AND CROSS OVER CABLING A.

Provide and install on plywood backboard in MDF two (2) 110 wiring block with legs for fax line cross over cabling. Leviton 41aw2-100 with legs or equal by Hubbell or Siemen.

B.

Terminate fax lines to 110 Blocks on plywood backboard. Cross connect phone line service provider’s DEMARC for fax lines to 110 block and verify ALL fax lines as designated on the drawings function by testing fax capability of each phone line.

C.

Fax lines shall be terminated with a single gang single port faceplate with black RJ45 keystone jack at the fax machine location.

CAT 5e MULTIPAIR CABLE A.

Provide plenum multi-pair Cat 5e cable from the MDF to each IDF as shown on the T2.6 drawing. Terminate both ends on 66 blocks with Amphenol connectors on the sides of the 66 blocks on plywood backboard in IDF and MDF. Cable is by Mohawk in quantities required for cable counts shown on T2.6 or equal by Belden or Berk-Tek.

2.8

EQUIPMENT RACKS A.

Provide: All 2 post racks in MDF (provide and install), IDF racks (provide and install as shown on the drawings); shall be 7’ tall, aluminum or steel floor-mounted and have mounting rails for standard 19” equipment. Provide racks as per technology drawing details. Provide and install at all two post racks (MDF, IDF, and other areas where a two post rack is shown on the drawings or as specified) uni-strut, threaded rod and other hardware required to secure the rack to the wall or building structure. Rack deflection shall no